Home

Hitachi-sj700-user-manual

1. Defaults Run pee are Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 en FE2 FU2 F2 Lo Hi EU USA Jpn g U001 User function 1 no no no Xv a 5 U002 User function 2 no no no Xv E U003 User function 3 no no no Xv 2 amp U004 User function 4 no no no XV 3 U005 User function 5 no no no Xv U006 User function 6 no disabled or any of the no no no Xv U007 User function 7 functions D001 to P049 no no no Xv U008 User function 8 no no no Xv U009 User function 9 no no no XV UO10 User function 10 no no no XV UO11 User function 11 no no no Xv U012 User function 12 no no no Xv Le a J M7m T TF 220 TIP Function B037 selects which parameter groups are displayed If you want to limit the displayed parameters to only the U Group functions set B037 02 3 75 SJ7002 Inverter Programming Error Codes The SJ7002 inverter operator keypad displays a special code begins with the amp character to indicate a programming error Programming errors exist when one parameter conflicts with the meaningful range permitted by related parameter s Note that particular real time frequency speed input levels can cause a conflict in some situations After a conflict exists the error code will appear on the dis
2. Mg2 Power source 3 phase i l JE MCCB GFI Thermal 68 Mg1 Mg3 switch Bs Ll S 3 gt ej 5J7002 23 L2 6 gt p Motor 5 L3 6 gt ED SJ7002 Inverter 4 23 Switching to inverter control occurs after the motor is running at full speed First Mg2 relay contacts open Then about 0 5 to I seconds later relay Mg3 contacts close connecting the inverter to the motor The following timing diagram shows the event sequence Mg1 Mg2 Mg2 Mg3 delay time 0 5 to 1 sec Mg3 l FW Set to 0 5 to 1 sec typical gt CS t B003 Retry wait time 1 nverier before motor restart output EI ETE ae Frequency matching Fa Normal operation In the previous timing diagram when the motor has been started across the line Mg2 is switched OFF and Mg3 is switched ON With the Forward command to the inverter already ON the CS terminal is switched ON and relay Mg1 contacts close The inverter will then read the motor RPM frequency matching When the CS terminal is switched OFF the inverter applies the Retry wait time before motor restart parameter B003 Once the delay time has elapsed the inverter will then start and match the frequency if greater than the threshold set by B007 If an over current trip occurs during frequency matching extend the retry wait time B003 If the ground fault interrupter breaker GFI trips
3. List of Coil Numbers Coil number Name R W Description hex dec 0018h 00024 AL Alarm signal R 0 OFF 1 ON 0019h 00025 FA3 Frequency arrival signal R set frequency or above 001Ah 00026 OTQ Over torque R 001Bh 00027 IP Instantaneous power failure R 001Ch 00028 UV Uundervoltage R 001Dh 00029 TRQ Torque limit R 001Eh 00030 RNT Operation time over R 001Fh 00031 ONT Plug in time over R 0020h 00032 THM Thermal alarm signal R 0021h 00033 Reserved 0022h 00034 Reserved 0023h 00035 Reserved 0024h 00036 Reserved 0025h 00037 Reserved 0026h 00038 BRK Brake release R 10 OFF 1 ON 0027h 00039 BER Brake error R 0028h 00040 ZS 0 Hz detection signal R 0029h 00041 DSE Speed deviation R maximum 002Ah 00042 POK Positioning completed R 002Bh 00043 FA4 Set frequency R overreached 2 002Ch 00044 FAS Set frequency reached 2 R 002Dh 00045 OL2 Overload notice advance R signal 2 002Eh 00046 Odc Analog O disconnection R detection 002Fh 00047 OIDe Analog OI R disconnection detection 0030h 00048 O2Dc Analog 02 R disconnection detection 0031h 00049 Reserved 0032h 00050 FBV PID feedback R 10 OFF comparison 1 ON 0033h 00051 NDc Communication bus R disconnectio
4. Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec F001 Output frequency setting R W Standard default target 0001h 00001 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz frequency that deter F001 R W mines constant motor 0002h 00002 speed when A001 03 F002 H Acceleration 1 time R W Standard default acceler 1103h 04355 1 to 0 01 sec setting FT ation 360000 F002 L R W 1104h 04356 F202 H Acceleration 1 time R W Standard default acceler 2103h 08451 1 to 0 01 sec setting 2nd motor ation 2nd motor 360000 F202 L R W 2104h 08452 F302 H Acceleration 1 time R W Standard default acceler 3103h 12547 1 to 0 01 sec setting 3rd motor ation 3rd motor 360000 F302 JL R W 3104h 12548 F003 H Deceleration 1 time R W Standard default deceler 1105h 04357 1 to 0 01 sec setting ation 360000 F003 JL R W 1106h 04358 F203 H Deceleration 1 time R W Standard default deceler 2105h 08453 1 to 0 01 sec setting 2nd motor ation 2nd motor 360000 F203 L R W 2106h 08454 Reserved 2107h 08455 to to 2202h 08706 F303 Deceleration 1 time R W Standard default deceler 3105h 12549 1 to 0 01 sec setting 3rd motor ation 3rd motor 360000 F303 JL R W 3106h 12550 Reserved 3107h 12551 to to 3202h 12802 F004 Keypad Run key routing R W 1107h 04359 Re
5. Run PD ere Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ER p SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA gpn C139 Terminal 15 OFF delay time _ 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv C140 Relay output ON delay time 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 XV C141 Relay output OFF delay time 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv C142 Logic output function A All programmable output functions 00 output frequency XY i i available except LOG1 to LOG6 C143 Logic output 1 function B XV C144 Logic output 1 operator AMT OG AND 00 00 00 Xv OF 0 i OR Xv ADR G2 XOR exclusive OR Xv C145 Logic output 2 function A All programmable output functions 00 output frequency XW available except LOG1 to LOG6 C146 Logic output 2 function B XV C147 Logic output 2 operator AMT a2 AND 00 00 00 XV OR 7 OR Xv ADR G2 XOR exclusive OR Xv C148 Logic output 3 function A All programmable output functions 00 output frequency XY F available except LOG1 to LOG6 C149 Logic output 3 function B XV C150 Logic output 3 operator AMT OG AND 00 00 00 Xv OR 0 i OR Xv ADR G2 XOR exclusive OR Xv C151 Logic output 4 function A All programmable output functions 00 output frequency XW F available except LOG1 to LOG6 C152 Logic output 4 function B am XV C153 Logic output 4 operator AM
6. circuit in the inverter will detect the overload and shut off the inverter output 2nd electronic thermal control Note A high frequency may be recorded as the error history data OPE SRW N Descripti Troubleshooting and Display ame SUG Corrective Action 23 Gate array If an error occurs in the communication Check for the noise sources located near communica between the internal CPU and gate array the inverter remove noise sources GAL DOM tion error the inverter will trip Check whether the communication cable has been disconnected check the connec tors E24 Phase loss When the phase loss input protection has Check for the phase loss power input input protec been enabled B006 01 the inverter check the power supply input wiring PH fail tion will trip to avoid damage if an phase loss Check the MCB and magnetic contactors input is detected The inverter trips when for poor contacts replace the MCB and the phase loss input continues for about magnetic contactors I second or more E25 Main circuit The inverter will trip if the gate array Check for the noise sources located near error 6 cannot confirm the ON OFF state of the inverter remove noise sources Main Cir IGBT because of a malfunction due to Check the main circuit element for noise short or damage to the main circuit damage Check the output circuit for a element short circuit check the
7. Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec B042 Torque limit 2 reverse R W 0 to 200 no disable torque 132Ch 04908 0 to 200 1 regenerating in 4 quadrant limit 255 no mode B043 Torque limit 3 reverse R W 0 to 200 no disable torque 132Dh 04909 0 to 200 1 driving in 4 quadrant limit 255 no mode B044 Torque limit 4 forward R W 0 to 200 no disable torque 132Eh 04910 0 to 200 1 regenerating in 4 quadrant limit 255 no mode B045 l Torque limit LADSTOP R W 00 Disable 132Fh 04911 0 1 enable 01 Enable B046 Reverse Run protection R W 00 Disable 1330h 04912 0 1 enable 01 Enable Reserved 1331h 04913 to to 1333h 04915 B050 Controller deceleration and R W 00 Disable 1334h 04916 0 to3 stop on power loss 01 Constant decel to stop 02 Constant DC voltage control with resume 03 Constant DC voltage control BOS1 DC bus voltage trigger R W Sets trigger for controlled decel 1335h 04917 Oto 10000 0 1 V level during power loss eration and stop on power loss function B052 Over voltage threshold R W Sets over voltage threshold for 1336h 04918 Oto 10000 0 1 V during power loss controlled deceleration function B053 Deceleration time setting R W 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9
8. Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec H001 Auto tuning setting R W 00 Auto tuning OFF 1501h 05377 0 1 2 01 Auto tune 02 Auto tune rotate motor H002 Motor data selection 1st R W 00 Standard motor data 1502h 05378 0 1 2 motor O1 Auto tuning data 02 Adaptive tuning data H202 Motor data selection 2nd R W 00 Standard motor data 2502h 9474 0 1 2 motor O1 Auto tuning data 02 Adaptive tuning data H003 Motor capacity lst motor R W 0 20 to 75 00 KW 153h 05379 00 to 36 t H203 Motor capacity 2nd setting R W 0 20 to 75 00 kW 2503h 9475 ieee H004 Motor poles setting 1st R W 00 2 poles 1504h 05380 0 to 4 motor 01 4 poles 02 6 poles 03 8 poles 04 10 poles H204 Motor poles setting 2nd R W 00 2 poles 2504h 9476 0 to 4 motor 01 4 poles 02 6 poles 03 8 poles 04 10 poles H005 H Motor speed constant Ist R W Motor proportional gain 1505h 05381 Oto 80000 0 001 motor constant factory set H005 L R W 1506h 05382 H205 H Motor speed constant 2nd R W Motor proportional gain 2505h 9477 Oto 80000 0 001 motor constant factory set H205 L R W 2506h 9478 H006 Motor stabilization R W 0 to 255 factory set 1507h 05383 Oto 255 1 constant Reserved 1508h 05384 to to 1514h 05396 H206 M
9. NOTE To disable parameter editing when using B031 lock modes 00 and 01 assign the SFT function to one of the intelligent input terminals See Software Lock on page 4 23 SJ7002 Inverter EEJ Miscellaneous The miscellaneous settings include scaling factors initialization modes and others This Settings section covers some of the most important settings you may need to configure Keypad Defaults Run E Pl Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ae P SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn B034 Run power on warning time 0t0 9999 0 to 99990 1000 to 0 0 0 XV 6553 10000 to 655300 hours B035 Rotational direction restriction FREE 008 Enable for both directions 00 00 00 xx FH G I Enable for forward only xx Ry G2 Enable for reverse only xx B036 Reduced voltage start selection _ 000 short to 255 long 06 06 06 Xv Function Display The inverter has the optional capability to suppress the display and editing of certain parame Settings ters Use B037 to select the display options The purpose of this feature is to hide particular secondary parameters that become unused or not applicable based on more fundamental param eter settings For example setting A001 01 configures the inverter to get its frequency command from the front keypad potentiomet
10. No a TIP The network values are binary integers Since these values cannot have an embedded f decimal point for many parameters it represents the actual value in engineering units multi plied by a factor of 10 or 100 Network communications must use the listed range for network data The inverter automatically divides received values by the appropriate factor in order to establish the decimal point for internal use Likewise the network host computer must apply the same factor when it needs to work in engineering units However when sending data to the inverter the network host computer must scale values to the integer range listed for network communications e Resolution This is the quantity represented by the LSB of the network value in engineer ing units When the network data range is greater than the inverter s internal data range this 1 bit resolution will be fractional Holding Registers D Group Monitor Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec Inverter status A R 0 Initial status I Waiting for 0003h 00003 0to9 Vdc level 2 Stoping 3 Running 4 Free run Stop FRS 5 Jogging 6 DC Braking 7 Freq is input 8 Retrying operation 9 Under voltage UV Inverter status B R 0 Stopping 1 Running 0004h 00004 0 1 2 2 Tripping Inverter status C R 0 1 Stopping 2 Decel 0005h 00005
11. PV low limit C053 44 suonee8d0 D 2 fe 5 e 5 Ke Stage 1 FW FBV to Stage 2 FW O Example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Network The intelligent output Ndc Network Detection Signal indicates the status of ModBus RTU Detection Signal communications not ASCII protocol The Ndc terminal turns ON when the external device on the ModBus stops transmitting for a time that exceeds parameter C077 Communication Opt Code 32 Time out Before Trip If a time out occurs the output Ndc remains ON until ModBus RTU communication resumes Use parameter C076 Action Upon Communication Error Selection to Symbol Ndc select the desired inverter response to a time out event Valid for 11 to 15 Master Outputs ALx Required Settings C076 C077 Slave inverter Default Requires Watchdog timer terminals config C077 XX XX SEC Network detection Ndc O Alarm output ALx 1 C076 00 or 01 trip 4 58 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Logic Output Signals 33 LOGI1 34 LOG2 The Logic Output Function uses the inverter s built in logic feature You can select any two of the other intelligent output options for use as internal inputs to the logic function You may also select from three logical operators AND OR or XOR exclusive OR to be applied to the two
12. Holding Registers D Group Monitor Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec D084 Trip monitor 4 R Factor code 0030h 00048 see codes in next table R Inverter status 0031h 00049 R Frequency high 0032h 00050 01040000 0 01 Hz gt ke R Frequency low 0033h 00051 53 R Current 0034h 00052 0 1 A S R Voltage 0035h 00053 1V W R Run time high 0036h 00054 1 hour R Run time low 0037h 00055 R ON time high 0038h 00056 I hour R ON time low 0039h 00057 D085 Trip monitor 5 R Factor code 003Ah 00058 see codes in next table R Inverter status 003Bh 00059 R Frequency high 003Ch 00060 0to 40000 0 01 Hz R Frequency low 003Dh 00061 R Current 003Eh 00062 0 1 A R Voltage 003Fh 00063 1V R Run time high 0040h 00064 1 hour R Run time low 0041h 00065 R ON time high 0042h 00066 1 hour R ON time low 0043h 00067 D086 Trip monitor 6 R Factor code 0044h 00068 see codes in next table R Inverter status 0045h 00069 R Frequency high 0046h 00070 Oto 40000 0 01 Hz R Frequency low 0047h 00071 R Current 0048h 00072 0 1 A R Voltage 0049h 00073 1V R Run time high 004Ah 00074 1 hour R Run time low 004Bh 00075 R ON time high 004Ch 00076 1 hour R ON time low
13. 3 37 SJ7002 Inverter Keypad Defaults Run nue rer Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ae E SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn 2 B030 Restart freq select for CUTOFF GG Frequency at last shutoff 00 00 00 Xv active freq matching 7 HAs G I Maximum frequency SET Ge Set frequency NOTE Two sets of overload restriction parameters are available The set that is in use may be selected by means of an intelligent input terminal see Overload Restriction on page 4 29 U fed 3 2 o i AUG BuunByuon 3 38 B Group Fine Tuning Functions 2 a le CE 5 2D C e O 42 2 ob E oO iS av oO Software Lock The software lock function keeps personnel from accidentally changing parameters in the Mode inverter memory Use B031 to select from various protection levels The table below lists all combinations of BO31 option codes and the R ON OFF state of the SFT input Each Check w or Ex X indicates RE whether the corresponding parameter s can be edited The Standard E a Parameters column below lists Low and High level access for some Lo Hi lock modes These refer to the parameter tables throughout this chapter each of which includes a column titled Run Mode Edit as XV
14. SJ7002 Inverter 313 Keypad Defaults Run er Tine Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 pa p SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA pm 27 A013 O L input active range start voltage 0 to O L input active range end 0 0 0 Xv voltage The starting point for the voltage input range A014 O L input active range end voltage O L input active range start voltage to 100 100 100 Xv 100 The ending point for the voltage input range A015 O L input start frequency B EAS OG Use A011 start value 01 01 01 Xv enable OH G I Use 0 Hz A016 External frequency filter time constant n 1 to 30 where n number of 8 8 8 Xv samples for average 31 500ms filter A017 Easy sequence function OFF OG Disable 00 00 00 xx enable OH G I Enable Multi speed and Jog Frequency The SJ7002 inverter has the capability to store and output up to 16 preset frequencies to the motor A020 to A035 As in traditional motion terminology we call this multi speed profile U 2 g 3 Q D Q 7 avg BuunByuon Settings capability These preset frequencies are selected by means of digital inputs to the inverter The inverter applies the current acceleration or deceleration setting to change from the current output frequency to the new one The first multi speed setting is
15. SJ7002 Inverter D5 Cable Carrier Cable Carrier Models Cat length freq Models Cat length freq m kHz m kHz SJ700 300L C3 5 2 5 SJ700 300H C3 1 2 5 SJ700 370L C3 5 2 5 SJ700 370H C3 1 2 5 SJ700 450L C3 5 2 5 SJ700 450H C3 5 2 5 SJ700 550L C3 5 2 5 SJ700 550H C3 5 2 5 SJ700 750H C3 10 2 5 SJ700 900H C3 10 2 5 SJ700 1100H C3 10 2 5 SJ700 1320H C3 10 2 5 SJ700 1500H Precautions for EMC Models SJ700 1850 to 4000 The SJ7002 series inverter conforms to the requirements of Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 2004 108 EC However when using the inverter in Europe you must comply with the following specifications and requirements to meet the EMC Directive and other standards in Europe engineers who have expert knowledge of electric work inverter operation and the hazardous WARNING This equipment must be installed adjusted and maintained by qualified circumstances that can occur Otherwise personal injury may result gt kS ne D 3 2 x U Use the following checklist to ensure the inverter is within proper operating ranges and conditions 1 Power supply requirements a Voltage fluctuation must be 15 to 10 or less b Voltage imbalance must be 3 or less c Frequency variation must be 4 or less d Total harmonic distortion THD of voltage must be 10 or less 2 Installation requirements a
16. B 69 SJ7002 Inverter Holding Registers H Group Motor Constants Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec H073 Gain switching time R W 0 to 999 milliseconds 1554h 05460 0to 9999 1 msec Reserved 1555h 05461 to to 1600h 05632 gt xe ko 0 2 Use the codes in the table below to return parameters for H003 and H203 motor capacity a selection Code Data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Japan or U S A mode 02KW 04 1075 15 2 2 37 B085 00 or 02 EU mode B085 01 0 2kW 0 37 0 55 0 75 1 1 1 5 2 2 3 0 40 Code Data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Japan or U S A mode 5 5 kW 7 5 11 15 185 22 30 37 45 55 75 B085 00 or 02 EU mode B085 01 5 5 kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Code Data 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Japan or U S A mode 90kW 110 132 150 160 185 200 220 250 280 300 B085 00 or 02 EU mode B085 01 90kW 110 132 150 160 185 300 220 250 280 300 Code Data 33 34 35 36 Japan or U S A mode 315 kW 340 355 400 B085 00 or 02 EU mode B085 01 315 kW 340 355 400 ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s a
17. FIA 04 Restart with active matching frequency SJ7002 Inverter EEN Defaults Run Rune Name SRW OPE Range or Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 Mode Code Description Edit FE2 FU2 F2 oni o Hi EU USA Jpn B002 Allowable under voltage power failure time 0 3 to 25 0 seconds 1 0 1 0 1 0 Xv The amount of time a power input under voltage can occur without tripping the power failure alarm If under voltage exists longer than this time the inverter trips even if the restart mode is selected If it exists less than this time retry will be attempted B003 Retry wait time before motor restart 0 3 to 100 seconds 1 0 1 0 1 0 Xv Time delay after a trip condition goes away before the inverter restarts the motor B004 Instantaneous power failure OFF 00 Disable 00 00 00 Xv under voltage trip alarm enable OH 0 I Enable DAFF G2 Disable during stop and ramp to stop i BOOS Number of restarts on power 16 00 Restart 16 times 00 00 00 Xv 7 Q failure under voltage trip EP oF events FREE G I Always restart c B006 Phase loss detection enable OFF GG Disable no trip on phase loss 00 00 00 Xv es 8 x O OH G I Enable trip on phase loss Q Ko B007 Restart frequency threshold 0 00 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv model 4000HFx2 is 0 00 to 120 0 Hz When the frequency of the mo
18. Functions B Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Namie FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan B001 Selection of restart mode 00 00 00 B002 Allowable under voltage power failure time 1 0 1 0 1 0 B003 Retry wait time before motor restart 1 0 1 0 1 0 B004 Instantaneous power failure under voltage trip 00 00 00 alarm enable B005 Number of restarts on power failure under voltage 00 00 00 trip events B006 Phase loss detection enable 00 00 00 B007 Restart frequency threshold 0 00 0 00 0 00 z B008 Retry after trip select 00 00 00 2 2 B009 Retry after undervoltage select 00 00 00 B010 Retry count select after overvoltage or overcurrent 3 3 3 B011 Retry wait time after trip 1 0 1 0 1 0 B012 Electronic thermal setting calculated within the Rated current for each inverter inverter from current output B212 Electronic thermal setting calculated within the Rated current for each inverter inverter from current output 2nd motor B312 Electronic thermal setting calculated within the Rated current for each inverter inverter from current output 3rd motor B013 Electronic thermal characteristic 01 01 00 B213 Electronic thermal characteristic 2nd motor 01 01 00 B313 Electronic thermal characteristic 3rd motor Ol 01 00 B015 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 0 0 0 B016 Free setting electronic therma
19. 05 gt BCC ASCII Code Table The table below shows only the ASCII codes used for function codes and parameter data Character ASCII Code Character ASCII Code Character ASCII Code STX 02 4 34 C 43 ACK 06 5 35 D 44 CR 0D 6 36 E 45 NAK 15 7 37 F 46 0 30 8 38 H 48 1 31 9 39 P 50 2 32 A 41 b 62 3 33 B 42 g xIpuaddy EI Communications Reference Information Communication The communication test mode verifies that the inverter can properly send and receive data via Test Mode the RS485 serial port Follow the steps below to perform the communication test 1 Remove the serial cable if present connected to the TM2 connector block of the control terminals as shown below faa AX ke C Q Serial communications NOTE It is not necessary to connect a loopback jumper The RS485 port uses a transceiver for communications which already allows simultaneous transmitting and receiving 2 Use the front panel keypad to navigate to parameter C071 Communication Speed Selection Change parameter CO71 02 and press Store Value 02 is the Loopback Test option Now the inverter is ready to conduct the loopback test 3 Turn the inverter power OFF and then ON again to initiate the communication test Observe the keypad display and compare to the results shown below PASS FAIL I Fe d I K md a a ea 4 Pre
20. 3 36 B Group Fine Tuning Functions 2 a le CE 5 2 C e O 42 2 ob E oO iS av oO Overload If the inverter s output current exceeds a tricti Restriction preset current level you specify during Motor pe acceleration or constant speed the Current TN FR B022 overload restriction feature automati cally reduces the output frequency to 0 restrict the overload This feature does not generate an alarm or trip event You can instruct the inverter to apply Output overload restriction only during Frequency constant speed thus allowing higher currents for acceleration Or you may use the same threshold for both acceler ation and constant speed In the case of controlled deceleration the inverter monitors both output current and DC bus voltage The inverter will increase output frequency to try to avoid a trip due to over current or over voltage due to regeneration When the inverter detects an overload it must decelerate the motor to reduce the current until it is less than the threshold You can choose the rate of deceleration that the inverter uses to lower the output current Keypad Defaults Run er x dear a Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ae oce ESC PLO SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 rl EU USA Jpn B021 Overload restriction OFF 008 Disable 01 01 Ol X
21. SJ7002 Inverter B 37 Holding Registers D Group Monitor Functions g xIpuaddy Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec D016 Cumulative operation RUN R Displays total time the inverter 1015h 04117 0 to 999900 0 1 time monitor has been in RUN mode in hours D016 L R Range is 0 to 9999 1000 to 1016h 04118 9999 100 to 999 10 000 to 99 900 hrs D017 H Cumulative power on time R Displays total time the inverter 1017h 04119 0 to 999900 1 hour high monitor has had input power ON in hours Range is DOLE R 0 to 9999 100 0 to 999 9 1018h DE low 1000 to 9999 100 to 999 hrs D018 Heat sink temperature R Displays the temperature of the 1019h 04121 200 to 2000 0 1 C monitor inverter s heat sink D019 Motor temperature monitor R Displays motor internal tempera 101Ah 04122 200 to 2000 0 19C ture requires an NTC thermistor installed in the motor and connected to TH and CM1 Reserved 101Bh 04123 Reserved 101Ch 04124 D022 Component life monitor R Displays estimated life status of 101Dh 04125 bit 0 capa I bit DC bus capacitors and cooling citors fans bit 1 fans Reserved 101Eh 04126 to to 102
22. 2 10 0 39 265 10 43 310 12 20 5 places 25 0 98 Air intake 195 7 68 SJ7002 Inverter El Exhaust Dimensional drawings continued Model SJ700 370LFU2 370HFU2 HFE2 450LFU2 x 5 I SE 450HFU2 HFE2 33 550HFU2 HFE2 S E z a Be 0 ME 235 O en a y 300 11 81 l 390 15 35 lt 5 places 41 1 61 Air intake 3 5 2 N Exhaust Model SJ700 550LFU2 700 27 56 670 26 38 Pa e a as Fit 2 b 12 0 47 380 14 96 480 18 90 Air intake 5 places 41 1 61 AN R a D co t N Step by Step Basic Installation Dimensional drawings continued Model SJ700 750HFU2 HFE2 390 15 35 xhaust 900HFU2 HFE2 eV 2 12 0 47 and Installation 670 26 38 700 27 56 D E amp 5 e 2 jo 2 _ Oo gt 2 1204 Air intake Model 480 18 90 e Exhaust SJ700 1100HFU2 HFE2 l H 380 14 96 i 2 12 0 47 aa 1320HFE2 1500HFU2 710 27 95 740 29 13 2 12 0 47 Air intake SJ7002 Inverter 2 13 Dimensional drawings continued 3 15 0 59 2 M12 Eyebolts 695 27 36 370 14 56 2 I 290
23. Function Code Parameter Setting Range Description 03 SLV does not use A344 A044 A244 Control method ea SE dos not A344 selection 05 V2 does not use A244 or A344 C001 C008 Intelligent input 43 PPI P I switching selection H005 H205 Speed response 0 001 to 65 53 No dimension 4 27 SJ7002 Inverter Function Code Parameter Setting Range Description H050 H250 PI proportional gain 0 0 to 999 9 1000 gain H051 H251 PI integral gain 0 0 to 999 9 1000 gain H052 H252 P proportional gain 0 01 to 10 00 No dimension H070 PI proportional gain 0 0 to 999 9 1000 gain for switching H071 PI integral gain for 0 0 to 999 9 1000 gain switching H072 P proportional gain 0 0 to 10 0 No dimension for switching H073 Gain switching time 0 to 999 Millisceonds The speed control mode is normally proportional integral compensation PI which attempts to keep the deviation between the actual speed and speed command equal to zero You can also select proportional P control function which can be used for droop control i e several inverters driving one load Droop is the speed difference resulting from P control versus PI control at 100 output torque as shown in the graph Set the P PI 100 switching function option 43 to one of the intel ligent input terminals 1 to 8 When the P PI input terminal is ON the control mode beco
24. a as 2 Cable length m D Models 2 to motor to DC reactor SJ700 1850HFU2 HFE2 5 5 SJ700 3150HFU2 HFE2 10 5 SJ700 4000HFU2 HFE2 10 5 Index A A Group functions 3 10 Absolute Position Control Mode 3 72 AC reactors 5 3 Acceleration 1 16 3 9 characteristic curves 3 26 second function 3 24 two stage 4 20 Acceleration stop function 3 21 Access levels 3 5 3 38 4 23 Access to terminals 2 2 Accessories 5 2 Adaptive auto tuning 4 73 ADD frequency enable 4 34 Alarm signal 4 47 Algorithms 3 66 Algorithms torque control 3 5 Ambient temperature 2 8 A 2 Analog disconnect detection 4 55 Analog input settings 3 11 3 27 Analog inputs current voltage select 4 24 operation 4 63 sampling filter 4 63 wiring examples 4 65 Analog outputs FM type 4 67 operation 4 66 PWM type 4 66 Analog signal calibration 3 62 Anti windmilling 3 18 3 21 Arrival frequency A 2 ASCII code table B 19 ASCII mode communications B 5 Automatic restart 3 30 Automatic voltage regulation 3 23 Auto tuning 4 71 A 2 adaptive 4 73 procedure 4 72 Auto tuning constants 3 66 AVR 3 23 B Group functions 3 30 Base frequency 2 32 A 2 Bibliography A 6 Block check code B 19 Brake control external 3 48 4 32 4 54 Braking 1 16 dynamic 5 6 Braking resistor 2 5 A 2 Braking resistor selection 5 7 Braking unit 2 5 Braking dynamic 1 19 Break away torque A 2 C
25. Display monitor Output frequency output current motor torque scaled value of output frequency trip history I O terminal condition electrical power and other parameters Other user settable parameters V F free setting up to 7 points freq upper lower limit freq jump accel decel curve selection manual torque boost value and freq adjustment energy saving operation analog meter tuning start frequency carrier frequency electronic thermal protection level external frequency output zero span reference external frequency input bias start end analog input selection retry after trip restart after instantaneous power failure various signal outputs reduced voltage start overload restriction default value setting US Europe Japan automatic deceleration at power failure AVR function fuzzy accel decel auto tuning on line off line high torque multi motor operation sensor less vector control of two motors by one inverter Protective functions Over current overload braking resistor overload over voltage EEPROM error under voltage error CT current transformer error CPU error external trip USP error ground fault input over voltage instantaneous power failure expansion card error expansion card 2 error inverter thermal trip phase failure detection IGBT error therm istor error Temperature 9 Operating ambient 10 to 50 C Storage 20 to 65 C Humidity 20 to 90 relati
26. Inverter Setpoint Error calelaton Freq EY External calelaton EY Process Analog input Process Variable PV When enabled the PID loop calculates the ideal output frequency to minimize the loop error This means we no longer command the inverter to run at a particular frequency but we specify the ideal value for the process variable That ideal value is called the setpoint and is specified in the units of the external process variable For a pump application it may be gallons minute or it could be air velocity or temperature for an HVAC unit Parameter A075 is a scale factor that relates the external process variable units to motor frequency The figure below is a more pe detailed diagram of the PID function 30 ke Scale factor fe 8 2 A075 FOO 2 5 3 Q Setpoint PID Enable PID Disable Standard Target Frequency setting source select A071 gt C023 Foot Scale factor A001 Fe reciprocal intelligent inpu i Multi speed I i settings gt 1 A075 P gain i A020 to A035 gt Tao72 l I one i Error i on keypa I SP I gain gt So y V I input No o j A073 Frequency select O PV setting AES eq Process V
27. Term 13 ON delay time R W 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 148Ah 05258 Oto 1000 0 1 sec C135 Term 13 OFF delay time R W 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 148Bh 05259 Oto 1000 0 1 sec C136 Term 14 ON delay time R W 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 148Ch 05260 Oto 1000 0 1 sec C137 Term 14 OFF delay time R W 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 148Dh 05261 Oto 1000 0 1 sec C138 Term 15 ON delay time R W 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 148Eh 05262 Oto 1000 0 1 sec C139 Term 15 OFF delay time R W 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 148Fh 05263 Oto 1000 0 1 sec C140 Relay output ON delay R W 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 1490h 05264 Oto 1000 0 1 sec time C141 Relay output OFF delay R W 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 1491h 05265 Oto 1000 0 1 sec time C142 Logic output 1 function A R W All programmable output 1492h 05266 7 functions available except C143 Logic output I function B R W LOGI to LOG6 1493h 05267 C144 Logic output 1 operator R W 00 AND 1494h 05268 0 1 2 01 OR 02 XOR exclusive OR C145 Logic output 2 function A R W All programmable output 1495h 05269 z functions available except C146 Logic output 2 function B R W LOGI to LOG6 1496h 05270 C147 Logic output 2 operator R W 00 AND 1497h 05271 0 1 2 01 OR 02 XOR exclusive OR C148 Logic output 3 function A R W Al
28. 10 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 15 0 15 0 150 Vv F 1000 to 3600 seconds Duration of 2nd segment of deceleration Vv 3rd motor A094 Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 TH G0 2CH input from terminal 00 00 00 xx rofile P FREE G I transition frequency Q F E 08 when motor direction reverses aS A294 Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 TH G0 2CH input from terminal 00 00 00 xx S profile 2nd motor 2a FREE G I transition frequency D d F F E G2 when motor direction reverses 5 A095 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition point 0 00 to 400 0 Hz model 0 0 0 0 0 0 xx TTT oes 4000HFx2 is 0 00 to 120 0 Hz Output frequency at which Accell switches to Accel2 A295 Accl to Acc2 frequency transition point 2nd motor 0 00 to 400 0 Hz model 0 0 0 0 0 0 xx 4000HFx2 is 0 00 to 120 0 Hz Output frequency at which Accell switches to Accel2 A096 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition point 0 00 to 400 0 Hz model 0 0 0 0 0 0 xx 4000HFx2 is 0 00 to 120 0 Hz Output frequency at which Decell switches to Decel2 A296 Decl to Dec2 frequency transition point 2nd motor 0 00 to 400 0 Hz model 0 0 0 0 0 0 xx 4000HFx2 is 0 00 to 120 0 Hz Output frequency at which Decell switches to Decel2 NOTE For A095 and A096 and for 2nd motor settings if you set a very rapid Acc1 or Dec1 time less than 1 0 second the inverter may not be able to change rates to Acc2 or Dec2 before reaching the target frequency I
29. 1471h 05233 Oto 100 1 C110 AMI bias adjustment R W 0 to 100 1472h 05234 Oto 100 1 C111 Overload setting 2 R W 0 00 x rated current to 1473h 05235 Oto 1800 0 1 2 00 x rated current A Reserved 1474h 05236 to to 147Ch 05244 C121 O input zero calibration R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 147Dh 05245 0 to 65530 1 10000 to 65530 C122 OI input zero calibration R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 147Eh 05246 0 to 65530 1 10000 to 65530 ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec C123 02 input zero calibration R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 147Fh 05247 0 to 65530 1 10000 to 65530 Reserved 1480h 05248 to to 1485h 05253 C130 Term 11 ON delay time R W 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 1486h 05254 Oto 1000 0 1 sec C131 Term 11 OFF delay time R W 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 1487h 05255 Oto 1000 0 1 sec C132 Term 12 ON delay time R W 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 1488h 05256 Oto 1000 0 1 sec C133 Term 12 OFF delay time R W 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 1489h 05257 Oto 1000 0 1 sec C134
30. 2 a e C 3 2D C e O no bi 2 eb E oO iS av oO Keypad Defaults Ron ee ae Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ev P SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 h EU USA pn A105 OI L input start frequency enable OI ERS 00 Use A101 start value Ol 01 01 Xv Hz G I Use 0OHz A111 02 L input active range start frequency _ 400 to 400 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv 7 model 4000HFx2 is Output frequency corresponding to the bipolar 0 00 to 120 0 Hz voltage input range starting point A112 02 L input active range end frequency 400 to 400 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 XY 7 model 4000HFx2 is Output frequency corresponding to the bipolar 0 00 to 120 0 Hz voltage input range ending point A113 02 L input active range start voltage 100 to 100 100 100 100 XY Starting point for the bipolar voltage input range A114 02 L input active range end voltage 100 to 100 100 100 100 Xv Ending point for the bipolar voltage input range Target Frequency Analog Input Calculate Function The inverter can mathematically combine two input Operation sources into one value The Calculate function can either add subtract or multiply the two selected sources This provides the flexibility needed by various applications You
31. A parameter will not change after parameters True for certain Is the inverter in Run Mode Some parameters cannot be edited during Run Mode Put inverter in Stop Mode press the Stop reset key Then edit the parameter an edit reverts to old setting True for all parameters If you re using the SFT intelligent input software lock function is the SFT input ON Change the state of the SFT input and check the B031 parameter SFT mode OD od ce es lt Q MC Og Fel S2 D FS SJ7002 Inverter 65 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions Fault Detection The microprocessor in the inverter detects a and Clearing variety of fault conditions and captures the event recording it in a history table The inverter output turns OFF or trips similar to the way a circuit breaker trips due to an over current condition Most faults occur when the motor is running refer to the diagram to the right However the inverter could have an internal fault and trip in Stop Mode In either case you can clear the fault by pressing the Stop Reset key Additionally you can clear the inverter s cumulative trip history by performing the procedure Restoring Factory Default Settings on page 6 16 setting B_84 00 will clear the trip history but leave inverter settings Fault intact Error Status The conditions at the time of an error provide important
32. A special filter intended for the SJ7002 series inverter must be installed 3 Wiring requirements a b c A shielded wire screened cable must be used for motor wiring and the length must be according to the following table below The carrier frequency must be set according to the following table to meet an EMC requirement The main circuit wiring must be separated from the control circuit wiring 4 Environmental requirements to be met when a filter is used a b c Ambient temperature must be within the range 10 C to 40 C Relative humidity must be within the range 20 to 90 non condensing Vibrations must be 5 9 m sec 0 6 G 10 to 55Hz or less 0 4 to 22kW 2 94 m sec 0 3 G 10 to 55Hz or less 30 to 150kW The inverter must be installed indoors not exposed to corrosive gases and dust at an altitude of 1 000 m or less Cable Carrier Cable Carrier Models Cat length freq Models Cat length freq m kHz m kHz SJ700 004L C3 5 2 5 SJ700 007L C3 5 25 SJ700 007H C3 5 2 5 SJ700 015L C3 5 2 5 SJ700 015H C3 5 2 5 SJ700 022L C3 5 2 5 J700 022H C3 5 2 5 SJ700 037L C3 5 2 5 SJ700 040H C3 5 2 5 SJ700 055L C3 1 1 SJ700 055H C3 1 2 5 SJ700 075L C3 1 1 SJ700 075H C3 1 2 5 SJ700 110L C3 1 1 SJ700 110H C3 1 2 5 SJ700 150L C3 1 1 SJ700 150H C3 1 2 5 SJ700 185L C3 1 1 SJ700 185H C3 1 2 5 SJ700 220L C3 5 2 5 SJ700 220H C3 1 2 5
33. Electronic thermal setting R W Range is 0 2 rated current to 230Ch 08972 200 to 0 1 calculated within the 1 2 rated current 1000 inverter from current output 2nd motor B312 Electronic thermal setting R W Range is 0 2 rated current to 330Ch 13068 200 to 0 1 calculated within the 1 2 rated current 1000 inverter from current output 3rd motor B013 Electronic thermal charac R W 00 Reduced torque 130Eh 04878 0 1 2 teristic 01 Constant torque 02 Free setting Reserved 130Fh 04879 B213 Electronic thermal charac R W 00 Reduced torque 230Dh 08973 0 1 2 teristic 2nd motor 01 Constant torque 02 Free setting Reserved 230Eh 08974 to to 2501h 09493 B 54 ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers B Group Fine Tuning Functions Network Data Func Code Name Description Register Range Res hex dec B313 Electronic thermal charac 00 Reduced torque 330Dh 13069 0 1 2 teristic 3rd motor 01 Constant torque 02 Free setting Reserved 330Eh 13070 to to 3506h 13574 B015 Free setting electronic Data point coordinates for Hz 1310h 04880 0to400 I Hz thermal frequency 1 axis horizontal in the free form curve B016 Free set
34. General Precau tions and Notes Take special care to avoid breaking wires or making connection mistakes Always keep the unit clean so that dust or other foreign matter does not enter the inverter e Firmly connect terminals and connectors Keep electronic equipment away from moisture and oil Dust steel filings and other foreign matter can damage the inverter causing unexpected accidents so take special care Inspection Items This chapter provides instructions or checklists for these inspection items Daily inspection e Periodic inspection approximately once a year Insulation resistance test OD od ce es lt Q MC Og Fel S2 D FS Troubleshooting Tips SJ7002 Inverter 6 3 The table below lists typical symptoms and the corresponding solution s Symptom condition Probable Cause Solution The inverter outputs U V W are not supplying The motor voltage will not run Is the frequency command source A001 parameter setting correct Is the Run command source A002 parameter setting correct Make sure the parameter setting A001 is correct Make sure the parameter setting A002 is correct Is power being supplied to terminals R S and T IL1 L2 and L3 If so the POWER lamp should be ON Check terminals R S and T L1 L2 and L3 then U V and W T1 T2 and T3 Turn ON the power supply or check fuses Is there an er
35. J7002 Command D081 N D082 N 1 Register number 0012h 0013h Trib factor upper digit Over voltage E07 Decelerating 02 g x ipu ddy ModBus Mode Communications jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Query Response No Field Name SOPE Na Field Name ample hex hex 1 Slave address 1 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code 06 2 Function code 06 3 Register start number 12 3 Register start number 12 high order 2 high order 4 Register start number 02 4 Register start number 02 low order 2 low order 5 Change data high 00 5 Change data high 00 order order 6 Change data low order 32 6 Change data low order 32 7 CRC 16 high order AD 7 CRC 16 high order AD 8 CRC 16 low order 23 8 CRC 16 low order 23 Note 1 Broadcasting is disabled Note 2 The starting coil number is one less than the number of the coil to be read first When the Write Holding Register command cannot be executed normally refer to the exception response Loopback Test 08h This function checks a master slave transmission using any test data An example follows e Send test data to an inverter having slave address 1 and receiving the test data from the inverter as a loopback test Query Response No Field Name ee No Field Name are 1 Slave address 1 Ol 1 Slave address
36. Intelligent terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 are identical programmable inputs for general use The input circuits can use the inverter s internal isolated 24V field supply P24 to power the inputs The input circuits connect internally to PLC as a common point To use the internal supply to power the inputs use the jumper as shown Remove the jumper to use an external supply or to interface to a PLC system or other that has solid state outputs If you use an external supply or PLC system its power return must connect to the PLC terminal on the inverter to complete the input circuit Input Wiring The following four input configurations are available to interface the inverter inputs to switches Examples or the outputs of another system such as a PLC 24VDC SJ7002 inverter common Input circuits Sinking inputs internal supply yz e V1 Jumpered for sinking inputs default for xFE models Sourcing inputs internal supply Jumpered for sourcing inputs default for xFU xFR models Sinking inputs external supply External power supply Sourcing inputs external supply 24VDC common 22 0 External gt power supply Buouuop pue suoneJ8d0 4 14 Using Intelligent Input Terminals 2 2 oe g TS a Og 40 Wiring Diagram Conventions The input wiring diagrams in th
37. PID Control When enabled the built in PID loop calculates an ideal inverter output value to cause a loop feedback process variable PV to move closer in value to the setpoint SP The current frequency command serves as the SP The PID loop algorithm will read the analog input for the process variable you specify either current or voltage input and calculate the output e A scale factor in A075 lets you multiply the PV by a factor converting it into engineering units for the process e Proportional integral and derivative gains are all adjustable e Optional You can assign an intelligent input terminal the option code 23 PID Disable When active this input disables PID operation See Intelligent Input Terminal Overview on page 3 51 e See PID Loop Operation on page 4 75 for more information Keypad Defaults Run me el Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 Kon SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 Lo Hi EU USA Jpn A071 PID Enable OFF G0 PID operation OFF 00 00 00 Xv OH G I PID operation ON XV F OH G2 PID operation ON with inverted output Xv A072 PID proportional gain 0 2 to 5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 VV A073 PID integral time constant 0 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 seconds 1 0 1 0 1 0 Vv A074 PID derivative time constant 0 0 to 99 99 100 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Vv A075 PV scale conversion 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 seconds 1 00 1 00 1 00 Xv Pr
38. USA Jpn B012 Level of electronic thermal setting 0 20 x rated current to rated current of inverter X Y 2 00 x rated current A B212 Level of electronic thermal setting 2nd motor 0 20 x rated current to rated current of inverter XW 2 00 x rated current A B312 Level of electronic thermal setting 3rd motor 0 20 x rated current to rated current of inverter XW 2 00 x rated current A B013 Electronic thermal characteristic SUE OG Reduced torque 01 01 00 XV CET G I Constant torque FREE OG V f free setting B213 Electronic thermal characteristic SUE OG Reduced torque 01 01 00 Xv 2nd motor CET G I Constant torque FREE OG V f free setting B313 Electronic thermal characteristic SUE 00 Reduced torque 01 01 00 Xv 3rd motor CET G I Constant torque FREE OG V f free setting B015 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 0 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 0 0 Xv model 4000HFx2 is 0 00 to 120 0 Hz B016 Free setting electronic thermal current 1 0 0 to 1000 A 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv B017 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 2 0 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 0 0 Xv model 4000HFx2 is 0 00 to 120 0 Hz B018 Free setting electronic thermal current 2 0 0 to 1000 A 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv B019 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 0 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 0 0 Xv model 4000HFx2 is 0 00 to 120 0 Hz B020 Free setting electronic thermal current 3 0 0 to 1000 A 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv
39. and 1 2 For metric wire sizes bolt sizes for the ring lug centers are 6 6M 8 8M 10 10M Note 2 Prepackaged square washer is to be used when the bare wire is directly connected to terminal without using crimp contact such as ring lug connector Note 3 N terminal for braking unit is common to N terminal of power lines kcmil 1 000 circular mils a measure of wire cross sectional area VK f i i TIP AWG American Wire Gauge Smaller numbers represent increasing wire thickness mm square millimeters a measure of wire cross sectional area SJ7002 Inverter El Terminal dimensions and torque specs continued 400V Class Inverters AE Power Screw size of terminal Rine lu Torque urpu Inverter Model connector g ug t inal connector 1 HP kW EIES AWG bolt Metric ft lbs N m 0 5 0 75 J700 007HFUF2 E All 2010 M4 1 254 0 9 1 2 1 1 5 J700 015HFUF2 E All 2010 M4 1 254 0 9 1 2 D z Q 2 2 2 J700 022HFUF2 E All 2010 M4 1 254 0 9 1 2 3 n 3 4 0 J700 040HFUF2 E All 20 10 M4 1 254 0 9 1 2 S g MC 7 5 5 5 SJ700 055HFUF2 All 8 12 M5 5 5 5 1 8 2 4 5 5 10 7 5 SJ700 O75HFUF2 All 8 12 M5 8 5 1 8 2 4 15 11 SJ700 110HFUF2 All 4 1 4 M6 14 6 3 0 4 0 20 15 SJ700 150HFUF2 E All 6 1 4 M6 8 6 3 3 4 5 25 18 5 SJ700 185HFU2 E All 4 1 4 M6 14 6 3 3 4 5 30 22 SJ700 220HFU2 E All 4 1 4
40. boost is applied from zero to 1 2 the 0 frequency base frequency You set the breakpoint 6 0Hz 30 0Hz f base of the boost point A on the graph by Fa 60Hz using parameters A042 and A043 The A043 10 manual boost is calculated as an addition to the standard straight V f line constant torque curve Be aware that running the motor at a low speed for a long time can cause motor overheating This is particularly true when manual torque boost is ON or if the motor relies on a built in fan for cooling NOTE Manual torque boost applies only to constant torque A044 00 and variable torque A044 01 V f control NOTE The motor stabilization parameter H006 is effective for constant torque A044 00 and variable torque A044 01 V f control 3 16 A Group Standard Functions 2 a le CE 5 2D C e O 42 oO ob E oO iS av oO V f Free setting The free setting V f inverter mode of operation uses voltage and frequency parameter pairs to define seven points on a V f graph This provides a way to define a multi segment V f curve that best suits your application The frequency settings do require that Output voltage F1 lt F2 lt F3 lt F4 lt F5 lt F6 lt F7 their Ven values must have this ascending order v EEE relationship However the voltages VI to V7 may either increase or decrease from one to the next The example to the
41. in Run Mode The output logic is active low and is the open collector type switch PER sarie to common B82 q The timing diagram to the right shows the Run Run Signal operation in detail The inverter Signal outputs the RUN signal whenever the inverter output exceeds the start frequency specified by parameter B082 The start frequency is the initial inverter output frequency when it turns ON NOTE If you use an intelligent output to drive an external relay be sure to connect a diode across the relay coil This will prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor The Frequency Arrival group of outputs help coordinate external systems with the current velocity profile of the inverter As the name implies output FA1 turns ON when the output frequency arrives at the standard set frequency parameter F001 Outputs FA2 through FA5 provide variations on this function for increased flexibility relying on two programmable accel decel thresholds For example you can have an output turn ON at one frequency during accel eration and have it turn OFF at a different frequency during deceleration All transitions have hysteresis to avoid output chatter if the output frequency is near one of the thresholds Symbol Function Name Description FAI Frequency arrival type I ON when output to motor is at the standard set constant speed frequency F001
42. 0 to 9999 1611h 05649 0 to 10000 1 range setting 1000 10 000 pulses P018 Home search completion R W 0 00 to 9 99 seconds 1612h 05650 Oto 999 0 01 sec delay time setting P019 Electronic gear set position R W 00 Position feedback side 1613h 05651 0 1 selection 01 Position command side P020 Electronic gear ratio R W 0 to 9999 1614h 05652 1 to 9999 numerator setting P021 Electronic gear ratio R W 1 to 9999 1615h 05653 1 to 9999 denominator setting P022 Feed forward gain setting R W 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 1616h 05654 01065535 0 01 P023 Position loop gain setting R W 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 1617h 05655 0 to 10000 0 01 P024 Position bias setting R W 204 2048 999 to 2048 1618h 05656 2048 to 1 2048 P025 Temperature compensa R W 00 No compensation 1619h 05657 0 1 tion thermistor enable 01 With compensation P026 Over speed error detection R W 0 0 to 150 0 161Ah 05658 0 to 1500 0 1 level setting P027 Speed deviation error R W 0 00 to 99 99 161Bh 05659 0 to 12000 0 01 Hz detection level setting 100 0 to 120 0 Hz B 71 SJ7002 Inverter Holding Registers P Group Expansion Card Functions g xIpuaddy Network Data Func Code Name R W De
43. 00 RUN 00 RUN 00 RUN Xv C023 Terminal 13 function 51 programmable functions 03 OL 03 OL 03 OL Xv available for logic C024 Terminal 14 function discrete outputs see next 07 OTQ 07 OTQ 07 OTQ Xv C025 Terminal 15 function en 08 IP 080P OS P xv C026 Alarm relay terminal 05 AL 05 AL 05 AL Xv function C027 FM signal selection 00 output freq Xv 12 programmable functions C028 AM signal selection available for analog outputs 00 output freq Xv x see after next section C029 AMI signal selection 00 output freq Xv C030 Digital current monitor 0 20 x rated current to 2 00 Rated current x 1 0 Vv reference value x rated current A Current with digital current monitor output at 1 44 kHz Vv NOTE Terminals 11 13 or 11 14 are automatically configured as ACO AC2 or ACO AC3 when C62 is configured to enable alarm code output The output logic convention is programmable for terminals 11 15 and the alarm relay terminals The open collector output terminals 11 15 default to normally open active low but you can select normally closed active high for the terminals in order to invert the sense of the logic You can invert the logical sense of the alarm relay output as well Keypad Defaults Run ek Pr Range and Settings F
44. 75 55 SJ700 550LFU2 2 0112 0 150 or 250A 250A 3 0 4 60 60 II 60 See notes for wiring tables on the following page SJ7002 Inverter 2 19 Determining wire and fuse sizes continued Motor Wiring 1 Output Power Lines 3 Chassis Ground Brake Res 400V Fuse Inverter Models ical UL Breaker AWG AWG HP kw kemi mm rated GFI kemil kemil mm AWG mm class J type 2 rec UL 600V m 3 o 0 5 0 75 8J700 007HFUF2 E 20 1 25 10A 10A 20 20 1 25 20 1 25 58 a s 1 1 5 8J700 015HFUF2 E 18 2 10A 10A 18 18 2 18 2 a 2 2 2 J700 022HFUF2 E 16 2 10A 10A 18 18 2 18 2 z 5 3 4 0 SJ700 040HFUF2 E 14 2 15A 15A 18 18 2 18 2 78 7 5 5 5 8J700 055HFUF2 E 12 3 5 5 15A 15A 10 12 33 10 35 5 5 10 7 5 J700 075HFUF2 E 10 3 5 20A 20A 10 12 35 10 3 5 15 11 J700 110HFUF2 E 8 5 5 30A 30A 8 10 55 8 5 5 20 15 J700 150HFUF2 E 6 8 40A 40A 8 10 8 10 8 25 18 5 J700 185HFU2 E 6 14 50A 50A 4 10 14 10 14 30 22 J700 220HFU2 E 4 14 60A 60A 4 10 14 10 14 40 30 J700 300HFU2 E 3 22 70A 70A 3 10 re Ne 50 37 SJ700 370HFU2 E 1 38 90A 90A 3 8 er 60 45 SJ700 450HFU2 E 1111 6 38 125A 125A 1 8 aeol a h 75 55 J700 550HFU2 E 2 0 60 125A 125A 1 6 6 100 75 SJ700 750HFU2 E 1111 6 1000r 175A 175A
45. Current analog output 4 20 mA nominal load impedance 2500 L Common for analog inputs Sum of OI O and H currents return OI Analog input current 4 to 19 6 mA range 20 mA nominal 100Q input impedance O Analog input voltage 0 to 9 6 VDC range 10VDC nominal 12VDC max input impedance 10 kQ 02 Analog input voltage 2 9 6 to 9 6 VDC range 10VDC nominal 12VDC max input impedance 10 kQ H 10V analog reference 10VDC nominal 10 mA max ALO Relay common contact AL1 Relay contact normally closed AL2 Relay contact normally open Contacts ALO AL1 maximum loads 250VAC 2A 30VDC 8A resistive load 250VAC 0 2A 30VDC 0 6A inductive load Contacts ALO AL2 maximum loads 250VAC 1A 30VDC 1A max resistive load 250VAC 0 2A 30VDC 0 2A max inductive load Min loads 100 VAC 10mA 5VDC 100mA 53 2a fe 5 e 5 Ke suoneJ8d0 4 10 Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices 2 2 oe g TS a Og oO Be sure to keep the control logic wiring separated from the power terminal wiring In the case of model 3150Hxx the drawing below shows how route control circuit wiring 1 2 Separate the control circuit wiring into two bundles to make use of available space Route the wiring from the control terminal block to the wiring plate Continue routing past the PCB
46. Deceleration curve constants fi G I Smallest deviation 02 02 02 Xv setting Sets the curve deviation from 1 10 Largest deviation Xv straight line deceleration in 10 levels Additional The parameters in the following table adjust the input characteristics of the analog inputs Analog Input When using the inputs to command the inverter output frequency these parameters adjust the Settings starting and ending ranges for the voltage or current as well as the output frequency range Related characteristic diagrams are located in Analog Input and Miscellaneous Settings on page 3 11 Keypad Defaults Run ae es Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 em p SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn A101 OIJ L input active range start frequency 0 00 to 400 0 Hz 00 0 00 0 00 0 Xv model 4000HFx2 is Output frequency corresponding to the current 0 00 to 120 0 Hz input range starting point A102 OI L input active range end frequency 0 00 to 400 0 Hz 00 0 00 0 000 Xv model 4000HFx2 is Output frequency corresponding to the current 0 00 to 120 0 Hz input range ending point A103 OIJ L input active range start current 0to 100 20 20 20 Xv Starting point for the current input range A104 OIJ L input active range end current 0 to 100 100 100 100 Xv Ending point for the current input range 3 28 A Group Standard Functions
47. Functions voltage LADSTOP function monitors the DC bus voltage and actively changes the output frequency profile to maintain the DC bus voltage within settable limits Although LAD refers to linear acceleration deceleration the inverter only STOPs the deceleration slope so that regenerative voltage will not cause the DC bus to rise enough to cause an over voltage trip event Note that acceleration is not affected The graph below shows an inverter output profile that starts decelerating to a stop At two different points during the deceleration regenerative voltage elevates the DC bus level exceed ing the LADSTOP threshold set by B131 When the Over voltage LADSTOP feature is enabled by B130 01 the inverter stops the deceleration ramp in each case until the DC bus level is again less than the threshold value B130 01 OVLADSTOP enable Inverter stops deceleration Over voltage protection trip threshold Over voltage protection i i trip threshold fe oS DC bus level 32 S l I I I l l I l oO g I Output I l I l o frequency i l 1 I l I Start deceleration l l 1 I Deceleration resumed N t Keypad Defaults Run P Tara N Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 er p SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn B130 Over voltage LADSTOP enable OFF OG Disable 00 00 00 xx Pauses deceleration r
48. HET ERE tion error ModBus RTU mode the inverter will Check whether the wiring distance is display the error code shown on the left appropriate check the connections The inverter will trip according to the setting of C076 E60 Option I error The inverter detects errors in the option Check whether the option board is Ea board mounted in the optional slot 1 For mounted correctly check the board EEG lt details refer to the instruction manual for mounting the mounted option board Check whether the option board is used OF 1 8 correctly refer to the instruction manual for the option board SJ FB SJ DG or SJ DN OF 1 3 Note 6 The inverter will not accept reset commands input via the RS terminal or entered by the STOP RESET key Therefore turn off the inverter power Note 7 The inverter applied for 004 to 110L H will not accept reset commands input via the RS terminal or entered by the STOP RESET key Therefore turn off the inverter power Note 8 The inverter will not accept the reset command entered from the digital operator Therefore reset the inverter by turning on the RS terminal NOTE If an EEPROM error E08 occurs be sure to confirm the parameter data values are still correct Expansion Card Error Codes SJ7002 Inverter KAIN The inverter monitors the operation of the expansion cards optional that may be Error range installed in the expansion bay f Sn E6x or OP1 On the i
49. High speed zero return frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to maximum frequency 0 00 0 00 0 00 Vw setting 1st motor Hz P072 Forward position range 0 to 268435455 when P012 02 268435455 Vv 0 to 1073741823 when P013 03 upper four digits P073 Reverse position range 268435455 to 0 when P012 02 268435455 Vv 1073741823 to 0 when P013 03 upper four digits P074 Teaching selection Bel OG X00 00 00 00 Vv Bl GI X01 AZ Ge X02 aS 03 X03 ag 04 X04 az OS X05 Be 06 X06 ar 07 X07 P100 Easy sequence user parameters U 00 to 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 10000 to 65535 0 0 0 Vv to UG1 P131 NOTE Parameters P044 to P049 are available only in inverters with manufacturing code X8K xxxxxx Xxxxx or later The manufacturing code is printed on the product specifications labels located on the front and side of the inverter housing U Q 9 3 D D Q o auq BuunByuon EZA P Group Expansion Card Functions D m le CE E 5 gt e O n be D ob E oO or oO Absolute Position To use the absolute position control mode set A044 V F characteristic curve setting 1st motor Control Mode equal to 02 V2 and set P012 Control Pulse Setting equal to 02 APR Automatic Position Control Mode e If P012 03 high resolution absolute position control the inverter quadruples the number of pulses used for positioning In this case multip
50. M12 Threaded holes for eyebolts 325 12 79 4 b 10 0 39 DC reactor model DCL H 315 285 11 22 M10 Grounding terminal 2x2 0 14 0 55 2 M10 Eyebolts 6 0 23 36 1 41 393 15 47 294 11 57 430 16 92 max M10 Grounding terminal uone elsu pue Bununop 1343AU Step by Step Basic Installation Dimensional drawings continued 1050 41 33 4 0 15 0 59 2 M16 Eyebolts 450 17 71 Exhaust 2 M16 300 11 81 300 11 81 300 11 81 Threaded holes 15 0 59 Inverter model GET LILL IF 1 J700 4000HFU2 HFE2 and Installation D E amp 5 e 2 jo 2 _ Oo gt HSD 1670 65 74 1700 66 92 MT TT 75 2 95 2 79 325 4 10 0 39 DC reactor model DCL H 400 285 11 22 325 12 79 2x2 14 0 55 36 1 41 15 ae M10 Grounding terminal C Air intake 4 M16 Threaded holes for eyebolts 2 M8 Eyebolts L m N Q A S 5 a g 9 N mm er 450 17 71 max GE Prepare for Wiring gt gt gt gt pp p pp 2 17 SJ7002 Inverter Step 5 The wiring enters the inverter
51. P P Group functions 3 69 P PI selection 4 26 Parameter editing 2 29 2 32 Parameter settings tables Parameters 1 16 Phase loss 3 30 PID feedback second stage output 4 56 PID loop 1 19 A 4 Clear integrator 4 26 Disable 4 26 error A 3 operation 4 75 output deviation 4 46 process variable A 4 setpoint A 5 settings 3 22 PLC connecting to 4 7 k Poles 1 19 Poles of motor 2 34 Potentiometer 2 33 4 65 Power factor A 4 Power failure 4 48 Power failure response 3 30 Power loss 4 4 Power loss response 3 42 Power source switching 4 22 Power on time over signal 4 51 Powerup test 2 27 observations 2 36 Powerup unattended start 421 Process variable A 4 Program mode 2 31 2 36 34 Programming device 3 2 Programming error codes 3 75 Programming error monitoring 3 8 Proportional gain 3 22 Pulse counter signals 4 42 Pulse width modulation 4 66 PWM A4 R Ratings label 1 5 Reactance A 5 Read write copy unit 1 3 3 2 Rectifier A 5 Reduced torque 3 15 Regenerative braking A 5 Regulation A 5 Regulatory agency approvals 1 5 Relay alarm contacts 4 47 Remote control 4 28 Removable components 1 4 Reset function 4 24 Reset Mode 3 62 Restart Mode 3 45 3 62 Retention screws 2 4 Reverse run command 4 15 Reverse torque A 5 Reverse U shape accel decel 3 26 Rotor A 5 Run command 4 15 Run mode 2 36 3 5 Run signal 4 44 Running the mot
52. Stop 1 Run enabled when A003 03 0002h 00002 Rotation direction command R W 0 REV 1 FW enabled when A003 03 0003h 00003 External trip EXT R W 0 No trip event 1 Trip occurred 0004h 00004 Trip reset RS R W 0 No reset condition 1 Reset 0005h 00005 Reserved 0006h 00006 Reserved 0007h 00007 Intelligent input terminal 1 R W 0 OFF 1 0008h 00008 Intelligent input terminal 2 R W HON 0009h 00009 Intelligent input terminal 3 R W 000Ah 00010 Intelligent input terminal 4 R W 000Bh 00011 Intelligent input terminal 5 R W 000Ch 00012 Intelligent input terminal 6 R W 000Dh 00013 Intelligent input terminal 7 R W OOOEh 00014 Intelligent input terminal 8 R W 000Fh 00015 Run Stop status R 0 Stop corresponds to D003 monitor 1 Run 0010h 00016 FW REV status R 0 FW 1 RV 0011h 00017 Inverter ready R 0 Not ready 1 Ready 0012h 00018 Reserved R 0013h 00019 RUN running R 0 OFF 1 ON 0014h 00020 FA2 Frequency Arrival R constant speed reached 0015h 00021 FA2 Frequancy Arrival above R set frequency 0016h 00022 OL Overload signal R 0017h 00023 OD PID deviation signal B 34 ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt
53. Y y H052 P proportional gain setting for 1st motor 0 01 to 10 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 Vv H252 P proportional gain setting for 2nd motor 0 01 to 10 00 1 00 1 00 100 Vv H060 0Hz SLV limit for 1st motor 0 0 to 100 0 100 100 100 U QD g 3 Q D Q a SAUG BuunByuon 3 68 H Group Motor Constants Functions D 2 a te C 5 2D C e O n bei 2 E oO iS or ai Keypad Defaults Run 0 ere Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 oe 2 ne SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 er EU USA gpn 2 H260 OHz SLV limit for 2nd motor 0 0 to 100 0 100 100 100 Vv H061 OHz SLV starting boost current for 1st motor 0 to 50 100 100 100 V H261 OHz SLV starting boost current for 2nd 0 to 50 100 100 100 motor H070 Terminal selection PI proportional gain 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 100 0 100 0 Vw setting HO71 Terminal selection PI integral gain setting 0 00 to 999 9 1000 100 0 100 0 100 0 Vw H072 Terminal selection P proportional gain 0 00 to 10 00 1 00 1 00 100 Vv setting H073 Gain switching time 0 to 999 milliseconds 100 100 100 SJ7002 Inverter 3 69 P Group Expansion Card Functions The two optional expansion cards for the SJ700 have associated configuration data The following table defines the functions and t
54. and constant speed B025 Overload restriction setting 0 20 x rated current to 1 80 x 131Ah 04890 200 to 0 1 2 rated current A 2000 B026 Deceleration rate at 0 10 to 30 00 seconds 131Bh 04891 1 to 3000 0 01 sec overload restriction 2 B027 Overcurrent suppression 00 Disable 131Ch 04892 0 1 enable 01 Enable B028 Current limit for active 0 20 x rated current to 1 80 x 131Dh 04893 200 to 0 1 frequency matching restart rated current A 2000 SJ7002 Inverter Ex Holding Registers B Group Fine Tuning Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec B029 Scan time constant for R W 10 to 3000 131Eh 04894 0 01 sec 0 01 sec active freq matching B030 Restart freq select for R W 00 Frequency at last shutoff 131Fh 04895 active freq matching 01 Maximum frequency 02 Set frequency B031 Software lock mode selec R W 00 Low level access SFT 1320h 04896 tion input blocks all edits 01 Low level access SFT input blocks edits except F001 and Multi speed parameters 02 No access to edits 03 No access to edits except F001 and Multi speed parameters 10 High level access including B031 Reserved 1321h 04897 Reserved 1322h 04898 B034 Run power on warning R W 0 t
55. 01 to 32 m Command Transmission command 2 bytes 05 BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node T Command and Data CR Control code carriage return 1 byte CR 0x0D The receive frame has a 440 byte data field This consists of an 8 byte total accumulated number of trip events followed by six 72 byte strings for the CR six most recent trip events as shown below Receive frame format Data field contents Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Data Transmission data 440 see next table bytes BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Command and Data CR Control code carriage return I byte CR 0x0D The nine bytes of data for each trip event history is listed below The data contains the multi plier to adjust the decimal point Divide the data by that factor to derive the actual value No Monitor Item Units Multiplier ER Notes 1 Trip factor 8 bytes Factor code 2 Inverter Status A 8 bytes Same as 04 3 Inverter Status B 8 bytes vo 4 Inverter Status C 8 bytes 5 Output frequency Hz 10 8 bytes Dec ASCII code 6 Accumulated Run Mode time hours 1 8 bytes Dec ASCII code 7 Output current A 10 8 bytes Dec ASCII code 8 Output volta
56. 04792 A150 EL S curve acceleration R W Range is 0 to 50 12B9h 04793 0 to 50 1 ratio A151 EL S curve acceleration R W Range is 0 to 50 12BAh 04794 0 to 50 1 ratio 2 A152 EL S curve acceleration R W Range is 0 to 50 12BBh 04795 0 to 50 1 ratio 3 A153 EL S curve acceleration R W Range is 0 to 50 12BCh 04796 0 to 50 1 ratio 4 Reserved 12BDh 04797 to to 1300h 04864 Holding Registers B Group Fine Tuning Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec B001 Selection of restart mode R W 00 Alarm output after trip 1301h 04865 0 to 4 automatic restart disabled 01 Resume operation after frequency matching 02 Resume operation after frequency matching 03 Resume previous freq after freq matching then decelerate to stop and display trip info 04 Restart with active matching frequency B002 Allowable under voltage R W The amount of time a power 1302h 04866 310250 0 1 sec power failure time input under voltage can occur without tripping the power failure alarm SJ7002 Inverter B 53 Holding Registers B Group Fine Tuning Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec B003 Retry wait time before R W Time delay after a trip condition 1303h 04867 3 to 1000 0 1 sec motor restart goes awa
57. 12804 30 to 400 1 Hz setting 3rd motor Reserved 3205h 12805 to to 3215h 12821 A005 AT selection R W 00 Select between O and 1205h 04613 00 to 04 OT at AT 01 Select between O and 02 at AT 02 Select between O and keypad pot 03 Select between OI and keypad pot 04 Select between 02 and keypad pot A006 02 selection R W 00 No summing 02 and 1206h 046 00 to 03 OI 01 Sum of 02 and OI neg sum reverse speed reference inhibited 02 Sum of 02 and OI neg sum reverse speed reference allowed 03 Disable 02 input ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers A Group Standard Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec Reserved 1207h 04614 to to 120Ah 04618 A011 O L input active range R W The output frequency corre 120Bh 04619 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz start frequency sponding to the voltage input A011 L range starting point 120Ch 04620 A012 H O L input active range R W The output frequency corre 120Dh 04621 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz end frequency sponding to the voltage input A012 L range ending point 120Eh 04622 A013 O L input active
58. 1634h 05684 to to 1638h 05688 P055 Pulse train frequency span R W 1 0 to 50 0 kHz 1639h 05689 10 to 500 0 1 kHz P056 Pulse train frequency time R W 0 01 to 2 00 seconds 163Ah 05690 110200 0 01 sec constant P057 Pulse train frequency bias R W 100 to 100 163Bh 05691 100 to 1 100 P058 Pulse train frequency limit R W 0 to 100 163Ch 05692 0 to 100 1 Reserved 163Dh 05693 P060 Multi stage position R W Reverse side to forward side 163Eh 05694 setting 0 upper four digits including P060 L R W sign 163Fh 05695 P061 H Multi stage position R W Reverse side to forward side 1640h 05696 setting I upper four digits including Po61 L R W sign 1641h 05697 P062 H Multi stage position R W Reverse side to forward side 1642h 05698 setting 2 upper four digits including P062 L R W sign 1643h 05699 P063 H Multi stage position R W Reverse side to forward side 1644h 05700 setting 3 upper four digits including P063 L R W sign 1645h 05701 P064 H Multi stage position R W Reverse side to forward side 1646h 05702 setting 4 upper four digits including P064 L R W sign 1647h 05703 P065 H Multi stage position R W Reverse side to forward side 1648h 05704 setting 5 upper four digits including P065 L R
59. 22 Orientation to Inverter Features Orientation to Inverter Features D E amp e 2 2 _ Oo gt E and Installation Unpacking and Inspection Main Physical Features Please take a few moments to unpack your new SJ7002 inverter and perform these steps 1 Look for any damage that may have occurred during shipping 2 Verify the contents of the box include a One SJ7002 inverter b One Instruction Manual supplied by printed book for FU2 FF2 models supplied on CR ROM for FE2 models c One SJ7002 Quick Reference Guide d One packet of desiccant discard not for human consumption 3 Inspect the specifications label on the front or side of the inverter Make sure it matches the product part number you ordered The SJ7002 Series inverters vary in size according to the current output rating and motor size for each model number All feature the same basic keypad and connector interface for consistent ease of use The inverter construction has a heat sink at the back of the housing The fans enhance heat sink performance Mounting holes are pre drilled in the heat sink for your convenience Never touch the heat sink during or just after operation it can be very hot The electronics housing and front panel are built onto the front of the heat sink The front panel has three levels of physical access designed for convenience and safety e First level access for basic use of inverter and editin
60. 4000xxx Braking resistor aN RB pTO N _ Braking unit Radio noise filter Braking components are useful for increasing the inverter s control torque for high duty cycle ON OFF applications and improving the decelerating capability Electrical noise interference may occur on nearby equipment such as a radio receiver This magnetic choke filter helps reduce radiated noise can also be used at input Output side AC reactor This reactor reduces the vibrations in the motor caused by the inverter s switching waveform by smoothing the waveform to approximate commer cial power quality It is also useful to reduce harmonics when wiring from the inverter to the motor is more than 10m in length LCR filter Sine wave shaping filter for output side The LCR filter is not required for models 1850xxx to 4000xxx NOTE Some components are required for regulatory agency compliance see Chapter 5 and 5 55 Q az 32 z 0 MC D 5 2 6 Step by Step Basic Installation Step by Step Basic Installation and Installation D E 5 e 2 jo 2 b o gt Gv Choosing a Mounting Location gt Pbb P ddd This section will guide you through the following basic steps of installation 1 Study the warnings associated with mounting the inverter 2 Transport or lift the inverter and DC reactor if used in a safe manner 3
61. 5 5 5 Xv P018 Home search completion delay time setting 0 00 to 9 99 seconds 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv P019 Electronic gear set position FE OG Position feedback side 00 00 00 Xv selection R i REF 0 I Position command side Xv P020 Electronic gear ratio numerator setting 0 to 9999 1 1 1 Xv P021 Electronic gear ratio denominator setting 1 to 9999 1 1 1 Xv P022 Feed forward gain setting 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv P023 Position loop gain setting 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 0 50 0 50 0 50 XW P024 Position bias setting 204 2048 999 to 2048 0 0 0 Xv P025 Temperature compensation OFF aG No compensation 00 00 00 Xv thermistor enable Allows for motor mounted OH G I With compensation thermistor to calibrate output to motor temperature P026 Over speed error detection level setting 0 0 to 150 0 135 0 135 0 135 0 XY P027 Speed deviation error detection level setting 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 120 0 Hz 7 50 7 50 7 50 XW P028 Motor gear ratio numerator setting 0 to 9999 1 1 1 Xv Ez P Group Expansion Card Functions 2 a te fa T 5 2D c e O n pe 2 ob E oO oO ai Keypad Defaults Run aa As Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 Re p SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 U
62. B041 Torque limit 1 forward driving in 158 158 0 to 200 150 150 150 Xv 4 quadrant mode i ENN ria no Disable torque limit B042 Torque limit 2 reverse regenerat 138 158 0 to 200 150 150 150 Xv ing in 4 quadrant mode 7 ra no Disable torque limit B043 Torque limit 3 reverse driving in 158 158 0 to 200 150 150 150 Xv 4 quadrant mode 7 rep ra no Disable torque limit B044 Torque limit 4 forward regenerat 1584 158 0 to 200 150 150 150 Xv ing in 4 quadrant mode ar no no Disable torque limit 342 B Group Fine Tuning Functions 2 m le CE 5 2D C e O 42 oO ob E oO iS av oO Keypad Defaults Run ane oe Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 EE P SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA pn B045 Torque limit LADSTOP enable OFF OG Disable 00 00 00 XV Temporarily stops accel decel ramps OM 0 I Enable XV during torque limit Available for SLV 0 Hz domain or vector control with feedback mode B046 Reverse Run protection enable OFF OG Disable 00 00 00 Xv Prohibits reverse motor rotation OH G I Enable Controlled Deceleration at Power Loss When enabled this feature permits the inverter to control final motor deceleration upon loss of inverter input power First you must make a wiring
63. B133 Overvoltage suppression R W 0 00 to 2 55 1388h 05000 0 to 255 0 01 proportional gain B134 Overvoltage suppression R W 0 000 to 9 999 1389h 05001 integral time 10 00 to 63 53 seconds Reserved 1390h 05002 to to 1400h 05120 g x ipu ddy ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec C001 Terminal 1 function R W 1401h 05121 1to9 11 to 18 C002 Terminal 2 function R W 1402h 05122 20 ha 24 C003 Terminal 3 function R W 1403h 05123 Fe 0 40 C004 Terminal 4 function R W See Input Terminal 1404h 05124 no Configuration on C005 Terminal 5 function R W page 3 50 1405h 05125 C006 Terminal 6 function R W 1406h 05126 C007 Terminal 7 function R W 1407h 05127 C008 Terminal 8 function R W 1408h 05128 Reserved 1409h 05129 Reserved 140Ah 05130 C011 Terminal 1 active state R W Select logic convention two 140Bh 05131 0 I option codes C012 Terminal
64. B133 Overvoltage suppression proportional gain 0 50 0 50 0 50 B134 Overvoltage suppression integral time 0 060 0 060 0 060 Intelligent Terminal Functions C Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Name FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan Cool Terminal 1 function 18 18 18 C002 Terminal 2 function 16 16 16 C003 Terminal 3 function 06 06 06 C004 Terminal 4 function 11 11 11 C005 Terminal 5 function 09 09 09 C006 Terminal 6 function 03 13 03 C007 Terminal 7 function 02 02 02 C008 Terminal 8 function 01 01 01 C011 Terminal 1 active state 00 00 00 C012 Terminal 2 active state 00 00 00 C013 Terminal 3 active state 00 00 00 C014 Terminal 4 active state 00 00 00 C015 Terminal 5 active state 00 00 00 C016 Terminal 6 active state 00 00 00 C017 Terminal 7 active state 00 00 00 C018 Terminal 8 active state 00 00 00 SJ7002 Inverter C 11 N xipueddy C Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Name FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan C019 Terminal FW active state 00 00 00 C021 Terminal 11 function 01 01 01 C022 Terminal 12 function 00 00 00 C023 Terminal 13 function 03 03 03 C024 Terminal 14 function 07 07 07 C025 Terminal 15 function 08 08 08 C026 Alarm relay terminal fun
65. Before increasing the filter setting we recommend trying to find the cause of input analog noise Check for the following Look for nearby high current wiring avoid any parallel runs to the analog signal wires e Check the impedance between the chassis grounds of the inverter and the analog signal source equipment a good connection will have a low impedance e Check the analog signal ground impedance from the inverter to the analog signal source e Avoid ground loops measure the current or voltage drop on the chassis ground and signal ground connections the ideal value is zero After taking steps to minimize the analog signal noise sources increase the filter time constant A016 until the motor output frequency when commanded by analog inputs becomes stable 464 Analog Input Operation 2 a of 5 TS 23 Og The following tables show the available analog input settings Parameters A006 A005 and input terminal AT determine the External Frequency Command input terminals that are avail able and how they function The Trim Frequency input 02 L is available when check marked for some settings Other settings make the reverse direction in addition to forward available for bipolar input settings when check marked A bipolar input responds to positive input voltages with a forward motor rotation and to negative input voltages with reverse motor rotation
66. Dynamic P RB Conducting Braking 0 4kW 11kW RB N Non conducting N RB Non conducting SJ7002 Inverter 6 29 Warranty Warranty Terms The warranty period under normal installation and handling conditions shall be two 2 years from the date of manufacture DATE on product nameplate or one 1 year from the date of installation whichever occurs first The warranty shall cover the repair or replacement at Hitachi s sole discretion of ONLY the inverter that was installed 1 Service in the following cases even within the warranty period shall be charged to the purchaser a Malfunction or damage caused by mis operation or modification or improper repair Malfunction or damage caused by a drop after purchase and transportation c Malfunction or damage caused by fire earthquake flood lightning abnormal input voltage contamination or other natural disasters When service is required for the product at your work site all expenses associated with field repair shall be charged to the purchaser Always keep this manual handy please do not lose it Please contact your Hitachi distributor to purchase replacement or additional manuals fed 3 ao lt o D D 22 to le os 3 35 3 3a Glossary and Bibliography In This Appendix page EE EEE 2 NT NN 6 A 2 Glossary lt x C Q Q lt Glossary Ambient Temperature Arrival Frequency Auto tuning Ba
67. Example 1 Without reverse Example 2 With reverse FW terminal FW terminal AT terminal AT terminal External frequency command O Ol terminal O External frequency command O Ol terminal Trim frequency command 02 terminal Trim frequency command 02 terminal forward reverse Actual frequency 0 command Actual frequency 0 command T Fo Foo a For Foo Wiring Examples Using an external potentiometer is a common way to control the inverter output frequency and a good way to learn how to use the analog inputs The potentiome ter uses the built in 10V reference H and the analog ground L for excitation and the voltage input O for the signal By default the AT terminal selects the voltage input when it is OFF Take care to use the proper resistance for the potentiometer which is 1 to 2kQ 2 Watts Voltage Input The 0 10V voltage input circuit uses terminals L and O Attach the signal cable s shield wire to terminal L on the inverter only DO NOT ground the shield at its other end Maintain the voltage within specifications do not apply negative voltage Normally a full span input level 10V will give the maximum motor frequency You can use parameter A014 to select a lower voltage for full output frequency such as using a 5V input signal 7 1 to 2 KO 2W suonee8d0 D 2 fe 5 e 5 Ke Bipolar Voltage Input T
68. Free setting V f frequency 4 0 to Free setting V f frequency 5 Hz 0 0 0 xx B107 Free setting V f voltage 4 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 0 0 0 0 xx B108 Free setting V f frequency 5 0 to Free setting V f frequency 6 Hz 0 0 0 xx B109 Free setting V f voltage 5 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 0 0 0 0 xx B110 Free setting V f frequency 6 0 to Free setting V f frequency 7 Hz 0 0 0 xx B111 Free setting V f voltage 6 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 0 0 0 0 xx B112 Free setting V f frequency 7 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 0 0 xx B113 Free setting V f voltage 7 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 0 0 0 0 xx AUG BuunByuon 3 48 B Group Fine Tuning Functions External Brake The brake control function in the inverter controls external braking used in systems such as Control elevators The purpose of this function is to ensure the inverter is powering the motor before releasing external brakes that would permit the load to move or coast This function requires the configuration and wiring of intelligent input and output terminals See External Brake Control Function on page 4 32 for more information Keypad Defaults Run cas Kl Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 re 8 SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn B120 Brake Control Enable OFF OG Disable 00 00 00 Xv OH 0 I Enable B121 Brake Wait Time for Release 0 00 to 5 00 seconds
69. Group Standard Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec A039 Jog stop mode R W 00 Free run stop jogging 1239h 04665 Oto 5 disabled during motor run 01 Controlled deceleration jogging disabled during motor run 02 DC braking to stop jogging disabled during motor run 03 Free run stop jogging always enabled 04 Controlled deceleration jogging always enabled 05 DC braking to stop jogging always enabled Reserved 123Ah 04666 A041 Torque boost method R W 00 Manual torque boost 123Bh 04667 0 1 selection 01 Automatic torque boost A241 Torque boost method R W 00 Manual torque boost 223Bh 08763 0 1 selection 2nd motor 01 Automatic torque boost A042 Manual torque boost value R W Can boost starting torque 123Ch 04668 0 to 200 0 1 between 0 and 20 above normal V f curve A242 Manual torque boost value R W Can boost starting torque 223Ch 08764 0 to 200 0 1 2nd motor between 0 and 20 above normal V f curve A342 Manual torque boost value R W Can boost starting torque 323Ch 12860 0 to 200 0 1 3rd motor between 0 and 20 above normal V f curve A043 Manual torque boost R W Sets the frequency of the V f 123Dh 04669 0 to 500 0 1 frequency adjustment breakpoint for torque boost A243 Manual torque boost R W
70. Output only during constant speed C039 Low current indication detection level 0 0 to 1 80 x rated inverter current Rated current x 1 0 Xv Low current threshold used for intelligent output LOC Xv C040 Overload signal output mode OH OG During accel decel constant speed 01 01 01 Xv Choose when the overload CET G I During constant speed only signal is enabled C041 Overload level setting 1 0 00 x rated current to 1 80 x rated current Rated current for Xv A inverter C042 Frequency arrival setting for acceleration 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv Sets the frequency arrival setting threshold for the output frequency during acceleration C043 Arrival frequency setting for deceleration 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv Sets the frequency arrival setting threshold for the output frequency during deceleration C044 PID deviation level setting 0 0 to 100 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 Xv Sets the PID loop error threshold ISP PVI absolute value to trigger intelligent output OD C045 Frequency arrival setting for acceleration 2 0 0 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv C046 Frequency arrival setting for deceleration 2 0 0 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xy C052 Maximum PID feedback PV data 0 0 to 100 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv C053 Minimum PID feedback PV data 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 XW C055 Over torque forward driving level setting 0 to
71. PD 1 Inverter P Name Function Breaker A molded case circuit breaker MCCB ground disconnect fault interrupter breaker GFI or a fused disconnect device NOTE The installer must refer to the NEC and local codes to ensure safety and compliance Input side This is useful in suppressing harmonics induced on AC Reactor the power supply lines or when the main power voltage imbalance exceeds 3 and power source capacity is more than 500 kVA or to smooth out line fluctuations It also improves the power factor Radio noise filter Electrical noise interference may occur on nearby equipment such as a radio receiver This magnetic choke filter helps reduce radiated noise can also be used on output EMI filter for CE applications This filter reduces the conducted noise in the power supply wiring between the inverter and the power see Appendix D distribution system Connect it to the inverter primary input side Radio noise filter This capacitive filter reduces radiated noise from the use in non CE main power wires in the inverter input side applications GND e U V W li o T1 T2f T3 Motor Thermal switch Appendix D DC link choke The choke suppresses harmonics generated by the inverter However it will not protect the input diode bridge rectifier A DCL reactor is required for models 185xxx to
72. RV for reverse Set motor direction in F004 D 3 2 z D 3 D 3 D 3 a D Bunooysejqno 64 Troubleshooting Symptom condition Probable Cause Solution speed If using the analog input is there current or voltage at O or OI Check the wiring Check the potentiometer or signal generating device The motor speed will not reach Is the load too heavy Reduce the load Heavy loads activate the overload restriction feature reduces output as needed the target frequency desired Is the inverter internally limiting the output frequency Check max frequency setting A004 Check frequency upper limit setting A061 If using analog inputs check their settings A101 A104 or A111 A114 or AO11 A014 The rotation is unstable Is the load fluctuation too great Is the supply voltage unstable Is the problem occurring at a particular frequency Increase the motor capacity both inverter and motor Fix power supply problem Change the output frequency slightly or use the jump frequency setting to skip the problem frequency frequency setting The RPM of the motor does not match the inverter output Is the maximum frequency setting A004 correct Does the monitor function D001 display the expected output frequency Verify the V F settings match motor specifications Make sure all scaling such as AO11 to A014 is properly set
73. STA and 21 STP Symbol 22 F R Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Required E Settings ANE Default Requires terminal config SJ7002 Inverter 4 25 Motors that are equipped with a thermistor can be protected from overheating Input terminal TH is dedicated to sense thermistor resistance The input can be set up via B098 and B099 to accept a wide variety of NTC or PTC type thermistors Use this function to protect the motor from overheating When a thermistor is connected between terminals TH TH and CM1 the inverter checks for over temperature and will cause a trip E35 and turn OFF the output to the motor Be sure the thermistor is connected to terminals TH and CM1 If the resistance is above or below depending on whether NTC or PTC the threshold the inverter will trip When the motor cools down enough the thermistor resistance will change enough to permit you to clear the error Press the STOP Reset key to clear the error TH FW a fom 5 3 1 P24 PLC CMt Arr thermistor An open circuit in the thermistor causes a trip and the inverter turns OFF the motor output Motor The 3 wire interface is an industry standard motor control interface This function uses two inputs for momentary contact start stop control and a third for selecting forward or reverse direction Symbol Function Name Description STA Start Motor Start motor rotation on momentary contact uses accel erat
74. Select a suitable mounting location NOTE If the installation is in an EU country study the EMC installation guidelines in Appendix D Cover the inverter s top ventilation openings to prevent debris from falling inside Check the inverter mounting dimensions for footprint and mounting hole locations Study the caution and warning messages associated with wiring the inverter Connect wiring for the inverter power input Connect wiring to the motor ewe ePnNnw sa Uncover the inverter s ventilation openings that were covered in Step 3 10 Perform a powerup test 11 Make observations and check your installation Step 1 Study the following caution messages associated with mounting the inverter This is the time when mistakes are most likely to occur that will result in expensive rework equipment damage or personal injury CAUTION Be sure to install the unit on flame resistant material such as a steel plate Other wise there is the danger of fire CAUTION Be sure not to place any flammable materials near the inverter Otherwise there is the danger of fire CAUTION Be sure not to let the foreign matter enter vent openings in the inverter housing such as wire clippings spatter from welding metal shavings dust etc Otherwise there is the danger of fire CAUTION Be sure to install the inverter in a place that can bear the weight according to the specifications in the text Chapter 1 Specifications Tables Other
75. The intelligent pulse counter input PCNT allows you to input a pulse train up to 100 Hz via an intelligent input terminal For high speed applications use the encoder input expansion card instead Monitor the cumulative count with D028 pulse counter function The value of the cumulative count cannot be stored in a separate register or parameter The counter value is cleared to zero when inverter power is turn ON or the inverter is reset You may also use the PCC Pulse Counter Clear input to clear the cumulative count The frequency resolution of the input pulse can be calculated by the formula shown below assuming a pulse signal input with 50 duty cycle Do not input higher frequencies than the calculated value Frequency resolution Hz 250 input terminal response setting C160 to C168 1 Example When the input terminal response time 1 the frequency resolution 125 Hz Pulse counter input PCNT Filtered pulse train Counter value 1 2 3 4 SJ7002 Inverter 4 43 Using Intelligent Output Terminals The intelligent output terminals are programmable in a similar way to the intelligent input terminals The inverter has several output functions that you can assign individually to five physical logic outputs Along with these solid state outputs the alarm relay output has type Form C normally open and normally closed contacts The relay is assigned the alarm function by default but you can assign it to any of the
76. When terminal 2CH is turned ON the inverter changes the rate of acceleration and deceleration from the initial settings F002 and F003 to use the second set of accelera tion deceleration values A092 and A093 When the terminal is turned OFF the inverter returns to the original acceleration Input and deceleration time F002 acceleration signals time 1 and F003 deceleration time 1 Use 2CH A092 acceleration time 2 and A093 deceleration time 2 to set the second stage FW RV acceleration and deceleration times Output frequency target frequency In the graph shown above the 2CH signal becomes active during acceleration This causes the inverter to switch from using acceleration 1 F002 to acceleration 2 A092 Note the following e Function A094 selects the method for second stage acceleration It must be set 00 to select the input terminal method in order for the 2CH terminal assignment to operate When the terminal FRS is turned ON the inverter turns OFF the output and the motor enters the free run state coasting If terminal FRS is turned OFF the output resumes sending power Opt Code 11 to the motor if the Run command is still active The free run stop feature works with other arameters to provide flexibility in stopping and starting motor rotation Symbol FRS i p j Epua gt In the diagram below parameter B088 selects whether the inverter resumes operation fro
77. disabled Intelligent terminal ATR is ignored because torque control is disabled Intelligent terminal STAT is ignored because pulse train position control is disabled e Home search function is disabled The teaching function allows you to make the inverter run and stop the motor as desired and store current position data to a position command memory location that you select Assign the ORT Orientation function option code 45 to an intelligent input The ORT terminal functions as the teaching input terminal when P012 Control Pulse Setting is set to 02 Absolute Position Control or 03 High resolution Absolute Position Control The teaching procedure is as follows 1 Select the teaching position memory location by setting P074 2 Move the work piece or machine to the desired location Enter an operation command while the ORT terminal is in the ON state The speed and accel decel settings selected at the operation command input are applied ORT ORT o U 2 g 3 Q D Q a AUG BuunByuon I rn 4 Speed setting selected at operation command input is applied Output frequency Position Teaching operation can be performed when power is input to the power supply terminals RO and TO of the inverter control circuit The current position counter also operates when an external device moves the work piece Therefore the teaching operation can also be performed when the inverter d
78. g TS a Og av Force Operation from Digital Operator Opt Code 31 Symbol OPE Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 A001 en A002 set not ennes equal to 02 Default Requires terminal config UDC Remote Control Data Clear Clears the Up down frequency memory In the graph below the UP and DWN terminals activate while the Run command remains ON The output frequency responds to the UP and DWN commands Output frequency UP DWN FW RV It is possible for the inverter to retain the frequency set from the UP and DWN terminals through a power loss Parameter C101 enables disables the memory If disabled the inverter retains the last frequency before an UP DWN adjustment Use the UDC terminal to clear the memory and return to the original set output frequency This function permits a digital operator interface to override the Run command source setting A002 when it is configured for a source other than the operator interface When the OPE terminal is ON the operator interface Run command over rides commands from input termi nals such as FW RV The inverter will use the standard output frequency settings to operate the motor When the OPE terminal is OFF the Run command operates normally as configured by A002 When changing the OPE state during Run Mode inverter is driving the motor the inverter will stop the motor before the new OPE stat
79. generate these signals If the FOT turns ON during forward rotation or ROT turns ON during reverse rotation the inverter limits the motor torque to 10 in the current direction of travel Outputto motor Forward drive stop Reverse drive stop suoesado D 5 2 fe 5 e 5 Ke Turn ON the SPD terminal input to perform speed control while in absolute position control mode The direction of rotation depends on the operation command FWD or REV When switching from speed control to position control be sure to verify the sign of the value set in the operation command While the SPD terminal is OFF the current position count remains at zero If the SPD terminal is turned OFF during motor operation the control mode switches to position control and pulse counting begins starting from zero If the target position value is also zero the inverter stops the motor at the current position Otherwise rotation continues until motor rotation arrives at the target position Output gt Start of position counting frequency I Position control Speed control 1 I 0 Target position Speed position switching SPD 4 42 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Pulse Counter Signals Opt Code 74 PCNT and 75 PCC Symbol Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Monitor Settings pee Default Requires terminal config 2 2 of g TS a Og av
80. increased to the DC bus voltage trigger level with the stop level is applied However the parameter setting will not be changed e When B052 is less than the supply voltage the rectified DC voltage or the AC voltage times square root of two when power recovers the inverter will be in the LAD stop state and cannot decelerate The Stop Command and frequency change command are ignored until deceleration is complete be sure to set B052 higher than the standard supply voltage A non stop deceleration function cannot be canceled until it is complete To restart the inverter operations after power recovery wait until the inverter stops Then enter a Stop Command and then an operation command FW RV e Setting a higher value for B054 Initial Output Frequency Decrease During Power Loss results in an over current trip due to sudden deceleration Setting a lower value for B054 or larger value for B053 Deceleration Time Setting During Power Loss results in under voltage trip due to reduced regenerative energy Non stop deceleration at instantaneous power failure B050 01 has these characteristics The nonstop deceleration at instantaneous power failure is the function making the inverter decelerate and stop the motor while maintaining the voltage below the overvoltage level over voltage threshold during power loss b052 when an instantaneous power failure occurs during the inverter operation To use this function remove the J51 connect
81. inputs A total of six outputs are available shown in the following tables Opt Code 35 LOG3 and Symbol 36 LOG4 37 LOGS 38 LOG6 Valid for Outputs 11 to 15 ALx Required Settings C142 to C159 Default terminal Requires config Symbol as Function A Input B Input Logical Operator LOG1 33 Logic Output 1 C142 C143 C144 LOG2 34 Logic Output 2 C145 C146 C147 LOG3 35 Logic Output 3 C148 C149 C150 LOG4 36 Logic Output 4 C151 C152 C153 LOG5 37 Logic Output 5 C154 C155 C156 LOG6 38 Logic Output 6 C157 C158 C159 2 2 of g TS a Og av Capacitor Life Warning Opt Code 39 Symbol WAC Valid for l11to 15 Outputs ALx Monitor Settings De Default Requires terminals config The example below shows a configuration for LOG1 Logic Output 1 Parameters C142 and C143 contain option codes for two outputs we select to be used as inputs to the logic operation Parameter C144 contains the select code for the logic operation 00 AND 01 OR and 02 OR Intelligent outputs used as internal C142 inputs RUN FA1 FA2 OL OD etc i i C144 RUN option code 00 Arou i I Logic function LOG 1 AND OR XOR l FA2 option code 02 A ere Input States LOGx Output State A Input B Input AND 00 OR 01 XOR 02 0 0
82. the brake confirmation signal BOK turns OFF and the inverter waits the required waiting time Then the inverter begins to decelerate again and brings motor and load to a complete stop see timing diagram on next page SJ7002 Inverter KEJ The following table lists the parameters related to the External Brake Control function Code Function Data or Range Description B120 Brake control 00 Disable Enables external brake control function within the enable 01 Enable inverter B121 Brake waiting 0 00 to 5 00 sec Sets the time delay after arrival at release time for release frequency B125 before the inverter outputs brake release signal BRK B122 Brake wait time 0 00 to 5 00 sec Sets time delay after brake confirmation signal for acceleration BOK is received until the inverter begins to accel erate to the set frequency B123 Brake wait time 0 00 to 5 00 sec Sets the time delay after brake confirmation signal for stopping BOK turns OFF after BRK turns OFF until decelerating the inverter to 0 Hz B124 Brake wait time 0 00 to 5 00 sec Sets the wait time for BOK signal after turn ON for confirmation OFF of BRK signal If BOK is not received during the specified time the inverter will trip with an external brake error BER B125 Break release 0 00 to 99 99 Hz Sets the frequency at which the inverter outputs the frequency setting 100 0 to 400 0 Hz brake rel
83. to 100 1343h 04931 Oto 100 1 of window comparator Lower limit B063 B066 2 B065 OI input hysteresis width R W 0 to 10 1344h 04932 0 to 10 1 of window comparator Lower limit B063 B064 2 B066 O OI O2 input maximum R W 100 to 100 1345h 04933 Oto 100 1 limit level of window Lower limit B067 B068 2 comparator B067 O OI O2 input minimum R W 100 to 100 1346h 04934 Oto 100 1 limit level of window Lower limit B066 B068 2 comparator B068 0 01 02 input hysteresis R W 0 to 10 1347h 04935 0 to 10 1 width of window Lower limit B066 B067 2 comparator Reserved 1348h 04936 B070 O input disconnect R W Oto 100 1349h 04937 0 to 100 1 threshold 255 ignore setting 255 B071 OI input disconnect R W 0 to 100 134Ah 04938 0 to 100 1 threshold 255 ignore setting 255 B072 02 input disconnect R W Oto 100 134Bh 04939 Oto 100 1 threshold 255 ignore setting 255 Reserved 134Ch 04940 to to 1350h 04944 B078 Clear cumulative input R W 00 No change 1351h 04945 0 1 power data 01 Clear the data B079 Cumulative input power R W 1 to 1000 1352h 04946 1 to 1000 1 display gain setting Reserved 1353h 04947 Reserved 1354h 04948 B082 Start frequen
84. 0 1 2 selection 01 Even parity 02 Odd parity C075 Communication stop bit R W 01 1 Stop bit 144Fh 05199 1 2 bits selection 02 2 Stop bits C076 Action upon communica R W 00 Trip 1450h 05200 0 to 4 tion error selection 01 Trip after deceleration and stop 02 No action ignore errors 03 Free run stop 04 Decelerate and stop C077 Communication timeout R W 0 00 to 99 99 seconds 1451h 05201 0 to 9999 0 01 sec before trip C078 Communication wait time R W Time the inverter waits after 1452h 05202 Oto 1000 1 msec receiving a message before it transmits C079 Communication protocol R W 00 ASCII 1453h 05203 0 1 select 01 ModBus RTU Reserved 1454h 05204 C081 O input span calibration R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1455h 05205 0 to 65530 1 10000 to 65530 C082 OI input span calibration R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1456h 05206 0 to 65530 1 10000 to 65530 C083 02 input span calibration R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1457h 05207 0 to 65530 1 10000 to 65530 Reserved 1458h 05208 SJ7002 Inverter B 63 Holding Registers C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec C085 Thermistor input tuning R W 0 0 to 999 9 1000 1459h 0
85. 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 The inverter calculates the capacitor life remaining based on the internal temperature of the inverter and the cumulative power ON time The WAC Capacitor Life Warning output turns ON to indicate that the capacitors have reached end of life If this event occurs Hitachi recommends that you replace the main circuit board and logic circuit board You may also use monitor parameter D022 at the digital operator to monitor the status of capacitor life SJ7002 Inverter KEJ Low Cooling Fan Speed Opt Code 40 Symbol WAF Valid for 11 to 15 Outputs ALx Required Settings Bie Monitor Settings me Default Requires terminals config Starting Contact The inverter monitors the heat sink cooling fan speed to help prevent overheating If the speed of the fan s decreases to 75 or less of full speed output WAF Low Cooling Fan Speed turns ON Note that if you set parameter B092 Cooling Fan Control 01 Fan ON only during RUN the inverter will not output the WAF signal when the cooling fan is stopped If the WAF signal turns ON during operation first check the cooling fan inlet for clogging by dust and debris If the air circulation path is clear the fans may need replacement You may also use monitor parameter D022 at the digital operator to monitor the status of fan speed The inverter generates FR Starting Contact Signal
86. 00 C151 Logic output 4 function A 00 00 00 C152 Logic output 4 function B 00 00 00 C153 Logic output 4 operator 00 00 00 C154 Logic output 5 function A 00 00 00 C155 Logic output 5 function B 00 00 00 C156 Logic output 5 operator 00 00 00 C157 Logic output 6 function A 00 00 00 C158 Logic output 6 function B 00 00 00 C159 Logic output 6 operator 00 00 00 C160 Terminal 1 input response time setting 1 1 1 C161 Terminal 2 input response time setting 1 1 1 C162 Terminal 3 input response time setting 1 1 1 C163 Terminal 4 input response time setting 1 1 1 C164 Terminal 5 input response time setting 1 1 1 C165 Terminal 6 input response time setting 1 1 1 C166 Terminal 7 input response time setting 1 1 1 C167 Terminal 8 input response time setting 1 1 1 C168 Terminal FW input response time setting 1 1 1 C169 Multi speed position determination time 0 0 0 Kar Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry Motor Constants as C D Q 2 lt Functions H Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Na FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan H001 Auto tuning setting 00 00 00 H002 Motor data selection 1st motor 00 00 00 H202 Motor data selection 2nd motor 00 00 00 H003 Motor capacity Ist motor Factory set H203 Motor capacity 2nd sett
87. 00 00 00 Xv select Modbus 0 i ModBus RTU 3 62 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Analog Signal Calibration Settings The functions in the following table configure the signals for the analog output terminals Note that these settings do not change the current voltage or sink source characteristics only the zero and span scaling of the signals NOTE See additional settings for analog calibration Parameter BO80 AM Terminal Analog Meter Adjustment gain parameter B081 FM Terminal Analog Meter Adjustment gain Defaults Run seer z ae Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 sae ode escription FE2 FU2 F2 F EU USA Jpn C081 O input span calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 Factory calibrated Vv 10000 to 65530 g C082 OI input span calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 Factory calibrated VY wo 10000 to 65530 D 2 C083 02 input span calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 Factory calibrated VY EE 10000 to 65530 gt E C085 Thermistor input tuning gain 0 0 to 999 9 1000 105 0 105 0 105 0 Ww e O C121 O input zero calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 Factory calibrated Vv 10000 to 65530 C122 OI input zero calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 Factory calibrated VV 10000 to 65530 C123 02 input zero calibration 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 Factory calibrated VV 100
88. 00 xx Selects how the inverter FES 0 I FRS free run to stop xx stops the motor B092 Cooling fan control OFF OG Fan always ON 00 00 00 xx see note below OH 0 i Fan ON during RUN OFF during STOP xx B095 Dynamic braking control OFF OG Disable 00 00 00 Xv OH G I Enable during RUN only XV STPOFF OH G2 Enable always Xv STPOH SJ7002 Inverter 3 47 Keypad Defaults Run me eee B Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 Kr ar ru SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn 2 B096 Dynamic braking activation level 330 to 380 V 200V class 360 360 360 XY 660 to 760 V 400V class 720 720 720 B098 Thermistor for thermal OFF 22 Disable 00 00 00 Xv protection control FTC G I Enable PTC thermistor Xv HTE 02 Enable NTC thermistor Xv B099 Thermal protection level setting 0 0 to 9999 Ohms 3000 3000 3000 Xv Thermistor resistance threshold at which trip occurs Xv B090 Dynamic braking usage ratio This parameter limits the amount of time the inverter can use the dynamic braking accessory device without entering the Trip Mode Please refer to Dynamic Braking on page 5 6 for more information on dynamic braking accessories NOTE When cooling fan control is enabled B092 01 the inverter always turns the fan ON for five minutes immediately after powerup This will cool the inverter in
89. 1 regenerating level setting output terminal OTQ quadrant IV g xIpuaddy B 62 ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec Reserved 143Fh 05183 Reserved 1440h 05184 C061 Electronic thermal warning R W Sets the threshold for 1441h 05185 Oto 100 1 level setting intelligent output THM C062 Alarm code output R W 00 Disable 1442h 05186 0 1 2 01 Enable 3 bit code 02 Enable 4 bit code C063 Zero speed detection level R W 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 Hz 1443h 05187 0 to 10000 0 01 Hz C064 Heatsink overheat warning R W Alarm temperature thresh 1444h 05188 0to 200 LAC level old for heatsink in inverter Reserved 1445h 05189 to to 144Ah 05194 C071 Communication speed R W 02 Test 144Bh 05195 2 to 6 selection 03 2400 bps 04 4800 bps 05 9600 bps 06 19200 bps C072 Node allocation R W Set the address of the 144Ch 05196 1 to 32 inverter on the network C073 Communication data R W 07 7 bit data 144Dh 05197 7 8 bits length selection 08 8 bit data C074 Communication parity R W 00 No parity 144Eh 05198
90. 1 voltage gain for automatic torque boost A246 Automatic torque boost R W Voltage compensation gain 2240h 08768 0 to 255 1 voltage gain 2nd motor for automatic torque boost A047 Automatic torque boost R W Slip compensation gain for 1241h 04673 Oto 255 1 slip gain automatic torque boost Reserved 1242h 04674 to to 1244h 04676 A247 Automatic torque boost Slip compensation gain for 2241h 08769 Oto 255 1 slip gain 2nd motor automatic torque boost Reserved 2242h 08770 to to 224Eh 08782 A051 DC braking enable R W 00 Disable 1245h 04677 0 1 2 01 Enable 02 Brake at set frequency only A052 DC braking frequency R W Frequency at which DC 1246h 04678 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz setting braking activates during decel A053 DC braking wait time R W The delay after reaching the 1247h 04679 0 to 50 0 1 sec DC braking frequency or DB signal before DC braking begins A054 DC braking force during R W Variable DC braking force 1248h 04680 0 to 80 1 deceleration A055 DC braking time for decel R W Sets the duration for DC 1249h 04681 Oto600 0 1 sec eration braking during decel A056 DC braking edge or level R W 00 Edge detection 124Ah 04682 0 1 detection for DB input 01 Level detection A057 DC braking force for R W Variable DC braking force 124Bh 04683 0 to 80 1 startin
91. 1 16 Fuse ratings 2 18 Fuse sizes xv Fuzzy logic accel decel 3 23 G Gain settings 4 26 General output signals 4 60 General purpose inputs 4 38 Glossary of terms A 2 Grommets 2 17 H H Group parameters 3 66 Harmonics A 3 Heatsink overheat warning 4 59 History of trip events 3 8 Home search A 4 Horsepower A 3 IGBT 1 14 A 3 test method 6 27 Index of terminal functions 4 11 Inertia A 3 Initialization 6 16 Input active range 3 27 Input circuits 4 13 Input terminals 2 22 Inspection electrical measurements 6 25 IGBT test method 6 27 measurement techniques 6 26 procedures 6 17 unpacking 2 2 Installation 2 6 Instantaneous power failure 4 48 Insulation test 6 19 Integral gain 3 22 Intelligent input terminals 3 50 4 13 Intelligent input wiring examples 4 13 Intelligent output terminals 3 55 4 43 Intelligent terminal functions 3 50 Intelligent terminal index 4 11 Intelligent terminals A 3 Inverter 1 18 Inverter definition A 3 Inverter ready signal 4 61 Inverter specifications 1 6 Isolation transformer A 4 J Jog command 4 18 Jog frequency settings 3 13 Jogging operation A 4 Jump frequency 3 21 A4 Keypad features 2 29 3 3 navigation 2 31 34 navigation trip events 6 15 Keypad features 2 29 Keypads 1 3 3 2 LEDs 2 29 3 3 Line reactor A 4 SJ7002 Inverter Linear accel decel 3 26 Logic connector 49 Logi
92. 1337h 04919 0 to 0 01 sec during power loss 1000 to 3600 seconds 360000 B053 L R W 1338h 04920 B054 Initial output frequency R W Sets the initial decrease in output 1339h 04921 Oto 1000 0 01 Hz decrease during power loss frequency upon power loss B055 Proportional gain setting R W 0 00 to 2 55 133Ah 04922 Oto 255 0 01 for non stop operation at power loss B056 Integral time setting for R W 0 0 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 55 133Bh 04923 0 to 65535 0 001 non stop operation at sec power loss Reserved 133Ch 04924 to to 133Eh 04926 B060 O input max limit level R W 0 to 100 133Fh 04927 Oto 100 1 of window comparator Lower limit B061 B062 2 B061 O input min limit level R W 0 to 100 1340h 04928 Oto 100 1 of window comparator Lower limit B060 B062 2 B062 O input hysteresis width R W 0 to 10 1341h 04929 Oto 10 1 of window comparator Lower limit B061 B062 2 B063 OI input max limit level R W 0 to 100 1342h 04930 0 to 100 1 of window comparator Lower limit B064 B066 2 B 57 SJ7002 Inverter Holding Registers B Group Fine Tuning Functions g xIpuaddy Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec B064 OI input min limit level R W 0
93. 15 14 95 30 4A or less 185 3 100 18 5 10 90 34 2A or less 315 3 100 22 6 75 36 0A or less 400 3 80 640 0A or less 30 10 75 43 5A or less NOTE When replacing an SJ300 inverter combined with LCR filter please check the type code of LCR filter and consult for compatibility 75 to132kW 114 Introduction to Variable Frequency Drives Introduction to Variable Frequency Drives 3 Q G The Purpose of Hitachi inverters provide accurate speed control for 3 phase AC induction motors You connect i Motor Speed AC power to the inverter and connect the inverter to the motor Many applications can benefit Control for from the use of variable speed drives in several ways rs Industry Energy savings HVAC Need to coordinate speed with an adjacent process textiles and printing presses Need to control acceleration and deceleration torque e Sensitive loads elevators food processing pharmaceuticals What is an The term inverter and variable frequency drive are related and somewhat interchangeable An Inverter electronic drive for an AC motor controls the motor s speed by varying the frequency of the power sent to the motor An inverter in general is a device that converts DC power to AC power The figure below shows how the variable frequency drive employs an internal inverter The drive first converts incoming AC power to DC through a rectifier bridge creating
94. 180 100 100 100 XW Threshold for intelligent output terminal OTQ quadrant I C056 Over torque reverse regenerating level 0 to 180 100 100 100 Xv setting Threshold for intelligent output terminal OTQ quadrant II C057 Over torque reverse driving level setting 0 to 180 100 100 100 Xv Threshold for intelligent output terminal OTQ quadrant IT C058 Over torque forward regenerating level 0 to 180 100 100 100 XW setting Threshold for intelligent output terminal OTQ quadrant IV C061 Electronic thermal warning level setting 0 to 100 80 80 80 Xy Sets the threshold for intelligent output THM C062 Alarm code output OFF 808 Disable 00 00 00 Xv Allows binary alarm codes to BIT G I Enable 3 bit code be output to intelligent i terminals 4BIT 02 Enable 4 bit code C063 Zero speed detection level 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv C064 Heatsink overheat warning level 0 to 200 0 C 120 120 120 XY Alarm temperature threshold for heatsink in inverter Xv SJ7002 Inverter 3 61 Serial The following table configures the communications port of the SJ7002 inverter You can have Communications vp to thirty two devices on the serial communications network The inverters are slaves and the computer or digital operator is the master Thus all inverters on the serial connection must use the same baud rate data length parity and stop bits Howeve
95. 2 HP 0 5 1 2 3 5 kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 22 351 Rated capacity KVA 200V 240V 1 0 1 2 1 7 2 0 2 5 3 1 3 6 4 3 5 7 6 8 Rated input voltage 3 phase 200 to 240V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 Rated input current A 3 3 5 5 8 3 12 18 Rated output voltage 3 3 phase 3 wire 200 to 240V corresponding to input voltage Rated output current A 3 5 7 5 10 5 16 5 Overload capacity output current A 150 for 60 sec 200 for 3 sec Efficiency at 100 rated output 85 1 89 5 92 3 93 2 94 0 Watt loss at 70 output 64 76 102 127 179 approximate W at 100 output 70 88 125 160 235 Dynamic braking internal chopper 20 20 20 20 20 A Hap with external res gt 150 gt 150 gt 150 gt 150 110 Min external braking resistance Q 50 50 35 35 35 DC braking Variable operating frequency time and braking force Electrical filtering Built in EMC filter and built in zero phase reactor Weight kg lb 3S 1717 35 17 7 35 I 7 7 3 5 7 7 35 17 7 Item 200V Class Specifications SJ7002 200V models U S version OSSLFUF2 075LFUF2 110LFUF2 150LFUF2 185LFU2 220LFU2 Applicable motor size 4 pole 2 HP 7 5 10 15 20 25 30 kW 55 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 Rated capacity kVA 200V 240V 8 3 9 9 11 0 13 3 15 9 19 1 22 1 26 6 26 3 31 5 32 9 39 4 Rated input voltage 3 phase 200 to 240V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 Rated input current A
96. 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Command and Data CR Control code carriage return 1 byte CR 0x0D The example below shows a transmission to the inverter at address Node 1 to set the output frequency for 5 Hz We use a value of 500 in ASCII to represent 5 00 Hz STX 01 01 000500 BCC I CR to ASCII 02 I 30 31 I 30 31 I 30 30 30 35 30 30 I 30 3510D When using the data as the feedback process variable for PID control set the most significant byte to ASCII 1 The following example transmits the data 5 STX 01 01 000500 BCC I CR to ASCII 021 30 31 I 30 31 I 31 30 30 35 30 30 I 30 35 I OD SJ7002 Inverter Commands The 02 command sets the logic state ON or OFF of the intelligent input terminals 02 and 12 The frame format of command 02 follows the Frame format timing diagram and specification table Je om om Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 and FF broadcast to all gt Command Transmission command 2 bytes 02 or 12 3 Data Transmission data 16 bytes see tables below a BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node wW Command and Data CR Control code carriage return 1 byte CR 0x0D The 16 byte data string
97. 200V oraus Voltage Inverter Model Wite size Range AYE HP kW ft Ibs N m 0 5 0 4 SJ700 004LFU2 14 stranded only 1 3 1 8 1 0 75 SJ700 007LFU2 14 stranded only 1 3 1 8 2 1 5 SJ700 015LFU2 14 stranded only 1 3 1 8 3 2 2 8J700 022LFU2 14 stranded only 1 3 1 8 5 3 7 SJ700 037LFU2 10 stranded only 1 3 1 8 7 5 5 5 SJ700 055LFU2 8 3 0 4 0 10 7 5 SJ700 075LFU2 6 3 0 4 0 15 11 SJ700 110LFU2 64 3 0 4 0 200V 20 15 SJ700 150LFU2 2 3 6 4 9 25 18 5 SJ700 185LFU2 1 3 6 49 30 22 SJ700 220LFU2 1 or 1 0 6 5 8 8 40 30 SJ700 300LFU2 2 0 or 1 0 II 1 0 6 5 8 8 50 37 SJ700 370LFU2 4 0 prepared wire only or 14 8 20 0 1 0 1 0 60 45 SJ700 450LFU2 4 0 prepared wire only or 14 8 20 0 1 0 II 1 0 75 55 SJ700 550LFU2 350 kcmil prepared wire 14 5 19 6 only or 2 0 II 2 0 prepared wire only Input Sr 400V Torque Voltage pu inverter Modal Power Terminals Wire Size Range AWG HP kW ft Ibs N m 0 5 0 75 SJ700 007HFU2 E All 14 stranded only 1 3 1 8 1 1 5 SJ700 015HFU2 E All 14 stranded only 1 3 1 8 2 2 2 SJ700 022HFU2 E All 14 stranded only 13 1 8 3 4 0 J700 040HFU2 E All 14 stranded only 1 3 1 8 7 5 5 5 SJ700 055HFU2 E All 12 3 0 4 0 10 7 5 SJ700 075HFU2 E All 10 3 0 4 0 now 15 11 SJ700 110HFU2 E All 8 3 0 4 0 20 15 SJ700 150HFU2 E All 6 3 6 4 9 25 18 5 SJ700 185HFU2 E All 6 3 6 49 30 22 SJ700 220HFU2 E All 60r4 6 5 8 8 40 30 SJ700 300HFU2 E All 3 6 5 8 8 50 37 SJ70
98. 26 35 51 70 84 105 Rated output voltage 3 3 phase 3 wire 200 to 240V corresponding to input voltage Rated output current A 24 32 46 64 76 95 Overload capacity output current A 150 for 60 sec 200 for 3 sec Efficiency at 100 rated output 94 4 94 6 94 8 94 9 95 0 95 0 Watt loss at 70 output 242 312 435 575 698 820 approximate W at 100 output 325 425 600 800 975 1150 Dynamic braking internal chopper 20 20 10 10 10 10 approx ea with external res 140 gt 150 110 110 90 110 Min external braking resistance Q 16 10 10 7 5 7 5 5 DC braking Variable operating frequency time and braking force Electrical filtering Built in EMC filter and built in zero phase reactor Weight kg lb 6 13 2 6 13 2 6 13 2 14 30 8 14 30 8 14 30 8 1 7 SJ7002 Inverter Item 200V Class Specifications continued SJ7002 200V models U S version 300LFU2 370LFU2 450LFU2 550LFU2 S Applicable motor size 2 HP 40 50 60 75 El kW 30 37 45 55 2 Rated capacity KVA 200V 240V 41 9 50 2 50 2 60 2 63 0 75 6 76 2 91 4 3 Rated input voltage 3 phase 200 to 240V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 Rated input current A 133 160 200 242 Rated output voltage 3 3 phase 3 wire 200 to 240V corresponding to input voltage Rated output current A 121 145 182 220 Overload capacity output current A 150 for 60 sec 200 for 3 sec Efficiency at 100 r
99. 3 phase 4 pole motor when selecting sensorless vector control SLV The braking torque via capacitive feedback is the average deceleration torque at the shortest deceleration stopping from 50 60 Hz as indicated It is not continuous regenerative braking torque The average decel torque varies with motor loss This value decreases when operating beyond 50 Hz If a large regenerative torque is required the optional regenerative braking resistor should be used Note 8 The frequency command will equal the maximum frequency at 9 8V for input voltage 0 to 10 VDC or at 19 6 mA for input current 4 to 20 mA If this characteristic is not satisfactory for your application contact your Hitachi sales representative Note 9 Note 10 The storage temperature refers to the short term temperature during transport Conforms to the test method specified in JIS C0050 1999 For the model types excluded in the standard specifications contact your Hitachi sales representative Note 11 0 4kW to 55kW models to meet NEMA 1 rating NEMA 1 applies up to 22kW An optional wire entry conduit box is required for Q i 3 an Ko 02 o oO Qa EEU Inverter Specifications D D B fa T i D amp General Specifications The following table continued on next page applies to all SJ7002 inverter models Item General Specifications Protective enclosure 1 11 Control me
100. 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Code Data 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Japan or U S A mode B85 00 or 02 90 kW 110 132 150 160 185 200 220 250 280 300 EU mode B85 01 90kW 110 132 150 160 185 200 220 250 280 300 Code Data 33 34 35 36 Japan or U S A mode B85 00 or 02 315 kW 340 355 400 EU mode B85 01 315 kW 340 355 400 SJ7002 Inverter ESH Command 07 The 07 command sets a parameter value equal to the value specified in the transmission The frame format of command 07 follows the diagram and specification table Frame format redd a Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 gt ke Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 and FF broadcast to all G nodes a Command Transmission command 2 bytes 07 a Parameter Function code of parameter 4 bytes F002 A001 B001 CO01 H003 POO1 Data Transmission data 8 bytes Value of parameter times ten as ASCII char code except for H003 and H203 see table below BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Command and Data CR Control code carriage return 1 byte CR 0x0D Note that the parameter F001 the output frequency can be set more directly with host command 01 instead of w
101. 8 8 xFE2 xFU2 xFF2 Edit EU USA Jpn Lo Hi A097 Acceleration curve selection Linear OG Linear 00 00 00 xx Set the characteristic curve of S curve G I S curve Accell and Accel2 U curue G2 U shape RU curue 03 Reverse U shape EL curwe 04 EL S curve A098 Deceleration curve selection Linear OG Linear 00 00 00 xx Set the characteristic curve of curug G I S curve Decell and Decel2 U curue 02 U shape RU curue 03 Reverse U shape EL curwe 04 EL S curve 3 27 SJ7002 Inverter The acceleration and deceleration curves can deviate from a straight line to a varying degree Parameters A131 and A132 control the amount of deviation for the acceleration and decelera tion curves respectively The following graphs show intermediate output frequency points as a percentage of the target frequency for 25 50 and 75 acceleration time intervals Output frequency Output frequency Output frequency of target of target of target 100 O Keypad Defaults Run z 5 oF aie EA r Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 er ge 2 pe SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 3 5 EU USA Jpn Oo o o A131 Acceleration curve constants i 0 I Smallest deviation 02 02 02 Xv setting Sets the curve deviation from if 10 Largest deviation Xv straight line acceleration in 10 levels A132
102. A special filter and a ferrite core intended for the SJ7002 large capacity series inverter must be installed shown in the table below b A provided direct reactor with the SJ700 large capacity series inverter must be installed Ferrite core 1 Inverter Filter Ferrite core 2 De Precautions for EMC Models SJ700 1850 to 4000 Category C2 Category C3 Models Filter Ferrite Ferrite Filter Ferrite Ferrite Core 1 Core 2 Core 1 Core 2 SJ700 1850HFU2 HFE2 v Y x x x x SJ700 3150HFU2 HFE2 v x x x x x SJ700 4000HFU2 HFE2 v v x x x x V Installation X No installation 3 Wiring requirements a Shielded wire screened cable is required for motor wiring but is not required for direct reactor wiring And the length of the cable must be according to the following table b The carrier frequency setting must be less than 3 kHz derated is required to meet an EMC requirement c The main circuit wiring must be separated from the control circuit wiring 4 Environmental requirements to be met when a filter is used a Ambient temperature must be within the range 10 C to 40 C b Relative humidity must be within the range 20 to 90 non condensing c Vibrations must be 1 96 m sec 0 2 G 10 to 55H2 or less d The inverter must be installed indoors not exposed to corrosive gas and dust at an altitude of 1 000 m or less
103. B 18 Communications Reference Information Communications Reference Information Inverter The standard affirmative reply from the inverter Frame format Affirmative Reply uses the ACK character acknowledge in the data field The frame format of this reply follows the STX Node Ack Bcc CR diagram and specification table Element Description Size Value 7 STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 E Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 g ACK Control code ACKnowledge I byte ACK 0x06 BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node and ACK CR Control code carriage return 1 byte CR 0x0D Inverter The standard negative reply from the inverter Frame format Negative Reply uses the NAK character negative acknowl edge in the data field The frame format of STX Node nak ENO BCC CR this reply follows the diagram and specifica sd tion table Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 NAK Control code 1 byte NAK 0x15 Negative ACKnowledge Error code Code representing error type 2 bytes See next table below BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Data and NAK CR Control code carriage return I byte CR 0x0D The error codes for a NAK negative acknowle
104. Bit 5 37 SF6 Multi speed bit 6 Multiple speed select Bit 6 38 SF7 Multi speed bit 7 Multiple speed select Bit 7 39 OLR Overload restriction Turn ON to select current overload parameter set 2 B024 B025 B026 OFF selects set 1 B021 B022 B023 40 TL Torque limit enable ON enables torque limit feature OFF disables all torque limit sources and defaults to 200 of inverter rated torque output 41 TRQI Torque limit selection bit Binary encoded torque limit select Bit 1 LSB 1 42 TRQ2 Torque limit selection bit Binary encoded torque limit select Bit 2 MSB 2 43 PPI Proportional ON selects Proportional only control OFF selects Propor Proportional Integral tional Integral control mode selection 44 BOK Brake confirmation signal Indicates external brake has released used only for external brake control function 45 ORT Orientation home search The encoder is in the home oriented position 46 LAC LAC LAD cancel Disables the normal Linear Accel Decel LAD mode 47 PCLR Position deviation reset Clears the position deviation by setting the actual position equal to the desired position 48 STAT Pulse train position Enables the pulse train control of motor command input enable 50 ADD Add frequency enable Adds the A145 value Add Frequency to the output frequency 51 F TM Force terminal mode Force inverter to use input terminals for output frequency and Run command sources 52 ATR Torque control enable Inverter operates by controlling tor
105. Brake Release ON when the inverter signals the external brake system to release open its brake OFF when the inverter is not driving the motor and needs the external brake engaged BER Brake Error ON when the output current is less than the set releasing current OFF when the brake function is not in use or when the output current to the motor is correct and it is safe to release the brake Other outputs listed below require expansion card SJ FB Encoder Feedback board Please see the SJ FB manual for more information Opt Hage Code Symbol Function Name Description 21 ZS Zero Speed Detect signal Signal indicates the encoder pulses of the motor have stopped 22 DSE Speed Deviation Excessive Velocity error exceeds the error threshold defined by parameter P026 23 POK Positioning Completion Indicates the load position is at the target SJ7002 Inverter KEJ Analog The analog disconnect detection is useful when the inverter receives a speed reference from an Disconnect external device Upon input signal loss at either the O OI or 02 terminal the inverter Detection normally just decelerates the motor to a stop However the inverter can use the intelligent output terminals ODc OIdc or O2dc to signal other machinery that a signal loss has Opt Code 27 Odc occurred and 28 Oldc Each analog disconnect output has independent thresholds set by B070 B071 and B072 Symbol 7 W
106. C Xv C018 Terminal 8 active state HO G0 Normally open N O 00 00 00 Xv HE G I Normally closed N C Xv C019 Terminal FW active state HO G0 Normally open N O 00 00 00 Xv HE G I Normally closed N C Xv Intelligent Input NOTE An input terminal configured for option code 18 RS Reset command cannot be configured for normally closed operation U 2 g 3 Q D Q 7 avg BuunByuon Each of the eight intelligent terminals may be assigned any of the options in the following Terminal table When you program one of the option codes for terminal assignments C001 to C008 the Overview respective terminal assumes the function role of that option code The terminal functions have a symbol or abbreviation which we use to label a terminal using that function For example the Reverse Run command is RV The physical label on the terminal block connector is simply 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 However schematic examples in this manual also use the terminal function symbol such as RV to show the assigned option The option codes for C011 to C019 determine the active state of the logical input active high or active low Summary Table This table shows all forty four intelligent input functions at a glance Detailed descriptions of these functions related parameters and settings and example wiring diagrams are in Using Intelligent Input Termi
107. C Group functions 3 50 Capacitor life curve 6 20 Capacitor life warning 4 58 Capacitor replacement 6 21 Carrier frequency 3 44 A 2 Catching a spinning motor 3 45 3 62 CE approval A 2 CE EMC guidelines D 2 Chassis ground connection 2 26 Choke 2 5 A 2 Choke DC link 5 4 Chopper frequency 3 44 Circuit breaker sizes xv Clear cumulative power value 4 36 Clearance 2 8 Coasting 3 45 3 62 Commercial power source enable 4 22 Communication test mode B 20 Communications 3 61 Communications protocol ASCII B 5 Communications protocol ModBus B 21 Communications serial B 2 Constant torque 3 15 Constant volts hertz operation 1 1 Indec 2 Control algorithms 3 14 Control gain switching 4 26 Controlled deceleration 3 42 Controlled deceleration at power loss 4 4 Cooling fan control 3 47 Copy Unit 1 3 Current forcing 4 37 Current overload 3 36 Current overload restriction 4 29 D D Group parameters 3 6 DC braking 4 18 4 19 A 2 derating 3 20 settings 3 18 DC link A 2 choke 54 Deadband A 2 Deceleration 1 16 3 9 4 18 characteristic curves 3 26 second function 3 24 two stage 4 20 Default parameter values C 2 Default settings restoring 6 16 Derating DC braking 3 20 Derivative gain 3 22 DeviceNet 5 5 Digital operator 2 29 3 3 force operation 4 28 removal 2 4 Digital operator panel A 2 Digital operators 1 3 Dimensions inverter 2 9 terminals 2 20 Diode A 3 Display restric
108. C007 Terminal 7 function 02 CF1 02 CF1 02 CF1 Xv C008 Terminal 8 function 01 RV OL RV 01 RV Xv The input logic convention is programmable for each of the six inputs Most inputs default to normally open active high but you can select normally closed active low in order to invert the sense of the logic Keypad Defaults Run one 5 K Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 oe oee Ed er SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn 2 C011 Terminal 1 active state HO 22 Normally open N O 00 00 00 Xv HE G I Normally closed N C XV C012 Terminal 2 active state HO 00 Normally open N O 00 00 00 Xv HE G i Normally closed N C Xv C013 Terminal 3 active state HO G0 Normally open N O 00 00 00 Xv HE G I Normally closed N C XV C014 Terminal 4 active state HO G0 Normally open N O 00 00 00 Xv HE G i Normally closed N C XV SJ7002 Inverter EEN Keypad Defaults Ran Are KE Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ae SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 oan EU USA Jpn C015 Terminal 5 active state HO G0 Normally open N O 00 00 00 Xv HE G I Normally closed N C Xv C016 Terminal 6 active state HO G0 Normally open N O 00 00 00 Xv HE G I Normally closed N C Xv C017 Terminal 7 active state HO G0 Normally open N O 00 00 00 Xv HE G I Normally closed N
109. CAUTION may if not avoided lead to serious results Important safety measures are described in CAUTION as well as WARNING so be sure to observe them STEP A step is one of a series of action steps required to accomplish a goal The ED number of the step will be contained in the step symbol 233324 3 NOTE Notes indicate an area or subject of special merit emphasizing either the product s capabilities or common errors in operation or maintenance N amp r TIP Tips give a special instruction that can save time or provide other benefits E while installing or using the product The tip calls attention to an idea that may not i be obvious to first time users of the product Hazardous High Voltage A HIGH VOLTAGE Motor control equipment and electronic controllers are connected to haz ardous line voltages When servicing drives and electronic controllers there may be exposed components with housings or protrusions at or above line potential Extreme care should be taken to protect against shock Stand on an insulating pad and make it a habit to use only one hand when checking compo nents Always work with another person in case an emergency occurs Disconnect power before checking controllers or performing maintenance Be sure equipment is properly grounded Wear safety glasses whenever working on electronic controllers or rotating machinery General Precautions Read These First rrr P PrP Np DD WARNING This e
110. D030 Position feedback monitor Displays absolute position of motor shaft Pulses when in absolute position control mode D102 DC voltage monitoring Displays the DC Bus voltage V D103 BRD load factor monitoring Displays the running average Dynamic Braking usage ratio ED D104 Electronic thermal overload Displays the motor electronic thermal monitoring overload estimated temperature ratio If the value reaches 100 the inverter will trip E05 3 7 U 2 g 3 Q D Q 7 SAG BuunByuon 3 8 D Group Monitoring Functions Trip Event and The trip event and history monitoring feature lets you cycle through related information using Programming the keypad See Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions on page 6 5 for more details Error Monitoring Programming errors generate an error code that begins with the special character See Programming Error Codes on page 3 75 for more information Func Code Name Description Units D080 Trip Counter Number of trip events D081 to D086 Trip monitor 1 to 6 Displays trip event information D090 Programming error monitor Displays programming error code fo 2 p o 92 o as 2a ca fo oO SJ7002 Inverter Exp F Group Main Profile Parameters The basic frequency speed profile is defined by parameters contained in the F Group a
111. Decel2 A096 L R W 127Ch 04732 A296 H Decl to Dec2 frequency R W Output frequency at which 2276h 08822 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz transition point 2nd motor Decel 1 switches to Decel2 A296 L R W 2277h 08823 Reserved 2278h 08824 to to 230Bh 08971 A097 Acceleration curve R W 00 Linear 127Dh 04733 0 to 4 selection 01 S curve 02 U shape 03 Reverse U shape 04 EL S curve A098 Deceleration curve setting R W 00 Linear 127Eh 04734 0 to 4 01 S curve 02 U shape 03 Reverse U shape 04 EL S curve Reserved 127Fh 04735 Reserved 1280h 04736 A101 OI L input active range R W Output frequency corre 1281h 04637 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz start frequency sponding to the current input A101 L R W range starting point 1282h 04738 A102 H OI J L input active range R W Output frequency corre 1283h 04739 O to 40000 0 01 Hz end frequency sponding to the current input A102 L R W range ending point 1284h 04740 A103 OI L input active range R W Starting point for the current 1285h 04741 Oto A104 1 start current input range value A104 OI L input active range R W Ending point for the current 1286h 04742 A103 1 end current input range value to 100 A105 OIJ L input start R W 00 Use A101 start value 1287h 04743 0 1 frequency enable 01 Use 0Hz
112. EMC filter selection L R S T PD P N U V W L e G L1 L2 L3 41 4 1 az 73 G Disable ener Enable le I par E Le Inverter models 450LFU2 Rol To EMC filter selection e S TIPD IP IN U VIW e D Mil wy 2 ea fen crn a aa amp Enable fe asian 19 Jumper bar H H Di Di Inverter models 550LFU2 EMC fitter selection zilis Ro To G lt lt lel Enable e R SIT PDIP IN UTV W Le L1 L2 L3 1 4 T1 T2 T3 eo a er Disable L igi ae Lo G G 2 24 Step by Step Basic Installation D E a 5 e _ jo 2 b o gt E and Installation Inverter model 750 to 1500HFU2 Rol To RS TPDIPIN IU V W L1 L2 L3 1 9 11 72 TS Jumper bar Lt G G Inverter model 1850HFU2 HFE2 Ro To LI RISITIPDIP IN U IV IW Li G L1 L2 L3 G1 G 11 72 T3 G Jumper P bar Inverter model 3150HFU2 HFE2 Rol To P S PD N V LIRI aasi Tien Pol Ulla Wi
113. Enable default for xFEF2 Jumper Cover plug plug green Disable default for xFUF2 Cover plug Jumper green plug NOTE For 055xxx and 075xxx 5 5 7 5kW inverter models The washer on the main terminal screw R S T PD P N U V W RB has two cutouts To prevent the cable clamping portion of crimp terminal from going under the washer align the cutouts with the cable as shown below Otherwise you run the risk of a loose connection and fire Washer under terminal screw SJ7002 Inverter 2 23 Terminal diagrams continued Inverter models 055 to 110LFUF2 055 to 110HFUF2 HFEF2 EMC filter selection Ro To RB RB Me Erai RIS T PDI PIN U V W z L1 L2 L3 1 71 T2 T3 2 Disable il Jumper bar gt default gt ra T as as 58 n Inverter models 150LFUF2 to 220LFU2 150HFUF2 to 220HFU2 HFE2 3 EMC filter selection Ro To RB 3 S RB e p RIS TIPD IPINIU V IW ad L1 L2 L3 1 4 11 T2 T3 Enable Disable le Jumper ale default P G bar G Inverter models 300 to 370LFU2 300 to 550HFU2 HFE2 Ro To
114. External Frequency Trim Frequency Reverse avail AUDE AUS AT Command Input Command Input bipolar input 00 00 OFF 0 x x OR 03 ON Ol x x 01 OFF 0 x x ON 02 x v 01 00 OFF 0 02 x Example 1 ON Ol 02 x 01 OFF 0 02 x ON 02 x v 02 00 OFF 0 02 v Example 2 ON ol 02 v 01 OFF 0 02 v ON 02 x v 02 OFF 0 02 x ON Keypad pot 02 x 03 OFF Or 02 x ON Keypad pot 02 x 04 OFF 02 x v ON Keypad pot 02 x The table below applies when the AT input function is not assigned to any intelligent input terminal The A005 setting normally used in conjunction with an AT input is ignored External Frequency Trim Frequency Reverse avail ANG A005 AT Command Input Command Input bipolar input 00 02 x v 01 not Summation of 02 x assigned O and OT 02 to any Summation of 02 v input O and OI terminal 03 Summation of x x O and OT A CAUTION Whenever the AT input function is not assigned to any input terminal and reverse rotation is not desired or is unsafe be sure to set A006 01 This setting makes the 02 input unipolar only SJ7002 Inverter 4 65 The examples below show how the use of the AT input during operation enables disables the Trim Frequency Command input 02 L The 02 L input may be used alone or as an offset control for the primary analog input
115. F001 Output frequency setting gt A020 A220 Multi speed freq setting 1st 2nd motor H09656 A021 to A035 Multi speed freq settings gt gia B100 B102 Free V f frequency gt B104 B106 B108 B110 B102 B104 Free V f frequency gt B100 Free setting V f frequency 1 B106 B108 B110 B100 Free V f frequency lt B102 Free setting V f frequency 2 B104 B106 Free V f frequency gt B108 B110 B100 B102 Free V f frequency lt B104 Free setting V f frequency 3 B106 B108 Free V f frequency gt B110 B100 B102 Free V f frequency lt B106 Free setting V f frequency 4 B104 B108 B110 Free V f frequency gt B100 B102 Free V f frequency lt B108 Free setting V f frequency 5 B104 B106 B110 Free V f frequency gt B100 B102 Free V f frequency lt B110 Free setting V f frequency 6 B104 B106 B108 Bleg B017 BO19 Free setting electronic lt B015 Free setting electronic thermal frequency thermal frequency 1 B015 Free setting electronic gt B017 Free setting electronic thermal frequency thermal frequency 2 B019 Free setting electronic lt thermal frequency B015 B017 Free setting electronic gt B019 Free setting electronic thermal frequency thermal frequency 3 Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 3 77 SJ7002 Inverter The base frequency is written when you store the parameter If the new base frequency value is outside the permissible range a motor burnout may
116. F2 Lo Hi EU USA Jpn H005 Motor speed constant 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 80 00 10 000 to 1 590 1 590 1 590 Vw Motor proportional gain constant factory set 90 000 H205 Motor speed constant 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 80 00 10 000 to 1 590 1 590 1590 Yy Motor proportional gain constant factory set 80 000 H006 Motor stabilization constant 1st motor 0 to 255 factory set 100 100 100 Vv H206 Motor stabilization constant 2nd motor 0 to 255 factory set 100 100 100 Vv H306 Motor stabilization constant 3rd motor 0 to 255 factory set 100 100 100 WW H020 Motor constant R1 Ist motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Ohms According to inverter xx H220 Motor constant R1 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Ohms aung xx H021 Motor constant R2 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Ohms xx H221 Motor constant R2 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Ohms xx H022 Motor constant L Ist motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 655 3 mH According to inverter xx H222 Motor constant L 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 655 3 mH re xx H023 Motor constant Ip 1st motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 655 3 A xx H223 Motor constant Ip 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 655 3 A xx H024 Motor Constant J 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 99 99 100 0 to According to inverter xx 999 9 1000 to 9999 ratio unit less rating H224 Motor constant J 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 0
117. FA2 Frequency arrival type 2 ON when output to motor is at or above the FA over frequency threshold 1 C042 during accel FA3 Frequency arrival type 3 ON when output to motor is at the FA threshold 1 at frequency C042 during accel or at C043 during decel FA4 Frequency arrival type 4 ON when output to motor is at or above the FA over frequency 2 threshold 2 C045 during accel FAS Frequency arrival type 5 ON when output to motor is at the FA threshold 2 at frequency 2 C045 during accel or at C046 during decel Note the following For most applications you will need to use only one or two of the frequency arrival type outputs see example However it is possible to assign all five output terminals to output functions FA1 through FA5 For each frequency arrival threshold the output anticipates the threshold turns ON early by an amount equal to 1 of the maximum frequency set for the inverter The output turns OFF as the output frequency moves away from the threshold delayed by an amount equal to 2 of the max frequency SJ7002 Inverter 4 45 Frequency arrival output FA1 uses the Output standard output frequency parameter F001 frequency as the threshold for switching In the figure to the right the inverter accelerates to the set output frequency which serves as the Threshold threshold for FA1 Parameters Fon and Fyr F001 illustrate the hysteresis that prevents ou
118. FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan P001 Operation mode on expansion card 1 error 00 00 00 P002 Operation mode on expansion card 2 error 00 00 00 P011 Encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting 1024 1024 1024 P012 Control pulse setting 00 00 00 P013 Pulse line mode setting 00 00 00 P014 Home search stop position setting 0 0 0 P015 Home search speed setting 5 00 5 00 5 00 P016 Home search direction setting 00 00 00 P017 Home search completion range setting 5 5 5 P018 Home search completion delay time setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 P019 Electronic gear set position selection 00 00 00 P020 Electronic gear ratio numerator setting 1 1 1 P021 Electronic gear ratio denominator setting 1 1 il P022 Feed forward gain setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 P023 Position loop gain setting 0 50 0 50 0 50 P024 Position bias setting 0 0 0 P025 Temperature compensation thermistor enable 00 00 00 P026 Over speed error detection level setting 135 0 135 0 135 0 P027 Speed deviation error detection level setting 7 50 7 50 7 50 P028 Numerator of motor gear ratio 1 1 1 P029 Denominator of motor gear ratio 1 1 1 P031 Accel decel time input selection 00 00 00 P032 Positioning command input 00 00 00 selection P033 Torque command input selection 00 00 00 P034 Torque command setting 0 0 0 P035 Torque command polarity select 00 00 00 P036 Torque bias mode 00 00 00 P037 Torque bias value 0 0 0 P038 Torque bias polarity selection 00 00 00 P039 Fo
119. Fax 49 211 5283 649 Fax 81 3 4345 6067 Web site www hitachi ds com en product inv Hitachi Asia Ltd Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd 16 Collyer Quay Narashino Division 20 00 Hitachi Tower Singapore 049318 1 1 Higashi Narashino 7 chome Singapore Narashino shi Chiba 275 8611 Phone 65 538 6511 Japan Fax 65 538 9011 Phone 81 47 474 9921 Fax 81 47 476 9517 Web site www hitachi ies co jp english Hitachi Asia Hong Kong Ltd 7th Floor North Tower World Finance Centre Harbour City Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Phone 852 2735 9218 Fax 852 2735 6793 NOTE To receive technical support for the Hitachi inverter you purchased contact the Hitachi inverter dealer from whom you purchased the unit or the sales office or factory contact listed above Please be prepared to provide the following inverter nameplate information 1 Model 2 Date of purchase 3 Manufacturing number MFG No 4 Symptoms of any inverter problem If any inverter nameplate information is illegible please provide your Hitachi contact with any other legible nameplate items To reduce unpredictable downtime we recommend that you stock a spare inverter Getting Started In This Chapter page MN ES 2 gt lnverter SG CHG AMONG sc cccccccescees ceed sacnadsatensetascdceddcnsnacceddeedeseccastcsdis 6 Introduction to Variable Frequency DIivVeS ccscssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 Frequen
120. G L1 L3 T1 T3 G Inverter model 4000HFU2 HFE2 Ro To P LI RIS TI PDIPINIU V IW G L1 L2 L3 G1 I 71 72 73 G Jumper bar The table below lists the nominal current that may leak from only the inverter when the internal EMC filter is enabled or disabled Leakage current is in proportion to input power voltage and frequency The values do not exclude current leakage from external devices and equipment e g power cables Inverter models from 75 kW to 132 kW does not have a switch to enable disable the internal EMC filter This complies EMC directive C3 level in standard condition internal Units 200V Class Inverters 400V Class Inverters EMC Filter Input voltage 200VAC 50 Hz Input voltage 400VAC 50 Hz Sae kW 0 4 3 7 5 5 11 15 37 45 55 75 3 7 5 5 11 15 37 45 55 75 132 Disabled mA 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 Enabled mA 2 5 48 23 23 5 95 56 56 SJ7002 Inverter Er NOTE An inverter powered by a portable or emergency diesel power generator may result in a distorted power waveform overheating the generator In general the generator capacity should be at least five times that of the inverter KVA CAUTION Be sure that the input voltage matches the inverter specifications Three phase 200 to 240V 50 60Hz Three phase 380 to 480V 50 60Hz CAUTION Be sure not to power a three phase o
121. GADE a a Input Functi Input Functi nput Function nput Function Default 7 CF1 Hae Me terminals 8 CF2 SP CF4 CF3 CF2 CFL SP CF4 CF3 CF2 CF1 Other Requires Speed 0 0 0 0 0 Speed 8 1 0 0 0 terminals config Speed 1 0 0 0 1 Speed 9 1 0 0 1 default for FE2 models only Speed 2 0 0 1 0 Speed 10 1 0 1 0 Speed 3 0 0 1 1 Speed 11 1 0 1 1 Speed 4 0 1 0 0 Speed 12 1 1 0 0 Speed 5 0 1 0 1 Speed 13 1 1 0 1 Speed 6 0 1 1 0 Speed 14 1 1 1 0 Speed 7 0 1 1 1 Speed 15 1 1 1 1 NOTE When choosing a subset of speeds to use always start at the top of the table and with the least significant bit CF1 CF2 etc 4 16 Using Intelligent Input Terminals The example with eight speeds in the figure below shows how input switches configured for CF1 CF3 functions can change the motor speed in real time Speed ard 7th 5th 2nd ist 6th 4th Oth Switches t CF1 CF2 CF3 Fwd Run Multi speed Override Feature The multi speed function can selectively override the external analog speed reference input When the Frequency Source Setting parameter A001 01 the control terminal inputs determine the output frequency At the same time the inverter can use multi speed select for output frequency if one or more intelligent inputs are configured as a CF type CF1 to CF4 When all CF input s are OFF the control terminal input determines the output frequency n
122. Hz can be speed controlled with an inverter output varying form 0 to 60 Hz See also base frequency carrier frequency and slip A harmonic is a whole number multiple of a base of fundamental frequency The square waves used in inverters produce high frequency harmonics even though the main goal is to produce lower frequency sine waves These harmonics can be harmful to electronics including motor windings and cause radiated energy that interferes with nearby electronic devices Chokes line reactors and filters are sometimes used to suppress the transmission of harmonics in an electri cal system See also choke A unit of physical measure to quantify the amount of work done per unit of time You can directly convert between horsepower and Watts as measurements of power Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor IGBT A semiconductor transistor capable of conduct ing very large currents when in saturation and capable of withstanding very high voltages when it is OFF This high power bipolar transistor is the type used in Hitachi inverters The natural resistance of an object to being accelerated or decelerated by an external force See also momentum A configurable input or output logic function on the Hitachi inverters Each terminal may be assigned one of several functions A device that electronically changes DC to AC current through a alternating process of switch ing the input to the output inverted and non inverted A variable speed dr
123. L R W 151Ah 05402 H222 H Motor constant L 2nd R W 0 01 to 99 99 2519h 09497 1 to 65530 0 01 mH motor 100 0 655 3 mH H222 L R W 251Ah 09498 H023 H Motor constant Io R W 0 01 to 99 99 151Bh 05403 1 t0 65530 0 01 A 100 0 655 3 A H023 L R W 151Ch 05404 H223 H Motor constant Io 2nd R W 0 01 to 99 99 251Bh 09499 1 to 65530 0 01 A motor 100 0 655 3 A H223 L R W 251Ch 09500 H024 H Motor Constant J R W 0 001 to 9 999 151Dh 05405 1 to 10 00 to 99 99 9999000 H024 L R W 100 0 to 999 9 151Eh 05406 1000 to 9999 Reserved 151Fh 05407 to to 1523h 05411 H224 H Motor constant J 2nd R W 0 001 to 9 999 251Dh 09501 1 to motor 10 00 to 99 99 9999000 H224 L R W 100 0 to 999 9 251Eh 09502 1000 to 9999 Reserved 221Fh 09503 to to 2523h 09507 H030 H Auto constant R1 Ist R W 0 001 to 9 999 1524h 05412 1 to 65530 0 001 Q motor 10 00 to 65 53 Ohms H030 L R W 1525h 05413 H230 H Auto constant R1 2nd R W 0 001 to 9 999 2524h 09508 1 to 65530 0 001 Q motor 10 00 to 65 53 Ohms H230 L R W 2525h 09509 H031 H Auto constant R2 Ist R W 0 001 to 9 999 1526h 05414 1 to 65530 0 001 Q motor 7 10 00 to 65 53 Ohms H031 L R W 1527h 05415 H231 H Auto constant R2 2nd R W 0 001 to 9 999 2526h 09510 1 to 65530 0 001 Q motor 10 00 to 65 53 Ohms H231 L R W 2527h 09511
124. M6 14 6 3 3 4 5 40 30 SJ700 300HFU2 E All 2 1 4 M6 22 6 3 3 4 5 50 37 SJ700 370HFU2 E All 1 0 5 16 M8 2 38 8 6 0 8 1 60 45 SJ700 450HFU2 E All 1 0 5 16 M8 2 38 8 6 0 8 1 75 55 SJ700 550HFU2 E All 2 5 16 M8 2 60 8 6 0 8 1 100 75 SJ700 750HFU2 E All 1 0 1 2 M10 100 10 14 8 20 0 125 90 SJ700 900HFU2 E All 1 0 1 2 M10 100 10 14 8 20 0 150 110 SJ700 1100HFU2 E All 2 0 1 2 M10 150 10 14 8 20 0 150 132 SJ700 1320HFE2 All 2 0 1 2 M10 150 10 14 8 20 0 SJ700 1320HFU2 R S T U V W 2 M16 R150 16 55 3 75 0 250 185 700 1850HFU2 E 127 mm x 2 3 P PD N Bamana M16 R150 16 55 3 75 0 R S T U V W 203 mm2x2 M16 200 16 32 5 44 0 400 315 SJ700 3150HFU2 E P PD N 253 mm x2 M16 325 16 55 3 75 0 R S T U V W 304 mm2x2 M12 325 12 32 5 44 0 500 400 SJ700 4000HFU2 E P PD N 405 mm x2 M12 4 38 4 52 0 Note 1 The recommended ring lug connector listing consists of wire size screw size format The wire sizes are in AWG or mm format For AWG wire sizes bolt sizes for the ring lug centers are 10 12 1 4 5 16 and 1 2 For metric wire sizes bolt sizes for the ring lug centers are 6 6M 8 8M 10 10M Note 2 Prepackaged included square washer is to be used when the bare wire is directly connected to terminal without using crimp contact such as ring lug connector Note 3 For 1850HF model use wires with the prepackaged included ring lug term
125. Note 1 Broadcasting is disabled Note 2 The starting coil number is one less than the number of the coil to be read first Note 3 When 0 or more than 32 is specified as a number of coils error code 03h is returned The data set in the response shows terminal states of coils 7 to 14 e Data 17h 00010111b indicates the following assuming coil 7 is the LSB Item Data Coil number 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Coil status OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON e When a read coil is outside the defined coils the final coil data to be transmitted contains O as the status of the coil outside the range e When the Read Coil Status command cannot be executed normally see the exception response g xIpuaddy B 26 ModBus Mode Communications jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Read Holding Register 03h This function reads the contents of the specified number of consecutive holding registers of specified register addresses An example follows below Reading previous three trip factors from an inverter having a slave address 5 This example assumes the previous three trip factors are as follows SJ7002 Command D081 N D082 N 1 Register number 0012h 0013h Trib factor upper digit Over voltage E07 Decelerating 02 Query Response No Field Name Eple ing Fie
126. Output Current Signal LOC will 2 2 of g SS a Og av Signals General Output Opt Code and Symbol 44 MO1 45 MO2 46 MO3 47 MO4 48 MO5 49 MO6 Valid for Outputs 11 to 15 ALx Required Settings See Easy Sequence Default terminal Requires config Output current A Opt Code 43 turn ON if the output current is less than the C038 threshold and motor operation corresponds to the selected monitoring mode Symbol LOC Valid for 11to 15 Code Function Data or Range Description Outputs ALx C038 Low current indication 00 Output during acceleration deceleration pe C038 C039 output mode select and constant speed operation 01 Output only during constant speed 1 Default Requires arne C039 Low current indication 0 0 to 2 0 x Low current threshold used for terminals config A detection level rated inverter intelligent output LOC current Note 1 Note that when parameter A001 Frequency Source Setting 01 control terminal it is possible that the inverter may not recognize a constant speed due to sampling In this case change C038 00 to include accel decel or increase the analog input filter A016 setting C038 0 Low output current LOC Refer to the Easy Sequence Instruction Manual for information on how to configure and use the genera
127. Over voltage trip restart up to 3 times e Under voltage trip restart up to 16 times When the inverter reaches the maximum number of restarts 3 or 16 you must power cycle the inverter to reset its operation Other parameters specify the allowable under voltage level and the delay time before restarting The proper settings depend on the typical fault conditions for your application the necessity of restarting the process in unattended situations and whether restarting is always safe Power failure lt allowable power fail Power failure gt allowable power time B002 inverter resumes fail time B002 inverter trips Input Input power power Inverter output Inverter output Motor free running speed O Powerfailure t O Powerfailure t Allowable i Allowable power fail time P B002 power fail time B002 gt l Retry wait time 4 B003 gt Func Code Name Description Default efaults Run Mode Edit Lo Hi SRW OPE Range or Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn B001 Selection of automatic restart ALM OG Alarm output after trip automatic restart 00 00 00 Xv mode disabled G I Restart at OHz a am RST G2 Resume operation after frequency matching FTF 03 Resume previous freq after freq matching then decelerate to stop and display trip info
128. R W when P013 03 upper 1655h 05717 tion four digits Reserved 1656h 05718 to to 1665h 05733 P100 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1666h 05734 0 to 65530 1 U00 10000 to 65535 P101 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1667h 05735 0 to 65530 1 U01 10000 to 65535 P102 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1668h 05736 0 to 65530 1 U02 10000 to 65535 P103 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1669h 05737 0 to 65530 1 U03 10000 to 65535 P104 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 166Ah 05738 0 to 65530 1 U04 10000 to 65535 P105 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 166Bh 05739 0 to 65530 1 U05 10000 to 65535 P106 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 166Ch 05740 0 to 65530 1 U06 10000 to 65535 P107 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 166Dh 05741 0 to 65530 1 U07 10000 to 65535 P108 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 166Eh 05742 0 to 65530 1 U08 10000 to 65535 P109 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 166Fh 05743 0 to 65530 1 U09 10000 to 65535 P110 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1670h 05744 0 to 65530 1 U10 10000 to 65535 P111 Easy sequence pa
129. SJ7002 Inverter B 51 Holding Registers A Group Standard Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec Reserved 1288h 04744 to to 128Ch 0448 A111 H 02 L input active R W Output frequency corre 128Dh 04749 40000 to 0 01 Hz gt range start frequency sponding to the bipolar 40000 3 Alll L R W voltage input range starting 128Eh 04750 D point a x A112 H 02 L input active R W Output frequency corre 128Fh 04751 40000 to 0 01 Hz w range end frequency sponding to the bipolar 40000 All2 L R W voltage input range ending 1290h 04752 point A113 02 L input active R W Starting point for the bipolar 1291h 04753 100 to 1 range start voltage voltage input range A114 value A114 02 L input active R W Ending point for the bipolar 1292h 04754 A113 1 range end voltage voltage input range value to 100 Reserved 1293h 04755 to to 12A4h 04772 A131 Acceleration curve R W Sets the curve deviation from 12A5h 04773 1 to 10 constants setting straight line acceleration in 10 levels 01 to 10 A132 Deceleration curve R W Sets the curve deviation from 12A6h 04774 1to 10 constants setting straight line deceleration in 10 levels 01 to 10 Reserved 12A7h 04775
130. SLV control OHz domain Vector contro with sensor a settings as well see Torque Control Algorithms on page 3 14 Therefore choose the best algorithm early in your application design process 3 6 D Group Monitoring Functions D Group Monitoring Functions Parameter Monitoring Functions o 2 pom N 32 o as G ca O You can access important system parameter values with the D Group monitoring functions whether the inverter is in Run Mode or Stop Mode After selecting the function code number for the parameter you want to monitor press the Function key once to show the value on the display In Functions D005 and D006 the intelligent terminals use individual segments of the display to show ON OFF status Func vB Code Name Description Units D001 Output frequency monitor Real time display of output frequency to 0 0 to 400 0 motor from 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Hz D002 Output current monitor Filtered display of output current to motor A 100 mS internal filter time constant D003 Rotation direction monitor Three different indications GI GIR TOR OE IEU aD Forward Stop Reverse D004 Process variable PV PID Displays the scaled PID process variable feedback monitor feedback value A75 is scale factor D005 Intelligent input terminal Displays the state of the intelligent inp
131. Sets the frequency of the V f 223Dh 08765 0 to 500 0 1 frequency adjustment 2nd breakpoint for torque boost motor A343 Manual torque boost R W Sets the frequency of the V f 323Dh 12861 0 to 500 0 1 frequency adjustment 3rd breakpoint for torque boost motor A044 V F characteristic curve R W 00 V f constant torque 123Eh 04670 0to5 selection 01 V f variable torque 02 V f free setting curve 03 Sensorless vector SLV 04 0Hz domain SLV 05 Vector control with encoder feedback A244 V F characteristic curve R W 00 V f constant torque 223Eh 08766 0 to 4 selection 2nd motor 01 V f variable torque 02 V f free setting curve 03 Sensorless vector SLV 04 0Hz domain SLV Reserved 223Fh 08767 A344 V F characteristic curve R W 00 V f constant torque 323Eh 12862 0 1 selection 3rd motor 01 V f variable torque B 47 SJ7002 Inverter Holding Registers A Group Standard Functions g xIpuaddy Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec Reserved 323Fh 12863 to to 326Ch 12908 A045 V f gain setting R W Sets voltage gain of the 123Fh 04671 20 to 200 1 inverter A046 Automatic torque boost R W Voltage compensation gain 1240h 04672 Oto 255
132. Switches the inverter into safe stop mode and the motor into free running status e S14 Start stop button Switches the inverter into safe stop mode by EMR signal input to a digital input terminal and sets the motor into free running status This operation corre sponds to EN60204 1 Stop Category 0 Safe stop mode continues as long as the EMR signal is input or until the RS signal is input even after the EMR signal is canceled To use the inverter for an application in which a mechanical brake such as a crane or elevator must be controlled the safety output from an external safety relay must be serially connected to the brake control circuit NOTE The cables used for safety relay wiring the EMR signal and RS signal must be shielded coaxial cables such as type RG174 U complying with MIL C17 made by LAPP or KX3B complying with NF C 93 550 Each cable must be 2 8 mm in outer diameter and 2 m or less in length The cable shielding must be grounded D E 5 e 2 jo 2 b o gt and Installation NOTE Every inductor related device such as a relay or contactor must have an over voltage protection circuit Configuring Drive Parameters In This Chapter page Choosing a Programming Device rrrnnrnnnnnnornnonnnnrnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 2 Using Keypad Devices rrnnnnnnrrrnnnvvnrrrrnnnnnnnnrrrsnnnnvrrrnnnnnnsnnssssnnnnsnnn 3 D Group Monitoring Functions
133. V f 4 I Hz B105 Free setting V f voltage 3 R W 0 0 to 800 0 V 136Ch 04972 0 to 8000 0 1 V B106 Free setting V f freq 4 R W 0 to Free setting V f freq 5 136Dh 04973 Oto V f5 I Hz B107 Free setting V f voltage 4 R W 0 0 to 800 0 V 136Eh 04974 0 to 8000 0 1 V B108 Free setting V f freq 5 R W 0 to Free setting V f freq 6 136Fh 04975 0 to V f6 1 Hz B109 Free setting V f voltage 5 R W 0 0 to 800 0 V 1370h 04976 O to 8000 0 1 V B110 Free setting V f freq 6 R W 0 to Free setting V f freq 7 1371h 04977 Oto V f7 1 Hz B111 Free setting V f voltage 6 R W 0 0 to 800 0 V 1372h 04978 0 to 8000 0 1 V B112 Free setting V f freq 7 R W 0 to 400 0 V 1373h 04979 Oto V 8 1 Hz B113 Free setting V f voltage 7 R W 0 0 to 800 0 V 1374h 04980 0 to 8000 0 1 V SJ7002 Inverter EEJ Holding Registers B Group Fine Tuning Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec Reserved 1375h 04981 to to 137Ah 04986 B120 Brake Control Enable R W 00 Disable 137Bh 04987 0 1 01 Enable B121 Brake Wait Time for R W Sets time delay between arrival 137Ch 04977 010500 0 01 sec Release at release frequency and the brake release signal B122 Brake Wa
134. Variable torque voltage voltage 100 100 0 Base Maximum 10 of Base Maximum frequency frequency base frequency frequency frequency The graph above right shows the general characteristic for variable torque The curve may be best described in three sections as follows a The range from OHz to 10 of the base frequency is the constant torque characteristic For example a base frequency of 60Hz ends the constant torque characteristic segment at 6Hz b The range from 10 of the base frequency to the base frequency is the variable reduced torque characteristic The voltage is output in the curve of frequency to the 1 7 power U fe 3 Q D n ang BuunByuon c After reaching the base frequency the characteristic maintains a constant output voltage for higher frequencies Using parameter A045 you can modify the voltage gain of the inverter This is specified as a percentage of the full scale setting AVR Automatic Voltage Regulation in parameter A082 The gain can be set from 20 to 100 It must be adjusted in accordance with the motor specifications Torque Boost The Constant and Vv Variable Torque algorithms feature an adjustable torque boost curve When the motor load has a lot of inertia or starting friction you may need to increase the low frequency starting torque character istics by boosting the voltage above the normal V f ratio shown at right The A042 10 Torque boost 10
135. W at 100 output 425 600 800 975 1150 Dynamic braking internal chopper 20 10 10 10 10 TE ton with external res gt 150 130 140 140 110 Min external braking resistance Q 35 35 24 24 20 DC braking Variable operating frequency time and braking force Electrical filtering Built in EMC filter and built in zero phase reactor Weight kg 1b 5 11 5 11 12 26 4 12 26 4 12 26 4 Item 400V Class Specifications SJ7002 inverters U S version 300HFU2 370HFU2 450HFU2 550HFU2 750HFU2 FOUN Models European ver 300HFE2 370HFE2 450HFE2 550HFE2 750HFE2 Applicable motor size 2 HP 40 50 60 75 100 kW 30 37 45 55 75 Rated capacity KVA 400 480V 40 1 48 2 51 9 62 3 62 3 74 8 76 2 91 4 103 2 123 8 Rated input voltage 3 phase 3 wire 380 to 480V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 Rated input current A 64 83 99 121 164 Rated output voltage 3 3 phase 3 wire 380 to 480V corresponding to input voltage Rated output current A 58 75 90 110 149 Overload capacity output current A 150 for 60 sec 200 for 3 sec Efficiency at 100 rated output 95 1 95 1 95 1 95 1 95 2 Watt loss at 70 output 1100 1345 1625 1975 2675 NE at 100 output 1550 1900 2300 2800 3800 Dynamic braking w o braking unit 10 10 10 10 8 approx torque short time stop 7 with braking unit Refer to separate DB Unit instruction manual or contact your Hitachi distribut
136. W sign 1649h 05705 P066 H Multi stage position R W Reverse side to forward side 164Ah 05706 setting 6 upper four digits including P066 L R W sign 164Bh 05707 P067 H Multi stage position R W Reverse side to forward side 164Ch 05708 setting 7 upper four digits including P067 L R W sign 164Dh 05709 P068 Home position mode R W 00 Low 164Eh 05710 0 1 2 selection O1 High 02 High 2 P069 Home position direction R W 00 Forward 164Fh 05711 0 I selection 01 Reverse B 73 SJ7002 Inverter Holding Registers P Group Expansion Card Functions g xIpuaddy Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec P070 Low speed homing R W 0 00 to 10 00 Hz 1650h 05712 Oto 1000 0 01 Hz frequency P071 High speed homing R W 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 1651h 05713 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz frequency maximum frequency setting Ist motor Hz P072 H Forward position range R W 0 to 536870912 when P012 1652h 05714 See 1 IT setting 02 0 to 2147483647 descrip P072 L R W when P013 03 upper 1653h 05715 tion four digits P073 H Reverse position range R W 0 to 536870912 when P012 1654h 05716 See 1 02 0 to 2147483647 descrip P073 L
137. a restriction of the motor current those effects are avail able on other functions The frequency arrival signal FA1 to FA5 is intended to indicate when the inverter output has reached arrived at the target frequency You can adjust the timing of the leading and trailing edges of the signal via two parameters specific to acceleration and deceleration ramps C042 and C043 The Error for the PID loop is the magni tude absolute value of the difference between the Setpoint desired value and Process Variable actual value The PID output deviation signal OD output terminal function option code 04 indicates when the error magnitude has exceeded a magnitude you define Motor current Overload signal 1 0 Output frequency Arrival signal 1 0 PID Error PV SP Deviation Signal 1 0 U 2 g 3 Q D Q 7 AUG BuunByuon 3 60 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions 9 2 a D fa 5 2D C e O 42 2 ob E oO oO ai Keypad Defaults Run aa Pyra Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 Re SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 Lo Hi EU USA Jpn C038 Low current indication OH OG Output during acceleration deceleration and 01 01 01 Xv output mode select constant speed operation CET G I
138. acted alone e Even though the second stage is simple ON OFF control when it is an inverter you can still adjust the output frequency to vary the boost it provides Refer to the example diagram below Its two stages of control are defined as follows Stage 1 Inverter 1 operating in PID loop mode with motor driving a fan Stage 2 Inverter 2 operating as an ON OFF controller with motor driving a fan Stage 1 provides the ventilation needs in a building most of the time On some days there is a change in the building s air volume because large warehouse doors are open In that situation Stage 1 alone cannot maintain the desired air flow PV sags under SP Inverter 1 senses the low PV and its PID Second Stage Output at FBV terminal turns ON This gives a Run FWD command to Inverter 2 to provide the additional air flow Air flow Sensor Stage 1 Stage 2 Inverter 1 Inverter 2 PV _ 101 01 or 02 PID Second Stage Output Process Variable NOTE The FBV is designed for implementing two stage control The PV high limit and PV low limit parameters C052 and C053 do not function as process alarm thresholds Terminal FBV does not provide a PID alarm function 4 57 SJ7002 Inverter To use the PID Second Stage Output feature you will need to choose upper and lower limits for the PV via C053 and C052 respectively As the timing diagram below shows these are the thresho
139. applica tions may not need noise suppression unless you notice electrical interference with the operation of other devices Q The SJ7002 features a PID loop feature PID loops are usually associated with chemical processes heating or process industries in general How could the PID loop feature be useful in my application A You will need to determine the particular main variable in your application the motor affects That is the process variable PV for the motor Over time a faster motor speed will cause a faster change in the PV than a slow motor speed will By using the PID loop feature the inverter commands the motor to run at the optimal speed required to maintain the PV at the desired value for current conditions Using the PID loop feature will require an additional sensor and other wiring and is considered an advanced application Inverter Mounting and Installation In This Chapter page Orientation to Inverter Features rrmvrnnnvvvrnnnnvvnnnvnvnnnnvrvnnnennnnnenrvnnner 2 Basic System Description rrrvrrrvrrrvrrrrvrrrvrrrvrrrvrrrrrrrnrrrvrrrnrsrrersreen 5 Step by Step Basic Installation rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnrrrnrrrnrrrrernr 6 Pow r p EN La um i cesaansvccahcdatideeebcaxcaedvoniuddaaiionaw veladuemanebsenct 27 Using the Front Panel Kopad Luvssansensvsmnemnesmns nmnidens e 29 Emergency Stop ja GL 1 eis cssctenanatdencckepeescencacktadenrebeoeeteceiencnnadin 37
140. arrival type 2 Turns ON when output to motor is at or above the FA over frequency Threshold 1 C042 during accel turns OFF when motor output goes below the threshold during decel 03 OL Overload advance notice Output current is more than the set Threshold 1 for the 5 signal 1 overload signal set with C041 2 Ge 04 OD Output deviation for PID PID error is more than the set threshold for the deviation D 2 control signal Z 5 05 AL Alarm signal Alarm condition has been met and not reset OG S a 06 FA3 Frequency arrival type 3 Output to motor is at the FA Threshold 1 C042 during accel O at frequency or at C043 during decel 07 OTQ Over torque signal Over torque feature is enabled and the motor is generating excess torque 08 IP Instantaneous power Inverter input power has decreased below the acceptable input failure signal voltage level 09 UV Under voltage signal Inverter input power has decreased below the acceptable input voltage level 10 TRQ In torque limit Output torque exceeds level set for the particular torque frequency quadrant in effect during operation 11 RNT Operation time over Inverter Run time exceeds the limit set by Run power on warning time B034 12 ONT Plug in time over Inverter plug in time exceeds the set limit 13 THM Thermal alarm signal Thermal limit for the motor is exceeded 19 BRK Brake release signal ON when the inverter signals the external braking system to release open its brake OFF when the inverter
141. arrival type 3 at freq 4 44 WAC 39 Capacitor life warning 4 58 OTQ 07 Over torque signal 4 48 WAF 40 Low cooling fan speed 4 59 IP 08 Instantaneous power failure signal 4 48 FR 41 Starting contact signal 4 5 UV 09 Under voltage signal 448 OHF 42 Heatsink overheat warning 4 59 TRQ 10 In torque limit signal 451 LOC 43 Low output current signal 4 60 RNT 11 Run time over 451 MOL 44 General output I 4 60 ONT 12 Power ON time over 451 MO2 45 General output 2 60 THM 13 Thermal alarm signal 4 52 MO3 46 General output 3 4 60 BRK 19 Brake release signal 4 54 MO4 47 General output 4 4 60 BER 20 Brake error signal 4 54 MO5 48 General output 5 4 60 ZS 21 Zero speed detect 454 MO6 49 General output 6 4 60 DSE 22 Speed deviation maximum 4 54 IRDY 50 Inverter ready signal 461 POK 23 Positioning completion 4 54 FWR 51 Forward rotation signal 4 61 FA4 24 Freq arrival type 4 4 44 RVR 52 Reverse rotation signal 61 over frequency 2 MJA 53 Major failure 4 61 FAS 25 Freq arrival type 5 4 44 WCO 54 O terminal window comparator 4 62 at frequency 2 WCOI 55 OI terminal window comparator 4 62 OL2 26 Overload advance notice 446 WCO2 56 02 terminal window comparator 4 62 signal 2 Odc 27 Analog O disconnect detect 4 55 OIDc 28 Analog OI disconnect detect 4 55 O2Dc 29 Analog 02 disconnect detect 4 55 SJ7002 Inverter 4 13 Using Intelligent Input Terminals
142. attachment plate to the wiring exit area Secure the control wiring to the PCB attachment plate with cable ties ee S s Li lo q o G Em D i Wiring plate ae ae U i v sll Control circuit wiring l l E 20 de 20 oj ga loh ON loh O H ON oO HNO toh MI ma POD Pd Ne 0D 8 81181181 8 881818 PCB attachment plate Lt o I go oposo Skola ONOZ o2 INPUT One EE din oja Input Terminal SJ7002 Inverter EKSIN Use the following table to locate pages for intelligent input material in this chapter Listing Intelligent INPUTS Intelligent INPUTS Symbol Code Name Page Symbol Code Name Page RV 0l Reverse Run Stop 4 15 TRQ2 42 Torque limit select bit 2 MSB 4 30 CF1 02 Multi speed select Bit 0 LSB 4 15 PPI 43 P PI mode selection 4 26 CF2 03 Multi speed select Bit 1 4 15 BOK 44 Brake confirmation signal 4 32 CF3 04 Multi speed select Bit 2 4 15 ORT 45 Orientation home search 4 34 CF4 05 Multi speed select Bit 3 LSB 4 15 LAC 46 LAC LAD cancel 4 34 JG 06 J
143. can use the result for the output frequency setting use A001 10 or for the PID Process Variable PV input use A075 03 Keypad Defaults Run en rer Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 Mode ocr SEP SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 a EU USA Jpn A141 A input select for Calculate FEM OG Digital operator A020 A220 A320 02 02 02 Xv Function 7 YE G I Keypad potentiometer 0 G2 O input Or 3 OI input CoM 04 Comm port OF 1 S Expansion card I OFS 06 Expansion card 2 PLS 27 Pulse train frequency train input A142 B input select for Calculate FEM OG Digital operator A020 A220 A320 03 03 03 Xv Function WE G I Keypad potentiometer a G2 O input OI 83 OI input COM 24 Comm port OFi 05 Expansion card 1 OFS 06 Expansion card 2 PLS 27 Pulse train frequency train input SJ7002 Inverter 3 29 Keypad Defaults Run Aai S aa A Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ae ar SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn 2 A143 Calculation symbol ADI 80 ADD A input B input 00 00 00 Xv Calculates a value based on SUE G I SUB A input B input the A input A141 selects i and the B input A142 MUL 02 MUL A input x B input selects A145 ADD frequency 10 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xy A146 ADD direction select Fl 00 Plus ad
144. check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Command and Data CR Control code carriage return 1 byte CR 0x0D The receive frame has a 104 byte data field Receive frame format containing values for 13 items DOLICE Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Data Transmission data 104 see next table bytes BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Command and Data CR Control code carriage return 1 byte CR 0x0D B 10 ASCII Mode Communications The data in the receive frame contains 8 byte values for 13 items listed in the table below No Monitor Item Units Multiplier ae Notes 1 Output frequency Hz 100 8 bytes Dec ASCII code 2 Output current A 10 8 bytes Dec ASCII code 3 Direction of rotation 8 bytes 0 Stop 1 FWD 2 REV faa z 4 PID feedback monitor 100 8 bytes Dec ASCII code Cc 5 Intelligent input monitor 8 bytes Dec ASCII code lt 6 Intelligent output monitor 8 bytes Dec ASCII code 7 Frequency converting monitor 100 8 bytes Dec ASCII code 8 Output torque monitor 1 8 bytes Dec ASCII code 9 Output voltage monitor V 10 8 bytes Dec ASCII code 10 Electric power monitor kW 10 8 bytes Dec ASCII code 11 Reserved 8 bytes 000
145. check the output cables and the Inverter may fail e Check for a ground fault check the To avoid this problem the output cables and motor inverter shuts off its output Ge Over current and displays the error code During e Check whether the inverter has deceler protection shown on the left when it deceleration ated the motor quickly increase the decel OC Decel detects a current higher eration time 03 Over current oe er During Check whether the inverter has acceler a protection DC current detector CT acceleration E n i increase the pe to detect over current When a current as high as Check whether the motor has been locked about 220 of the check the motor and wiring inverter s rated output Check whether the torque boost current current is detected the has been set too high reduce the boost protective circuit operates current Eay Over current EN Other Check whether the DC braking force is protection conditions too high reduce the braking force Over e Check whether the current detector CT is normal replace or repair the CT E05 Overload This protective function monitors the Check whether the motor load is too high protection inverter output current and shuts off the reduce the load factor OL BED 1 4 inverter output and displays the error code e Check whether the thermal level is appro shown on the left when the internal priate adjust the level appropriately electronic t
146. clues to help you understand the cause Codes The SJ7002 inverter displays a status at trip point digit to the right of the decimal point for some error codes For example 07 2 means Error 7 occurred and the inverter status was condition 2 when the error occurred Status Status Codes Inverter Status Codes Inverter Status M Reset eger Run Command active with 0 Hz i speed reference l Stop sd cs 5 Starting ae 2 Deceleration Ss q DC braking Sai Constant speed E 8 Overload restriction a E Acceleration tp SON or FOC operation in progress D 3 2 z D 3 D 3 D 3 a D Bunooysejqnoly 66 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions e C fe lt 02 O Ka 2 H fd re Z a C o 2 E 49 xe fa Error Codes An error code will appear on the display automatically when a fault causes the inverter to trip The following table lists the cause associated with the error OPE SRW Ae Troubleshooting and 3 Name Description 7 4 Display Corrective Action Epl Over current If the motor is constrained During Check whether the load has fluctuated protection or suddenly accelerated or constant sharply OC Drive decelerated a high current speed Check for the short circuit of output will flow in the inverter operation connections
147. coils low 06 order 2 order 2 7 Byte number 3 02 7 CRC 16 high order 34 8 Change data high 17 8 CRC 16 low order 4C order 3 9 Change data low 00 Note 4 Data is transferred by the specified order 3 number of data bytes data size 10 CRC 16 high order DB 11 CRC 16 low order 3E Note 1 Broadcasting is disabled Note 2 The starting coil number is one less than the number of the coil to be read first Note 3 The change data is a set of high order data and low order data So when the size in bytes of data to be changed is an odd number add 1 to the data size in bytes to make it an even number When the Write in Coils command cannot be executed normally see the exception response B 30 ModBus Mode Communications jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Write in Holding Registers 10h This function writes data in consecutive holding registers An example follows e Write 3000 seconds as the first acceleration time 1 F002 in an inverter having a slave address 1 This example uses change data 300000 493E0h to set 3000 seconds as the data resolution of the registers 1103h and 1104h holding the first acceleration time 1 F002 is 0 01 second Query Response No Field Name Example No Field Name Pomel hex hex 1 Slave address 1 01 1 Slave address 1 01 2 Fun
148. complex mathematical calcula tions required to achieve superior performance The technique is referred to as sensorless vector control It allows the drive to continuously monitor its output voltage and current and their relationship to each other From this it mathematically calculates two vector currents One Output frequency 100 SJ7002 Inverter 1 15 vector is related to motor flux current and the other to motor torque current The ability to separately control these two vectors is what allows the SJ7002 to deliver extraordinary low O speed performance and speed control accuracy Q e Hitachi 2 Series of inverters includes two sub groups the class and the Inverter Input and The Hitachi SJ7002 Series of i includ b groups the 200V cl d the 400V P Three Phase class inverters The drives described in this manual may be used in either the United States or D Power Europe although the exact voltage level for commercial power may be slightly different from z 2 country to country Accordingly a 200V class inverter requires nominal 200 to 240VAC and a 400V class inverter requires from 380 to 480VAC All SJ7002 inverters require three phase input power whether 200V or 400V class N L 4 EE SEERE DESERTERTE SETE AE ee EE a EE R E a TIP If your application only has single phase power available refer to the Hitachi SJ100 Series inverters SJ100 inverters of 3HP or less can accept single phase input power The comm
149. conditions are on the next page The alarm output terminals operate as shown below left by default The contact logic can be inverted as shown below right by using the parameter setting C036 The relay contacts normally open N O and normally closed N O convention uses normal to mean the inverter has power and is in Run or Stop Mode The relay contacts switch to the opposite position when it is in Trip Mode or when input power is OFF suoeiado D 5 2 fe 5 e 5 Ke Contact position after initialization Contact position inverted by C036 setting During normal running When an alarm occurs or During normal running or When an alarm occurs power is turned OFF power is turned OFF Run ALO ALO Run ALO ALO Contact Power State ALI AL2 Contact Power State ALI AL2 N C ON Normal Closed Open N O ON Normal Open Closed after set 3 initialize ON Trip Open Closed C036 00 ON Trip Closed Open C036 01 OFF Open Closed OFF Open Closed 4 48 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Over torque The Over torque function OTQ turns ON when the estimated value of output torque of motor Signal increases more than the arbitrary level set for the output see table below Recall that the torque limit function cove
150. corresponding flash memory register in the inverter SJ7002 Inverter KEJ Multi stage Three Multi stage Position Select inputs are binary encoded to select one of eight settings p Position lect P060 to P067 Input CP1 is the LSB CP3 is the MSB If no position select inputs are ositio elec p p P 1 2 and 3 assigned P060 becomes the default position setting H 3 66 CP1 s Input Function Opt Code OOP eee Multi Position and 67 CP2 oge CF3 CF2 CF1 Symbol E 68 CP3 P060 Position setting 0 0 0 0 kor 1 to 8 P061 Position setting 1 0 0 1 Required Pio P062 Position setting 2 0 1 0 Settings P067 C169 P063 Position setting 3 0 1 1 Default Requires P064 Position setting 4 1 0 0 ber contig P065 Position setting 5 1 0 1 P066 Position setting 6 1 1 0 P067 Position setting 7 1 1 1 The three multi stage position select inputs CF1 CF2 and CF3 are binary encoded When more than one input changes state to select a position it is possible that skewing of input transitions would briefly select undesired intermediate positions To avoid this problem a determination time feature is available Parameter C169 sets a delay time that applies uniformly to all three inputs It operates according to the following process The determination timer is initialized upon an input transition The transition is not yet transferred to the output T
151. depends on what you connect to the EXT terminal Even if EXT is turned OFF the inverter remains in the trip state You must reset the inverter or cycle power to clear the error returning the inverter to the Stop Mode In the graph below the EXT input turns ON during normal Run Mode operation The inverter lets the motor free run to a stop and the alarm output turns ON immediately When the operator initiates a Reset command the alarm and error are cleared When the Reset is turned OFF the motor begins rotation since the Run command is already active free run A 1 E oO EXT Motor revolution speed RS Alarm output terminal FW RV If the USP Unattended Start Protection feature is in use the inverter will not automatically restart after cancelling the EXT trip event In that case it must receive either another Run command OFF to ON transition a keypad Reset command or an RS intelligent terminal input signal If the Run command is already present when power is turned ON the inverter starts running immediately after powerup The Unattended Start Protection USP function prevents that automatic startup If the USP input is active the inverter will not run without outside interven tion In this case there are two ways to reset an alarm and resume running 1 Turn the Run command OFF or 2 Perform a reset operation by the terminal RS input or the keypad Stop rese
152. energy from a decelerating load Load inertia causes the motor to act as a generator during deceleration See also four quadrant operation and dynamic braking The torque a motor must produce to overcome the static friction of a load in order to start the load moving The frequency of the constant periodic switching waveform that the inverter modulates to generate the AC output to the motor See also PWM A regulatory agency for governing the performance of electronic products in Europe Drive installations designed to have CE approval must have particular filter s installed in the applica tion An inductor that is tuned to react at radio frequencies is called a choke since it attenuates chokes frequencies above a particular threshold Tuning is often accomplished by using a movable magnetic core In variable frequency drive systems a choke positioned around high current wiring can help attenuate harmful harmonics and protect equipment See also harmon ics The inverter DC braking feature stops the AC commutation to the motor and sends a DC current through the motor windings in order to stop the motor Also called DC injection braking it has little effect at high speed and is used as the motor is nearing a stop The portion of the variable frequency drive between the input rectifiers and the output stages It delivers smoothed DC power to the control and output stages of the drive In a control system the range of i
153. event of the motor 2 2 of g TS a Og av 4 74 Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control Manual Setting Of With vector control the inverter uses the output current output voltage and motor constants to Motor Constants estimate the motor torque and speed It is possible to achieve a high starting torque and accurate speed control at low frequency Sensorless Vector Control improved torque control at output frequencies down to 0 5 Hz Use A044 03 1st motor or A244 03 2nd motor to select sensorless vector control Sensorless Vector Control 0Hz Domain improved torque control at output frequencies from 0 to 2 5 Hz Use A044 04 1st motor or A244 04 2nd motor For this vector control method we recommend using a motor that is one frame size smaller than the inverter size Sensorless Vector Control with Feedback improved torque control at all speeds while providing the most accurate speed regulation If you do use any vector control methods it is important that the motor constants stored in the inverter match the motor We recommend first using the auto tuning procedure in the previous section If satisfactory performance through auto tuning cannot be fully obtained please adjust the motor constants for the observed symptoms according to the table below CAUTION If the inverter capacity is more than twice the capacity of the motor in use the inverter may not achieve its full perfor
154. external regenerative braking uses any of the vector control modes A044 03 04 or 05 This function is ONLY compatible with V F control NOTE If the load exceeds the rating of the inverter the acceleration time may be increased NOTE If using a motor with a capacity that is one size smaller than the inverter rating enable the Overload Restriction function B021 B024 and set the Overload Restriction Level B022 B025 to 1 5 times the motor nameplate current Q 2 GE NOTE Be aware that the acceleration and deceleration times will vary depending on the D 2 actual load conditions during each individual operation of the inverter ER 25 5 ae Second The SJ7002 inverter features two stage acceleration and deceleration ramps This gives flexibil Oo Acceleration and ity in the profile shape You can specify the frequency transition point the point at which the Deceleration standard acceleration F002 or deceleration F003 changes to the second acceleration A092 Functions or deceleration A093 These profile options are also available for the second motor settings and third motor settings All acceleration and deceleration times are time to ramp from zero speed to full speed or full speed to zero speed Select a transition method via A094 as depicted below Be careful not to confuse the second acceleration deceleration settings with settings for the second motor fr
155. factor of the power supply is 3 or higher Ifthe power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter capacity the power supply capacity is 500 kVA or more If abrupt power supply changes are expected Examples of these situations include 1 Several inverters are connected in parallel sharing the same power bus 2 A thyristor converter and an inverter are connected in parallel sharing the same power bus 3 An installed phase advance power factor correction capacitor opens and closes Where these conditions exist or when the connected equipment must be highly reliable install an AC reactor between the power supply and the inverter Also where the effects of an indirect lightning strike is possible install a lightning conductor Example calculation Vrs 205V Var 203V Vrp 197V where Vgs is R S line voltage Var is S T line voltage Vyp is T R line voltage Unbalance factor of voltage Max line voltage min Mean line voltage x 100 Meanline voltage Ves Vast Vert VTR 205 202 Vest Vort Vrp Please refer to the documentation that comes with the AC reactor for installation instructions This reactor reduces the vibrations in the motor caused by the inverter s switching waveforms by smoothing the waveforms to approximate commercial power quality It is also useful to reduce the reflected voltage wave phenomenon when wiring from the inverter to the motor is more than 10m in length Please r
156. faults cannot be detected the accumulation of defects faults must not cause any loss of the safety function Principle for Category Safety requirement System behavior achieving safety 3 The requirements of category B and proven The safety function always safety principle specifications must be applied operates when a single defect Safety related parts must be designed to meet fault occurs the following requirements Almost all defects faults are The safety function always operates when a detected single ER fault eee Accumulation of undetected e Each single defect fault is eventually defects faults may cause a detected to prevent the loss of the safety loss of the safety function function 4 The requirements of category B and proven The safety function always safety principle specifications must be applied operates when a single defect Characterized mainly fault occurs Each single defect fault is eventually detected to prevent the loss of the safety function by the structure Wiring Examples NOTE The system manufacturer is responsible for selecting the level of risk factors in accordance with EN954 1 Stop categories are defined by EN60204 1 European Machinery Directive EN60204 1 The examples of wiring shown below are based on the three stop categories compliant with e Category 0 Uncontrolled stopping by immediate removal of power to machine actuators e Category 1 Stoppin
157. for three trip items plus a reserved field STX Node CR Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Data Transmission data 8 bytes see next table BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Command and Data CR Control code carriage return 1 byte CR 0x0D Trip data is organized as shown The Data field contents table below lists the codes and their meanings Status A Status B Status C reserved Code Status A Definition Status B Definition Status C Definition 00 Initial status On stopping 01 On running Stop 02 On Stopping On tripping Deceleration speed 03 On running Constant speed 04 On free run stop Acceleration speed 05 On jog Forward 06 On dynamic braking Reverse 07 On retry Reverse from forward 08 On trip Forward from reverse 09 On under voltage Forward start 10 Reverse start B 12 ASCII Mode Communications Command 05 The 05 command reads the inverter s trip history Transmit frame format The frame format of command 05 follows the diagrams and specification tables The transmit CR frame has no data field Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes
158. functions as a signal to run or stop the motor Motor direction is determined by the algebraic sign of the difference between the current position and the target position Operation command Er Output frequency l i L Speed setting I KI P017 Home search I Small position value completion range l causes decel before setting N target speed is reached l 0 l pe Position Home search completion delay time setting If zero return operation as described below is not performed the motor position detected at powerup is assumed to be at the origin position data 0 When the operation commend is turned ON with zero specified as the position setting positioning is completed without running the motor Set C102 Reset Mode Selection 03 so that the inverter only resets a trip condition does not turn OFF the motor output Otherwise the current position counter is cleared when the inverter reset terminal turns ON Be sure to set C102 03 if you intend to use the value of the current position counter for operation after recovering the inverter from a trip by turning ON the reset terminal reset key Teaching Function 3 73 SJ7002 Inverter If intelligent terminal PCLR is assigned when it is ON the current position counter is cleared and the position deviation counter is also cleared When the inverter is in Absolute Position Control Mode some functions are necessarily
159. functions that the open collector outputs can use SJ7002 inverter Sinking outputs open collector Output circuits common External system 24VDC suoesado D 3 2 3 3 Ke TIP The open collector transistor outputs can handle up to 50mA each We highly recommend that you use an external power source as shown It must be capable of providing at least 250mA to drive the outputs at full load If you need output current greater than 50mA use the inverter output to drive a small relay Be sure to use a diode across the coil of the relay as shown reverse biased in order to suppress the turn off spike or use a solid state relay 4 44 Using Intelligent Output Terminals 2 2 of Cc TS a Og av Run Signal Opt Code 00 Symbol RUN Valid for l11to 15 Outputs ALx Required Settings mene Default terminal 12 Frequency Arrival Signals 01 FA1 Opt Code PRAT and 06 FA3 Symbol 74 TFA4 25 FA5 Valid for 11 to 15 Outputs ALx F001 for FA1 C042 and 5 C043 for Required FA2 and FA3 Settings C045 and C046 for FA4 and FAS Default terminal 1 FA1 Other Requires terminals config When the RUN signal is selected as an intelligent output terminal the inverter outputs a signal on that terminal when it is FW RV
160. injury to personnel WARNING The Stop Key is effective only when the Stop function is enabled Be sure to enable the Stop Key separately from the emergency stop Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel WARNING During a trip event if the alarm reset is applied and the Run command is present the inverter will automatically restart Be sure to apply the alarm reset only after verifying the Run command is OFF Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel WARNING Be sure not to touch the inside of the energized inverter or to put any conductive object into it Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or fire WARNING If power is turned ON when the Run command is already active the motor will automatically start and injury may result Before turning ON the power confirm that the RUN command is not present WARNING When the Stop key function is disabled pressing the Stop key does not stop the inverter nor will it reset a trip alarm WARNING Be sure to provide a separate hard wired emergency stop switch when the application warrants it WARNING If the power is turned ON and the Run command is already active the motor starts rotation and is dangerous Before turning power ON confirm that the external Run command is not active WARNING After the Reset command is given and the alarm reset occurs the motor will restart suddenly if the Run command is already active Be sure to set the alarm reset after verifying that
161. inverter displays an error code LED format is E see Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions on page 6 5 to interpret and clear the error Acceleration and Deceleration The SJ7002 inverter has programmable acceleration and deceleration values The test procedure left these at the default value 10 seconds You can observe this by setting the potentiometer at about half speed before running the motor Then press RUN and the motor will take 5 seconds to reach a steady speed Press the STOP key to see a 5 second deceleration to a stop State of Inverter at Stop If you adjust the motor s speed to zero the motor will slow to a near stop and the inverter turns the outputs OFF The high performance SJ7002 can rotate at a very slow speed with high torque output but not zero must use servo systems with position feedback for that feature This characteristic means you must use a mechanical brake for some applications Interpreting the Display First refer to the output frequency display readout The maximum frequency setting parameter A004 defaults to 50 Hz or 60 Hz Europe and United States respectively for your application Example Suppose a 4 pole motor is rated for 60 Hz operation so the inverter is configured to output 60 Hz at full scale Use the following formula to calculate the RPM RPM Frequency x 60 _ Frequency x 120 _ 60x120 _ 1800RPM Pairs of poles of poles 4 The theoretical speed for the
162. is at least 10 times greater than the inverter capacity or the power supply capacity is 500 kVA or more 3 Abrupt power supply changes are expected due to conditions such as a Several inverters are interconnected with a short bus b A thyristor converter and an inverter are interconnected with a short bus c An installed phase advance capacitor opens and closes Where these conditions exist or when the connected equipment must be highly reliable you MUST install an input side AC reactor of 3 at a voltage drop at rated current with respect to the supply voltage on the power supply side Also where the effects of an indirect lightning strike are possible install a lightning conductor CAUTION EFFECTS OF SHARING POWER SOURCE BETWEEN INVERTER AND OTHER MOTORS An electric cooling fan for the motor shall be powered from another system A motor directly connected to the power source shall also be power from another system If they are powered from the same system as the inverter an insufficient voltage protection error E09 or an instan taneous power failure protection error E16 may occur when the inverter is turned OFF CAUTION Do not install inverters in a corner grounded Delta distribution system The result ing line imbalance will cause premature line fuse failure and failure of the inverter input bridge rectifier Install in a balanced Delta or Wye distribution system only CAUTION When the EEPROM error E8 occurs be sure to conf
163. is not driving the motor and needs the external brake engaged 20 BER Brake error signal ON when the output current is less than the set releasing current OFF when the braking function is not in use or when the output current to the motor is correct and it is safe to release the brake 21 ZS Zero speed detect Encoder pulses of the motor have stopped 22 DSE Speed deviation Velocity error exceeds the error threshold defined for the maximum encoder input 23 POK Positioning completion Load position is at the target 24 FA4 Frequency arrival type 4 ON when output to motor is at or above the FA threshold 2 over frequency 2 C045 during accel OFF when the output to motor is below the FA threshold 2 C046 during decel 25 FAS Frequency arrival type 5 Output to motor is at the FA threshold 2 C045 during accel at frequency 2 or at C046 during decel 3 57 SJ7002 Inverter Output Function Summary Table U g 3 Q D Q a pe ene Function Name Description 26 OL2 Overload notice advance Output current is more than the set Threshold 2 for the signal 2 overload signal set with C111 27 Odc Analog O disconnect Input signal level at terminal O is below threshold set with detect B070 28 OIDc Analog OT disconnect Input signal level at terminal OI is below threshold set with detect B071 29 O2Dc Analog 02 disconnect
164. master and each of the inverter s is a slave as shown in the figure below RS485 serial network The specifications for SJ7002 Series RS485 serial communications are in the following table Item ASCII Mode ModBus RTU mode User selectable Transmission speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Vv Communication modes Half duplex one device transmits at a time x Synchronization Start stop transmission Asychronous transmission x Character code ASCII code Binary code x LSB placement Transmits LSB first x Electrical interface RS485 differential transceiver x Data bits 7 or 8 bits 8 bits v Parity None even odd v Stop bits 1 or 2 bits v Start convention One way start only by command from host device on network x Wait time for response 10 to 1 000 ms 0 to 1 000 ms Y Connection format Station address numbers from 1 to 32 maximum v Error check Overrun framing BCC vertical Overrun framing CRC 16 and x parity and longitudinal parity longitudinal parity errors errors SJ7002 Inverter B 3 Serial Connection The serial connector is to the left of the control logic connector as shown below Diagrams Serial Communications atalaia TAERA HHA Connector ee SS AR ARE BE S pl pa amp N amp gt W me ao Me Me a a Nes H 02 am pia 13 11 LN Lo LOLTAMI 15 1EM2 12 ENGE L_ Termination resistor Termination resistor Send receiv
165. motor chassis ground wiring as you used on the POUNCE ground power input wiring in the previous step After completing the wiring e Check the mechanical integrity of each wire crimp and terminal connection e Replace the front panel and secure the retention screw firmly After completing the initial installation and powerup test in this chapter you may need to wire the logic signal connector for your application For new inverter users applications we highly recommend that you first complete the powerup test in this chapter without adding any logic control wiring Then you will be ready to set the required parameters for logic control as covered in Chapter 4 Operations and Monitoring Step 8 After mounting and wiring the inverter Uncover the fan outlet vents remove any protective material covering the inverter ventilation openings from Step 3 This includes covers over the side ventilation ports as well as the fan outlet area CAUTION Failure to remove all vent opening covers before electrical operation may result in damage to the inverter Uncover the ventilation slots both sides 2 27 SJ7002 Inverter Powerup Test Step 9 After wiring the inverter and motor you re ready to do a powerup test The procedure 10 that follows is designed for the first time use of the drive Please verify the following conditions before conducting the powerup test Perform the i Po
166. of each single protective conductor terminal must be sized for the required nominal load J7002 inverter with book type filter N Q o N N N N N N N N N N N N N N m N gt N o o ge N OD N SAA Q N lo 2 N x lt U N ISSS R N N N N SSN L3 Li L2 PE D4 Precautions for EMC Models SJ700 004 to 1500 m 2s ae C Q 2 lt Precautions for EMC Models SJ700 004 to 1500 The SJ7002 series inverter conforms to the requirements of Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 2004 108 EC However when using the inverter in Europe you must comply with the following specifications and requirements to meet the EMC Directive and other standards in Europe WARNING This equipment must be installed adjusted and maintained by qualified engineers who have expert knowledge of electric work inverter operation and the hazardous circumstances that can occur Otherwise personal injury may result Use the following checklist to ensure the inverter is within proper operating ranges and conditions 1 Power supply requirements a b c d Voltage fluctuation must be 15 to 10 or less Voltage imbalance must be 3 or less Frequency variation must be 4 or less Total harmonic distortion THD of voltage must be 10 or less 2 Installation requirement a
167. of function commands or configuring parameters The optional read write programmer will let you read and write inverter EEPROM contents from the programmer This feature is particularly useful for OEMs who need to duplicate a particu lar inverter s settings in many other inverters in assembly line fashion LAV In general braking is a force that attempts to slow or stop motor rotation So it is associated with motor deceleration but may also occur even when the load attempts to drive the motor faster than the desired speed overhauling If you need the motor and load to decelerate quicker than their natural deceleration during coasting we recommend installing a braking resistor The dynamic braking unit built into certain SJ7002 models sends excess motor energy into a resistor to slow the motor and load see Introduction on page 5 2 and Dynamic Braking on page 5 6 for more information For loads that continuously overhaul the motor for extended periods of time the SJ7002 may not be suitable contact your Hitachi distributor The inverter parameters include acceleration and deceleration which you can set to match the needs of the application For a particular inverter motor and load there will be a range of practically achievable accelerations and decelerations The SJ7002 inverter is capable of sophisti cated speed control A graphical representa tion of that capability will help you Speed understand
168. oho 2 eere a E a EAEE aaa iS 2 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry rrrrnrrnnvrnrvrrrnvrrnvrrrrrrnrrrrerrreen 2 Introduction Introduction This appendix lists the user programmable parameters for the SJ7002 series inverters and the default values for European U S and Japanese product types The right most column of the tables is blank so you can record values you have changed from the default This involves just a few parameters for most applications Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry SJ7002 series inverters provide many functions and parameters that can be configured by the user We recommend that you record all parameters that have been edited in order to help in troubleshooting or recovery from a loss of parameter data Inverter model SJ700 f This information is printed on the specification label located p MFG No on the right side of the inverter E co Q 2 lt Main Profile Parameters F Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Name FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan FOO1 Output frequency setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 F002 Acceleration 1 time setting 30 0 30 0 30 0 F202 Acceleration 1 time setting 2nd motor 30 0 30 0 30 0 F302 Acceleration 1 time setting 3rd motor 30 0 30 0 30 0 F003 Deceleration 1 time setting 30 0 30 0 30 0 F203 Deceleration 1 time setting 2nd motor 30 0 30 0 30 0 F303 Deceleration 1 time
169. operate the inverter if the jumper is removed Is the direction of the motor rotation correct Did the inverter trip during acceleration or deceleration Were the rpm and frequency meter readings as expected Were there any abnormal motor vibrations or noise DD loo gt PPrrrr PP P PP PP SJ7002 Inverter Warnings for Operations and Monitoring WARNING Be sure to turn ON the input power supply only after closing the front case While the inverter is energized be sure not to open the front case Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock WARNING Be sure not to operate electrical equipment with wet hands Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock WARNING While the inverter is energized be sure not to touch the inverter terminals even when the motor is stopped Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock WARNING If the Retry Mode is selected the motor may suddenly restart after a trip stop Be sure to stop the inverter before approaching the machine be sure to design the machine so that safety for personnel is secure even if it restarts Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel WARNING If the power supply is cut OFF for a short period of time the inverter may restart operation after the power supply recovers if the Run command is active If a restart may pose danger to personnel so be sure to use a lock out circuit so that it will not restart after power recovery Other wise it may cause
170. personnel suoeiado 3 2 3 3 Ko WARNING Be sure not to touch the inside of the energized inverter or to put any conductive object into it Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or fire WARNING If power is turned ON when the Run command is already active the motor will automatically start and injury may result Before turning ON the power confirm that the RUN command is not present WARNING When the Stop key function is disabled pressing the Stop key does not stop the inverter nor will it reset a trip alarm WARNING Be sure to provide a separate hard wired emergency stop switch when the appli cation warrants it gt gt Pr PP P PPP PD 44 Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss With the default SJ7002 inverter configuration a sudden power loss will cause the inverter to shut down immediately If running at the time the motor and load will coast to a stop And without power the inverter s alarm output will not activate This default performance may be fine for applications with loads such as fans and pumps However some loads may require controlled decelerations upon power loss or you may want an alarm signal upon power loss This section describes how to harness regenerative energy so that the motor load actually powers the inverter long enough to control a final deceleration and power the alarm output The dia
171. range R W The starting point for the 120Fh 04623 0 to A014 1 start voltage voltage input range value A014 O L input active range R W The ending point for the 1210h 04624 A013 1 end voltage voltage input range value to 100 A015 O L input start R W 00 Use A011 start value 1211h 04625 0 1 frequency enable 01 Use 0 Hz A016 External frequency filter R W n 1 to 30 where n 1212h 04626 1 to 30 31 1 time const number of samples for average 31 500ms filter A017 Easy sequence function R W 00 Disable 1213h 04627 0 1 enable 01 Enable Reserved 1214h 04628 A019 Multi speed operation R W 00 Binary up to 16 stage 1215h 04629 0 1 selection speed using 4 terminals 01 Single bit up to 8 stage speed using 7 terminals A020 Multi speed frequency R W Defines the first speed of a 1216h 04630 Oorstart 0 01 Hz setting multi speed profile freq to A020 IL 1217h 04631 max freg A220 H Multi speed frequency R W Defines the first speed of a 2216h 08726 Oorstart 0 01 Hz setting 2nd motor multi speed profile for 2nd freq to A220 L motor 2217h 08727 max freq Reserved 2218h 08728 to to 223Ah 08762 A320 Multi speed frequency R W Defines the first speed of a 3216h 12822 Oorstart 0 01 Hz setting 3rd motor multi speed profile for 3rd freq to A320 L otor 3217h 12823 nax freq R
172. range 6 60 Hz 5 50 Hz without motor derating e Models from 0 4 22kW 1 2 to 30hp have built in dynamic braking circuits e Models from 0 4 11kW 1 2 to 15hp have optional built in dynamic braking resistor Model SJ700 037HFEF2 European version e Cooling fan has ON OFF selection to provide longer life A full line of accessories from Hitachi is avail able to complete your motor control application These include Digital remote operator keypad Expansion card for sensor feedback e Braking resistors e Radio noise filters e Built in CE compliance filters Expansion Card Encoder Input Additional factory I O network interface cards to be announced SJ7002 Inverter EEN Digital Operator The SJ7002 Series inverters have a detachable keypad called a digital operator on the front Interface panel of the housing The particular keypad that comes with the inverter depends on the country Components or continent corresponding to the particular model number The standard digital operators occupy just part of the keypad recess in the panel Therefore the inverter comes with a snap in panel filler plate that mounts below the keypad as shown These detachable keypads can be mounted in a NEMA cabinet panel door cut out for example Threaded metal inserts on the rear of the keypads facilitate this external mounting configura tion A short cable then connects the keypad unit to the connector in the inverter ke
173. reduced to B018 A Points x y and z show the adjusted trip current levels in those conditions for given trip times Trip time s 60 x BO18 value x 116 y B018 value x 120 z B018 value x 150 0 5 0 Reduced trip current at B017 Hz 4 54 Using Intelligent Output Terminals 2 2 of g TS a Og av Brake Control Signals Opt Code 19 BRK and 20 BER Symbol Valid for 11to 15 Outputs ALx B120 B121 Required B122 B123 Settings B124 B125 B126 Default Requires terminals config Expansion Card Output Signals Opt Code 21 Z5 and 22 DSE Symbol 23 POK Valid for 11to 15 Outputs ALx Required Settings C961 Default Requires terminals config The Brake Control function enables the inverter to control external braking systems with a particular safety characteristic The brake release logic convention is such that an open circuit fault such as loose wire causes the external brake to engage A complete discussion of the operation of brake control is in External Brake Control Function on page 4 32 The diagram below shows the signals that are important to the External Brake Control function BRK Brake release Brake System BOK Brake confirmation BER Brake error Emergency Brake Input avi Symbol Function Name P Description State BRK
174. representation Be sure to use a 10V full scale DC voltmeter 0 to 10V 1 mA The signal characteristics of terminal FM in PWM signal configuration is shown below FM FM output value 10V T B081 FM terminal 8 bit gain setting OV t C27 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 Selects FM type output I I e T Period T 6 4ms constant 156 Hz 4 67 SJ7002 Inverter To calibrate the meter reading generate a full scale output always ON at terminal FM Then use parameter B08 I gain setting from 0 to 255 to adjust the corresponding full scale reading of the meter For example when the inverter output frequency is 60 Hz change the value of B081 so that the meter reads 60 Hz TIP When using the analog meter for monitoring adjust the meter so it has a zero reading when the FM output is zero Then use scale factor B081 to adjust the FM output so the maximum frequency in the inverter corresponds to a full scale reading on the meter NOTE The indicator accuracy after adjustment is about 5 Depending on the motor the accuracy may exceed this value PWM Smoothing Circuit Note that standard analog output signals are avail able on terminals AM and AMI covered in the next section However you may also wish to smooth the PWM signal at the FM terminal and convert it to an analog signal The FM terminal will then generate a relatively stable DC analog voltage that
175. result Therefore if the warning occurs change the base frequency to an appropriate value These parameters are checked even when the digital operator option code 02 is not specified for the frequency source setting A001 Set frequency speed values are not permitted to be inside the jump frequency ranges if defined When a frequency reference value from a real time source such as keypad potentiometer or analog input are inside a jump frequency range the actual speed is automatically forced to equal the lowest point of the jump range U Q 9 3 2 D Q o auq BuunByuon Operations and Monitoring In This Chapter page be EE EP 2 Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power LOss rrrunnnnnnevnrnnn 4 Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices cccccccccceceeeceeeeeeseeeeeees 7 Using Intelligent Input Terminals ccccccecceesssessseeeseeeeeeeeennnne 13 Using Intelligent Output Terminals rrvrrrvrrrvrrrrvrrnrrrrvrrrvrrrrrrrerennr 43 Analog lnput Operation nneennnennneennee nnee nnne nnne nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnne a 63 Analog Output Operation rvrrrvrrrvvrrvvrrrvrrrvrrrvrrrvrrrnrrrvrrrvrrrnrrsrerere 66 Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control rrrvrrrrrrnvrrrnrrrnrrrrvenr 69 PD Lop JEAN vea 15 Configuring the Inverter for Multiple MOtors cccccsscccsseeeeeeeeees 76 42 Introduction Introduction The previous mate
176. running continuously usually need fan unit replacement at 10 year intervals In addition fan unit replacement is required immediately if the fan has abnormal sound or vibration The fan replacement procedure depends according to the model housing type For inverters with molded plastic housings 1 Loosen the two screws that secure the lower front panel Remove the panel from the inverter 2 Turn OFF power to the inverter and confirm that the Charge Indicator LED is OFF 3 Loosen the two screws that secure the upper front panel Remove the panel from the inverter 4 Press the tabs inward on each side of the cooling fan unit and lift the unit away from the top of the inverter housing 5 Disconnect the fan unit wiring on the circuit board at the top of the inverter Bunooysejqnolp D 5 ox 2 5 3 D 5 D 5 ra oO 6 Remove the defective fan s from the cooling fan mounting plate 6 24 Maintenance and Inspection e C fe lt 02 O Ka 2 H fd re Z C o 2 E 49 xe fa To install the new fan s 1 Slide the fan s into the mounting locations in the mounting plate To ensure the correct airflow be sure that the label on each fan faces toward the vent openings top of inverter Connect the fan wiring to terminals J21 or J22 depending on the inverter model on the main circuit board Put the mounting plate in position on the top of th
177. sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 167Bh 05755 0 to 65530 1 U21 10000 to 65535 P122 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 167Ch 05756 0 to 65530 1 U22 10000 to 65535 P123 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 167Dh 05757 0 to 65530 1 U23 10000 to 65535 P124 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 167Eh 05758 0 to 65530 1 U24 10000 to 65535 P125 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 167Fh 05759 0 to 65530 1 U25 10000 to 65535 P126 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1680h 05760 0 to 65530 1 U26 10000 to 65535 P127 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1681h 05761 0 to 65530 1 U27 10000 to 65535 P128 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1682h 05762 0 to 65530 1 U28 10000 to 65535 P129 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1683h 05763 0 to 65530 1 U29 10000 to 65535 P130 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1684h 05764 0 to 65530 1 U30 10000 to 65535 P131 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1685h 05765 0 to 65530 1 U31 10000 to 65535 Reserved 1686h 05766 to to 2102h 08450 Drive Parameter Settings Tables In This Appendix page JO
178. setting 3rd motor 30 0 30 0 30 0 F004 Keypad Run key routing 00 00 00 J7002 Inverter Standard Functions A Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Namie FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan A001 Frequency source setting 0l 01 02 A002 Run command source setting 01 01 02 A003 Base frequency setting 50 60 60 A203 Base frequency setting 2nd motor 50 60 60 A303 Base frequency setting 3rd motor 50 60 60 A004 Maximum frequency setting 50 60 60 A204 Maximum frequency setting 2nd motor 50 60 60 A304 Maximum frequency setting 3rd motor 50 60 60 gt A005 AT selection 00 00 00 3 A006 02 selection 03 03 03 a AO11 O L input active range start frequency 0 00 0 00 0 00 o A012 O L input active range end frequency 0 00 0 00 0 00 A013 O L input active range start voltage 0 0 0 A014 O L input active range end voltage 100 100 100 A015 O L input start frequency enable 01 01 01 A016 External frequency filter time const 8 8 8 A017 Easy sequence function enable 00 00 00 A019 Multi speed operation selection 00 00 00 A020 Multi speed frequency setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A220 Multi speed frequency setting 2nd motor 0 00 0 00 0 00 A320 Multi speed frequency setting 3rd motor 0 00 0 00 0 00 A021 Multi speed 1 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A022
179. shown to the right The two marks Check WY or Ex X under the Lo Hi subtitle indicate whether Low level and or High level access applies to each parameter as defined in the table below In some lock modes you can edit only F001 and the Multi speed parameter group that includes A020 A220 A320 A021 A035 and A038 Jog However it does not include A019 Multi speed operation selection The editing access to B031 itself is unique and is specified in the right most two columns below F001 and FT B031 Lock S i Standard Parameters Multi speed B031 ntelligent Mode Input Tpu Stop Run Stop or Run Stop Run 00 OFF v Low level Vv v x ON x x x v x 01 OFF v Low level Vv v x ON x x v v x 02 ignored x x x v x 03 ignored x x Y v x 10 ignored v High level v v v NOTE Since the software lock function B031 is always accessible when the motor is stopped this feature is not the same as password protection used in other industrial control devices Keypad Defaults Run Pan pone y Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 pa Se Ba SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 Hi EU USA Jpn B031 Software lock mode HIG G0 Low level access SFT input blocks all edits 01 01 01 Xv selection HDi G I Low level access SFT input blocks edits except F001 and Multi speed parameters MDS G2 No access to edits HIS 03 No access to edits except F001 and Multi speed parameters HiG iQ High level access including B031
180. sm 2decceccvenntsciensateiiesavadsuscsaceneasadecess 6 F Group Main Profile Paramelers eumuaesearm mennene seen 9 A Group Standard Functions svvvenseseanamis nmebdin n 10 B Group Fine Tuning Functions povmuansemmemnrena anm 30 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions errrvrrrnrrrvrrrvrrrvrrrvrrenr 50 H Group Motor Constants Functions rrrvrrrvrrrnrrrrvrrrrrrrrrrrrrenr 66 P Group Expansion Card FUNCHONS vener dv 69 U Group User selectable Menu Functions cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 74 Programming Error CQO nic sccnicedeticncctedpsasdatanatiddansainasdtienidaatiaacs 75 EH Choosing a Programming Device Choosing a Programming Device o 2 _ a te c 5 2D C e O n 0 ob E oO iS av oO Introduction Inverter Programming Keypads Hitachi variable frequency drives inverters use the latest electronics technology for getting the right AC waveform to the motor at the right time The benefits are many including energy savings and higher machine output or productivity The flexibility required to handle a broad range of applications has required ever more configurable options and parameters inverters are now a complex industrial automation component And this can make a product seem diffi cult to use but the goal of this chapter is to make this easier for you As the powerup test in Chapter 2 demon
181. stop lasts 10 seconds the inverter will free run coast for a total of 14 seconds before driving the motor again Parameter B007 Restart Frequency Threshold sets the motor frequency at which the inverter will no longer resume and accelerate instead resuming from 0 Hz complete stop B091 01 Stop Mode free run stop B091 01 Stop Mode free run stop B088 00 Resume from 0Hz B088 01 Resume from current speed Motor Zero frequency start Motor gt 4 B003 wait time speed speed Q 2 ES Og D o Z E FW RV FW RV 53 0 25 ca e O Keypad Defaults Run er Ka Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 JR E SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn B088 Restart mode after FRS 25T OG Restart from 0Hz 00 00 00 XV Selects how the inverter ST G I Restart from frequency detected from resumes operation when actual speed of motor the free run stop FRS is cancelled FIA G2 Restart from active matching frequency B089 Automatic carrier OFF OG Disable 00 00 00 Xv frequency reduction OH G I Enable XV B090 Dynamic braking usage ratio 0 0 to 100 0 00 00 00 XV Set 0 0 to disable dynamic braking Selects the braking duty cycle for the dynamic braking resistor XV total brake ON time per 100 second interval B091 Stop mode selection DEC OG DEC decelerate and stop 00 00
182. system peta Name Description OPE Range and Settings 00 Trip E41 01 Trip E41 after deceleration and stop C076 Action ete 02 No action ignore errors cation error selection 03 Free run stop 04 Decelerate and stop ae Communication timeout before trip 0 00 to 99 99 seconds Limit timer for reception timeout C078 Communication wait time 0 0 to 1000 milliseconds Time to wait until the inverter starts sending a response after reception of a query excluding the silent interval The inverter always sends a response frame after receiving a query frame The inverter does not initiate any communication with the host master B 22 ModBus Mode Communications Message Config Each frame is formatted as follows uration Query Frame Format Header silent interval Slave address Function code Data Error check code Trailer silent interval jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Slave address This is a numer from I to 32 assigned to each inverter slave Only the inverter having the address given as a slave address in the query can receive the query e When slave address 0 is specified the query can be addressed to all inverter simultane ously broadcasting In broadcasting the host master cannot read inverter data nor perform a loopback test Data The data contains a function command The data format used in the SJ7002 corresponds to the ModBus d
183. table exe om een Element Description Size Value a STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 x 2 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 and FF broadcast to all a nodes 2 lt Command Transmission command 2 bytes 08 BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Command and Data CR Control code carriage return I byte CR 0x0D Command 09 The 09 command verifies whether or not it is Transmit frame format possible to set a particular parameter in the EEPROM The frame format of command 08 STX Node Command BCC CR follows the diagram and specification table Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 09 BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Command and Data CR Control code carriage return I byte CR 0x0D The receive frame includes an ACK Receive frame format acknowledge character followed by a 2 byte data field with the result STX Node ACK Data BOC CR Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 ACK Control code ACKnowledge I byte ACK 0x06 Data Parameter value 2 bytes 00 setting
184. that matches your load This allows the inverter to utilize the best thermal overload characteristic for your Hz application 0 5 20 60 120 Output frequency The torque developed in a motor is directly proportional to the current in the windings which is also proportional to the heat generated and temperature over time There fore you must set the thermal overload threshold in terms of current amperes with parameter B012 The range is 50 to 120 of the rated current for each inverter model If the current exceeds the level you specify the inverter will trip and log an event error E05 in the history table The inverter turns the motor output OFF when tripped Separate settings are available for the second and third motors if applicable as shown in the table below Function z vB Code Function Description Data or Range B012 B212 Electronic thermal setting calculated Range is 0 2 x rated current to B312 within the inverter from current output 1 0 x rated current Example 1 setting for SJ700 110LFE2 0 4 to 55kW The rated motor current is 64A The setting range is 0 2 64 to rated current or 12 8A to 64 0A For a setting of B012 64A current at 100 rated current the curve is shown below Example 2 setting for SJ700 750LFE2 75 to 150 kW The rated motor current is 149A The setting range is 0 2 149 to rated current or 29 8A to 149A For a setting of B012 149A current at 100 rated cu
185. the Hot connections are the same Therefore the Neutral connection is theoretically zero This is why inverters that generate 3 phase power for motors do not generally have a Neutral connection to the motor However the Earth Ground connection is important for safety reasons and is provided A measure of rotational force The units of measurement are the product of the distance radius from shaft center axis and force weight applied at that distance Units are usually given as pound feet ounce inches or Newton meters A solid state three terminal device that provides amplification of signals and can be used for switching and control While transistors have a linear operating range inverters use them as high powered switches Recent developments in power semiconductors have produced transis tors capable of handling high voltages and currents all with high reliability The saturation voltage has been decreasing resulting in less heat dissipation Hitachi inverters use state of the art semiconductors to provide high performance and reliability in a compact package See also IGBT and saturation voltage An event that causes the inverter to stop operation is called a trip event as in tripping a circuit breaker The inverter keeps a history log of trip events They also require an action to clear A measure of the internal power loss of a component the difference between the power it consumes and what its output delivers An inverte
186. the Run command is OFF to prevent injury to personnel WARNING You may need to disconnect the load from the motor before performing auto tuning The inverter runs the motor forward and backward for several seconds without regard to load movement limits i J ip U F ID rrr PP PPPP DDD Cautions for Operations and Monitoring CAUTION The heat sink fins will have a high temperature Be careful not to touch them Otherwise there is the danger of getting burned CAUTION The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high speed Be sure check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before operating the inverter Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel CAUTION If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default setting S0Hz 60Hz be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the respective manufacturer Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting their approval Otherwise there is the danger of equipment damage CAUTION It is possible to damage the inverter or other devices if your application exceeds the maximum current or voltage characteristics of a connection point CAUTION Be careful not to turn PID Clear ON and reset the integrator sum when the inverter is in Run Mode output to motor is ON Otherwise this could cause the motor to decelerate rapidly resulting in a trip CAUTION When the motor runs at l
187. the following operational modes are available selected by B040 eine contig 1 Four quadrant individual setting mode This mode sets torque limit in 4 zones forward driving and regenerating reverse driving and regenerating Limits for each quadrant are set with B041 B044 individually 2 Terminal selection mode By use of torque limit select intelligent input terminals 1 and 2 this mode changes and uses torque limits 1 4 set in B041 Intelligent B044 Selected torque limit range is valid in all four Inputs Torque limit quadrants Inputs TRQ1 and TRQ2 apply only to parameter terminal selection mode TRQ2 TRQ1 3 Analog input mode This mode sets torque limit value OFF OFF B041 by the voltage applied to terminal 02 referenced to L for ground An input of 0 10V corresponds to the OFP ON B042 torque limit value of 0 to 200 The selected torque ON OFF B043 limit value is valid in all four quadrants whether ON ON B044 forward or reverse move driving or regenerating 4 Expansion Cards 1 and 2 This function is valid when using the expansion card SJ DG Please refer to the SJ DG instruction manual SJ7002 Inverter KEN When the torque limit enable function TL is assigned to an intelligent input terminal torque limiting occurs only when TL is ON Both the 4 quadrant mode and terminal switching mode of torque limiting use input TL for enable di
188. the transistors will not be exactly the same but they will be close If you find a significance difference a problem may exist NOTE Before measuring the voltage between P and N with the DC current range confirm that the smoothing capacitor is discharged fully then execute the tests DVM Probe Circuit Type Measured Value D1 R PD Non conductin Converter O Q Inverter E i G 3 DAS DE ARNE f PD R Conducting l Di D2 D3 TRI TR2 TRS D2 S PD Non conducting I e e o l i i l A c f PD S Conducting i AA A A F saa A i D3 T PD Non conducting R U Os i 4 e Oi PD T Conducting p EE Converter S i ol i V D4 R N Conducting OF l I I I I I N R Non conducting TT I I Wi 1O I 0 D5 S N Conducting I l l I I I I N S Non conducting l A A AY Gr Th l l l l l D6 T N Conducting i l l i 7 D4 D5 DE TR7 TR4 TRS TRE NE NE oo i O EEE z TR1 U P Non conducting N P U Conducting TR2 Vv P Non conducting P V Conducting 2 TR3 W P Non conducting ag g fa P W Conducting leg Inverter ar TR4 U N Conducting 33 3 N U Non conducting 5 2 38 TRS y N Conduct D N Vv Non conducting TR6 W N Conducting N W Non conducting 6 28 Maintenance and Inspection D CE ie D 2 5 5 FE Q O oO ta g o ke oO DVM Probe Circuit Type Measured Value TR7 RB P Non conducting
189. through an entry exit plate For plastic plates remove the knockout portions of the plate For metal plates with rubber grommets cut an X in the center of the grommet as shown Be especially careful to avoid cutting into the thick outer ring so that the wiring will have a cushion from contacting the metal plate area for logic signal wiring anal Knockout areas for power wiring Cut grommet s for use as shown 5 3 Q gt J 392 z 0 MC fae O 3 3 Q NOTE Some inverter models will have a wiring box for NEMA rating compliance Make sure the wire entry to the NEMA box also has protective cushion from chaffing of insulation Before proceeding please study the caution and warning messages below WARNING Use 75 C Cu wire only or equivalent WARNING Open Type Equipment For models SJ700 750H to SJ700 4000H WARNING A Class 2 circuit wired with Class I wire or equivalent WARNING Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes 240 V maximum For models with suffix L WARNING Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes 480 V maximum For models with suffix H HIGH VOLTAGE Be sure to ground the unit Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or fire HIGH VOLTAGE Wiring work shall be carried out only by qualified personnel Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and
190. to 200 x 2 ms 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv C167 Terminal 8 input response time C168 Terminal FW input response time o o o o o o ol o ol e C169 Multistage speed position to 200 x 10 ms 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv determination time U D 3 Q D Q o aAUG BuunByuon 3 66 H Group Motor Constants Functions 2 a le C 5 2D C e O 42 2 ob E oO iS or ai H Group Motor Constants Functions Introduction The H Group parameters configure the inverter for the motor characteristics You must manually set H003 and H004 values to match the motor Most of the remaining parameters are related to vector control and are in use only when function A044 is set for one of the vector control modes as shown in the diagram The procedure in Auto tuning of Motor Constants on page 4 71 automatically sets all the param eters related to vector control If you configure the inverter to use vector control we highly recommend letting the auto tuning procedure derive the values for you If you want to reset the parameters to the factory default settings use the procedure in Restoring Factory Default Settings on page 6 16 Inverter Torque Control Algorithms V f control constant torque V f control variable torque V f control free setting curve Sensorless vector SLV control Sensorless vector OHz dom
191. to connect an AC power supply to the output termi ow 2 25 nals Otherwise there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of injury and or fire Power Input Power Output NOTE o l L1 L2 L3 Three phase 200 to 240V 50 60 Hz Li L2 L3 Ti T2 T3 Three phase 380 to 480V 50 60 Hz pp gt PPP gt P PP CAUTION Fasten the screws with the specified fastening torqueinthe a 2 2 table below Check for any loosening of screws Otherwise there is the danger of fire CAUTION Remarks for using ground fault interrupter breakers in the main 2 25 power supply Adjustable frequency inverters with CE filters RFI filter and shielded screened motor cables have a higher leakage current toward Earth GND Especially at the moment of switching ON this can cause an inadvertent trip of ground fault interrupter breakers Because of the rectifier on the input side of the inverter there is the possibility to stall the switch off function through small amounts of DC current Please observe the follow ing Use only short time invariant and pulse current sensitive ground fault interrupter breakers with higher trigger current Other components should be secured with separate ground fault interrupter breakers Ground fault interrupter breakers in the power input wiring of an inverter are not an absolute protection against electric shock CAUTION Be sure to install a fuse in each phase of the main power suppl
192. to correspond with Run FW or RV input commands The source of the Run command does not matter so the A002 setting is ignored If both FW and RV inputs are ON the inverter stops motor operation and turns OFF the FR output The FR signal is useful for external devices that need a traditional starting contact signal to coordinate operation with the inverter Forward command Reverse command Starting Contact Signal FR suonee8d0 5 2 fe 5 e 5 Ke The inverter monitors its heatsink temperature to detect overheating You can use parameter C064 Heatsink Overheat Warning Level to set the over temperature threshold for the heatsink in degrees C The inverter will turn ON intelligent output OHF Heatsink Overheat Warning if the heatsink temperature exceeds the value in parameter C064 Signal Opt Code 41 Symbol FR Valid for 11to 15 Outputs ALx Required Settings oe Default Requires terminals config Heatsink Overheat Warning Opt Code 42 Symbol OHF Valid for 11to 15 Outputs ALx Required Settings C064 Default Requires terminals config 4 60 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Low Output Current Signal The inverter monitors the output current to the motor according to parameter C038 Low Current Indication Output Mode Select Use parameter C039 Low Current Indication Detection Level to set the low current threshold The Low
193. to loosen the screws and tilt the cover outward for removal The screws are retained in the cover 5 2 z 30 or P r Se DE h Oo 3 3 Q Retention screws Notice the large power terminals at the bottom of the wiring area The rubber grommets below the power terminals are for wire entry exit to the power source and motor Never operate the inverter with the front panel removed The control terminals connect logic or analog signals for control and monitoring of the inverter The nearby alarm relay provides both normally open and normally closed logic for interface to an external alarm The alarm circuit may carry hazardous live voltages even when the main power to the inverter is OFF So never directly touch any terminal or circuit component HITACHI Charge lamp i indicator Logic connector gt Power terminals Wire entry exit plate WARNING Be sure to wait 10 minutes after powerdown and verify the charge lamp indicator is OFF to proceed Otherwise there is the risk of electric shock 24 Orientation to Inverter Features D E amp 5 oO 2 jo 2 _ Oo gt and Installation 3 Third level access The SJ7002 provides for field installation of interface circuits These circuits are on expansion cards to be installed in the expansion bay To access the expansion bay you will need to remove the upper front panel Use the latch to release the digital operator the
194. to rotate the force vector in the motor without the use of a shaft position sensor angular Benefits include an increase in torque at the lowest speed and the cost savings from the lack of a shaft position sensor The setpoint is the desired value of a process variable of interest See also Process Variable PV and PID Loop An AC power source consisting of Hot and Neutral wires An Earth Ground connection usually accompanies them In theory the voltage potential on Neutral stays at or near Earth Ground while Hot varies sinusoidally above and below Neutral This power source is named Single Phase to differentiate it from three phase power sources Some Hitachi inverters can accept single phase input power but they all output three phase power to the motor See also three phase The difference between the theoretical synchronous speed of a motor at no load determined by its inverter output waveforms and the actual speed Some slip is essential in order to develop torque to the load but too much will cause excessive heat in the motor windings and or cause the motor to stall A nick name for the appearance of the rotor frame assembly for an AC induction motor The windings in a motor that are stationary and coupled to the power input of the motor See also rotor The output frequency that the inverter first produces as the frequency command setting increases from zero The start frequency is programmable and is important to set
195. to terminal N do not connect to N yet 5 Remove the ferrite filter from the original jumper wire and then slide it onto the new wires connecting to terminals RO and TO Be sure to save the original jumper in a safe place 6 Connect the wire from RO to P and connect the wire from TO to N as shown More information on power loss related alarm functions see Instantaneous Power Failure Under voltage Signal on page 4 48 The following table lists the functions related to the controlled deceleration at power loss feature After making the wiring change use function B050 to enable the feature Use BOS1 to determine the point at which a decaying DC bus voltage will trigger the controlled deceleration Use parameter B054 to specify an initial step wise deceleration at power loss and B053 to specify the duration of the linear deceleration Note that this feature also affects the output signals that indicate instantaneous power fail and under voltage conditions see Instantaneous Power Failure Under voltage Signal on page 4 48 Func nevi Code Name Description Range B050 Controlled deceleration and Allows inverter control using regen Two option codes stop on power loss erative energy to decelerate after loss 00Disable of input power requires jumper 01Enable change B051 DC bus voltage trigger level Sets trigger for controlled decelera 0 0 to 1000 V during power l
196. torque boost frequency adjustment 3rd motor 0 0 to 50 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 Vv Sets the frequency of the V f breakpoint A in graph top of previous page for torque boost A044 V f characteristic curve selection Vo 22 V f constant torque 00 00 00 xx Ist motor Torque control modes VF I VI variable torque FREE W IF G2 V f free setting curve SLY 03 Sensorless vector SLV SLY 04 OHz domain SLV vi GS Vector control with encoder feedback A244 V f characteristic curve selection Vo 22 V f constant torque 00 00 00 xx 2nd motor Torque control modes VF I VI variable torque FREE W IF OG V f free setting curve SLY 03 Sensorless vector SLV BSL Y 04 OHz domain SLV 3 18 A Group Standard Functions 9 2 a D CE 5 2D C e O n bi 2 E oO oO oO Keypad Defaults Run ee er Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 EE SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 Lo Hi EU USA Jpn A344 V f characteristic curve VC OG V f constant torque 00 00 00 xx selection 3rd motor Torque control modes VF G I V f variable torque A045 V f gain setting 0 to 255 100 100 100 Vv Sets voltage gain of the inverter A046 Automatic torque boost voltage gain 0 to 255 100 100 100 Vw Voltage compensation gain for automatic torque boost A246 Automatic torque boost voltage gain 2nd motor 0 to 255 100 100 100
197. 0 Speed 3 1 0 0 Speed 4 1 0 0 0 Speed 5 1 0 0 0 0 Speed 6 1 0 0 0 0 0 Speed 7 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 18 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Jogging The Jog input JG is used to command the Command motor to rotate slowly in small increments JG for manual operation The speed is limited Opt Code 06 to 10 Hz The frequency for the jogging FW operation is set by parameter A038 Jogging Symbol UG does not use an acceleration ramp There RV 7 fore setting the jogging frequency A038 too MOr 1 to 8 high will cause i mig mai Ta Oo Inputs gh will cause inverter tripping A002 01 A jog command may arrive while the motor Output A038 gt B082 is running You can program the inverter to frequency J AS Required A038 gt 0 either ignore or respond to a jog command Settings 4039 00 to in this case by using function A039 The 05 type of deceleration used to end a motor jog Default is also selectable by programming function A039 Six jog mode options are defined below terminal 3 Jogging During Motor Operation Jog Deceleration Method Disabled A039 Enabled A039 00 03 Free run stop coasting 01 04 Deceleration normal level and stop 02 05 Use DC braking and stop In the left example diagram below the Jog command is ignored In the right example diagram a jog command interrupts a Run mode operat
198. 0 motor A044 V F characteristic curve selection 00 00 00 A244 V F characteristic curve selection 2nd motor 00 00 00 A344 V F characteristic curve selection 3rd motor 00 00 00 A045 V f gain setting 100 100 100 A046 Automatic torque boost voltage gain 100 100 100 A246 Automatic torque boost voltage gain 2nd motor 100 100 100 A047 Automatic torque boost slip gain 100 100 100 A247 Automatic torque boost slip gain 2nd motor 100 100 100 A051 DC braking enable 00 00 00 A052 DC braking frequency setting 0 50 0 50 0 50 A053 DC braking wait time 0 0 0 0 0 0 A054 DC braking force during deceleration 0 0 0 A055 DC braking time for deceleration 0 0 0 0 0 0 A056 DC braking edge or level detection for DB input 01 01 Ol A057 DC braking force for starting 0 0 0 A058 DC braking time for starting 0 0 0 0 0 0 A059 DC braking carrier frequency setting 5 0 5 0 5 0 A061 Frequency upper limit setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A261 Frequency upper limit setting 2nd motor 0 00 0 00 0 00 A062 Frequency lower limit setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A262 Frequency lower limit setting 2nd motor 0 00 0 00 0 00 A063 Jump center frequency setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A065 A067 J7002 Inverter A Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Nome FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan A064 Jump hystere
199. 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv Sets time delay between arrival at release frequency and the brake release signal D B122 Brake Wait Time for Acceleration 0 00 to 5 00 seconds 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv 2 5 2 Sets time delay from receipt of brake confirmation signal to start of motor acceleration D 2 2 B123 Brake Wait Time for Stopping 0 00 to 5 00 seconds 0 00 0 00 000 Xv d 5 Sets time delay from brake confirmation signal turns OFF to inverter deceleration to 0 Hz Ea 3 B124 Brake Wait Time for Confirmation 0 00 to 5 00 seconds 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv Sets the wait time for confirmation after turn ON OFF of brake release If confirmation is not received during the specified wait time the inverter will trip with an external brake error B125 Brake Release Frequency Setting 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv Sets the frequency of the brake release output signal after delay set by B121 B126 Brake Release Current Setting 0 to 1 80 x rated current Rated current for XV inverter Sets the minimum inverter current level above which the brake release signal is permitted B127 Braking Frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv BRK Brake release lt BOK Brake confirmation BER Brake error External Brake System Emergency Brake or alarm etc SJ7002 Inverter EJ Overvoltage B130 B131 Over voltage LADSTOP Enable Over voltage LADSTOP Level The over
200. 0 370HFU2 E All 1 14 8 20 0 60 45 SJ700 450HFU2 E All 1 14 8 20 0 75 55 SJ700 550HFU2 E All 2 0 14 5 19 6 XIV Motor ee Output ee del Power Terminals Wire Size Range AWG E HP kW ft Ibs N m 100 75 8J700 750HFU2 E All 1 0 Il 1 0 14 8 20 0 125 90 J700 900HFU2 E All 1 0 Il 1 0 14 8 20 0 150 110 SJ700 1100HFU2 E All 3 0 113 0 25 8 35 0 150 132 SJ700 1320HFE2 All 3 0 II 3 0 25 8 35 0 SJ700 1500HFU2 250 185 SJ700 1850HFU2 E R S T U V W 250 kcmil x 2 55 3 75 0 P PD N 300 kcmil x 2 6 0 8 1 P N Braking unit 1 55 3 75 0 400V Earth GND 250 kemil 28 9 39 2 400 315 SJ700 3150HFU2 E R S T U V W 400 kcmil x 2 32 5 44 0 P PD N 500 kcmil x 2 14 8 20 P N Braking unit 250 kemil 32 5 44 0 Earth GND 400 kemil 28 9 39 2 500 400 SJ700 4000HFU2 E R S T U V W 600 kcmil x 2 38 4 52 0 P PD N 800 kemil x 2 14 8 20 P N Braking unit 250 kemil x 2 38 4 52 0 Earth GND 600 kemil 28 9 39 2 XV SJ7002 Inverter Fuse and Circuit The inverter s input power wiring must include UL Listed dual element 600V fuses or UL Breaker Sizes Listed inverse time 600V circuit breakers Input ie er 200V Ampere Rating an ne u
201. 0 to 10 erating 3 Constant speed operation 4 Accelerating 5 Forward rotation 6 Reverse rotation 7 Forward to reverse rotation transition 9 Starting forward rotation 10 Starting reverse rotation PID feedback R W 0006h 00006 Reserved 0007h 00007 to to 0010h 00016 B 36 ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q Q 2 lt Holding Registers D Group Monitor Functions Network Data Func Code Name Description Register Range Res hex dec D001 H Output frequency monitor Real time display of output 1001h 04097 Oto40000 0 01 Hz frequency to motor DOOL ijik from 0 0 to 400 0 Hz 10926 PS D002 Output current monitor Filtered display of output current 1003h 04099 0 to 9999 0 01 A to motor 100 mS internal filter time constant D003 Rotation direction monitor 0 Stop 1004h 04100 0 1 2 I Forward 2 Reverse D004 Process variable PV PID Displays the scaled PID process 1005h 04101 0 to 9990 0 1 feedback monitor variable feedback value A75 is D004 L scale factor 1006h 04102 D005 Intelligent input terminal Displays the state of the intelli 1007h 04103 bit 0 1 bit I bit status gent input terminals 7 8 termi nals D006 Intelligent output terminal Displays the state of the intel
202. 0 to 99 99 100 0 to xx 999 9 1000 to 9999 ratio unit less H030 Auto tuned motor constant R1 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Ohms According to inverter xx H230 Auto tuned motor constant R1 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Ohms EE xx H031 Auto tuned motor constant R2 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Ohms According to inverter xx H231 Auto tuned motor constant R2 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Ohms mune xx H032 Auto tuned motor constant L Ist motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 mH According to inverter xx H232 Auto tuned motor constant L 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 mH amg xx H033 Auto tuned motor constant Ip Ist motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 mH According to inverter xx H233 Auto tuned motor constant Ip 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 655 3 mH oT xx H034 Auto tuned motor constant J 1st motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 99 99 100 0 to According to inverter xx 999 9 1000 to 9999 ratio unit less rating H234 Auto constant J 2nd motor 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 99 99 100 0 to xx 999 9 1000 to 9999 ratio unit less H050 PI proportional gain for 1st motor 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 100 0 100 0 Yy H250 PI proportional gain for 2nd motor 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 100 0 100 0 Y yY HO51 PI integral gain for 1st motor 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 100 0 100 0 Y y H251 Pl integral gain for 2nd motor 0 0 to 999 9 1000 100 0 100 0 100 0
203. 00 0 00 P072 Forward position range setting 268435455 268435455 268435455 P073 Reverse position range setting 268435455 268435455 268435455 P074 Position teaching selection 00 00 00 P100 Easy sequence parameter U00 0 0 0 P101 Easy sequence parameter U01 0 0 0 P102 Easy sequence parameter U02 0 0 0 P103 Easy sequence parameter U03 0 0 0 P104 Easy sequence parameter U04 0 0 0 P105 Easy sequence parameter U05 0 0 0 P106 Easy sequence parameter U06 0 0 0 P107 Easy sequence parameter U07 0 0 0 P108 Easy sequence parameter U08 0 0 0 P109 Easy sequence parameter U09 0 0 0 P110 Easy sequence parameter U10 0 0 0 P111 Easy sequence parameter U11 0 0 0 0 18 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry P Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Name FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan P112 Easy sequence parameter U12 0 0 0 P113 Easy sequence parameter U13 0 0 0 P114 Easy sequence parameter U14 0 0 0 P115 Easy sequence parameter U15 0 0 0 P116 Easy sequence parameter U16 0 0 0 P117 Easy sequence parameter U17 0 0 0 P118 Easy sequence parameter U18 0 0 0 P119 Easy sequence parameter U19 0 0 0 P120 Easy sequence parameter U20 0 0 0 o P121 Easy sequence parameter U21 0 0 0 5 P122 Easy sequence parameter U22 0 0 0 P123 Ea
204. 00 to 65530 NOTE Settings C081 C082 C083 C121 C122 C123 are factory calibrated for each inverter Do not change these settings unless absolutely necessary Note that if you restore factory defaults for all parameters these settings will not change Miscellaneous The following table contains miscellaneous functions not in other function groups Functions Keypad Defaults Ran Aer e pen Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 pe ESE di SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn C091 Debug mode enable MDB OG No display 00 00 00 xx MD G I Display C101 Up Down memory mode HO STR OG Clear last frequency return to 00 00 00 Xv selection default frequency F001 Controls speed setpoint for STR G I Keep last frequency adjusted by the inverter after power cycle UP DWN C102 C103 Reset Mode Restart Mode The reset mode selection set via parameter C102 determines how the inverter responds to the RS intelligent input signal or keypad Stop Reset key in a trip condition The options allow you to cancel the trip on either the OFF to ON or ON to OFF transition of RS and if desired stop the inverter if it is in Run Mode A trip event causes the inverter output to the motor to turn OFF immediately If in Run Mode when the trip SJ7002 Inverter 3 63 occurred the inverter and motor will enter free run stop coasting operation In some applica tions the
205. 00000 12 Run Mode time monitor hours 1 8 bytes Dec ASCII code 13 Power ON time monitor hours 1 8 bytes Dec ASCII code The eight bytes for intelligent input or intelligent output data have a bit set in the data field for each T O point that is ON according to the following table Terminal Monitor Item Data 1 Input 1 00000001 2 Input 2 00000002 3 Input 3 00000004 4 Input 4 00000008 5 Input 5 00000010 6 Input 6 00000020 7 Input 7 00000040 8 Input 8 00000080 FW Forward input 00000100 11 Output I 00000001 12 Output 2 00000002 13 Output 3 00000003 14 Output 4 00000008 15 Output 5 00000010 AL Alarm relay 00000020 SJ7002 Inverter ESIE Command 04 The 04 command reads the status of the inverter Transmit frame format The frame format of command 04 follows the diagrams and specification tables The transmit STX Node Command BCO CR frame has no data field Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 04 gt BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node 3 Command and Data a CR Control code carriage return 1 byte CR 0x0D The receive frame has an 8 byte data field Receive frame format containing values
206. 003 B007 ie Settings C102 C103 22 0 g Default 1 terminal The AT terminal operates in conjunction with parameter setting A005 to determine the analog input terminals that are enabled for current or voltage input Setting A006 determines whether the signal will be bipolar allowing for a reverse direction range Note that current input signal cannot be bipolar and cannot reverse direction must use FW and RV command with current input operation The basic operation of the AT intelligent input is as follows AT ON and A005 00 AT will enable terminals OI L for current input 4 to 20mA AT ON and A005 01 AT will enable terminals 02 L for voltage input e AT OFF Terminals O L are enabled for voltage input A005 may be equal to 00 or 01 in this case Be sure to set the frequency source setting A001 01 to select the analog input terminals Please refer to Analog Input Operation on page 4 63 for more information on bipolar input configuration and the operating characteristics of analog inputs The RS terminal causes the inverter to i turn OFF the motor output and execute a gt 12ms powerup reset If the inverter is in Trip RS FT eae Mode the reset cancels the Trip state approx 30ms When the signal RS is turned ON and i OFF the inverter executes the reset opera Alarm output tion The minimum pulse width for RS must be 12 ms or greater The alarm outpu
207. 004Dh 00077 D090 Programming error R Displays programming error 004Eh 00078 Warning monitor code code Reserved 004Fh 00079 to to O8FFh 02303 ModBus Data Listing Holding Registers D Group Monitor Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec Write to EEPROM W 00 Motor constant calculation 0900h 02304 0000 01 Set data storage in 0001 EEPROM other Other Motor constant recalcu lt lation and set data storage in 5 EEPROM a T Reserved 0901h 02305 to to 1000h 4096 D102 DC voltage monitoring Displays the DC Bus voltage 1026h 04134 0 to 9999 0 1 V D103 BRD load factor monitor Displays the running average 1027h 04135 0 to 1000 0 1 ing Dynamic Braking usage ratio ED D104 Electronic thermal Displays the motor electronic 1028h 04136 0 to 1000 0 1 overload monitoring thermal overload estimated temperature ratio If the value reaches 100 the inverter will trip E05 Reserved 1029h 04137 to to 102Dh 04141 Note 1 Assume that the inverter current rating is 1000 for D002 Note 2 When the value is 10000 100 0 seconds a value in the second decimal place is ignored SJ7002 Inverter Trip Factor Code HIGH order Trip Factor Code LOW ord
208. 01 2 Function code 08 2 Function code 08 3 Test subcode high 00 3 Test subcode high 00 order order 4 Test subcode low 00 4 Test subcode low 00 order order 5 Data high order Any 5 Data high order Any 6 Data low order Any 6 Data low order Any 7 CRC 16 high order CRC 7 CRC 16 high order AD 8 CRC 16 low order CRC 8 CRC 16 low order 23 Note 1 Broadcasting is disabled The test subcode is for echo 00h 00h only and not available to the other commands SJ7002 Inverter Ez Write in Coils OFh This function writes data in consecutive coils An example follows e Change the state of intelligent input terminal 1 to 6 of an inverter having a slave address eg This example assumes the intelligent input terminals have terminal states listed below Item Data Intelligent input terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 Coil number 7 8 9 10 11 12 Terminal status ON ON ON OFF ON OFF L 2 si Ww Query Response No Field Name urampi No Field Name Example hex hex 1 Slave address 1 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code OF 2 Function code OF 3 Coil start number 00 3 Coil start number 00 high order high order 4 Coil start number low 06 4 Coil start number low 06 order order 5 Number of coils high 00 5 Number of coils high 00 order 2 order 2 6 Number of coils low 06 6 Number of
209. 020000000000000 0000000000400000 0040000000000000 0000000000800000 0080000000000000 0000000001000000 0100000000000000 0000000002000000 0200000000000000 0000000004000000 0400000000000000 0000000008000000 0800000000000000 0000000010000000 1000000000000000 0000000020000000 2000000000000000 0000000040000000 4000000000000000 0000000080000000 8000000000000000 SJ7002 Inverter BG The arrangement of the terminal assignment data permits you to assign all inputs in a single command The example below shows a transmission to the inverter at address Node 1 to set the Forward command Multi speed 1 and Multi speed 2 0x0000000000000001 0x0000000000000004 Sum the three data strings 0x0000000000000008 0x000000000000000D STX 101 02 I 0x000000000000000D I BCC CR to ASCII 02 30 31 30 31 30 30 30 30 303030 30 303030 30 303030 68 30 35 0D g xipuaddy Command 03 The 03 command reads the monitor data as a single block The frame format of command 03 follows the Transmit frame format diagram and specification table The transmit frame has no data field STX Node Command BCC CR Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 03 BCC Block
210. 05164 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz for decel setting threshold for the C043 IL R W output frequency during 142Dh 05165 deceleration C044 PID deviation level setting R W Sets the PID loop error 142Eh 05166 Oto 1000 0 1 threshold ISP PVI absolute value to trigger intelligent output OD C045 H Frequency arrival setting R W 0 0 to 99 99 142Fh 05167 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz for acceleration 2 100 0 to 400 0 Hz C045 L R W 1430h 05168 C046 H Frequency arrival setting R W 0 0 to 99 99 1431h 05169 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz for deceleration 2 7 100 0 to 400 0 Hz C046 IL R W 1432h 05170 Reserved 1433h 05171 to to 1437h 05175 C052 Maximum PID feedback R W 0 0 to 100 0 1438h 05176 Oto 1000 0 1 PV data C053 Minimum PID feedback R W 0 0 to 100 0 1439h 05177 Oto 1000 0 1 PV data Reserved 143Ah 05178 C055 Over torque forward R W Threshold for intelligent 143Bh 05179 Oto 180 1 driving level setting output terminal OTQ quadrant I C056 Over torque reverse R W Threshold for intelligent 143Ch 05180 Oto 180 1 regenerating level setting output terminal OTQ quadrant IT C057 Over torque reverse R W Threshold for intelligent 143Dh 05181 Oto 180 1 driving level setting output terminal OTQ quadrant II C058 Over torque forward R W Threshold for intelligent 143Eh 05182 Oto 180
211. 071 01 if you want PID loop control enabled all the time Do not enable disable PID control while the motor is running inverter is in Run Mode Do not turn ON the PIDC input while the motor is running inverter is in Run Mode CAUTION Be careful not to turn PID Clear ON and reset the integrator sum when the inverter is in Run Mode output to motor is ON Otherwise this could cause the motor to decelerate rapidly resulting in a trip When sensorless vector control OHz sensorless vector control or vector control with sensor is selected for the control method the Control Gain Switching function selects between two sets of gains in the internal speed loop These gains are used in proportional and integral compensa tion When Control Gain Switching is not selected for an intelligent input terminal the default gains in effect correspond to the OFF state of CAS Use PPI P PI Control Switching to select between proportional and proportional integral control Symbol Function Name FR Description CAS Control Gain Switching ON _ Gains in parameters H070 H071 and H072 are selected OFF Gains in parameters H050 H051 H052 or H250 H251 H252 2nd motor are selected PPI P PI Control Switching ON _ Selects Proportional control P OFF Selects Proportional Integral control PI The table below lists the functions and parameter settings related to internal speed loop gains
212. 1 ratio Set 0 0 to disable dynamic braking B091 Stop mode selection R W 00 DEC decelerate and stop 135Eh 04958 0 1 01 FRS free run to stop B092 Cooling fan control R W 00 Fan always ON 135Fh 04959 0 1 01 Fan ON during RUN OFF during STOP Reserved 1360h 04960 Reserved 1361h 04961 B095 Dynamic braking control R W 00 Disable 1362h 04962 0 1 2 01 Enable during RUN only 02 Enable always B096 Dynamic braking activa R W 330 to 380 V 200V class 1363h 04963 330 to 380 1V tion level 660 to 760 V 400V class 660 to 760 Reserved 1364h 04964 B098 Thermistor for thermal R W 00 Disable 1365h 04965 0 1 2 protection control 01 Enable PTC thermistor 02 Enable NTC thermistor B099 Thermal protection level R W Thermistor resistance threshold 1366h 04966 0 to 9999 1Q setting at which trip occurs B100 Free setting V f freq 1 R W 0 to Free setting V f freq 2 1367h 04967 Oto V f2 1 Hz B101 Free setting V f voltage 1 R W 0 0 to 800 0 V 1368h 04968 0 to 8000 0 1 V B102 Free setting V f freq 2 R W 0 to Free setting V f freq 3 1369h 04969 0 to V f3 1 Hz B103 Free setting V f voltage 2 R W 0 0 to 800 0 V 136Ah 04970 0 to 8000 0 1 V B104 Free setting V f freq 3 R W 0 to Free setting V f freq 4 136Bh 04971 0 to
213. 1 Output frequency setting lt A020 A220 Multi speed freq setting 1st 2nd motor 2 G3 u23 A061 A261 Frequency upper limit lt B082 Start frequency adjustment setting 1st 2nd motor 4538 4232 A062 A262 Frequency lower limit lt setting 1st 2nd motor 4035 482635 F001 Output frequency setting lt A020 A220 Multi speed freq setting 8335 A320 lst 2nd 3rd motor 45365 A021 to A035 Multi speed freq settings lt 5537 A038 Jog frequency setting lt Programming Error Codes 9 2 a te fa T 5 2D C e O no 2 ob E ca iS av ai Programming Error Parameter out of bounds Boundary defined by Code net a Code Description lt gt Code Description 45585 4255 F001 Output frequency setting gt f x A063 A064 Jump center frequency H385 A020 A220 Multi speed freq setting lt f x A065 A066 jump hysteresis frequency A320 1st 2nd 3rd motor A067 A068 width setting 4585 A021 to A035 Multi speed freq settings gt f x See note after table lt f x Programming Error Parameter out of bounds Boundary defined by Cete Code Description lt gt Code Description 509 Hess A061 A261 Frequency upper limit gt B112 Free setting V f frequency 7 setting 1st 2nd motor 4592 gege A062 A262 Frequency lower limit gt setting 1st 2nd motor 095 48295
214. 1 01 B039 Automatic user parameter function enable 00 00 00 B040 Torque limit selection 00 00 00 B041 Torque limit 1 forward driving in 4 quadrant 150 150 150 mode B042 Torque limit 2 reverse regenerating in 150 150 150 4 quadrant mode B043 Torque limit 3 reverse driving in 4 quadrant 150 150 150 mode B044 Torque limit 4 forward regenerating in 150 150 150 4 quadrant mode B045 Torque limit LADSTOP enable 00 00 00 B046 Reverse Run protection enable 00 00 00 B050 Controller deceleration and stop on power loss 00 00 00 B051 DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss 0 0 0 0 0 0 B052 Over voltage threshold during power loss 360 0 720 0 360 0 720 0 360 0 720 0 B053 Deceleration time setting during power loss 1 00 1 00 1 00 B054 Initial output frequency decrease during power loss 0 00 0 00 0 00 B055 Proportional gain setting for non stop operation at 0 20 0 20 0 20 power loss B056 Integral time setting for non stop operation at 100 100 100 power loss B060 O input max limit level of window comparator 100 100 100 B061 O input min limit level of window comparator 0 0 0 B062 O input hysteresis width of window comparator 0 0 0 B063 OI input max limit level of window comparator 100 100 100 B064 OI input min limit level of window comparator 0 0 0 B065 OI input hysteresis width of window comparator 0 0 0 B066 02 input maximum limit level of window 100 100 100 comparator B067 02 input minimum limit leve
215. 100 100 100 C109 AM bias adjustment 0 0 0 C110 AMI bias adjustment 20 20 20 C111 Overload setting 2 Rated current for each inverter model C121 O input zero calibration Factory set C122 OT input zero calibration Factory set C123 02 input zero calibration Factory set C130 Terminal 11 ON delay time 0 0 0 0 0 0 C131 Terminal 11 OFF delay time 0 0 0 0 0 0 C132 Terminal 12 ON delay time 0 0 0 0 0 0 C133 Terminal 12 OFF delay time 0 0 0 0 0 0 C134 Terminal 13 ON delay time 0 0 0 0 0 0 C135 Terminal 13 OFF delay time 0 0 0 0 0 0 C136 Terminal 14 ON delay time 0 0 0 0 0 0 SJ7002 Inverter C 13 N xipueddy C Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Name FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan C137 Terminal 14 OFF delay time 0 0 0 0 0 0 C138 Terminal 15 ON delay time 0 0 0 0 0 0 C139 Terminal 15 OFF delay time 0 0 0 0 0 0 C140 Relay output ON delay time 0 0 0 0 0 0 C141 Relay output OFF delay time 0 0 0 0 0 0 C142 Logic output 1 function A 00 00 00 C143 Logic output 1 function B 00 00 00 C144 Logic output 1 operator 00 00 00 C145 Logic output 2 function A 00 00 00 C146 Logic output 2 function B 00 00 00 C147 Logic output 2 operator 00 00 00 C148 Logic output 3 function A 00 00 00 C149 Logic output 3 function B 00 00 00 C150 Logic output 3 operator 00 00
216. 100 100 100 Xv Lower limit B067 B068 x 2 B067 O2 input minimum limit level of window comparator 100 to 100 100 100 100 Xv Lower limit B066 B068 x 2 B068 02 input hysteresis width of window comparator 0 to 10 0 0 0 Xv Lower limit B066 B067 x 2 B070 O input disconnect threshold 0 to 100 255 255 255 Xv re 255 Ignore setting XV B071 OI input disconnect threshold 0 to 100 255 255 255 Xv re 255 Ignore setting Xv B072 O2 input disconnect threshold 0 to 100 127 127 127 Xv re i27 Ignore setting Xv Miscellaneous B083 Carrier frequency adjustment The internal switching frequency of the inverter Functions circuitry also called the chopper frequency It is called the carrier frequency because the lower AC output frequency of the inverter rides the carrier The faint high pitched sound you hear when the inverter is in Run Mode is characteristic of switching power supplies in general The carrier frequency is adjustable from 500 Hz to 15 kHz the upper limit varies depending on the inverter rating The audible sound decreases at the higher frequencies but RFI noise and leakage current may be increased Refer to the specification derating curves in Chapter I to determine the maximum allowable carrier frequency setting for your particular inverter and environmental conditions NOTE When the inverter is in sensorless vector mode use
217. 11 41 90 11 41 90 L Exhaust Inverter model 15 0 59 SJ700 1850HFU2 HFE2 5 p lt 368 o ara 32 z 0 MC fe Oo 5 Q 965 37 99 995 39 17 15 0 59 Air intake 4 M12 Threaded holes for eyebolts DC reactor model DCL H 185 4 11x18 0 43x0 70 M6 Grounding terminal 270 10 62 max 240 9 44 max For M16 500 19 68 max 214 Step by Step Basic Installation Dimensional drawings continued NOTE The following crimp terminals are included with UL Listed inverter models SJ700 1850HFU2 HFE2 Terminal Corresponding Corresponding Type StrandedWire Size mm Screw Size z R38 8 R26 66 42 42 M8 6 38 16 R26 66 42 42 M16 5 T R150 16 117 2 152 05 M16 ka 2 o D 25 a Model o 8 4 0 33 42 7 1 68 Model o 17 0 67 52 5 2 07 R38 8 R38 16 N N 17 7 0 70 Sls 0 55 X AN e m 33 7 20 5 I va 2 Model 17 0 67 R38 8 36 0 90 1 06 19 5 0 77 26 5 1 04 Q mm a 0 13 SJ7002 Inverter Dimensional drawings continued 3 0 15 0 59 2 M12 Eyebolts 680 26 77 290 11 41 OA 450 17 71 Exhaust 15 0 59 2 M12 Threaded holes Inverter model J700 3150HFU2 HFE2 1270 50 0 15 0 59 Air intake 50 1 96 50 1 96 4
218. 125Fh 04703 0 1 2 01 PID operation ON 02 PID operation ON with inverted output A072 PID proportional gain R W 0 2 to 5 0 1260h 0474 2 to 50 0 2 A073 PID integral time constant R W 0 0 to 999 9 1000 to 3600 1261h 04705 0 to 36000 0 1 sec seconds A074 PID derivative gain R W 0 0 to 99 99 100 0 seconds 1262h 04706 0 to 10000 0 01 sec A075 PV scale conversion R W 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 1263h 04707 1 to 9999 0 01 seconds B 49 SJ7002 Inverter Holding Registers A Group Standard Functions g xipueddy Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec A076 PV source setting R W 00 OI current input 1264h 04708 0 to 3 10 01 O voltage input 02 Communication input 03 Pulse train freq input 10 Calculate function output A077 Reverse PID action R W 00 PID input SP PV 1265h 04709 0 1 normal 01 PID input SP PV reverse A078 PID output limit R W Range is 0 0 to 100 0 1266h 04710 Oto 1000 0 1 sec A079 PID feed forward select R W 00 Disable 1267h 04711 0 to3 01 O voltage input 02 OI current input 03 02 voltage input Reserved 1268h 04712 A081 AVR function select R W 00 AVR
219. 2 active state R W 00 Normally open N O 140Ch 05132 C013 Terminal 3 active state R W 01 Normally closed N C 140Dh 05133 C014 Terminal 4 active state R W 140Eh 05134 C015 Terminal 5 active state R W 140Fh 05135 C016 Terminal 6 active state R W 1410h 05136 C017 Terminal 7 active state R W 1411h 05137 C018 Terminal 8 active state R W 1412h 05138 C019 Terminal FW active state R W 1413h 05139 Reserved 1414h 05140 C021 Terminal 11 function R W 1415h 05141 0 to 13 19 to 26 C022 Terminal 12 function R W 1416h 05142 j C023 Terminal 13 function R W See Output Terminal 1417h 05143 C024 Terminal 14 function R W Configuration on 1418h 05144 page 3 55 C025 Terminal 15 function R W 1419h 05145 C026 Alarm relay terminal R W 141Ah 05146 function C027 FM signal selection R W See Output Terminal 141Bh 05147 Oto 10 12 C028 AM signal selection R W Configuration on 141Ch 05148 C029 AMI signal selection R W page 3 55 141Dh 05149 C030 Digital current monitor R W Current with digital current 141Eh 05150 200 to 0 1 reference value monitor output at 1 44 kHz 2000 C031 Terminal 11 active state R W Select logic convention two 141Fh 05151 0 I 7 option codes C032 Terminal 12 active state R W 00 Normally
220. 2 z D 3 D 3 D 3 Q ko 3 Connect the capacitor unit to the main circuit terminal block by using the two 2 terminal screws Secure the capacitor mounting plate to the inverter housing by using the screws Replace the wire entry plate Replace the lower front panel cover and secure it with screws 6 22 Maintenance and Inspection e C fe lt 02 O Ka 2 H fd re Z a C o 2 E 49 xe fa For inverters with sheet metal housings 1 Aw PF wh Loosen the two screws that secure the lower front panel Remove the panel from the inverter Turn OFF power to the inverter and confirm that the Charge Indicator LED is OFF Remove the lower screws from terminal block terminals P and N Remove the screws that secure the capacitor mounting plate Pull down the capacitor mounting plate Remove the bus bar and resistors Then remove the capacitor unit from the capacitor mounting plate Lower screws terminals P and N Capacitor mounting plate Capacitor unit To install the new capacitor unit N97 PS Ye NE Place the capacitor unit on the mounting plate and secure the unit with screws Mount the bus bar and resistors in the original positions and secure them with screws Slide the capacitor mounting plate into the inverter housing Secure the capacitor mounting plate to the inverter housing by u
221. 2 Inverter Emergency Stop Function Introduction The SJ700 series inverter has the function of uncontrolled stopping by removal of motor power in accordance with Stop Category 0 defined by EN60204 1 The inverter is also designed to comply with Safety Category 3 of EN954 1 This function is generally called Safe Stop function The emergency stop function shuts off the inverter output i e stops the switch ing operation of the main circuit elements in response to a command from a hardware circuit via an intelligent input terminal without the operation by internal CPU software Carefully note the following points when installing or using the Emergency Stop Function The emergency stop function does not electrically shut off the inverter but merely stops the switching operation of the main circuit elements Therefore do not touch any terminals of the inverter or any power lines e g motor cables Otherwise electric shock injury or ground fault may result 5 3 Q 23 32 z 0 MC D 3 3 e All systems that include an inverter must comply with the requirements of EN60204 1 safety of machinery and other applicable standards You must confirm the contents of standards applicable to your system Before installing a system using Safe Stop function you must fully examine whether Safe Stop function and the safety category to be applied are adequate for your system For details refer to the standards require
222. 20HFU2 E 30 Built in 10 35 110 20 10 100 NOTE For inverters larger than 30 HP 22kW an external braking unit will be required Contact your distributor or Hitachi for assistance Troubleshooting and Maintenance In This Chapter page Se SE 2 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions xwwvnnnnvvvnnnnnnnnnnennrnn 5 Restoring Factory Default Settings rrrrrvrrrvrrrrvrrrrrrrvrrrvrrrrrrrnrenn 16 Maintenance and Inspechion n uuuvrisuunnmsnmnnisveeivvvvh 17 EE EL EEE NE EE RER 29 62 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Safety Messages Please read the following safety messages before troubleshooting or performing maintenance on the inverter and motor system WARNING Wait at least ten 10 minutes after turning OFF the input power supply before performing maintenance or an inspection Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock WARNING Make sure that only qualified personnel will perform maintenance inspection and part replacement Before starting to work remove any metallic objects from your person wristwatch bracelet etc Be sure to use tools with insulated handles Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or injury to personnel logic P C board Otherwise there is danger of fire due to wire breakage and or injury to WARNING Never remove connectors by pulling on its wire leads wires for cooling fan and personnel
223. 253Dh 09533 Oto 10000 0 1 2nd motor H051 PI integral gain for 1st R W 0 0 to 999 9 1000 153Eh 05438 Oto 10000 0 1 motor H251 PI integral gain for 2nd R W 0 0 to 999 9 1000 253Eh 09534 Oto 10000 0 1 motor H052 P proportional gain setting R W 0 01 to 10 00 153Fh 05439 0 to 1000 0 01 for Ist motor Reserved 1540h 05440 to to 1546h 05446 H252 P proportional gain setting R W 0 01 to 10 00 253Fh 09535 Oto 1000 0 01 for 2nd motor Reserved 2540h 09536 to to 2546h 09542 H060 Zero LV limit for 1st motor R W 0 0 to 100 0 1547h 05447 0 to 1000 0 1 H260 Zero LV limit for 2nd R W 0 0 to 100 0 2547h 09543 0 to 1000 0 1 motor H061 Zero LV starting boost R W 0 to 50 1548h 05448 0 to 50 1 current for 1st motor Reserved 1549h 05449 to to 1550h 05456 H261 Zero LV starting boost R W 0 to 50 2548h 09544 0 to 50 1 current for 2nd motor Reserved 2549h 09545 to to 3102h 12546 H070 Terminal selection PI R W 0 0 to 999 9 1000 1551h 05457 Oto 10000 0 1 proportional gain setting H071 Terminal selection PI R W 0 0 to 999 9 1000 1552h 05458 Oto 10000 0 1 integral gain setting H072 Terminal selection P R W 0 00 to 10 00 1553h 05459 0 to 1000 0 01 proportional gain setting
224. 294 ation Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition point A095 A295 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition point A096 A296 Level of electronic thermal setting B012 B212 B312 Select electronic thermal characteristic B013 B213 B313 Select motor constant H002 H202 Motor capacity setting H003 H203 Motor poles setting H004 H204 Motor constant Kp setting Standard Auto H005 H205 tuning Motor stabilization constant H006 H206 Motor constant R1 setting Standard Auto H020 H030 H220 H230 tuning Motor constant R2 setting Standard Auto H021 H031 H221 H231 tuning Motor constant L setting Standard Auto H022 H032 H222 H232 tuning Motor constant Io setting Standard Auto H023 H033 H223 H233 tuning suoeiado 2 a of 5 TS 23 og 4 78 Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors Function Name Parameter Codes 1st motor 2nd motor 3rd motor Motor constant J setting Standard Auto H024 H034 H224 H234 tuning PI proportional gain H050 H250 P proportional gain setting H052 H252 OHz SLV limit for 1st motor H060 H260 Inverter System Accessories In This Chapter page 0 RE 2 Component Descriptions nnnennnenineennnennne nnne nnne nanenane nnnnnnnnnnnnn nen 3 Dynamic Braking EH Introduction Introduction A motor speed control system will obviously include a m
225. 3 8 3811 38 125 90 SJ700 900HFU2 E 1111 6 1000r 200A 200A 3 8 BR Ppa eas 38 II 38 150 110 J700 1100HFU2 E 1 0111 0 1500r 250A 250A 1 6 6o a 60 II 60 150 132 SJ700 1320HFE2 3 011310 801180 300A 300A 3 0 30 80 J700 1500HFU2 250 185 J700 1850HFU2 E 300 Il 1521 400A 400A 250 250 127 300 152 400 315 J700 3150HFU2 E 5001 25311 700A 700A 400 400 203 500 253 500 400 J700 4000HFU2 E 8001 4051 1000A 1000A 600 600 304 800 405 Note 1 Field wiring must be made by a UL listed and CSA certified ring lug terminal connector sized for the wire gauge involved The connector must be fixed by using the crimping tool specified by the connector manufacturer Note 2 Be sure to consider the capacity of the circuit breaker to be used Note 3 Be sure to use a larger wire gauge if power line length exceeds 66 ft 20m Note 4 Prepackaged included square washer is to be used when the bare wire is directly connected to terminal without using crimp contact such as ring lug connector Note 5 When replacing J300 055HF or SJ300 O55HFF2 inverter with SJ700 055HFF2 you may use power wiring size 2mm Note 6 Wire must be rated for operation up to 75 C 2 20 Step by Step Basic Installation Terminal The following tables list the screw size of terminal and recommended t
226. 5 H220 H224 H230 H234 H250 H252 H260 A097 01 02 03 A131 Acceleration pattern constant A098 01 02 03 A132 Deceleration pattern constant SJ7002 Inverter EZIN Function Resulting Non displayed Code Data Functions when B37 01 Nous B098 01 02 B099 C085 Thermistor function B050 01 B051 B054 Instantaneous power failure B120 01 B121 B126 External brake control Function Resulting Non displayed Code Data Functions when B37 01 Notes 02 06 C042 C043 Frequency arrival signal 03 C040 C041 Overload advance notice C021 C025 07 C055 C058 Over torque C026 21 C063 Zero speed detection signal 24 25 C045 C046 Frequency arrival signal o 26 C011 Overload advance notice 2 y S H002 00 H020 H024 Motor constant 5 5 01 02 H030 H034 Motor constant auto tuning S H202 00 H220 H224 Motor constant i 01 02 H023 H0234 Motor constant auto tuning P010 01 P011 P023 P025 P027 Expansion card function Keypad Defaults Run pene Ne Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ae P SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 7 EU USA Jpn B040 Torque limit selection 4 SET OG 4 quadrant mode 00 00 00 Xy TH G I Selected by two input terminals see p 430 OZ G2 From analog 02 input 0 to 10V 0 to 200 OFL 03 From expansion card I OFS 04 From expansion card 2
227. 5 92 3 93 2 94 0 94 4 Watt loss at 70 output 76 102 127 179 242 approximate W at 100 output 88 125 160 235 325 Dynamic braking internal chopper 20 20 20 20 20 p ston 7 with external res gt 150 gt 150 gt 150 gt 150 130 Min external braking resistance Q 100 100 100 70 70 DC braking Variable operating frequency time and braking force Electrical filtering Built in EMC filter and built in zero phase reactor Weight kg lb 3 5 7 7 3 5 7 7 3 5 7 7 ISITT 6 13 2 EEN Inverter Specifications D D D fa T 09 D Item 400V Class Specifications SJ7002 inverters U S version 075HFUF2 110HFUF2 150HFUF2 185HFU2 220HFU2 400V models European ver Applicable motor size 2 HP 075HFEF2 110HFEF2 10 15 150HFEF2 185HFE2 220HFE2 20 25 30 kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 Rated capacity KVA 400 480V 11 13 3 15 9 19 1 22 1 26 6 26 3 31 5 33 2 39 9 Rated input voltage 3 phase 3 wire 380 to 480V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 Rated input current A 18 25 35 42 53 Rated output voltage 3 3 phase 3 wire 380 to 480V corresponding to input voltage Rated output current A 16 23 32 38 48 Overload capacity output current A 150 for 60 sec 200 for 3 sec Efficiency at 100 rated output 94 6 94 8 94 9 95 0 95 0 Watt loss at 70 output 312 435 575 698 820 pproximiate
228. 5 unit output side D o 2 Encoder input AC reactor output ALI xxx HRL xxx 5 3 28 expansion card side lt 4 LCR filter HRL xxxC 5 3 A B Encoder feed back SJ FB 5 5 expansion Digital input SJ DG 5 5 qa D RF noise expansion card filter T3 AC reactor or 3 LCR filter NOTE The Hitachi part number series for accessories includes different sizes of each part type specified by the x suffix Hitachi product literature can help match size and rating of your inverter to the proper accessory size Each inverter accessory comes with its own printed a instruction manual Please refer to those manuals for complete installation details This chapter gives only an overview of these optional system devices For more infor mation on Hitachi inverter system accessories please contact your Hitachi sales office or distributor Encoder Thermal switch SJ7002 Inverter 53 Component Descriptions AC Reactors Input Side AC Reactor or LCR Filter Output Side This is useful in suppressing harmonics induced on the power supply lines or when the main power voltage imbalance exceeds 3 and power source capacity is more than 500 KVA or to smooth out line fluctuations It also improves the power factor In the following cases for a general purpose inverter a large peak current flows on the main power supply side and is able to destroy the inverter module e If the unbalanced
229. 50 to 200 100 100 100 C109 AM bias adjustment 0 to 100 0 0 0 ve C110 AMI bias adjustment 0 to 100 20 20 20 Vv C111 Overload setting 2 0 00 x rated current to 1 80 x rated current Rated current for Xv A inverter Output Terminal Signal Functions Keypad Defaults Run nae Kees Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ae p SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn C130 Terminal 11 ON delay time 10 0 to 100 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv C131 Terminal 11 OFF delay time 10 0 to 100 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv C132 Terminal 12 ON delay time 10 0 to 100 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv C133 Terminal 12 OFF delay time 10 0 to 100 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv C134 Terminal 13 ON delay time 10 0 to 100 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv C135 Terminal 13 OFF delay time 10 0 to 100 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv C136 Terminal 14 ON delay time 10 0 to 100 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv C137 Terminal 14 OFF delay time 10 0 to 100 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv C138 Terminal 15 ON delay time 0 0 to 100 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv 3 64 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions o 2 a te C 5 2D C e O no 2 ob E oO iS a ai Keypad Defaults
230. 5209 Reserved 145Ah 05210 to to 145Eh 05214 gt C091 Debug mode enable R 00 No display 145Fh 05215 0 I 8 01 Display 2 x Reserved 1460h 05216 w to to 1468h 05224 C101 Up Down memory mode R W 00 Clear last freq return to 1469h 05225 0 1 selection default freq F001 01 Keep last frequency adjusted by UP DWN C102 Reset mode selection R W 00 Cancel trip state stop 146Ah 05226 0 to 3 inverter output reset CPU clear position counter at ON transition 01 Cancel trip state stop inverter output reset CPU clear position counter at OFF transition 02 Cancel trip state and clear position counter no effect if a trip does not exist 03 Cancel trip state but does not clear position counter no effect if a trip does not exist C103 Restart mode after reset R W 00 Restart at 0 Hz 146Bh 05227 01 Resume operation after frequency matching 02 Restart with active matching frequency Reserved 146Ch 05228 C105 FM gain adjustment R W 50 to 200 146Dh 05229 50 to 200 1 C106 AM gain adjustment R W 50 to 200 146Eh 05230 50 to 200 1 C107 AMI gain adjustment R W 50 to 200 146Fh 05231 50 to 200 1 Reserved 1470h 05232 C109 AM bias adjustment R W 0 to 100
231. 5h 04133 D025 H User monitor 0 R Displays state of internal EZ 102Eh 04142 2147483647 1 Sequence register User Monitor to D025 L R j 102Fh 04143 2147483647 D026 H User monitor 1 R Displays state of internal EZ 1030h 04144 2147483647 1 Sequence register User Monitor to D026 IL R 1031h 04145 2147483647 D027 H User monitor 2 R Displays state of internal EZ 1032h 04146 2147483647 1 Sequence register User Monitor to D027 L R 1033h 04147 2147483647 D028 H Pulse counter R W Displays accumulated pulse 1034h 04148 0 to 1 count of PCNT intelligent input 2147483647 D028 L R W terminal option code 74 1035h 04149 D029 H Position setting monitor R Displays absolute position 1036h 04150 2147483647 1 command for motor shaft in to D029 L R absolute position control mode 1037h 04151 2147483647 D030 H Position feedback monitor R Displays absolute position of 1038h 04152 2147483647 1 motor shaft when in absolute to D030 L R position control mode 1039h 04153 2147483647 D080 Trip counter R Number of trip events 0011h 00017 0 to 65535 I trip event ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q Q 2 lt Holding Registers D Group Monitor Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Rang
232. 6 0 SJ700 150LFE2 SJ700 3150LFE2 rated current is 64A rated current is 600A Trip Trip time s time s 60 60 55 8 76 8 102 4 508 8 720 912 87 2 120 160 84 8 120 152 Reduced trip current at 20 Hz Reduced trip current at 20 Hz 3 34 B Group Fine Tuning Functions 2 a le CE 5 2D C e O 42 2 ob E oO iS av oO Constant Torque Characteristic Select Trip current ing the constant torque characteristic for the reduction example motor gives the curves below At factor 2 5 Hz the output current is reduced by a x 1 0 factor of 0 9 for given trip times x 0 9 x 0 8 0 SJ700 150LFE2 SJ700 3150LFE2 rated current is 64A rated current is 600A Trip Trip time s time s 60 60 0 5 0 5 0 0 62 8 86 4 115 2 572 810 1026 98 1 135 180 95 4 135 171 Reduced trip current at 2 5 Hz Reduced trip current at 2 5 Hz Free Thermal Characteristic It is possible to set the electronic thermal characteristic using a free form curve defined by three data points according to the table below Function av Code Name Description Range B015 BO17 Free setting electronic Data point coordinates for 0 to 400 Hz B019 thermal frequency 1 2 3 Hz axis horizontal in the model 4000HFx2 is free form curve 0 00 to 120 0 Hz B016 B018 Free setting electronic Data point coordinates for 0 0 disable B020 thermal current 1 2 3 Ampere axis vertical i
233. 6 General purpose input 6 0000000040000000 OPE Forcible operation 4000000000000000 MI7 General purpose input 7 0000000080000000 8000000000000000 MI8 General purpose input 8 Data Hex 12 Command Description Data Hex 12 CommandDescription 0000000000000001 0000000100000000 0000000000000002 AHD Analog command holding 0000000200000000 0000000000000004 CP1 Multi stage position select 1 0000000400000000 0000000000000008 CP2 Multi stage position select 2 0000000800000000 0000000000000010 CP3 Multi stage position select 3 0000001000000000 0000000000000020 ORL Zero return limit function 0000002000000000 0000000000000040 ORG Zero return trigger function 0000004000000000 0000000000000080 FOT Forward drive stop 0000008000000000 0000000000000100 ROT Reverse drive stop 0000010000000000 0000000000000200 SPD Speed position switching 0000020000000000 0000000000000400 PCNT Pulse counter 0000040000000000 0000000000000800 PCC Pulse counter clear 0000080000000000 0000000000001000 0000100000000000 0000000000002000 0000200000000000 0000000000004000 0000400000000000 0000000000008000 0000800000000000 0000000000010000 0001000000000000 0000000000020000 0002000000000000 0000000000040000 0004000000000000 0000000000080000 0008000000000000 0000000000100000 0010000000000000 0000000000200000 0
234. 6 29 Appendix A Glossary and Bibliography Glossary A 2 Bibliography A 6 Appendix B Serial Communications Introduction B 2 ASCII Mode Communications B 5 Communications Reference Information B 18 ModBus Mode Communications B 21 ModBus Data Listing B 33 Appendix C Drive Parameter Settings Tables Introduction C 2 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry C 2 Appendix D CE EMC Installation Guidelines CE EMC Installation Guidelines D 2 Precautions for EMC Models SJ700 004 to 1500 D 4 Precautions for EMC Models SJ700 1850 to 4000 D 5 Index SJ7002 Inverter Xi Revisions Revision History Table No Revision Comments Date of Issue nen Manual No Initial release of manual NB206X August 2008 NB206X A Add new inverter models from 004xxx to 037xxx and models October 2009 NB206XA 750Hxx to 4000Hxx Numerous additions and corrections throughout manual Contact Information Hitachi America Ltd Hitachi Australia Ltd Industrial Sales Division Level 3 82 Waterloo Road 50 Prospect Avenue North Ryde N S W 2113 Tarrytown NY 10591 Australia U S A Phone 61 2 9888 4100 Phone 1 914 631 0600 Fax 61 2 9888 4188 Fax 1 914 631 3672 Web site www hitachi america us inverters Hitachi Europe GmbH Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd Am Seestern 18 AKS Building 3 Kanda Neribei cho D 40547 Diisseldorf Chiyoda ku Tokyo 101 0022 Germany Japan Phone 49 211 5283 0 Phone 81 3 4345 6910
235. 6 CP1 Multi stage position Binary encoded position select bit 1 LSB select 1 67 CP2 Multi stage position Binary encoded position select bit 2 LSB select 2 68 CP3 Multi stage position Binary encoded position select bit 3 MSB select 3 69 ORL Zero return limit function Indicates that the load has reached the zero return point so the inverter stops the zero return operation in progress 70 ORG Zero return trigger Starts a zero return operation load moves toward the zero function return point 71 FOT Forward drive stop Limits the forward rotational torque to 10 for use at the end of travel in position control mode 72 ROT Reverse drive stop Limits the reverse rotational torque to 10 for use at the end of travel in position control mode 73 SPD Speed position control Causes the inverter to perform only speed control ignores select encoder pulses while in position control mode 74 PCNT Pulse counter input Pulse counter input 75 PCC Pulse counter clear Clears the pulse count no Not selected input ignored Output Terminal Configuration SJ7002 Inverter EEJ The inverter provides configuration for logic discrete and analog outputs shown in the table below Defaults Run eae ate Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ae p FE2 FU2 ner EU USA Jpn C021 Terminal 11 function 01 FA1 01 FAI O1 FAI XY C022 Terminal 12 function
236. APAN Serial number The model number for a specific inverter contains useful information about its operating Convention characteristics Refer to the model number legend below SJ700 __ 004 H F U F 2 L Version number _ 2 3 EMC filter installed at factory F installed without F not installed Restricted distribution Series E Europe U U S name Configuration type F with digital operator keypad Input voltage H three phase 400V class L three phase only 200V class Applicable motor capacity in kW 004 0 4 kW 055 5 5 kW 220 22 kW 1850 185 kW 007 0 75 kW 075 7 5 kW 300 30 kW 3150 315 kW 015 1 5 kW 110 11 kW 370 37 kW 4000 400 kW 022 2 2 kW 150 15 kW 450 45 kW 037 3 7 kW 185 18 5 kW 550 55 kW 16 Inverter Specifications Inverter Specifications D D D e fa T 09 D Tables for 200V class inverters Note that General Specifications on page 1 10 footnotes for all specifications tables The 200V models from 004 to 220LFU2 0 5 to 30 HP include internal dynamic braking units see Dynamic Braking on page 5 6 covers all SJ7002 inverters followed by Item 200V Class Specifications SJ7002 200V models U S version 004LFUF2 007LFUF2 015LFUF2 022LFUF2 037LFUF2 Applicable motor size 4 pole
237. Accel Decel Operation This feature uses fuzzy logic to optimize acceleration and deceleration curves in real time It is enabled by A085 02 Optimal accel decel operation automatically adjusts the acceleration and deceleration times in response to changes in load or inertia to take advantage of the maximum output current capability of the inverter In general optimal accel decel will allow for the shortest accel and decel times based on the actual load conditions The function continuously monitors output current and DC bus voltage to avoid reaching their respective trip levels NOTE In this mode the settings of acceleration and deceleration times F002 and F003 are disregarded The acceleration time is controlled to maintain output current below the level set by the Overload Restriction Function if enabled Parameters BO21 B024 B022 B025 and B023 B026 If Overload Restriction is not enabled then the current limit used is 150 of the inverter s rated output current The deceleration time is controlled so that the output current is maintained below 150 of the inverter s rated current and the DC bus voltage is maintained below the OV Trip level 358V or 770V 3 24 A Group Standard Functions NOTE DO NOT use Optimal Accel Decel A085 02 when an application has a requirement for constant acceleration or deceleration has a load inertia more than approx 20 times the motor inertia uses internal or
238. B083 to set the carrier frequency greater than 2 1 kHz for proper operation NOTE The carrier frequency setting must stay within specified limits for inverter motor applications that must comply with particular regulatory agencies For example a European CE approved application requires the inverter carrier to be less than 5 kHz SJ7002 Inverter 3 45 B084 B085 Initialization codes These functions allow you to restore the factory default settings Please refer to Restoring Factory Default Settings on page 6 16 B086 Frequency display scaling You can convert the output frequency monitor on D001 to a scaled number engineering units monitored at function D007 For example the motor may run a conveyor that is monitored in feet per minute Use this formula Scaled output frequency D007 Output frequency D001 x Factor B086 Keypad Defaults Run pane Mahn S Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 e E SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn B078 Clear cumulative input power CHT aG No change 00 00 00 VV data Set 01 press STR key to clear CLE I Clear the data i B079 Cumulative input power display gain setting 1 to 1000 1 1 1 Vv u S w B082 Start frequency adjustment 0 10 to 9 99 Hz 0 50 0 50 0 50 XY Se 3 3 Sets the starting frequency for the inverter output 2a D B083 Carrier frequency setting Mos
239. EF2 FUF2 FF2 soar SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 Lan EU USA Jpn C031 Terminal 11 active state HO 22 Normally open N O 00 00 00 Xv HE G I Normally closed N C C032 Terminal 12 active state HO 22 Normally open N O 00 00 00 Xv HE G I Normally closed N C C033 Terminal 13 active state HO G0 Normally open N O 00 00 00 Xv HE G I Normally closed N C C034 Terminal 14 active state HO 22 Normally open N O 00 00 00 Xv HE G I Normally closed N C C035 Terminal 15 active state HO G0 Normally open N O 00 00 00 Xv HE 0 i Normally closed N C C036 Alarm relay terminal active HO OG Normally open N O 01 01 01 Xv EE NC 0 I Normally closed N C U 2 g 3 Q D Q 7 aSAUG BuunByuon 3 56 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Output Summary Table This table shows all twenty two functions for the logic output terminals 11 15 at a glance Detailed function descriptions related parameters settings and example wiring diagrams are in Using Intelligent Output Terminals on page 4 43 Output Function Summary Table Option Terminal PE Code Symbol Function Name Description 00 RUN Run signal Inverter is in Run Mode motor running 01 FAI Frequency arrival type 1 When output to motor is at the standard set frequency F001 constant speed 02 FA2 Frequency
240. Function selection a b N O N C Function selection eG 3 normally C001 selection use C011 1 normally C003 1 2 OFF Emergency Stop disabled factory setting User selectable 4 User selectable 4 User selectable 4 User selectable 4 Factory RS setting code 18 Factory N O setting code 00 Factory JG setting code 06 Factory N O setting code 00 ON Emergency Stop enabled Automatic assignment of functions to intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 and the terminal assigned RS code 18 3 Fixed RS Fixed N O Fixed EMR Fixed N C cannot be code 18 cannot be code 00 cannot be code 64 cannot be code 01 changed changed changed changed ON after set to OFF once Emergency Stop disabled 3 5 User selectable 4 User selectable 4 User selectable 4 User selectable 4 Setting RS Setting N O Released No Setting N C retained code 18 retained code 00 from function retained code 01 when SW1 when SW1 emergency assigned when SW1 is set ON is set ON stop is set ON function Note 1 When function RS code 18 is assigned to the input terminal a b N O N C selection is always 00 N O Note 2 When terminal setting C003 is EMR code 64 terminal setting C013 is always 01 N C Note 3 If function RS code18 has been assigned to an intelligent input terminal other than intellig
241. H032 H Auto constant L Ist motor R W 0 01 to 99 99 1528h 05416 1 to 65530 0 01 mH 100 0 to 655 3 mH H032 L R W 1529h 05417 H232 H Auto constant L 2nd R W 0 01 to 99 99 2528h 09512 1 to 65530 0 01 mH motor 100 0 to 655 3 mH H232 L R W 2529h 09513 H033 H Auto constant Io 1st motor R W 0 01 to 99 99 152Ah 05418 1 to 65530 0 01 mH 100 0 to 655 3 mH H033 L R W 152Bh 05419 H233 H Auto constant Io 2nd R W 0 01 to 99 99 252Ah 09514 1 to 65530 0 01 mH motor 100 0 to 655 3 mH H233 L R W 252Bh 09515 ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers H Group Motor Constants Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec H034 Auto constant J lst motor R W 0 001 to 9 999 152Ch 05420 1 to 0 001 10 00 to 99 99 9999000 H034 L R W 100 0 to 999 9 152Dh 05421 1000 to 9999 H234 H Auto constant J lst motor R W 0 001 to 9 999 252Ch 09516 1 to 0 001 10 00 to 99 99 9999000 H234 L R W 100 0 to 999 9 252Dh 09517 1000 to 9999 Reserved 152Eh 05422 to to 153Ch 05436 H050 PI proportional gain for Ist R W 0 0 to 999 9 1000 153Dh 05437 0 to 10000 0 1 motor H250 PI proportional gain for R W 0 0 to 999 9 1000
242. HITACHI Inspire the Next SJ7002Series Inverter Instruction Manual e Three phase Input 200V Class e Three phase Input 400V Class U S Version Models European Version Models Manual Number NB206XA After reading this manual October 2009 keep it handy for future reference Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd SJ7002 Inverter pi Safety Messages Definitions and Symbols For the best results with the SJ7002 Series inverter carefully read this manual and all of the warning labels attached to the inverter before installing and operating it and follow the instruc tions exactly Keep this manual handy for quick reference A safety instruction message includes a hazard alert symbol and a signal word WARNING or CAUTION Each signal word has the following meaning that could be dangerous to you and other persons operation this equipment Read the This symbol indicates HIGH VOLTAGE It calls your attention to items or operations Ay message and follow the instructions carefully This symbol is the Safety Alert Symbol It occurs with either of two signal words CAUTION or WARNING as described below WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that if not avoided can result in serious injury or death CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that if not avoided can result in minor to moderate injury or serious damage to the product The situation described in the
243. Hz DC braking carrier frequency DC braking carrier frequency DC braking carrier frequency Frequency Frequency Limits Upper and lower related Functions limits can be imposed on the inverter Output frequency output frequency These limits will apply regardless of the source of the speed A061 lad EEE EEE imi reference You can configure the lower frequency limit to be greater than zero as shown in the graph to the right The upper limit must not exceed the rating of the motor or capability of the machinery A062 Lower limit Settable range Frequency command Keypad Defaults Run Ps oats A Range and settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 He MEW SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn A061 Frequency upper limit setting BRASS 0 00 Setting is disabled 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv Sets a limit on output frequency less 9666 536 gt 0 50 Setting is enabled Xv than the maximum frequency A004 0 50 to 400 0 Hz A261 Frequency upper limit setting 2nd aga BAS 0 00 Setting is disabled 0 00 0 00 000 Xv motor Sets a limit on output frequency less BARA 38 gt 0 50 Setting is enabled XV than the maximum frequency A004 0 50 to 400 0 Hz A062 Frequency lower limit setting Baga AA 0 00 Setting is disabled 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv Sets a limit on output frequency BEH S gt 0 50 Setting is enabled Xv greater than zero 0 50 to 400 0 H
244. IGBT Check the inverter for abnormality repair the inverter E30 IGBT error If instantaneous over current occurs the Check the output circuit for a short circuit 7 main circuit element temperature is check the output cables IGET abnormal or the main circuit element Check for the ground fault check the drive power drops the inverter will turn output cables and motor OFF its output to protect the main circuit Check the main circuit element for element After tripping because of this damage check the IGBT protective function the inverter cannot Check the heat sink for clogging clean retry the operation the heat sink 35 Thermistor The inverter monitors the resistance of the Check whether the motor temperature is error thermistor in the motor connected to the high check the motor temperature TH inverter s TH terminal and will turn Check whether the internal thermistor of OFF the inverter output if the motor the motor has been damaged check the temperature rises thermistor Check whether noise has been mixed in the thermistor signal separate the therm istor wiring from other wirings 356 Braking error When 01 has been specified for B120 Check whether the brake has been turned Brake Control Enable the inverter will on and off or not check the brake BRAKE trip if it cannot receive the braking confir Check whether the wait time B124 is mation signal within B124 Brake Wait too short
245. Input signal level at terminal 02 is below threshold set with detect B072 31 FBV PID feedback second Stage 1 inverter is indicating to Stage inverter that the stage output Process Variable PV is in saturation The system needs Stage 2 output contribution to stabilize system control 32 NDc Network detection signal The communications watchdog timer period specified by C077 has timed out 33 LOG1 Logic output I Boolean operation specified by C144 has a logical 1 result 34 LOG2 Logic output 2 Boolean operation specified by C147 has a logical 1 result 35 LOG3 Logic output 3 Boolean operation specified by C150 has a logical 1 result 36 LOG4 Logic output 4 Boolean operation specified by C153 has a logical 1 result 37 LOGS Logic output 5 Boolean operation specified by C156 has a logical 1 result 38 LOG6 Logic output 6 Boolean operation specified by C159 has a logical 1 result 39 WAC Capacitor life warning Capacitor bank on the main board needs replacement 40 WAF Low cooling fan speed Cooling fan is enabled but it is rotating below normal speed 41 FR Starting contact signal ON while the inverter receives a FW or REV command 42 OHF Heat sink overheat Inverter heat sink temperature is above the threshold set by warning C064 43 LOC Low output current signal Output current to motor is below threshold set by C039 44 MOI General output I Easy sequence function general output I 45 MO2 General output 2 Eas
246. Multi speed 2 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A023 Multi speed 3 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A024 Multi speed 4 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A025 Multi speed 5 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A026 Multi speed 6 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A027 Multi speed 7 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A028 Multi speed 8 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A029 Multi speed 9 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A030 Multi speed 10 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A031 Multi speed 11 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A032 Multi speed 12 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A033 Multi speed 13 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 Ra ke C D Q 2 lt C 4 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry A Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Nae FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan A034 Multi speed 14 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A035 Multi speed 15 setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A038 Jog frequency setting 1 00 1 00 1 00 A039 Jog stop mode 00 00 00 A041 Torque boost method selection 00 00 00 A241 Torque boost method selection 2nd motor 00 00 00 A042 Manual torque boost value 1 0 1 0 1 0 A242 Manual torque boost value 2nd motor 1 0 1 0 1 0 A342 Manual torque boost value 3rd motor 1 0 1 0 1 0 A043 Manual torque boost frequency adjustment 5 0 5 0 5 0 A243 Manual torque boost frequency adjustment 2nd 5 0 5 0 5 0 motor A343 Manual torque boost frequency adjustment 3rd 5 0 5 0 5
247. N Povo Low speed zero i P070 low speed zero return speed 5 Inverter stops motor and sets ORG position value to zero when ORL i signal turns OFF ORL Forward Reverse Drive Stop Opt Code 7 1 FOT and 72 ROT Symbol Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Required dene Settings Default Requires terminal config Speed Position Control Select Opt Code 73 Symbol SPD Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Required A044 05 Settings P012 Default Requires terminal config SJ7002 Inverter EZIN High zero return level 1 Motor accelerates for specified 2 acceleration time to high zero Output return speed frequency High speed 2 Zero Return 2 Motor runs at high zero return speed 0 3 Motor starts deceleration when ORL signal turns ON Low speed zero 4 Motor runs in reverse direction at return level low speed zero return speed ORG S 5 Motor starts deceleration to stop i when ORL signal turns OFF ORL 6 Motor accelerates in forward direction to low speed zero return level 7 Inverter stops motor and sets position value to zero when next Z signal pulse occurs The forward reverse drive stop function prevents the motor from moving a load outside a desired position range The end of travel in each direction must cause the appropriate input signal FOT or ROT to turn ON Typically a limit switch or proximity switch is used to
248. NG Gr right shows the definition of a complex l curve by following the setting require va er i 4 ments va va A gt Output Free setting f7 B112 becomes the pa 1 frequency i i B101 to I fe i I I r maximum frequency of the inverter B113 Therefore we recommend setting f7 odd 0 fi f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7 Hz first since the initial value of all default frequencies f1 f7 is OHz B100 to B112 even NOTE The using of V f free setting operation specifies parameters that override make invalid certain other parameters The parameters that become invalid are torque boost A041 A241 base frequency A003 A203 A303 and maximum frequency A004 A204 A304 In this case we recommend leaving their settings at the factory default values The V f free setting endpoint f7 V7 parameters must stay within the more basic inverter limits in order for the VISE 3 specified free setting characteristic curve to be achieved For example the inverter cannot output a higher voltage than the input voltage or the AVR setting voltage Automatic Voltage Output voltage Regulation set by parameter A082 ver The graph to the right shows how the Output inverter input voltage would clip limit r i l frequency the characteristic curve if exceeded B113 0 odd 6 f7 Hz B100 to B112 even Sensorless Vector Control and Sensorless Vector Control 0Hz Domain These advanced torque contr
249. ON when the inverter is ready for parameter editing Program Mode It is normally OFF when the parameter display is monitoring data Monitor Mode However the PRG LED will be ON whenever you are monitoring the value of parameter D001 When the keypad is enabled as the frequency source via A001 02 you can edit the inverter frequency directly from D001 monitor display by using the Up Down keys e Run Key Press this key to run the motor the Run Enable LED must be ON first Parame ter F004 Keypad Run Key Routing determines whether the Run key generates a Run FWD or Run REV command auq BuunByuon Run Key Enable LED is ON when the inverter is ready to respond to the Run key OFF when the Run key is disabled Stop Reset Key Press this key to stop the motor when it is running uses the programmed deceleration rate This key will also reset an alarm that has tripped e Potentiometer OPE SRE only allows an operator to directly set the motor speed when the potentiometer is enabled for output frequency control Potentiometer Enable LED ON when the potentiometer is enabled for value entry OPE SRE only e Parameter Display a 4 digit 7 segment display for parameters and function codes e Display Units Hertz Volts Amperes kW These LEDs indicate the units associated with the parameter display When the display is monitoring a parameter the appropriate LED is ON In the case of kW units both Volts an
250. OTQ over torque signal IP Instantaneous power failure signal UV Under voltage signal TRQ In torque limit RNT Run time over ONT Power ON time over THM thermal alarm BRK Brake release signal BER Brake error signal ZS Zero speed detect DSE speed deviation maximum POK Positioning completion FA4 Frequency arrival type 4 over frequency 2 FAS Frequency arrival type 5 at frequency 2 OL2 Overload notice advance signal 2 FBV PID feedback comparison NDc communication line disconnection LOG 1 logical operation result 1 LOG2 logical operation result 2 LOG3 logical operation result 3 LOG4 logical operation result 4 LOGS logical operation result 5 LOG6 logical operation result 6 WAC capacitor life warning WAF cooling fan speed drop FR starting contact signal OHF heat sink overheat warning LOC low current indication signal MOL general purpose output 1 MO2 general purpose output 2 MO3 general purpose output 3 MO4 general purpose output 4 MOS general purpose output 5 MO6 general purpose output 6 IRDY inverter ready FWR forward rotation signal RVR reverse rotation signal MJA major failure signal Terminals 11 13 or 11 14 automat ically configured as ACO AC2 or ACO AC3 per alarm code output selection Intelligent monitor output terminals Analog voltage monitor analog current monitor 8 bit resolution and PWM output on terminals AM AMI FM
251. Output frequency suoeiado D 3 2 O 5 e 3 5 Ke Output frequency Hz Thresholds C043 C046 C042 C045 4 46 Using Intelligent Output Terminals 2 2 of g SS a Og av Overload Advance Notice Signal Opt Code 03 OL and Symbol 26 OL2 Valid for 11 to 15 Outputs ALx Required Settings C041 C111 Default Requires terminal config Output Deviation for PID Control Opt Code 04 Symbol OD Valid for l11to 15 Outputs ALx Required Settings C044 Default Requires terminal config When the output current exceeds a Current preset value the OL or OL2 terminal signal turns ON Parameter Set C041 C041 sets the overload threshold for value OL parameter C111 sets it for C041 OL2 The overload detection circuit operates during powered motor opera tion and during regenerative braking Mr 7 OL The output circuits use open collector Signal transistors and are active low Symbol Function Name Description OL Overload advance notice signal 1 ON when output current is more than the set threshold for the overload signal C041 OL2 Overload advance notice signal 2 ON when output current is more than the set threshold for the overload signal C111 Note the following The default threshold value
252. Output frequency selected Press the D key a n n Output frequency displayed When the d008 function code appeared the PRG LED went OFF This confirms the inverter is no longer in programming mode even while you are selecting the particular monitoring param eter After pressing the FUNC key the display shows the current speed is zero at this point Running the If you have programmed all the parameters up to this point you re ready to run the motor Motor First review this checklist 1 Verify the Power LED is ON If not check the power connections 2 Verify the Run Key Enable LED is ON If not review the programming steps to find the problem Verify the PRG LED is OFF If it is ON review the instructions above Make sure the motor is disconnected from any mechanical load Turn the potentiometer to the MIN position completely counterclockwise Now press the RUN key on the keypad The RUN LED will turn ON Slowly increase the potentiometer setting in clockwise fashion The motor should start turning when the indicator is in the 9 00 position and beyond AA we amp 8 Press the STOP key to stop the motor rotation 2 36 Using the Front Panel Keypad D E eo 2 jo 2 _ o gt and Installation Gp Powerup Test Observations and Summary Step 10 Reading this section will help you make some useful observations when first running the motor Error Codes If the
253. P039 Forward speed limit for 0 00 to maximum torque control mode frequency Hz P040 Reverse speed limit for 0 00 to maximum torque control mode frequency Hz P036 Torque bias mode 00 Disable 01 Inverter keypad P037 02 02 terminal input P037 Torque bias value 200 to 200 P038 Torque bias polarity 00 Indicated by polarity 01 Depends on motor direction 5 2 e 5 e 5 Ke suonee8d0 KEJ Using Intelligent Input Terminals The following block diagram shows the torque control operation If the measured speed exceeds the speed limit the motor speed is controlled in proportional control mode Torque command inverter output Torque command input o Intelligent input ATR L Torque bias Speed control Speed comparator Measured speed Clear Cumulative When D015 cumulative power monitoring function is selected the inverter displays the Power Value cumulative value of electric power input to the inverter You can also convert the value to other engineering units by setting the related parameter gain BO79 cumulative input power display a Opt Code 53 gain setting The gain can be set within the range of 1 to 1000 resolution 1 fe Symbol KHC There are two ways to clear the cumulative power data 22 Set B078 01 and press the STR key on the digital operator Os Valid for 1 to 8 i f Inputs 0 e Co
254. R W 2272h 08818 A393 H Deceleration 2 time R W Duration of 2nd segment of 326Fh 12911 1 to 0 01 sec setting 3rd motor deceleration 3rd motor 360000 A393 IL R W 3270h 12912 B 50 ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers A Group Standard Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec Reserved 3271h 12913 to to 330Bh 13067 A094 Select method to switch to R W 00 2CH terminal input 1278h 04728 0 1 2 Acc2 Dec2 profile O1 transition frequency 02 when motor direction reverses A294 Select method to switch to R W 00 2CH terminal input 2273h 08819 0 1 2 Acc2 Dec2 2nd motor O1 transition frequency 02 when motor direction reverses A095 H Accl to Acc2 frequency R W Output frequency at which 1279h 04729 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz transition point Accell switches to Accel2 A095 L R W 127Ah 04730 A295 H Accl to Acc2 frequency R W Output frequency at which 2274h 08820 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz transition point 2nd motor Accell switches to Accel2 A295 L R W 2275h 08821 A096 H Dec1 to Dec2 frequency R W Output frequency at which 127Bh 04731 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz transition point Decel 1 switches to
255. See Chapter 3 for instructions Control Signal Terminal Block See Chapter 4 for wiring Capacitor Bank for DC Link Cable entry exit plate See Chapter 6 for servicing See Chapter 2 for instructions SJ7002 Inverter EEN Specifications Be sure to verify that the specifications application safety requirements Approvals Inverter model number Motor capacity for this model Output Rating frequency voltage current Power Input Rating frequency voltage pha at Manufacturing codes ____ __ lot number The Hitachi SJ7002 inverters have product specifications labels located on the front and the Label and Agency right side of the housing as shown below The director reactor filters also have a product label on the labels match your power source motor and Q D 3 3 Ko 02 r o D Q Product label HITACHI INVERTER Model SJ700 3150HFE2 kW HP 315 420 50H7 60Hz 50Hz 60Hz Qutput Sortie 0 120Hz MFGNo 79A T27453AA001 Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd A 630A 600A Date 0709 V 1Ph 3 Ph 3 Ph Input Entree 380 480V 380 480V MADE IN JAPAN NE17914 45 Model Number Product label HITACHI TYPE _DCL H 315 AMP S 680 A INS H CLASS DRW NO Production number NO DATE NE17653 Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd MADE IN J
256. T OG AND 00 00 00 XV OR 0 i OR Xv ADR 02 XOR exclusive OR Xv C154 Logic output 5 function A All programmable output functions 00 output frequency X Y F available except LOG1 to LOG6 C155 Logic output 5 function B XV C156 Logic output 5 operator AMT OG AND 00 00 00 XV OR 0 i OR Xv ADR G2 XOR exclusive OR Xv C157 Logic output 6 function A All programmable output functions 00 output frequency XY available except LOG1 to LOG6 C158 Logic output 6 function B E XV C159 Logic output 6 operator AMT OG AND 00 00 00 XV OF 0 i OR Xv ADR G2 XOR exclusive OR Xv SJ7002 Inverter 3 65 Input Signal Terminal Functions Defaults Run r A em Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ae ode escription FE2 FU2 F2 T EU USA Jpn to 200 x 2 ms 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv to 200 x 2 ms 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv C160 Terminal 1 input response time C161 Terminal 2 input response time to 200 x 2 ms 00 00 00 xv to 200 x 2 ms 00 00 00 xv C162 Terminal 3 input response time C163 Terminal 4 input response time to 200 x 2 ms 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv to 200 x 2 ms 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv C164 Terminal 5 input response time C165 Terminal 6 input response time C166 Terminal 7 input response time to 200 x 2 ms 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv to 200 x 2 ms 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv
257. Torque Limit input TL must be ON in order to enable torque limiting and its related Symbol TRQ output TRQ See Torque Limit on page 4 30 in the intelligent input section Valid for 11 to 15 Outputs ALx B040 if Required 3040 00 A then set Settings po41 B042 B043 B044 Default Requires terminals config Run Time SJ7002 Series inverters accumulate the total hours in Run Mode run time and the total hours of power ON time You can set thresholds for these accumulating timers Once the threshold is exceeded an output terminal will turn ON One use of this is for preventative maintenance A signal light or audible alert could signal the need for servicing calibration etc Power On Time Over Signals Opt Code 11 RNT and Symbol Function Name Description Symbol 12 ONT 2 7 RNT Run Time Over ON when the accumulated time spent in Valid for 11 to 15 Run Mode exceeds the limit B034 D Outputs ALx 20 x ONT Power ON Time Over ON when the accumulated power ON time o Required B034 exceeds the limit B034 Og Settings 37 Default Requires The two outputs RNT and ONT share the same time threshold parameter B034 Typically im 4 terminals config you will use either the RNT or the ONT output only not both at once These outputs are useful for the notification that a preventative maintenance interval has expired 452 Using Intelligen
258. USA Jpn 2 P029 Motor gear ratio denominator setting 1 to 9999 1 1 1 Xv P031 Accel decel time input selec FEM OG Inverter 00 00 00 xx tion OF 1 G I Expansion card I OFS 02 Expansion card 2 P032 Positioning command input FEM 00 Inverter 00 00 00 XV selection i IFPI 0 I Expansion card I OFS 02 Expansion card 2 P033 Torque command input a OG O terminal 00 00 00 xx selection 7 OT G I OI terminal oe G2 02 terminal REM 03 Inverter keypad P034 P034 Torque command setting 0 to 180 0 0 0 xx P035 Torque command polarity HOR OG Indicated by signal polarity at 02 terminal 00 00 00 xx select DIR G I Depends on motor direction P036 Torque bias mode HO 22 Disable 00 00 00 xx DIF G I Inverter keypad P037 HOF 2 02 terminal input P037 Torque bias value 0 to 180 0 0 0 xx P038 Torque bias polarity HOR OG Indicated by polarity 00 00 00 Xy DIR G I Depends on motor direction P039 Forward speed limit for torque control mode 0 00 to maximum frequency Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 xx P040 Reverse speed limit for torque control mode 0 00 to maximum frequency Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 xx P044 DeviceNet comm watchdog timer 0 00 to 99 99 seconds 1 00 1 00 1 00 xx P045 Inverter action on DeviceNet TEF OG Trip 01 01 01 xx comm error FTF G I Decelerate and trip HO 02 Hold last speed FRS 03 Free run stop DEC 04 Decelerate and stop P046 DeviceNet polled I O Ou
259. Vv Voltage compensation gain for automatic torque boost A047 Automatic torque boost slip gain 0 to 255 100 100 100 Vw Slip compensation gain for automatic torque boost A247 Automatic torque boost slip gain 2nd motor 0 to 255 100 100 100 Vv Slip compensation gain for automatic torque boost DC Braking Settings The DC braking feature can provide additional stopping torque when compared to a normal deceleration to a stop It can also ensure the motor and load are stopped before acceleration When decelerating DC braking is particularly useful at low speeds when normal deceleration torque is minimal During deceleration the inverter injects a DC voltage into the motor windings during deceleration below a frequency you can specify A052 The braking power A054 and duration A055 can both be set You can optionally specify a wait time before DC braking A053 during which the motor will free run coast When starting You can also apply DC braking upon the application of a Run command specifying both the DC braking force level A057 and the duration A058 This will serve to stop the rotation of the motor and the load when the load is capable of driving the motor This effect sometimes called windmilling is common in fan appli cations Often air moving in duct work will drive the fan in a backward direc Output voltage Running Output voltage DC brak
260. a few models that have a built in braking unit The other models use an optional external braking unit e Parallel wires increase effective wire gauge and are denoted by Il in the tables Signal Lines not listed in these tables connect to the removable logic connector The recom mended wire gauge for all wiring to the logic connector is 28 AWG 0 75 mm Be sure to use shielded wire for any analog signals AR Motor Wiring 1 Output Power Lines 3 Chassis Ground Brake Res 200V Inverter Fuse Models UL Breaker HP kw AWG mm rated GFI ANG AMG mm AWG mm rec UL class J type 2 600V 0 5 0 4 SJ700 004LFUF2 20 1 25 10A 10A 20 20 1 25 20 1 25 1 0 75 J700 007LFUF2 18 1 25 10A 10A 20 20 1 25 20 1 25 2 1 5 SJ700 015LFUF2 14 2 10A 10A 14 14 2 14 2 3 2 2 J700 022LFUF2 14 2 15A 15A 14 14 2 14 2 5 3 7 SJ700 037LFUF2 10 3 5 20A 20A 10 10 3 5 10 3 5 7 5 5 5 SJ700 O55LFUF2 8 5 5 30A 30A 8 10 5 5 8 5 5 10 7 5 SJ700 O75LFUF2 6 8 40A 40A 8 10 8 6 8 15 11 SJ700 110LFUF2 4 14 60A 60A 4 10 14 10 14 20 15 SJ700 150LFUF2 2 22 80A 80A 3 8 22 8 22 25 18 5 J700 185LFU2 1 30 100A 100A 3 8 22 8 30 30 22 SJ700 220LFU2 1 38 125A 125A 2 8 30 6 38 40 30 SJ700 300LFU2 2 0 60 or 150A 150A 2 6 30 a 22122 50 37 SJ700 370LFU2 4 0 100 or 175A 175A 1 0 6 38 38 1138 60 45 J700 450LFU2 4 0 100 or 225A 225A 3 0 6 38 38 1138
261. adequate ventilation Otherwise the inverter may overheat and cause equipment damage or fire Step 3 Before proceeding to the wiring section it s a Cover the fan outlet vents G good time to temporarily cover the inverter s ventilation j openings Paper and masking tape are all that is needed Keep Debris Out This will prevent harmful debris such as wire clippings of Inverter Vents and metal shavings from entering the inverter during installation Please observe this checklist while mounting the inverter 1 The ambient temperature must be in the range of 10 to 40 C If the range will be up to 50 C maximun rating you will need to refer to derate the output current performance of the inverter 2 Keep any other heat producing equipment as far away from the inverter as possible 3 When installing the inverter in an enclosure maintain the clearance around the inverter and verify Cover the ventilation slots that its ambient temperature is within specification both sides when the enclosure door is closed 4 Do not open the main front panel door at any time during operation SJ7002 Inverter Exp Step 4 Locate the applicable drawing on the following pages for your inverter 5 Dimensions are given in millimeters inches format Smaller models come equipped with NEMAI adapter conduit box for wire entry for U S models LFU and HFU The NEMA I Check Inverter a
262. ae 400V Ampere Rating Voltage Inverter Model on 0 Voltage Inverter Model or or HP kW Breaker HP kw Breaker SJ700 004LFU2 _ 1 0 75 SJ700 007LFU2 10A 1 0 75 SJ700 007HFU2 E SA 2 1 5 SJ700 015LFU2 15A 2 1 5 SJ700 015HFU2 E 10A 3 2 2 SJ700 022LFU2 20A 3 2 2 J700 022HFU2 E 10A 5 3 7 SJ700 037LFU2 30A 5 3 7 J700 037HFU2 E 15A 7 5 5 5 SJ700 055LFU2 30A 7 5 5 5 SJ700 OSSHFU2 E 15A 10 7 5 SJ700 075LFU2 10 7 5 SJ700 075HFU2 E 20A 200V 15 11 SJ700 110LFU2 15 11 SJ700 1 1OHFU2 E 30A 20 15 SJ700 150LFU2 20 15 SJ700 150HFU2 E 40A 25 18 5 SJ700 185LFU2 25 18 5 SJ700 185HFU2 E 50A 30 22 SJ700 220LFU2 30 22 SJ700 220HFU2 E 60A 40 30 SJ700 300LFU2 400V 40 30 SJ700 300HFU2 E 70A 50 37 SJ700 370LFU2 50 37 SJ700 370HFU2 E 90A 60 45 SJ700 450LFU2 60 45 SJ700 450HFU2 E 125A 75 55 SJ700 550LFU2 75 55 SJ700 550HFU2 E 125A 100 75 SJ700 750HFU2 E 225A 125 90 SJ700 900HFU2 E 225A 150 110 SJ700 1100HFU2 E 300A 200 150 SJ700 1320HFE2 300A J700 1500HFU2 250 185 SJ700 1850HFU2 E 400A 400 315 SJ700 3150HFU2 E 700A 55 400 SJ700 4000HFU2 E 1000A xvi Wire Connectors Motor Overload Protection A A WARNING Field wiring connections must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified ring lug terminal connector sized for the wire gauge being used The connector must be fixed using the crimping tool specified by N Cable the connector ma
263. ain Vector control with 05 sensor NOTE The auto tuning procedure and related warning messages are in Auto tuning of Motor Constants on page 4 71 Please read these before trying to auto tune the motor parameters Keypad Defaults Run peer Kose Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ae z Cue SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 ae EU USA Jpn H001 Auto tuning Setting HOR OG Auto tuning OFF 00 00 00 xx HET G Auto tune measure motor resistance and inductance without rotating AUT G2 Auto tune rotate motor H002 Motor data selection 1st HOR G0 Standard motor data 00 00 00 xx motor AUT G I Auto tuning data OH G2 Adaptive tuning data AUT H202 Motor data selection 2nd HOR G0 Standard motor data 00 00 00 xx motor AUT G I Auto tuning data OH G2 Adaptive tuning data AUT H003 Motor capacity 1st motor 0 20 to 400 kW Factory set xx H203 Motor capacity 2nd motor 0 20 to 400 kW Factory set xx H004 Motor poles setting 1st motor 2 4 6 8 10 poles 4 4 4 xx H204 Motor poles setting 2nd motor 2 4 6 8 10 poles 4 4 4 xx SJ7002 Inverter 3 67 Keypad Defaults Ran ee Eo Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 a SRW OPE FE2 FU2
264. al for information on how to configure and use the In puts 1 8 general purpose inputs MI 1 to MI8 56 MI1 57 MI12 58 MI3 Opt Code 59 MI4 and Symbol 60 MI5 61 MI6 62 MI7 63 MI8 Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Required See Easy Settings Sequence Default Requires terminal config Analog Holding The analog holding function causes the inverter to sample and hold the analog command Command external analog input The hold operation begins when the intelligent input AHD assign exc option code 65 turns ON While AHD terminal is ON the Up Down function uses the held 5 5 Opt Code 65 input level as the reference speed frequency value Set parameter C101 Up Down memory SE 1 Mode Selection 01 to store the last frequency adjusted by UP DWN in memory oS Symbol AHD gt If the inverter power is cycled OFF and ON or the RS reset terminal receives a reset ON O 5 Valid for 1 to 8 and OFF while AHD is ON holding analog value the data held at the moment of power Inputs OFF or Reset ON will be used Required sbi The wave form below shows a typical sequence for use of the Analog Holding Command Settings i Analog input command l Default Requires 0 terminal config i i Output frequency command l 0 t I I Analog Holding Command AHD k Analog hold ON NOTE Frequent use of the Analog Hold function may damage the
265. al functions SET and SET3 This provides an extra level of flexibility needed in particular situations See the following page 4 77 SJ7002 Inverter Parameters for the second motor and third motors have function codes of the form x2xx and x3xx respectively They appear immediately after the first motor s parameter in the menu listing order The following table lists the parameters that have the second third parameter registers for programming Function Name Parameter Codes m 2 3 3 Ko 1st motor 2nd motor 3rd motor Acceleration time setting Acceleration 1 F002 F202 F302 Deceleration time setting Deceleration 1 F003 F203 F303 Base frequency setting A003 A203 A303 Maximum frequency setting A004 A204 A304 Multi speed frequency setting A020 A220 A320 Torque boost method selection A041 A241 Manual torque boost value A042 A242 A342 Manual torque boost frequency adjustment A043 A243 A343 V F characteristic curve selection A044 A244 A344 Automatic torque boost voltage gain A046 A246 Automatic torque boost slip gain A047 A247 Frequency upper limit setting A061 A261 Frequency lower limit setting A062 A262 Second acceleration time setting Accelera A092 A292 A392 tion 2 Second deceleration time setting Decelera A093 A293 A393 tion 2 Select method to use 2nd acceleration deceler A094 A
266. ame the set waiting time per parameter Host C078 the inverter responds master it wai C078 P time i l frame l Inverter I slave g xIpuaddy The following table lists the commands single character codes sent to a particular device on the network Some commands may be broadcast to all devices on the network Command Denim Broadcast to Code all devices 00 Forward Reverse Stop command v 01 Setting of frequency in standard profile v 02 Setting of intelligent terminal state v 03 Read all monitor data block read 04 Read inverter status 05 Read trip history 06 Read a single parameter value 07 Write a single parameter value Vv 08 Set inverter parameters to default values Y 09 Verifies that the requested setting can be written to EEPROM OA Writes a parameter value to EEPROM v OB Requests the recalculation of internal constant v NOTE Use of command 08 set inverter parameters to default values first requires setting the initialization mode parameter B084 to 01 initializes parameters only or 02 initializes param eters and clears the trip history Command 00 The 00 command controls the Forward Reverse and Stop mode of the inverter You must set parameter A002 03 in order for serial communications control of the inverter to apply The frame format of command 00 follows the Frame format timing diagram and specification table
267. amp when OH G I Enable during deceleration and constant xx DC bus voltage rises above speed threshold level in order to avoid over voltage trip ADH 02 Enable during acceleration xx B131 Over voltage LADSTOP level 330 to 390 V for 200V class 380 380 380 XW 660 to 780 V for 400V class 760 760 760 Sets the threshold level for over voltage LADSTOP When the DC bus voltage is above the Xv threshold value the inverter stops deceleration until the DC bus voltage is less than the threshold setting again B132 Acceleration and deceleration rate at overvoltage 0 10 to 30 00 seconds 1 00 1 00 1 00 Xv suppression B133 Overvoltage suppression proportional gain 0 00 to 2 55 0 50 0 50 0 50 XX B134 Overvoltage suppression integral time 0 000 to 9 999 10 00 to 63 53 seconds 0 060 0 060 0 060 X X 3 50 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions 2 a le CE 5 2D C e O 42 2 ob E oO iS av oO C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Input Terminal The eight input terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 can be configured for any of 44 different functions The next two tables show how to configure the eight terminals The inputs are logical in that they are either OFF or ON We define these states as OFF 0 and ON 1 The inverter comes with default options for the eight terminals These default settings are initially u
268. an internal DC bus voltage Then the inverter circuit converts the DC back to AC again to power the motor The special inverter can vary its output frequency and voltage according to the desired motor speed Variable frequency Drive Power Input L1 R Converter Internal DC Bus Inverter Motor Rectifier The simplified drawing of the inverter shows three double throw switches In Hitachi inverters the switches are actually IGBTs isolated gate bipolar transistors Using a commutation algorithm the microprocessor in the drive switches the IGBTs ON and OFF at a very high speed to create the desired output waveforms The inductance of the motor windings helps smooth out the pulses Torque and In the past AC variable speed drives used an Output Constant Volts open loop scalar technique to control speed voltage Hertz Operation The constant volts per hertz operation V maintains a constant ratio between the applied voltage and the applied frequency With these 1007 Peas ene a conditions AC induction motors inherently Constant torque delivered constant torque across the operating Ny speed range For some applications this scalar technique was adequate Today with the advent of sophisticated micro processors and digital signal processors DSPs it is possible to control the speed and torque of AC induction motors with unprece dented accuracy The SJ7002 utilizes these devices to perform
269. and configure the associated parameters This manual makes use of the velocity profile graph used in industry shown at right In the example the acceler ation is a ramp to a set speed and the decel eration is a decline to a stop Fixed speed Velocity Profile 1 17 SJ7002 Inverter Acceleration and deceleration settings specify the time required to go from a stop to maximum frequency or visa versa The Speed Maximum speed resulting slope speed change divided by time is the acceleration or deceleration An increase in output frequency uses the accel eration slope while a decrease uses the deceleration slope The accel or decel time a particular speed change depends on the starting and ending frequencies However 0 the slope is constant corresponding to the i i full scale accel or decel time setting lt Acceleration gt Q D 3 3 Ko 02 o D Qa For example the full scale acceleration Acceleration time setting setting time may be 10 seconds the time required to go from 0 to 60 Hz The SJ7002 inverter can store up to 16 preset speeds And it can apply separate accelera tion and deceleration transitions from any Speed preset to any other preset speed A multi Speed 2 speed profile shown at right uses two or Speed 1 more preset speeds which you can select via intelligent input terminals This external control can apply any preset speed at any time Alternative
270. andard default acceleration 2nd motor F302 Acceleration 1 time setting 3rd motor 10 01 to 3600 seconds 30 0 30 0 300 WH Standard default acceleration 3rd motor F003 Deceleration 1 time setting 10 01 to 3600 seconds 30 0 30 0 300 Vv Standard default deceleration F203 Deceleration 1 time setting 2nd motor 10 01 to 3600 seconds 30 0 30 0 300 vv Standard default deceleration 2nd motor F303 Deceleration 1 time setting 3rd motor 10 01 to 3600 seconds 30 0 30 0 300 W Standard default deceleration 3rd motor amp c3 F004 Keypad Run key routing FH Forward 00 00 00 xx Rv qc Reverse 3 10 A Group Standard Functions 2 a le CE 5 2D C e O 42 2 ob E oO iS av oO A Group Standard Functions Basic Parameter Settings These settings affect the most fundamental behavior of the inverter the outputs to the motor The frequency of the inverter s AC output determines the motor speed You may select from three different sources for the reference speed During application development you may prefer using the potentiometer but you may switch to an external source control terminal setting in the finished application for example The base frequency and maximum frequency settings interact according to the graph below left The in
271. ariable D gain Voltage Feedback gt 1A074 om Analog input scaling A GND s Scale factor Monitor L ih O A075 D004 V FO Ol I t A076 pen PID V I input select 2 2 of ic SS a Og av 4 76 Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors Simultaneous Connections Inverter Configuration for Multiple Motor Types For some applications you may need to connect two or more motors wired in parallel to a single vT2 inverter s output For example this is common in Inverter wrs I NY conveyor applications where two separate conveyors need to have approximately the same speed The use of two motors may be less expensive than making the mechanical link for one motor to drive multiple conveyors Some of the requirements when using multiple to Nth motor motors with one drive are e Use only V F variable frequency control do not use SLV sensorless vector control The inverter output must be rated to handle the sum of the currents from the motors You must use separate thermal protection switches or devices to protect each motor Locate the device for each motor inside the motor housing or as close to it as possible The wiring for the motors must be permanently connected in parallel do not remove one motor from the circuit during operation NOTE The motor speeds are identical only in theory That is because slight
272. armonic frequencies may cause erroneous readings However the measuring instruments and methods listed above provide reasonably accurate results Note 3 A general purpose digital volt meter DVM is not usually suitable to measure a distorted waveform no t pure sinusoid D 3 2 z D 3 D 3 D 3 a D Bunooysejqnop 6 26 Maintenance and Inspection e fe lt 02 Ko Ka 2 FE oa Oo Z a C o 2 E 49 xe fa The figure below shows measurement locations for voltage current and power measurements listed in the table on the previous page The voltage to be measured is the fundamental wave effective voltage The power to be measured is the total effective power Three phase measurement diagram Inverter Inverter Output Taking voltage measurements around drives equipment requires the right equipment and a safe Voltage Measure approach You are working with high voltages and high frequency switching waveforms that ment Techniques are not pure sinusoids Digital voltmeters will not usually produce reliable readings for these waveforms And it is usually risky to connect high voltage signals to oscilloscopes The inverter output semiconductors have some leakage and no load measurements produce misleading results So we highly recommend using the following circuits to measure voltage for performing the equipment inspections Voltage measurement with load Voltage mea
273. ases use register 0900h for recalculation as described below Submitting an ENTER Command e Write any data in all memory of a holding register at 0900h by the Write in Holding 7 Register command 06h Cc Write Data Description 0000 Recalculate the motor constants 0001 Store the register data Other Recalculate the motor constants and store the register data NOTE The ENTER command takes much time to run You can check its progress by monitor ing the Data Writing signal of a coil at 001 Ah NOTE The service life of the storage element of the inverter is limited to about 100 000 write operations Frequent use of the ENTER command may shorten its service life SJ7002 Inverter Ex ModBus Data Listing ModBus Coil List The following tables list the primary coils for the inverter interface to the network The table legend is given below Coil Number The network register address offset for the coil in hex and decimal Actual network address is 30001 offset The coil data is a single bit binary value e Name The functional name of the coil R W The read only R or read write R W access permitted to the inverter data Description The meaning of each of the states of the coils gt D E List of Coil Numbers a S Coil number w Name R W Description hex dec 0000h 00000 Reserved 0001h 00001 Operation command R W 0
274. ata format below Name of Data Description Coil Binary data that can be referenced and changed 1 bit long Holding Register 16 bit data that can be referenced and changed Function Code Specify a function you want to make the inverter execute Function codes available to the SJ7002 are listed below Maximum data size Maximum number of Function 4 Code Function bytes available per data elements per message message Olh Read Coil Status 4 32 coils in bits 03h Read Holding Register 8 4 registers in bytes 05h Write in Coil 2 1 coil in bits 06h Write in Holding Register 2 1 register in bytes 08h Loopback Test OFh Write in Coils 4 32 coils in bits 10h Write in Registers 4 4 registers in bytes Error check Modbus RTU uses CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check for error checking The CRC code is 16 bit data that is generated for 8 bit blocks of arbitrary length The CRC code is generated by a generator polynomial CRC 16 Ku SJ7002 Inverter Header and trailer silent interval Latency is the time between the reception of a query from the master and transmission of a response from the inverter The header and trailer set the total time the inverter should wait before sending a response after having received a query from the master system Be sure to specify the time corresponding to the transmission of 3 5 characters 24 bits as t
275. ated output 95 0 95 1 95 1 95 1 Watt loss at 70 output 1100 1345 1625 1975 ey at 100 output 1550 1900 2300 2800 Dynamic braking w o braking unit 10 10 10 10 age ao with braking unit 55 110 45 90 35 75 30 60 DC braking Variable operating frequency time and braking force Electrical filtering Built in EMC filter and built in zero phase reactor Weight kg lb 22 48 4 30 66 30 66 43 94 6 Tables for 400V Note that General Specifications on page 1 10 covers all SJ7002 inverters followed by footnotes for all specifications tables The 400V models from 007 to 220HFU2 class inverters 7 5 to 30 HP include internal dynamic braking units see Dynamic Braking on page 5 6 Item 400V Class Specifications SJ7002 inverters U S version 007HFUF2 015HFUF2 022HFUF2 040HFUF2 055HFUF2 AOON MOSI European ver 007HFEF2 015HFEF2 022HFEF2 040HFEF2 055HFEF2 Applicable motor size 2 HP 1 2 3 5 7 5 kW 0 75 1 5 22 4 5 5 Rated capacity kVA 400 480V 1 7 2 0 2 5 3 1 3 6 4 3 5 7 6 8 9 7 11 6 Rated input voltage 3 phase 3 wire 380 to 480V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 Rated input current A 2 8 4 2 5 8 9 9 13 Rated output voltage 3 3 phase 3 wire 380 to 480V corresponding to input voltage Rated output current A 2 5 3 8 5 3 9 0 14 Overload capacity output current A 150 for 60 sec 200 for 3 sec Efficiency at 100 rated output 89
276. braking time by the duration of the DB pulse b Edge triggered When the DB input transitions OFF to ON and the inverter is in Run Mode it will apply DC braking only until the motor stops then DC braking is OFF During Stop Mode the inverter ignores OFF to ON transitions Therefore do not use edge triggered operation when you need DC braking before acceleration nn O CAUTION Be careful to avoid specifying a braking time that is long enough to cause motor v Q overheating If you use DC braking we recommend using a motor with a built in thermistor 5 a and wiring it to the inverter s thermistor input see Thermistor Thermal Protection on page 4 35 25 Also refer to the motor manufacturer s specifications for duty cycle recommendations 8 during DC braking a J fo Keypad Defaults Run Aa pe Nanas Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 re EG gr SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn A051 DC braking enable OFF OG Disable 00 00 00 Xv OH 0 I Enable Xv DOH 2 Brake at set frequency only Xv A052 DC braking frequency setting 0 00 to 60 00 Hz 0 50 0 50 0 50 XW Frequency at which DC braking activates during decel Xv A053 DC braking wait time 0 0 to 5 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv The delay after reaching the DC braking frequency or Xv DB signal before DC braking begins A054 DC braking force during deceleratio
277. c output signals 4 58 Logic terminals 3 50 input wiring examples 4 1 Low cooling fan speed 4 5 3 35 i 99 Low output current signal 4 60 M Megger test 6 19 Momentum A 4 Main profile parameters 3 9 Maintenance procedures 6 17 Major failure signal 461 ModBus mode communications B 21 Model number convention 1 5 Monitor mode 2 31 2 35 2 36 3 4 auto tuning 4 71 Motor load A 4 Motor poles 2 34 Motor selection 1 19 Motor wiring 2 26 Multiple motors Multi speed operation N Nameplate 1 5 trip events 6 15 NEC A 4 NEMA A 4 NEMA rating 2 8 Noise filters 5 2 AC reactor 2 5 Monitoring functions 3 6 Motor constants 3 66 4 69 manual setting of 4 74 Mounting location 2 6 configuration 4 76 4 15 4 17 A4 Multi speed profiles 1 16 Multi speed settings 3 13 Multi stage position select 4 39 Navigational map 2 31 34 NEMA compliance 2 17 Network detection signal 4 57 Noise suppression 1 19 O Open collector outputs 4 43 A 4 Operational modes 3 5 Operator interfaces 1 3 Optimal accel decel 3 23 Optional components 2 5 Options 1 2 Orientation A 4 Output circuits 4 43 Output deviation for PID control 4 46 Output frequency 3 9 Output overload 3 36 Output terminals 2 26 Over current trip 3 30 Overload advance notice signal 4 46 Overload restriction 3 36 4 29 Over torque signal 4 48
278. case the inverter motor is still warm from prior running before a short power outage Free setting The free setting V f inverter mode of operation uses voltage and frequency parameter pairs to V f Pattern define seven points on a V f graph This provides a way to define a multi segment V f curve that best suits your application The frequency settings do require that F1 lt F2 lt F3 lt F4 lt F5 lt F6 lt F7 their values must have this ascending order relationship To satisfy this criterion during initial parameter editing set F7 B112 and work backwards when setting these values since the defaults are all 0 Hz However the voltages V1 to V7 may either increase or decrease from one to the next There fore you may set these parameters in any order U 2 fe 3 Q D 12 Defaults Run Pie enl Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 an FE2 FU2 F2 Lotti EU USA Jpn B100 Free setting V f frequency 1 0 to Free setting V f frequency 2 Hz 0 0 0 xx B101 Free setting V f voltage 1 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 0 0 0 0 xx B102 Free setting V f frequency 2 0 to Free setting V f frequency 3 Hz 0 0 0 xx B103 Free setting V f voltage 2 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 0 0 0 0 xx B104 Free setting V f frequency 3 0 to Free setting V f frequency 4 Hz 0 0 0 xx B105 Free setting V f voltage 3 0 0 to 800 0 V 0 0 0 0 0 0 xx B106
279. cceleration The acceleration pause function can be Output Pause Function used to minimize the occurrence of frequency over current trips when accelerating high inertia loads It introduces a dwell or pause in the acceleration ramp You can control the frequency at which this dwell occurs A069 and the duration A069 of the pause time A070 This function can also be used as an anti windmilling 0 tool when the load might have a tendency to drive the motor in a reverse direction while the inverter is in a Stop mode Initiating a normal acceleration in such a situa tion may result in over current trips This function can be used to keep the inverter output frequency and voltage at low levels long enough to bring the load to a stop and commence turning in the desired direction before the acceleration ramp resumes See also DC Braking Settings on page 3 18 Set frequency Accel pause period 1 Defaults Run vue en Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 Tae ode escription FE2 FU2 F2 k 5 i EU USA Jpn A069 Acceleration pause frequency setting 0 00 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv model 4000HFx2 is 0 00 to 120 0 Hz A070 Acceleration pause time setting 0 0 to 60 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv 3 22 A Group Standard Functions 9 2 a te a 5 2 C e O n bid 2 ob E oO iS av oO
280. change to the inverter See Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss on page 4 4 for complete instructions including wiring and signal timing diagrams for using the controlled deceleration at power loss feature After making the wiring change use function B050 to enable the feature Use B051 to deter mine the point at which a decaying DC bus voltage will trigger the controlled deceleration Use parameter B054 to specify an initial step wise deceleration at power loss and B053 to specify the duration of the linear deceleration During the controlled deceleration the inverter itself acts as a load to decelerate the motor With either a high inertia load or a short deceleration time or both it is possible that the inverter impedance will not be low enough to continue linear deceleration and avoid an over voltage condition on the DC bus Use parameter B052 to specify a threshold for the over voltage In this case the inverter pauses deceleration runs at constant speed When the DC bus decays again below the threshold linear deceleration resumes The pause resume process will repeat as necessary until the DC bus energy is depleted under voltage condition occurs The case when setting B052 is lower than the inverter supply voltage has special consider ations e If B052 Over voltage Threshold During Power Loss is less than B051 DC Bus Voltage Trigger Level During Power Loss the over voltage threshold during power loss will be
281. class models E 15 Instantaneous If an instantaneous power failure lasts Check whether the power supply voltage power failure 15 ms or more the inverter will shut off has dropped recover the power supply Inst F F protection its output When the power failure Check the MCB and magnetic contactors duration is long the inverter assumes a for poor contacts replace the MCB and normal power OFF If a restart mode has the magnetic contactor been selected and an operation command remains in the inverter the inverter will restart after the power is recovered Eedg Temperature The inverter will display the error code Check whether the cooling efficiency has error due to shown on the left if the lowering of been lowered replace the cooling fan OH tFAH low cooling cooling fan speed is detected at the occur Check the heat sink for clogging clean fan speed rence of the temperature error described the heat sink below EC l Temperature If the main circuit temperature rises Check whether the inverter is installed error because of a high ambient temperature or vertically check the installation OH fir for other reasons the inverter will shut OFF its output Check whether the ambient temperature is high lower the ambient temperature Note 5 The inverter will not accept reset commands input via the RS terminal or entered by the STOP RESET key Therefore turn off the inverter power SJ7002 Inverter
282. cles Does the motor need a chassis ground connection A Yes for several reasons Most importantly this provides protection in the event of a short in the motor that puts a hazardous voltage on its housing Secondly motors exhibit leakage currents that increase with aging Lastly a grounded chassis generally emits less electrical noise than an ungrounded one SJ7002 Inverter 1 19 Q What type of motor is compatible with the Hitachi inverters A Motor type It must be a three phase AC induction motor Use an inverter grade motor that has 800V insulation for 200V class inverters or 1600V insulation for 400V class Motor size In practice it s better to find the right size motor for your application then look for the inverter to match the motor Q D 3 3 Ko ip ey D Q NOTE There may be other factors that will affect motor selection including heat dissipation motor operating speed profile enclosure type and cooling method Q How many poles should the motor have A Hitachi inverters can be configured to operate motors with 2 4 6 or 8 poles The greater the number of poles the slower the top motor speed will be but it will have higher torque at the base speed Q Will I be able to add dynamic resistive braking to my Hitachi SJ7002 drive after the initial installation A Yes Models SJ700 004XXX through SJ700 220XXX have built in dynamic braking units You can add an exte
283. ction 05 05 05 C027 FM signal selection 00 00 00 C028 AM signal selection 00 00 00 C029 AMI signal selection 00 00 00 C030 Digital current monitor reference value Rated current x 1 0 C031 Terminal 11 active state 00 00 00 C032 Terminal 12 active state 00 00 00 C033 Terminal 13 active state 00 00 00 C034 Terminal 14 active state 00 00 00 C035 Terminal 15 active state 00 00 00 C036 Alarm relay active state 01 01 01 C038 Low current indication output mode select 01 01 01 C039 Low current indication detection level Rated current x 1 0 C040 Overload signal output mode 01 01 01 C041 Overload level setting Rated current for each inverter C042 Frequency arrival setting for accel 0 00 0 00 0 00 C043 Arrival frequency setting for decel 0 00 0 00 0 00 C044 PID deviation level setting 3 0 3 0 3 0 C045 Frequency arrival setting for acceleration 2 0 00 0 00 0 00 C046 Frequency arrival setting for deceleration 2 0 00 0 00 0 00 C052 Maximum PID feedback PV data 0 00 0 00 0 00 C053 Minimum PID feedback PV data 100 0 100 0 100 0 C055 Over torque forward driving level setting 100 100 100 C056 Over torque reverse regenerating level setting 100 100 100 C057 Over torque reverse driving level setting 100 100 100 C058 Over torque forward regenerating level setting 100 100 100 C061 Electronic thermal warning level setting 80 80 80 C062 Alarm code output 00 00 00 C063 Zero speed detection level 0 00 0 00 0 00 C064 Heatsink o
284. ction code 10 2 Function code 10 3 Start address high 11 3 Register start number 11 order 2 high order 4 Start address low order 02 4 Register start number 02 2 low order 5 Number of holding 00 5 Number of holding 00 registers high order registers high order 6 Number of holding 02 6 Number of holding 02 registers low order registers low order 7 Byte number 3 04 7 CRC 16 high order E5 8 Change data 1 high 00 8 CRC 16 low order 34 order 9 Change data 1 low 04 order 10 Change data 2 high 93 order 11 Change data 2 low EO order 12 CRC 16 high order 9E 13 CRC 16 low order 9F Note 1 Broadcasting is disabled Note 2 The starting coil number is one less than the number of the coil to be read first When the Write Holding Register command cannot be executed normally refer to the exception response Exception Response SJ7002 Inverter Ez When sending a query excluding a broadcasting query to an inverter the master always requests a response from the inverter Usually the inverter returns a response according to the query However when finding an error in the query the inverter returns an exception response The exception response consists of the fields shown below Field Configuration Slave address Function code Exception code CRC 16 The content of each field is explained below The function code of the exception response
285. cy adjustment R W 0 10 to 9 99 Hz 1355h 04949 10 to 999 0 01 Hz B083 Carrier frequency setting R W Sets the PWM carrier internal 1356h 04950 Sto 150 0 1 kHz switching frequency B084 Initialization mode R W 00 Trip history clear 1357h 04951 0 1 2 parameters or trip history 01 Parameter initialization 02 Trip history clear and parameter initialization B085 Country code for initializa R W 00 Japan version 1358h 04952 0 1 2 tion 01 Europe version 02 USA version B086 Frequency scaling conver R W Specify a constant to scale D007 1359h 04953 110999 0 1 sion factor to display in engineering units B087 STOP key enable R W 00 Enable 135Ah 04954 0 1 2 01 Disable 02 Disable only the STOP function ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers B Group Fine Tuning Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec B088 Restart mode after FRS R W 00 Restart from 0Hz 135Bh 04955 0 1 2 01 Restart from frequency detected from actual speed of motor 02 Restart from active matching frequency Reserved 135Ch 04956 B090 Dynamic braking usage R W 0 0 to 100 0 135Dh 04957 Oto 1000 0
286. d AVR voltage select 200 215 220 230 240 Valid for 200V class inverters A082 380 400 415 440 Valid for 400V class inverters 460 480 Please read the following Warning before running the auto tuning procedure on the next page WARNING You may need to disconnect the load from the motor before performing auto tuning The inverter runs the motor forward and backward for several seconds without regard to load movement limits 4 72 Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control Preparation for Auto tuning Procedure Be sure to study the preparation items and verify the related inverter configuration before going further in this procedure 1 Adjust the motor base frequency A003 and the motor voltage selection A082 to match the specifications of the motor used in the auto tuning procedure 2 Verify that the motor is not more than one frame size smaller than the rated size for he inverter Otherwise the motor characteristic measurements may be inaccurate 3 Be sure that no outside force will drive the motor during auto tuning 4 If DC braking is enabled A051 01 the motor constants will not be accurately set There fore disable DC braking A051 00 before starting the auto tuning procedure 5 When auto tuning with motor rotation H001 02 take care to verify the following points a The motor will rotate up to 80 of the base frequency make sure that this will not cause any problem b Do not at
287. d Amperes LEDs will be ON An easy way to remember this is that kW V x A 1000 Power LED This LED is ON when the power input to the inverter is ON e Alarm LED This LED is ON when an alarm condition has tripped the inverter Clearing the alarm will turn this LED OFF again See Chapter 6 for details on clearing alarms Function Key This key is used to navigate through the lists of parameters and functions for setting and monitoring parameter values Up Down A 2 Keys Use these keys to alternately move up or down the lists of parameter and functions shown in the display and increment decrement values Store G Key When the unit is in Program Mode and the operator has edited a param eter value press the Store key to write the new value to the EEPROM This parameter is then displayed at powerup by default If you want to change the powerup default navigate to a new parameter value and press the Store key Et Using Keypad Devices Keypad Whether you use the keypad on the inverter or the read write copy unit each navigates the same Navigational Map way The diagram below shows the basic navigational map of parameters and functions Monitor Mode Program Mode Display Data Select Function Select Parameter Edit Parameter D002 D104 nnn II Store as powerup default Increment g fob E decrement av o 2 m te amp 3 2D e O Increment decr
288. d for your system Every system must be configured with an inverter a motor and an external shutoff device The external shutoff device must at least comply with Safety Category 3 of EN954 1 e Safe Stop function is not intended for electrical insulation between the inverter and motor If necessary connect a shut off device e g contactor to the motor connection cable e Safe Stop function is not designed to prevent malfunctions in drive process control and application functions e Carefully note that digital outputs i e relay and open collector outputs are not regarded as the safety related signals described here The signals output from externally installed safety relays must be used for the safety related control circuits installed for your system Inverter To enable the emergency stop function set the slide lever of slide switch SW1 to ON The Configuration factory default SW1 setting is OFF Emergency Stop disabled NOTE Before operating slide switch SW1 make sure that the input power supply is off NOTE Carefully note that improperly turning slide switch SW1 ON or OFF will automati cally change function assignments to the control terminals of the inverter i I Slide switch SW1 ES I Slide lever factory setting OFF OFF ID ON 2 38 Emergency Stop Function D E 5 e 2 jo 2 _ Oo gt and Installation When the emergency
289. d independently at either the AM See I O specs on page 4 9 or AMI terminal as listed in the table below Use C028 to configure terminal AM and C029 to configure terminal AMI Func Terminal Code Description Full Scale Value 00 Output frequency 0 Max frequency Hz 01 Output current 0 200 02 Output torque 1 0 200 C028 AM C029 AMI 04 Output voltage 0 100 05 Input electric power 0 200 06 Thermal load ratio 0 100 07 LAD frequency 0 Max frequency Hz Note 1 Display of torque is possible only during sensorless vector control OHz domain sensorless vector control and vector control with feedback 2 2 of g TS a Og av The analog signals may need some adjustment for gain or offset to compensate for variances in the system For example the signals may drive a panel meter and require a full scale gain adjustment The table below lists the function codes and their descriptions The AM and AMI terminals have separate gain and offset adjustments Note the default values Func Terminal Description Range Default B080 AM Gain adjustment 0 255 180 C086 AM Offset Adjustment 0 0 10 0V 0 0V C087 AMI Gain adjustment 0 255 80 C088 AMI Offset Adjustment 0 0 20 0mA 0 0mA SJ7002 Inverter KEJ Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control Introduction These advanced torque control a
290. d on with an input check whether the inverter power has USP operation signal remaining in the inverter been turned on with an input operation This protective function is active when signal remaining in the inverter reset the the USP function is enabled operation command and then turn ON the inverter power E Y4 Ground fault When the inverter power is turned ON Check for the ground fault check the protection 5 this protective function detects the ground output cables and motor GHIL FIG fault between the inverter output circuit Check the inverter itself for abnormality and the motor to protect the inverter This remove the output cables from the function does not operate when a residual inverter and then check the inverter voltage remains in the motor Check the main circuit for abnormality use testing methods described in this chapter and repair the inverter E 15 Input over This protective function determines an Check whether the input voltage is high voltage error if the input voltage is kept above the while the inverter is stopped lower the OL SRC protection specification level for 100 seconds while input voltage suppress the power voltage the inverter is stopped The inverter will fluctuation or connect an AC reactor trip if the DC voltage of the main circuit between the power supply and the inverter is kept above about 390 VDC in case of input the 200 V class models or about 780 VDC in case of the 400 V
291. d servo lock states Output frequency Servo ON SON i i i I Current Forcing Opt Code 55 Symbol FOC Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Required 044 4244 Settings Default Requires terminal config FW RV Inverter does not follow FW RV __ ft command because SON is OFF The current forcing function applies an excitation current to pre build magnetic flux in the motor The forcing function is available when one of the following vector control modes is configured for use at the inverter output e A044 03 sensorless vector control e A044 04 OHz range sensorless vector control e A044 05 vector control with sensor To use current forcing assign option code 55 to an intelligent input terminal After making the input assignment the inverter will accept an operation command only when the FOC terminal is ON If the FOC terminal is turned OFF during inverter operation the inverter output enters FRS mode free run stop If the FOC is turned ON again the inverter restarts the motor according to function B088 Restart Mode After FRS Restart after FRS B088 Free run stop Excitation current flows Output frequency Current forcing FOC i f i I FW RV Inverter does not follow FW RV __f command because FOC is OFF D 2 fe 5 e 5 Ke suonee8d0 KEJ Using Intelligent Input Terminals General Purpose Refer to the Easy Sequence Instruction Manu
292. danger of shock or injury C4 MFG No Hitachi Lid MADE IN JAPAN ti NF CEHxx To meet EMC Class B limit an optional ferrite core FC Hx must be inserted between the NF CEHx filter above and the inverter This capacitive filter reduces radiated noise from the main power wires in the inverter input side This filter is not for achieving CE compliance and is applicable only to the input side only of the inverter It comes in two versions for 200V class inverters or 400V class inverters Please refer to the documentation that comes with the radio noise filter for installation instruc tions The DC choke reactor suppresses harmonics generated by the inverter It attenuates the high frequency components on the inverter s internal DC bus link However note that it does not protect the diode rectifiers in the inverter input circuit Expansion Cards SJ7002 Inverter The SJ FB Encoder Feedback Board installs in PWB connector the inverter s expansion bay which can accept to external wiring up to two expansion cards The encoder card accepts two channel incremental encoder signals Position feedback is essential for certain torque control algorithms and is useful for improving low speed performance The card can also generate linear acceleration deceleration ramps for velocity control All wiring associated with this card connects to its PWB connectors as shown Some related signals may be assigned to the intelli
293. dapter is optional for larger models as indicated in the drawings Dimensions sn Model 150 5 91 2 b 6 0 24 SJ700 004LFUF2 007LFUF2 007HFUF2 HFEF2 015LFUF2 p 015HFUF2 HFEF2 3 5 022LFUF2 58 022HFUF2 HFEF2 S 3 a gt alc v 3 037LFUF2 A ME pa 35 040HFUF2 HFEF2 UR o Q 6 0 24 Air intake 143 5 63 Exhaust Model 210 8 27 i 2 b 7 0 28 SJ700 055LFUF2 SS 7 0 28 055HFUF2 HFEF2 T 075LFUF2 je 075HFUF2 HFEF2 110LFUF2 alo 110HFUF2 HFEF2 o Je N 33 x 28 1 30 x 1 10 AN Air intake 170 6 69 203 7 99 NOTE Be sure to use lock washers or other means to ensure screws do not loosen due to vibration 210 Step by Step Basic Installation Dimensional drawings continued Exhaust 250 9 84 229 30 78 2 7 0 28 Model J700 150LFUF2 150HFUF2 HFEF2 i 2 185LFU2 A A EE 285HFU2 HFE2 23 220LFU2 elg Ls aja 1 GE 220HFU2 HFE2 GT EG 7 B p Vy 7 0 28 3 places 42 x 42 5 j 1 65 x 1 67 lt gt Air intake 00 I ht o o o i u j k 244 9 60 il I E n m w SQ N ON Exhaust 2 4 10 0 39 Model J700 300LFU2 300HFU2 HFE2 510 20 08 540 21 26
294. ddress of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes 06 Data Parameter specified to be read 4 bytes see tables below BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Command and Data CR Control code carriage return I byte CR 0x0D The receive frame includes an ACK Receive frame format acknowledge character followed by an re fee fee Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 ACK Control code ACKnowledge I byte ACK 0x06 Data Parameter value 8 bytes Value of parameter times ten returned as ASCII char code except for H003 and H203 see table below BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Command and Data CR Control code carriage return 1 byte CR 0x0D Use the codes in the table below to return parameters for H003 and H203 motor capacity selection Code Data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Japan or U S A mode B85 00 or 02 02 KW 04 10 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 EU mode B85 01 0 2kW 0 37 10 55 10 75 1 1 1 5 2 2 3 0 40 Code Data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Japan or U S A mode B85 00 or 02 5 5 kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 EU mode B85 01 5 5kW 7 5 11 15 1 18
295. de the inverter uses a large capacitor as shown in the diagram below The capacitor handles high voltage and current as it smooths the power for use by the inverter So any degradation of the capacitor will affect the performance of the inverter The capacitor bank in SJ7002 series inverters is replaceable This section will show you how to replace it in the field Power Converter Internal DC Bus Variable frequency Drive Inverter Rectifier Capacitor life is reduced in higher ambient temperatures as the graph below demonstrates Be sure to keep the ambient temperature at acceptable levels and perform maintenance inspections on the fan heat sink and other components If the inverter is installed on a cabinet the ambient temperature is the temperature inside the cabinet Ambient temperature C Capacitor Life Curve 24 hrs day operation Years SJ7002 Inverter Capacitor The DC section of the inverter main circuit uses high capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitors Replacement as smoothing filter components Since chemical reactions occur inside the capacitors the service life of these parts depends mainly on the ambient temperature and operating conditions Capacitors used in a standard operating environment must be replaced after about 10 years However each capacitor must me immediately replaced if it fails a visual inspection or if periodic inspections shows the capacity t
296. dge are eee Error Description ae Error Description 01H Parity error 07H Receive buffer overrun error 02H Check sum error 08H Receive time out error 03H Framing error 11H Abnormal command code error 04H Overrun error 13H Execution disabled 05H Protocol error 16H Abnormal parameter code value error 06H ASCII code error If a host computer broadcasts a command to all inverter stations no response will be returned to the host SJ7002 Inverter B 19 Block Check This section shows how the inverter protocol computes defines a BCC block check code The Code BCC BCC is calculated for each frame transmitted and can be used to verify the integrity of data transmission The example below shows command 01 setting the inverter frequency to 5Hz Frame format ASCII Code gt 0x 02 gt 01 Ox 30 31 gt 01 Ox 30 31 000500 0x 30 30 30 35 30 30 gt 0 Ox 30 35 0x OD The block check code is computed by using the ASCII codes shown above and applying eXclusive OR XOR operations Beginning with the first pair of bytes the result of their XOR result is then used in an XOR operation with the third byte and so on For this example the BCC calculation is shown below Data bytes 30 31 30 31 30 30 30 35 30 30 01 31 00 XOR intermediate results bu 30 4 Lo 00 Lo 30 Lo
297. differences in their loads will cause one motor to slip a little more than another even if the motors are identi cal Therefore do not use this technique for multi axis machinery that must maintain a fixed position reference between its axes Some equipment manufacturers may have a single type of machine that has to support three different motor types and only one motor will be connected at a time For example an OEM may sell basically the same machine to the US market and the European market Some reasons why the OEM needs two motor profiles are The inverter power input voltage is different for these markets The required motor type is also different for each destination In other cases the inverter needs two profiles because the machine characteristics vary accord ing to these situations Sometimes the motor load is very light and can move fast Other times the motor load is heavy and must move slower Using two profiles allows the motor speed acceleration and deceleration to be optimal for the load and avoid inverter trip fault events Sometimes the slower version of the machine does not have special braking options but a higher performance version does have braking features Having multiple motor profiles lets you store several personalities for motors in one inverter s memory The inverter allows the final selection between the three motor types to be made in the field through the use of intelligent input termin
298. ds A145 value to output 00 00 00 Xv frequency EY G I Minus subtracts A145 value from output frequency Elevator Accel Parameters A150 to A153 affect the slope of the acceleration and deceleration for the elevator Decel Curves related S curves a SE Defaul a2 efaults Run T a ae eats Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 eae oS L FE2 FU2 F2 7 i EU USA Jpn A150 EL S curve accel ratio 1 Range is 0 to 50 25 25 25 xx A151 EL S curve accel ratio 2 Range is 0 to 50 25 25 25 xx A152 EL S curve decel ratio 1 Range is 0 to 50 25 25 25 xx A153 EL S curve decel ratio 3 Range is 0 to 50 25 25 25 xx 3 30 B Group Fine Tuning Functions B Group Fine Tuning Functions Automatic Restart Mode and Phase Loss o 2 pom N 32 o as G ca O The B Group of functions and parameters adjust some of the more subtle but useful aspects of motor control and system configuration The restart mode determines how the inverter will resume operation after a fault causes a trip event The four options provide advantages for various situations Frequency matching allows the inverter to read the motor speed by virtue of its residual magnetic flux and restart the output at the corresponding frequency The inverter can attempt a restart a certain number of times depending on the particular trip event e Over current trip restart up to 3 times e
299. duplicated for the second motor settings the remaining 15 multi speeds apply only to the first motor The jog speed setting is used whenever the Jog command is active The jog speed setting range is arbitrarily limited to 10 Hz to provide safety during manual operation The acceleration to the jog frequency is instantaneous but you can choose from six modes for the best method for stopping the jog operation Keypad Defaults Run Pa Kaen Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 an P SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn A019 Multi speed operation selec BIHARY OG Binary up to 16 stage speed using 00 00 00 xx tion 4 intelligent terminals BIT 0 I Single bit up to 8 stage speed using 7 intelligent terminals A020 Multi speed frequency setting 0 to 360 Hz 0 00 0 00 000 Vv A020 Speed 0 1st motor Defines the first speed of a multi speed profile A220 Multi speed frequency setting 2nd motor 0 to 360 Hz 0 00 0 00 000 Vv A220 Speed 0 2nd motor Defines the first speed of a multi speed profile for 2nd motor A320 Multi speed frequency setting 3rd motor 0 to 360 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 Yy A320 Speed 0 3rd motor Defines the first speed of a multi speed profile for 3rd motor A021 Multi speed frequency settings 0 to 360 Hz 0 00 0 00 000 Vv to for multiple motors A021 Speed 1 A035 a A035 Speed 15 Defines 15 additional speeds 3 14 A Group S
300. duty cycle The percentage of usage is proportional to the heat dissipated If the duty cycle is greater o O fe Accessories tl t2 t3 than the B090 parameter setting the inverter B90 Duty cycle Chee ly 100 100 seconds enters the Trip Mode and turns OFF the frequency output Please note the following for SJ700 O055xFU2 to SJ700 220xFU2 e When B090 is set for 0 dynamic braking is not performed When the duty cycle value exceeds the limit set by B090 the inverter will trip ending the dynamic braking The cable from the external resistor to the inverter must not exceed 5 m 16 ft length The wires from the DB resistor to the inverter must not be bundled together with control or signal wires NOTE Inverters rated 40hp 30kW and above SJ700 300xFU2 and larger models do not include an internal braking unit Parameters B090 B095 and B096 do not apply to these models 5 7 SJ7002 Inverter Dynamic Braking The J7002 Series 200V and 400V class inverter models in the 1 2 to 30 HP range have internal Selection Tables braking units Additional stopping torque is available by adding external resistors The required braking torque depends on your particular application Other tables in this section will help you choose the proper resistor Without Using Optional Performa
301. e Negative Send receive Positive gt 5 3 D 3 2 x OW Each device requires just two connections in parallel for data transmission and reception Additionally the device at each physical end of the wiring requires a termination resistor The SJ7002 has built in termination resistors that become part of the circuit when you add a jumper as shown The termination resistor helps to suppress electrical reflections Send receive 2 Send receive j da Termination jumper HESS BEEE BEST VY ee Rt TETTESTE TETTERE RL RETT tae TIP Each slave device on the serial network must have a unique node address set by parame ter C072 If this is a new application we recommend connecting one new device at a time and checking the communications after each addition Eri Introduction Serial Network Several parameter settings are necessary to configure serial communications listed below Parameter Settings i g ee Item Value Description 02 Loop back test 03 2400 bps C071 Baud rate 04 4800 bps 05 9600 bps 06 19200 bps 1 to 32 1 to 32 Node or station address unique FF to each inverter or device FF Automatic broadcast to all nodes on jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt C072 Node address d transmit allowed only on certain commands refer to each command description in this appendix 07 7 bits C073 Data bits 08 8 bi
302. e C Q 2 lt Holding Registers P Group Expansion Card Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec P001 Operation mode on expan R W 00 Trip stop motor 1601h 05633 0 1 sion card 1 error 01 Continuous operation P002 Operation mode on expan R W 00 Trip stop motor 1602h 05634 0 1 sion card 2 error 01 Continuous operation Reserved 1603h 05635 to to 160Ah 05642 P011 Encoder pulse per revolu R W 128 to 65000 pulses per 160Bh 05643 128 to 1 tion PPR setting revolution 65000 P012 Control pulse setting R W 00 Automatic Speed 160Ch 05644 0 1 Regulation ASR mode 01 Automatic Position Regulation APR mode 02 Absolute Position Control 03 High resolution Absolute Position Control P013 Pulse line mode setting R W 00 Quadrature mode 160Dh 05645 0 1 2 01 Count and direction 02 Separate forward and reverse pulse trains P014 Home search stop position R W 0 to 4095 pulses 160Eh 05646 0t0 4095 1 pulse setting P015 Home search speed setting R W Start frequency to maximum 160Fh 05647 0 to 12000 0 01 Hz frequency up to 120 0 Hz P016 Home search direction R W 00 Forward 1610h 05648 0 I setting O1 Reverse P017 Home search completion R W
303. e 4 9 Signal Contact Ratings Built in power for inputs 24VDC supply 100 mA maximum Intelligent programmable logic inputs Intelligent programmable logic outputs 27VDC maximum 4 7kQ input impedance Open collector type S0mA max ON state current 27 VDC maximum OFF state voltage Thermistor input Minimum thermistor power 100mW PWM output 0 to 1OVDC 1 2 mA max 50 duty cycle Voltage analog output 0 to 10VDC 2 mA max Current analog output 4 20 mA nominal load impedance 250Q Analog input current 4 to 19 6 mA range 20 mA nominal Analog input voltage unipolar 0 to 9 6 VDC range 1OVDC nominal 12VDC max input impedance 10 kQ Analog input voltage bipolar 9 6 to 9 6 VDC range 10VDC nominal 12VDC max input impedance 10 kQ 10V analog reference 10VDC nominal 10 mA maximum Alarm relay normally closed contacts Maximum loads 250VAC 2A 30VDC 8A resistive load 250VAC 0 2A 30VDC 0 6A inductive load Minimum loads 100 VAC 10mA 5VDC 100mA Alarm relay normally open contacts 250VAC 1A 30VDC 1A max resistive load 250VAC 0 2A 30VDC 0 2A max inductive load Min loads 100 VAC 10mA 5VDC 100mA DCL Filter Specifications Carrier Frequency Derating Direct reactor filters DCL are available for the Hitachi high capacity SJ7002 inverters models 1850HFU2 to 4000HFU2 The DCL specifications are in
304. e Description Cornsponding Siena Code Range S 00 Output frequency Actual motor speed represented by PWM 0 to max frequency in Hz 2 signal GE o L 01 Output current Motor current of maximum rated output 0 to 200 current represented by PWM signal 56 2 amp 02 Output torque Rated output torque 0 to 200 8 03 Digital output Output frequency available only at FM 0 to max frequency in Hz frequency output 04 Output voltage Rated output voltage to motor 0 to 100 05 Input power Rated input power 0 to 200 06 Electronic thermal Percentage of electronic overload attained 0 to 100 overload 07 LAD frequency Internal ramp generator frequency 0 to max frequency in Hz 08 Digital current monitor Signal freq 1 440 Hz when 0 2 x rated current to 2 0 x output current C030 setting rated current A 09 Motor temperature Thermistor input temp reading in PWM 0 to 200 C format 10 Heat sink temperature Inverter heatsink temp reading in PWM 0 to 200 C format 12 General YA 0 analog Internal analog value from EZ Sequence 0 to 100 output C028 Setting for Terminal AM C029 Setting for Terminal AMI Orion Function Name Description Gorm pondineiniEnal Code Range 00 Output frequency Actual motor speed represented by PWM 0 to max frequency in Hz signal 01 Output current Motor current of maximum rated output 0 to 200 current represented by PWM signal 02 Output torque Rated output torque 0 to 200 03 Digital output Output freq
305. e Res hex dec D081 R Factor code 0012h 00018 see codes in next table R Inverter status 0013h 00019 R Frequency high 0014h 00020 0to 40000 0 01 Hz R Frequency low 0015h 00021 R Current 0016h 00022 0 1 A Trip monitor I R Voltage 0017h 00023 1V R Run time high 0018h 00024 1 hour R Run time low 0019h 00025 R ON time high 001Ah 00026 I hour R ON time low 001Bh 00027 D082 R Factor code 001Ch 00028 see codes in next table R Inverter status 001Dh 00029 R Frequency high OO1Eh 00030 01040000 0 01 Hz R Frequency low 001Fh 00031 R Current 0020h 00032 0 1 A Trip monitor 2 R Voltage 0021h 00033 1V R Run time high 0022h 00034 1 hour R Run time low 0023h 00035 R ON time high 0024h 00036 I hour R ON time low 0025h 00037 D083 R Factor code 0026h 00038 see codes in next table R Inverter status 0027h 00039 R Frequency high 0028h 00040 01040000 0 01 Hz R Frequency low 0029h 00041 R Current 002Ah 00042 0 1 A Trip monitor 3 R Voltage 002Bh 00043 1V R Run time high 002Ch 00044 1 hour R Run time low 002Dh 00045 R ON time high 002Eh 00046 1 hour R ON time low 002Fh 00047 SJ7002 Inverter EEJ
306. e condition occurs You g can select the retry function with parameter B001 a Opt Code 08 IP o gt and Symbol Function Name Description OG Symbol 09 UV 22 IP Instantaneous Power Failure ON when the inverter detects a loss of input og Valid for 11 to 15 power Outputs ALx UV Under voltage condition ON when the inverter input power is less Required Hir gt ti than the specified input range Settings B005 B007 When enabled the Retry Function operates in the following ways Default Requires terminals config Under voltage conditions When an instantaneous power failure or under voltage condition occurs the inverter will attempt to restart up to 16 times trip condition will occur on the 17th attempt which must be cleared with the Stop Reset key When connecting control power supply terminals Ro To to the DC bus P N an under voltage may be detected at power off and cause a trip If this is undesirable set B004 to 00 or 02 Over current voltage conditions When retry function is selected and an over current or an over voltage condition occurs a restart is attempted 3 times A trip will occur on the 4th failed restart attempt Use parameter B004 to select the trip and alarm response to instantaneous power failure and under voltage conditions If an over voltage or over current trip occurs during the deceleration and an instantaneous power failure error E16 is displayed the inverter go
307. e following formula and the value of the actual motor torque limit is calculated by the formula Do not set a value in B041 to B044 that results in an actual torque greater than 200 or you risk motor failure For example suppose you have a 0 75kW inverter and a 0 4kW motor The torque limit setting value that is for T 200 is set entered as 106 shown by the following formula Actual torque limit x Motor capacity _ 200 x 0 4kW _ ay 106 Torque limit setting ee 0 75kW 4 75 SJ7002 Inverter PID Loop Operation In standard operation the inverter uses a reference source selected by parameter A001 for the output frequency which may be a fixed value F001 a variable set by the front panel potenti ometer or value from an analog input voltage or current To enable PID operation set A071 01 This causes the inverter to calculate the target frequency or setpoint An optional intelligent input assignment code 23 PID Disable will temporarily disable PID operation when active A calculated target frequency can have a lot of advantages It lets the inverter adjust the motor speed to optimize some other process variable of interest potentially saving energy as well Refer to the figure below The motor acts upon the external process To control that external process the inverter must monitor the process variable This requires wiring a sensor to either the analog input terminal O voltage or terminal OJ current
308. e inverter Press downward on the fan units until the retention tabs click into place Replace the upper and lower front panel covers on the inverter using two 2 screws for each panel For inverters with sheet metal housings 1 2 3 Loosen the screws that secure the lower front panel Remove the panel from the inverter Turn OFF power to the inverter and confirm that the Charge Indicator LED is OFF Loosen the two screws that secure the upper front panel Remove the panel from the inverter 4 Remove the screws that secure the fan unit to the top of the inverter 5 Lift the cooling fan unit away from the top of the inverter housing 6 Remove the defective fan s from the cooling fan mounting plate To install the new fan s 1 Slide the fan s into the mounting locations in the mounting plate To ensure the correct airflow be sure that the label on each fan faces toward the vent openings top of inverter Connect the fan wiring to terminals J21 J22 or J23 depending on the inverter model on the main circuit board Put the mounting plate in position on the top of the inverter housing and secure it with screws 4 Replace the upper and lower front panel covers on the inverter and secure them with screws SJ7002 Inverter 6 25 General Inverter The following table specifies how to measure key system electrical parameters The diagrams Electrical on the next page show inverter mot
309. e inverter 7 segment display shows lower case b and d meaning the same as the upper case letters B and D used in this manual for uniformity A to F The inverter automatically switches into Monitor MONITOR PROGRAM Mode when you access D Group functions It switches into Program Mode when you access A Group any other group because they all have editable nae B Group parameters Error codes use the E Group and D Group lt _ gt C Group appear automatically when a fault event occurs H Group Refer to Monitoring Trip Events History amp P Group Conditions on page 6 5 for error code details U Group F Group SJ7002 Inverter Eri Keypad The SJ7002 Series inverter drives have many programmable functions and parameters Navigational Map Chapter 3 will cover these in detail but you need to access just a few items to perform the powerup test The menu structure makes use of function codes and parameter codes to allow programming and monitoring with only a 4 digit display and a few keys and LEDs So it is important to become familiar with the basic navigational map of parameters and functions in the diagram below You can later use this map as a reference Monitor Mode Program Mode Display Data Select Function Select Parameter Edit Parameter 5 g 268 Ko ara 32 z 0 oc fe Oo 3 3 To D002 D104 nnn Increm
310. e is greater than the A014 ending value the inverter outputs the ending frequency specified by A012 A011 3 12 A Group Standard Functions 2 a le CE 5 2D C e O 42 2 ob E oO iS av oO Adjusting OI L characteristics In the graph to the right A103 and A104 max frequency select the active portion ofthe input Pe pr i current range Parameters A101 and A102 A102 Z select the start and end frequency of the converted output frequency range respec tively Together these four parameters define the major line segment as shown When the line does not begin at the origin A101 and A103 gt 0 then A105 defines A101 whether the inverter outputs OHz or the 1 input A101 specified frequency when the 0 A103 A104 100 analog input value is less than the A103 4mA 20mA setting When the input voltage is greater than the A104 ending value the inverter outputs the ending frequency specified by A102 Adjusting 02 L characteristics In the graph to the right A113 and A114 select the active portion of the input voltage range Parameters A111 and A112 select the start and end frequency of A112 755 the converted output frequency range 100 respectively Together these four parame 10v ters define the major line segment as shown When the input voltage is less than the A1 13
311. e measure between 200 to 240V 50 60 Hz inverter terminals 400V class L1 L2 L3 380 to 460V 50 60 Hz Main Ground Adequate v Megger test 500VDC reading of SM circuits Insulation resistance ohms or greater see next section for test details Mounting No loose Vv Torque wrench M3 0 5 0 6 Nm screws M4 0 98 1 3 Nm MS 1 5 2 0 Nm Components Overheating v Thermal trip events No trip events Housing Dirt dust Y Visual Vacuum dust and dirt Terminal block Secure v Visual No abnormalities connections Smoothing Leaking Vv Visual No abnormalities capacitor swelling Relay s Chattering v Aural Single click when switching ON or OFF Resistors Cracks or v Visual Use Ohm meter to check discoloring braking resistors Cooling Cooling fan Noise v Power down Rotation must be smooth system manually rotate Heat sink Dust v Visual Vacuum to clean Control General No odor Y Visual No abnormalities circuit discoloring corrosion Capacitor No leaks or v Visual Undistorted appearance deformation Display LEDs Legibility v Visual All LED segments work 6 18 Maintenance and Inspection e fe K cay 02 Ko Ka 2 FE oa Oo a C 2 E av xe Z oO Inspection Item Inspected Check for Eyde Inspection Method Criteria Month Year Motor General Vibration v Visual touch Ordinary range Unusual odor Vv Look for signs of Nor
312. e mote Device setting Number Access ET Part 8 Length number Inverter keypad OPE SRE Monitor and EEPROM in ICS 1 I meter U S version program inverter ICS 3 re Inverter keypad OPE S Monitor and EEPROM in Use same two cables as European version program inverter above Read write Copy SRW OEX Monitor and EEPROM in Use same two cables as Unit with Keypad program read or inverter or in above write all data copy unit TIP Other special purpose keypads are available such as ones to serve the needs of the HVAC market heating ventilating amp air conditioning Please contact your Hitachi distributor for details SJ7002 Inverter EEN Using Keypad Devices Inverter Front Panel Keypad Key and Indicator Legend The SJ7002 Series inverter front keypad contains all the elements for both monitoring and programming parameters The keypad layout OPE SRE is shown below All other programming devices for the inverter have a similar key arrangement and function Parameter Display Power LED Run Stop LED AAR HITACHI Display Units LEDs Hertz Program Monitor LED 20 Volts or Amperes kW both ON Percent Run Key Enable LED Potentiometer Enable LED Run Key F Potentiometer Stop Reset Key Run Stop LED ON when the inverter output is ON and the motor is developing torque and OFF when the inverter output is OFF Stop Mode U D g 3 D Q D Q Z Program Monitor LED This LED is
313. e takes effect If the OPE input turns ON and the digital operator gives a Run command while the inverter is already running the inverter stops the motor Then the digital operator can control the motor SJ7002 Inverter KEJ Overload Restriction Opt Code 39 Symbol OLR Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 B021 B023 Required Set 1 Settings B024 B026 Set 2 Default Requires terminal config The inverter constantly monitors the motor current during acceleration deceleration and constant speed If the inverter reaches the overload restriction level it adjusts the output frequency automatically to limit the amount of overload This function prevents an over current trip by inertia during rapid acceleration or large changes in load at constant speed It also attempts to prevent an over voltage trip on deceleration due to regeneration It accomplishes this by temporarily suspending deceleration and or increasing the frequency in order to dissi pate regenerative energy Once the DC bus voltage falls sufficiently deceleration will resume OLR Parameter Selection Two sets of overload restriction parameter settings and values are available as outlined in the table below Symbol Function Name aoe Description OLR Overload Restriction ON Selects Overload Restriction Set 2 Selection B024 B025 B026 settings in effect OFF Selects Overload Restriction Set 1 B021 B022 B023 settin
314. ease signal BRK after delay set by B121 B126 Brake release 0 to 200 of Sets the minimum inverter current level above current setting rated current which the brake release signal BRK will be permitted B127 Braking 0 to 400 Hz Sets the frequency at which the inverter outputs the g frequency 0 to 120 Hz for braking signal a Q model 4000 zo 23 3 The diagram below shows the event sequence described in the steps on the previous page amp s 3 Ke Output frequency Brake wait time for accel B I Brake wait time for stopping Bz I i Brake release frequency I l t I I I I Run command FAG GE SE i ee I I I I I I Brake release output BRK gt B121 Brake wait time to release I I I I Brake OK input BOK I Brake wait time l gt B124 lt for confirmation B124 we Brake error output BER 1 1 4 34 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Expansion Card Input Signals SJ FB manual for more information Other inputs listed below require the expansion card SJ FB Encoder Feedback Please see the 45 ORT R ots SER Symbol Function Name Description Opt Code 46 LAC and i i i i Sn 47 PCLR ORT Orientation Orientation home search sequence 48 STAT LAC LAD Cancel Cancels the linear acceleration deceleration position control in the fe
315. ectrical circuit of the high voltage internal DC bus Be sure that all power has been disconnected from the inverter and that you have waited at least 10 minutes before accessing the terminals or screws Be sure the charge lamp is extinguished Otherwise there is the danger of electrocution to personnel CAUTION Do not operate the inverter unless you have replaced the two oa 6 21 screws that connect the capacitor bank assembly to the internal DC bus Otherwise damage to the inverter may occur HIGH VOLTAGE Be careful not to touch wiring or connector terminals oe 6 26 when working with the inverters and taking measurements Be sure to place the measurement circuitry above in an insulated housing before using them General Warnings and Cautions gt p gt gt gt WARNING Never modify the unit Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or injury CAUTION Withstand voltage tests and insulation resistance tests HIPOT are executed before the units are shipped so there is no need to conduct these tests before operation CAUTION Do not attach or remove wiring or connectors when power is applied Also do not check signals during operation CAUTION Do not stop operation by switching OFF electromagnetic contactors on the primary or secondary sides of the inverter Power Ground fault Input interrupter Inverter MCCB GFI oo S d WW L1 L2 L3 When there has been a sudden power failure while a Run c
316. edback card Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 PCLR Position deviation clear Forces the position error to zero l B120 01 STAT Pulse train input enable Starts the pulse train control of motor frequency Required a Set B121 to Settings B126 i The diagram below shows how the Input Output connections for the SJ FB feedback board Wiring On SJ FB The inverter s internal connections and parameter configuration make these signals available on Gfarroinels mr intelligent input and output terminals J7002 inverter SJ FB Feedback Expansion Card D Input assignments o E 2 SS cs Input Q terminals OT Control and logic connector Output assignments 4 Output terminals The information on outputs related to the SJ FB expansion card is in Expansion Card Output Signals on page 4 54 ADD Frequency Enable Opt Code 50 to add or subtract By configuring an intel Symbol ADD 5 output frequency in real time Valid for 1 to 8 Inputs Keypad potentiometer Required Settings AVIS AO Control terminal Default Requires Function F001 setting terminal config Network variable F001 2 Calculate function output A145 Add frequency Intelligent input ADD i c 1 1 71A001 P gt 1 r The inverter can add or subtract an offset value to the output frequency setting which is speci fied by A001 will work with any of
317. eed some fre inverter parameter adjustment 3 3 The parameter tables in this chapter have a column titled Run Mode z g Edit An Ex mark X means the parameter cannot be edited a Check Run 5 mark WY means the parameter can be edited You ll notice in the table Mode example to the right the two adjacent marks X W The two marks Edit that can also be X X or W correspond to these levels of access Lo Hi to editing XV Low access level to Run Mode edits indicated by left most mark e High access level to Run Mode edits indicated by right most mark The Software Lock Setting parameter B031 determines the particular access level that is in effect during Run Mode and access in other conditions as well It is the responsibility of the user to choose a useful and safe software lock setting for the inverter operating conditions and personnel Please refer to Software Lock Mode on page 3 38 for more information Control The motor control program in the SJ7002 Inverter Control Algorithms Algorith ms inverter has several sinusoidal PWM switching algorithms The intent is that you V f control select the best algorithm for the motor constant torque V f control variable torque V f control free setting curve characteristics in your application Each algorithm generates the frequency output in Sensorless vector SLV control a unique way Once configured the algorithm is the basis for other parameter
318. efer to the documentation that comes with the AC reactor for installation instructions gt Q D on D O D o EN Component Descriptions fe O fe o Zero phase Reactor RF Noise Filter EMI Filter A Accessories Ferrite Core RF Noise Filter Capacitive DC Link Choke Electrical noise interference may occur on nearby equipment such as a radio receiver The zero phase reactor helps reduce radiated noise from the inverter wiring It can be used on the input or output side of the inverter The example zero phase reactor shown to the right comes with a mounting bracket The wiring must go through the opening to reduce the RF component of the electri cal noise Loop the wires three times four turns to attain the full RF filtering effect For larger wire sizes place multiple zero phase reactors up to four side by side for a greater filtering effect The EMI filter reduces the conducted noise on the power supply wiring generated by the inverter Connect the EMI filter to the inverter primary input side The NF CEH lt x series filter is required for compliance to the EMC Class A directive Europe and C TICK Austra lia See CE EMC Installation Guidelines on page D 2 WARNING The EMI filter has high internal leakage current from power wiring to the chassis Therefore connect the chassis ground of the EMI filter before making the power connections to avoid
319. ement Write data to EEPROM store as powerup default Write data to F001 store D001 Return z as power eg el up default NOTE The inverter 7 segment display shows lower case b and d meaning the same as the upper case letters B and D used in this manual for uniformity A to F SJ7002 Inverter 35 Operational The RUN and PGM LEDs tell just part of the story Modes Run Mode and Program Modes are independent modes not opposite modes In the state diagram to Can S amp step the right Run alternates with Stop and Program Mode alternates with Monitor Mode This is a very important ability for it shows that a technician can approach a running machine and change some parameters without shutting down the machine Monitor Program The occurrence of a fault during operation will cause the inverter to enter the Trip Mode as shown An event such as an output overload will cause the inverter to exit the Run Mode and turn OFF its output to the motor In the Trip Mode any request to run the motor is ignored You must clear the error by pressing the Stop Reset switch See Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions on page 65 9 r fe Run Mode Edits The inverter can be in Run Mode inverter output is controlling motor and still allow you to a edit certain parameters This is useful in applications that must run continuously yet n
320. enabled 1269h 04713 0 1 2 01 AVR disabled 02 AVR enabled except during deceleration A082 AVR voltage select R W 200V class inverter settings 126Ah 04714 200 215 220 230 240 V 400V class inverter settings 380 400 415 440 460 480 V Reserved 126Bh 04715 Reserved 126Ch 04716 A085 Operation mode selection R W 00 Normal operation 126Dh 04717 0 1 2 01 Energy saver operation 02 Optimal accel decel operation A086 Energy saving mode tuning R W 0 0 to 100 seconds 126Eh 04718 Oto 1000 0 1 Reserved 126Fh 04719 to to 1273h 04723 A092 H Acceleration 2 time R W Duration of 2nd segment of 1274h 04724 I to 0 01 sec setting acceleration 360000 A092 L R W 1275h 04725 A292 H Acceleration 2 time R W Duration of 2nd segment of 226Fh 08815 1 to 0 01 sec setting 2nd motor acceleration 2nd motor 360000 A292 L R W 2270h 08816 A392 H Acceleration 2 time R W Duration of 2nd segment of 326Dh 12909 1 to 0 01 sec setting 3rd motor acceleration 3rd motor 360000 A392 L R W 326Eh 12910 A093 H Deceleration 2 time R W Duration of 2nd segment of 1276h 04726 I to 0 01 sec setting 7 deceleration 360000 A093 L R W 1277h 04727 A293 H Deceleration 2 time R W Duration of 2nd segment of 2271h 08817 1 to 0 01 sec setting 2nd motor deceleration 2nd motor 360000 A293 JL
321. enabled to m Pee key 6 u 8 q restore all defaults 11 First part of special key m Press and hold the and b G g q sequence the B in the keys together and immediately display begins flashing press and hold the key Do not release these keys yet 12 Holding the keys above press and n Entire B084 display will hold th amp TOP kev fi 56084 begin flashing og old the STOP key for 3 sec 3 g 13 When the 5084 display begins n 77 Default parameter country an 2 f yu yu code shown during initializa 3 flashing release the amp key or tion process left most charac 232 F ter displays alternating 8 BUSA pater 14 Rel th d AAN Final part of key sequence aan 4 an function code for output keys together frequency monitor shown after initialization is complete Maintenance and Inspection 6 17 SJ7002 Inverter ped a D 2 oO fed O oO Burjooysajqnouy Monthly and Yearly Inspection Chart Inspection Item Inspected Check for Tyak Inspection Method Criteria Month Year General Ambient Extreme v Thermometer Ambient temperature environment temperatures hygrometer between 10 to 50 C amp humidity non condensing Major devices Abnormal v Visual and aural Stable environment for vibration electronic controls noise Power supply Voltage v Digital volt meter 200V class voltage toleranc
322. ence is smallest if they intersect at an angle of 90 Cables susceptible to interference should therefore only intersect motor cables intermediate circuit cables or the wiring of a rheostat at right angles and never be laid parallel to them over longer distances 5 Minimize the distance between an interference source and an interference sink inter ference threatened device thereby decreasing the effect of the emitted interference on the interference sink e You should use only interference free devices and maintain a minimum distance of 0 25 m from the adjustable frequency inverter SJ7002 Inverter D3 6 Follow safety measures in the filter installation Ensure that the protective earth terminal PE of the filter is properly connected to the PE terminal of the adjustable frequency inverter An HF ground connection via metal contact between the housings of the filter and the adjustable frequency inverter or solely via cable shield is not permitted as a protective conductor connection The filter must be solidly and permanently connected with the ground potential so as to preclude the danger of electric shock upon touching the filter if a fault occurs To achieve a protective ground connection for the filter 2 e Ground the filter with a conductor of at least 10 mm cross sectional area e Connect a second grounding conductor using a separate grounding terminal parallel to the protective conductor The cross section
323. ening torque is 0 7 N m 0 5 ft Ib Maximum torque is 0 8 N m 0 6 ft Ib 1 ALI Serial communications Analog inputs Analog Power outputs Alarm relay Logic inputs Logic outputs Specifications for the logic connection terminals are in the following table Terminal Name Description Ratings and Notes P24 24V power for inputs 24VDC supply 100 mA max CM1 PLC 24V common Common for logic inputs Common for 24V supply FW TH inputs 1 to 8 and FM Note Do not ground Common for input terminals 1 to 8 jumper to CM for sinking jumper to P24 for sourcing CM2 Common for logic outputs Common for output terminals 11 to 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Intelligent programmable discrete logic inputs 27VDC max use P24 or an external supply refer enced to terminal CM1 4 7KQ input impedance FW Forward stop command 27VDC max use P24 or an external supply refer enced to terminal CM1 4 7KQ input impedance 11 12 13 14 15 Intelligent programmable discrete logic outputs Open collector type 50mA max ON state current 27 VDC maximum OFF state voltage TH Thermistor input Reference to CM1 min thermistor power 100mW FM AM PWM output Voltage analog output 0 to LOVDC 1 2 mA max 50 duty cycle 0 to LOVDC 2 mA max AMI
324. ent decrement Store as powerup default Increment decrement PRG LED PRG LED D001 wit data to EEPROM store as powerup default Write data to F001 store D001 Return to as power parameter list up default 2 32 Using the Front Panel Keypad D E eo 2 jo 2 _ o gt and Installation Selecting Functions and Editing Parame ters A In order to run the motor for the powerup test this section will show how to e select the inverter s maximum output frequency to the motor select the keypad potentiometer as the source of motor speed command e select the keypad as the source of the RUN command e set the number of poles for the motor enable the RUN command The following series of programming tables are designed for successive use Each table uses the previous table s final state as the starting point Therefore start with the first and continue programming until the last one If you get lost or concerned that some of the other parameters settings may be incorrect refer to Restoring Factory Default Settings on page 6 16 CAUTION If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default setting S0Hz 60Hz be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the respective manufacturer Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting their approval Otherwise there is the danger o
325. ent input terminals 1 and 3 before slide switch SW1 is set to ON the input terminal setting for that terminal is automatically changed to NO no function assigned when slide switch SW1 is set to ON This prevents any duplication of terminal functions Even if slide switch SW1 is subsequently turned OFF the original function setting for the terminal will not be restored If necessary the original function will have to be reassigned to the terminal Example If slide switch SW1 is set to ON when function RS code18 has been assigned to input terminal 2 by terminal setting C002 terminal setting C002 is changed to NO no function assigned and function RS code 18 is assigned to input terminal 1 by terminal setting C001 Even if slide switch SW1 is subsequently SJ7002 Inverter 2 39 turned OFF terminal 2 function C002 and terminal 1 function C001 will remain as NO no function assigned and RS code 18 respectively Function EMR code 64 cannot be assigned to input terminal 3 by an operation from the digital operator The function is automatically assigned to the terminal when slide switch SW1 is set to ON After slide switch SW1 has been set to ON once function assignments to intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 are not returned to their original assignments If necessary reassign original functions to the intelligent input terminals Note that data from an inverter configured for the emergency stop functio
326. equency NOTE 1 Be sure to set the over voltage threshold greater than the DC bus voltage trigger level B052 gt B051 for proper operation 2 Once the power loss deceleration function starts it will complete and stop the motor even if input power is restored In that case it automatically enables the Run mode again 4 7 SJ7002 Inverter Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices Hitachi inverters drives are useful in many types of applications During installation the inverter keypad or other programming device will facilitate the initial configuration After installation the inverter will generally receive its control commands through the control logic terminals or serial interface from another controlling device In a simple application such as single conveyor speed control a Run Stop switch and potentiometer will give the operator all the required control In a sophisticated application you may have a programmable logic controller PLC as the system controller with several connections to the inverter It is not possible to cover all the possible types of application in this manual It will be neces sary for you to know the electrical characteristics of the devices you want to connect to the inverter Then this section and the following sections on I O terminal functions can help you quickly and safely connect those devices to the inverter CAUTION It is possible to damage the inverter or other devices if
327. equency A094 00 frequency A094 01 Accel 2 Accel 2 Frequency A095 77 transition point Accel 1 2CH 1 input oO Keypad Defaults Run ped ar Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 Met p SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA pn A092 Acceleration 2 time setting 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 15 0 15 0 15 0 Vy Tr 1000 to 3600 seconds Duration of 2nd segment of acceleration A292 Acceleration 2 time setting 2nd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 15 0 15 0 150 Vv 7 1000 to 3600 seconds Duration of 2nd segment of acceleration 2nd motor A392 Acceleration 2 time setting 3rd motor 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 15 0 15 0 150 Vv i 1000 to 3600 seconds Duration of 2nd segment of acceleration 3rd motor SJ7002 Inverter Ez Keypad Defaults Ran pre Mare Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 et SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn 2 A093 Deceleration 2 time setting ae 10 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 15 0 15 0 150 yY i 7 1000 to 3600 seconds Duration of 2nd segment of deceleration A293 Deceleration 2 time setting 2nd motor 10 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 15 0 15 0 150 z 7 1000 to 3600 seconds Duration of 2nd segment of deceleration 2nd motor A393 Deceleration 2 time setting 3rd motor
328. equency is higher than the inverter output frequency This condition can cause the inverter DC bus voltage to rise resulting in an over voltage trip In many applications the over voltage condition serves as a warning signal that we have exceeded the deceleration capabilities of the system SJ7002 inverters rated 15hp 11kW and below have a built in braking unit that sends the regenerative energy from the motor during deceleration to the optional braking resistor s External braking units may also be used if higher braking torques and or duty cycles are required The dynamic braking resistor serves as a load developing heat to stop the motor just as brakes on an automobile develop heat during braking The braking resistor is the main component of a braking resistor assem bly which includes an integral thermal fuse and thermally activated alarm relay for safety However be careful to avoid overheating its resis tor The thermal fuse and thermal relay are safeguards for extreme condi tions but the inverter can maintain braking usage in a safe zone Braking Resistor Dynamic Braking The inverter controls braking via a duty cycle BRD Usage Ratio method percent of the time braking is ON versus total time Parameter B090 sets the dynamic braking usage ratio In the graph to the right the example shows three uses of dynamic braking in a 100 second period The inverter calculates the average percentage OFF usage in that time
329. er In this case the inverter will not use the analog inputs nor their adjustment parameters for an external frequency command Keypad Defaults Run une Name Range and Settings Mode Code Description SRW lll OPE 8 8 xFE2 xFU2 xFF2 Edit EU USA Jpn Lo Hi B037 Function code display ALL 80 Display all 04 04 04 Xv restriction i i i FUNCTIOH G I Display only utilized functions see table on next page USER 2 Display user selected functions only configure with UO1 to U12 COMPARE 03 Data comparison display BASIC 04 Basic display B038 Initial display selection STF OG Last value dislayed when STR key 01 01 01 Xv was pressed Fri 0 i D001 Tout ae D002 Dir 03 D003 F CHY 04 D007 F SET 85 F001 B039 Automatic user parame OFF OG Disable 00 00 00 Xv ter function enable OH G i Enable For example you can set B037 01 to have the inverter suppress the displaying of all analog input parameters when A001 01 as shown in the first row of the following table Function Resulting Non displayed Code Data Functions when B37 01 Notes A001 01 A005 A006 A011 A016 A101 0 OI 02 terminal A114 C081 C083 C121 C123 functions U 2 g 3 Q D Q a avg BuunByuon 3 40 B Group Fine Tuning Functions 2 a le C 5 2D C e O 42 2 ob E oO iS or ai Functi
330. er inverter status Code Name Code Name 0 No trip 0 Reset 1 Over current event while at constant 1 Stop speed 2 Over current event during deceleration 2 Deceleration 3 Over current event during acceleration 3 Constant speed 4 Over current event during other condi 4 Acceleration tions 5 Overload protection 5 Run Command active with 0 Hz speed reference 6 Braking resistor overload 6 Starting 7 Over voltage protection 7 DC braking 8 EEPROM error 8 Overload restriction 9 Under voltage error 9 SON or FOC operation in progress 10 CT current transformer error 11 CPU error 12 External trip 13 USP 14 Ground fault 15 Input over voltage 16 Instantaneous power failure 20 Inverter thermal trip with low fan speed 21 Inverter thermal trip 23 Gate array error 24 Phase failure detection 25 Main circuit error 30 IGBT error 35 Thermistor 36 Brake error 37 Emergency stop 38 Low speed overload protection 43 Easy sequence error invalid instruc tion 44 Easy sequence error invalid nesting count 45 Easy sequence execution error I 50 to 59 Easy sequence user trip 0 to 9 60 to 69 Expansion card 1 error 0 to 9 70 to 79 Expansion card 2 error 0 to 9 g xipueddy B 42 ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers F Group Main Profile Parameters
331. erminal config Code Function Range Description B060 O input maximum limit level of 0 to 100 Lower limit B061 B062 x 2 window comparator B061 O input minimum limit level of 0 to 100 Lower limit B060 B062 x 2 window comparator B062 O input hysteresis width of 0 to 10 Lower limit B061 B062 x 2 window comparator B063 OI input maximum limit level 0 to 100 Lower limit B064 B066 x 2 of window comparator B064 Ol input minimum limit level of 0 to 100 Lower limit B063 B066 x 2 window comparator B065 OI input hysteresis width of 0 to 10 Lower limit B063 B064 x 2 window comparator B066 O2 input maximum limit level 100 to 100 Lower limit B067 B068 x 2 of window comparator B067 O2 input minimum limit level 100 to 100 Lower limit B066 B068 x 2 of window comparator B068 02 input hysteresis width of 0 to 10 Lower limit B066 B067 x 2 window comparator The following signal diagram shows the window comparator output generated from input signals and comparator settings listed along the Y axis O Ol or 02 Hysteresis region A B060 B063 BO066 Z B062 B065 B068 S B061 B064 B067 Z WCO WCOI or WCO2 r SJ7002 Inverter 4 63 Ana
332. erminal turns ON DC braking is applied When the DB terminal turns OFF again the inverter output ramps to the previous frequency 2 Scenario 2 The Run command is applied from the operator keypad When the DB terminal turns ON DC braking is applied When the DB terminal turns OFF again the inverter output remains OFF 3 Scenario 3 The Run command is applied from the operator keypad When the DB terminal turns ON DC braking is applied after the delay time set by A053 expires The motor is in a free running coasting condition during this delay time When the DB terminal SJ7002 Inverter 4 19 Scenario 1 FW RV DB Output frequency Run command from operator DB Output frequency Run command from operator DB Output frequency suonee8d0 D 5 2 fe 5 e 5 Ke turns OFF again the inverter output remains OFF Note the following Do not use the DB input continuously or for a long time when the DC braking force setting A054 is high depends on the motor application Do not use the DB feature for continuous or high duty cycle as a holding brake The DB input is designed to improve stopping performance Use a mechanical brake for holding a stop position Opt Code 08 SET and Symbol 17 SET3 Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Required Settings none Default Requires term
333. erter Opt Code FW enters the Stop Mode and i 01 RV e When a terminal associated with either FW or RV function is configured for normally Symbo closed the motor starts rotation when that terminal is disconnected or otherwise has no input Valid for 11 to 8 voltage Inputs The parameter F004 Keypad Run Key Routing determines whether the single Run key issues a Run FWD command or Run REV command However it has no effect on the FW Required A002 01 and RV input terminal operation Settings Default terminal FW FW is a dedicated terminal WARNING If the power is turned ON and the Run command is already active the motor starts rotation and is dangerous Before turning power ON confirm that the external Run command is not active Multi Speed The inverter can store up to 16 different fixed target frequencies speeds in parameters A020 Select Binary to A035 Binary inputs select the speed through four of the intelligent terminals configured as v Encoded binary encoded inputs CF1 to CF4 per the table These can be any of the eight inputs and in 20 any order You can use fewer inputs if you need eight or fewer speeds 3 02 CF1 32 o Opt Code 03 CF2 Symbol Function Name 23 and 8 Symbol 04 CF3 CF1 Binary speed select Bit 0 LSB BSE CF2 Binary speed select Bit 1 lid fe i ner NG 1 to 8 CF3 Binary speed select Bit 2 F001 A020 CF4 Binary speed select Bit 3 MSB Required i Settings
334. es into free run stop In this case make the deceleration time longer SJ7002 Inverter 4 49 Use the parameters listed in the table below to define Instantaneous Power Failure and Under voltage Signal operation Code Function Data or Range Description B001 Selection of 00 Alarm output after trip automatic automatic restart restart disabled mode 01 Restart at 0 Hz 02 Retry with frequency matching to present motor speed 03 Retry with frequency matching followed by deceleration to stop then trip alarm B002 Allowable under 0 3 to 1 0 sec The amount of time a power input voltage power under voltage can occur without failure time tripping the power failure alarm If under voltage exists longer than this time the inverter trips even if the restart mode is selected If it exists less than this time retry will be attempted B003 Retry wait time 0 3 to 100 sec Time delay after a trip condition goes before motor away before the inverter restarts the restart motor B004 Instantaneous 00 Disable power failure voltage trip alarm 01 Enable enable 02 Disable during stop and ramp to stop B005 Number of restarts 00 Restart up to 16 times on instantaneous on power failure power failure or under voltage der volt tri ite Ao a 01 Always restart on instantaneous power events ne failure or an under voltage condition B007 Restart frequency 0 00 to 400 0 Hz When frequency
335. eserved 3218h 12824 to to 323Bh 12859 A021 Multi speed 1 setting R W Defines nth additional speed 1218h 04632 Oorstart 0 01 Hz freq to A021 L 1219h 04633 nax freq A022 H Multi speed 2 setting R W Defines nth additional speed 121Ah 04634 Oor start 0 01 Hz freq to A022 L 121Bh 04635 nax freq A023 H Multi speed 3 setting R W Defines nth additional speed 121Ch 04636 Oor start 0 01 Hz freq to A023 L 121Dh 04637 max freq SJ7002 Inverter Ez Holding Registers A Group Standard Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec A024 Multi speed 4 setting R W Defines nth additional speed 121Eh 04638 Oorstart 0 01 Hz freq t A024 L 121Fh 04639 max freq A025 H Multi speed 5 setting R W Defines nth additional speed 1220h 04640 Oor start 0 01 Hz freq t A025 L 1221h 04641 max freq A026 H Multi speed 6 setting R W Defines nth additional speed 1222h 04642 Oor start 0 01 Hz freq t A026 L 1223h 04643 max freq A027 H Multi speed 7 setting R W Defines nth additional speed 1224h 04644 Oor start 0 01 Hz freq t A027 L 1225h 04645 max freq A028 H Multi speed 8 setting R W Defines nth additio
336. ey to write the new value to the EEPROM This param eter is then displayed at powerup by default 7 If you want to change the powerup default Function Up Down Store navigate to a new parameter value and press key keys key the Store key Keys Modes and Purpose of the keypad is to provide a way to change modes and parameters The term function Parameters applies to both monitoring modes and parameters These are all accessible through function codes that are primarily 3 or 4 character codes The various functions are separated into related groups identifiable by the left most character as the table shows VE Type Category of Function Mode to Access Peer D Monitoring functions Monitor O or O PF Main profile parameters Program O A Standard functions Program B Fine tuning functions Program O SC Intelligent terminal functions Program O H Motor constant functions Program O Spo Expansion card functions Program O U User selectable menu functions Monitor O E Error codes For example function A004 is the base frequency setting for the motor typically 50 Hz or 60 Hz To edit the parameter the inverter must be in Program Mode PGM LED will be ON You use the front panel keys to first select the function code A004 After displaying the value for A004 use the Up Down N or W keys to edit the value NOTE Th
337. f equipment damage Setting the Motor Base Frequency The motor is designed to operate at a specific AC frequency Most commercial motors are designed for 50 60 Hz operation First check the motor specifications Then follow the steps in the table below to verify the setting or correct for your motor DO NOT set it for greater than 50 60 Hz unless the motor manufacturer specifically approves operation at the higher frequency Action Display Func Parameter Press the key Press the or keys until gt Press the key Press the key twice Press the ag key Monitor functions QO c3 c3 A Group selected ID First A parameter ID Cd c3 Base frequency setting C3 C3 UJ Default value for base frequency US 60 Hz Europe 50 Hz un on CI C3 Set to your motor specs your display may be different On c3 Press the or key as needed 3 Stores parameter returns to A Press the key AG Group list oe C3 TIP If you need to scroll through a function or parameter list press and hold the N or W key to auto increment through the list SJ7002 Inverter 2 33 Select the Potentiometer for Speed Command The motor speed may be controlled from the following sources e Potentiometer on front panel keypad if present e Control terminals Remote panel Then follow the steps in the table below t
338. function Note 1 Unavailable for A344 Note 2 Unavailable for A244 and A344 The 4 quadrant operation mode for torque limiting B040 00 is illustrated in the figure to the right The instantaneous torque depends on inverter activity acceleration constant speed or deceleration as well as the load B042 B041 These factors determine the operating quadrant RV FW at any particular time The parameters in B041 B042 B043 and B044 determine the amount of torque limiting that the inverter applies Reverse driving Forward regenerating The terminal selection mode B040 01 uses two intelligent inputs TRQ1 and TRQ2 for the binary encoded selection of one of the four torque limit parameters B041 B042 B043 and B044 Torque B40 00 Reverse regenerating Forward driving B043 B044 4 32 Using Intelligent Input Terminals External Brake Control Function Opt Code 44 Symbol BOK Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 B120 01 Required set B121 to Settings B127 Default Requires terminal config 2 2 of g TS a Og av The External Brake Control function enables the inverter to control external electromechanical brake systems with a particular safety characteristic For example elevator control systems maintain the brake on the load until the drive motor has reached a releasing frequency point at which the exter
339. g A058 DC braking time for R W Sets the duration for DC 124Ch 04684 010600 0 1 sec starting braking before accel A059 DC braking carrier R W 0 5 to 15 kHz for models 124Dh 04685 5to 150 0 1 kHz frequency setting up to 550xxx 0 5 to 10 5 to 100 kHz for 750xxx to 1500xxx models Reserved 124Eh 04686 A061 Frequency upper limit R W Sets a limit on output 124Fh 04687 0 50to 0 01 Hz setting frequency less than the 40000 A061 L maximum frequency A004 1250h 04688 ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers A Group Standard Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec A261 Frequency upper limit R W Sets a limit on output 224Fh 08783 0 50to 0 01 Hz setting 2nd motor frequency less than the 40000 A261 L R W maximum frequency A004 2250h 08784 A062 H Frequency lower limit R W Sets a limit on output 1251h 04689 0 50to 0 01 Hz setting frequency greater than zero 40000 A062 L R W 1252h 04690 A262 H Frequency lower limit R W Sets a limit on output 2251h 08785 0 50to 0 01 Hz setting 2nd motor frequency greater than zero 40000 A262 L R W 2252h 08786 Reserved 2253h 08787 to to 226Eh 08814 A063 J
340. g by removal of power after controlled stopping with power to machine actuators retained e Category 2 Controlled stopping with power to machine actuators retained NOTE The Safe Stop function must be activated at least once a year for preventive maintenance purposes NOTE Before preventive maintenance the machine must be turned off If the power supply to the motor is not turned off during testing the Safe Stop function will not operate In such case the inverter must be replaced The examples of wiring below are intended to implement the Safe Stop function through safety input of the EMR signal by the method complying with EN954 1 Category 3 The emergency stop circuit is monitored via an external safety relay safety switching device e One safety relay safety switching device can be used for multiple inverters SJ7002 Inverter Eri Safety switching device Inverter J7002 Example with sourcing logic PNOZ X5 13 Emergency m stop 7 5 g 268 Ko ora P t 0 oc fe Oo 5 Q Safety switching device Inverter SJ7002 Example with sinking logic PNOZ X5 S13 Emergency mm stop 71 NOTE The safety relay safety switching device used in these examples is the PNOZ X5 made by Pilz Use a safety switching device equivalent to the PNOZ X5 242 Emergency Stop Function e S13 Emergency stop button
341. g parameters during powered operation power is ON Second level access for wiring the inverter power supply or motor power is OFF Third level access for accessing the expansion bay for adding removing expansion boards power is OFF 1 First level Access View the unit just as it came from the box as shown The OPE SRE or OPE S digital operator keypad comes installed in the inverter The four digit display can show a variety of performance parameters LEDs indicate whether the display units are Hertz Volts Amperes or kW Other LEDs indicate Power external and Run Stop Mode and Program Monitor Mode status Membrane keys Run and Stop Reset and a Min Max frequency control knob OPE SRE only control motor operation These controls and indicators are usually the only ones needed after the inverter installation is complete The FUNC AN W and STR keys allow an operator to change the inverter s functions and parameter values or to select the one monitored on the 4 digit display Note that some parameters may not be edited if the inverter is in Run mode HITACHI SJ7002 Inverter 2 Second level access First ensure no power source of any kind is connected to the inverter If power has been connected wait 10 minutes after power down and verify the Charge Lamp indicator is OFF to proceed Then locate the two screws at the bottom corners of the main front panel Use a Phillips screwdriver
342. g z 8 after overload protection E05 If the continuous reset restart operations for error 3 a ko E05 could cause damage to the inverter NOTE If an EEPROM error E08 occurs be sure to confirm the parameter data values are still correct 68 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions e C fe lt 02 O Ka 2 H fd re Z a C o 2 E 49 xe fa OPE SRW Bae Troubleshooting and Name Description Display Corrective Action Ell CPU error 5 If the internal CPU malfunctions or an Check for the noise sources located near error occurs in it the inverter will shut the inverter remove noise sources CPU OFF its output and display the error code Check whether the inverter has failed shown on the left repair the inverter Note Reading abnormal data from the EEPROM may result in a CPU error Ele External trip If an error occurs in the external equip If the inverter s external trip function is ment or device connected to the inverter enabled check whether an error has EATERHAL the inverter will latch the error signal and occurred in external equipment clear the shut off its output This protective error in the external equipment function is active when the external trip function is enabled E 13 USP error A USP error is indicated when the If the USP function has been enabled inverter power is turne
343. ge V 10 8 bytes Dec ASCII code 9 Power ON time hours 1 8 bytes Dec ASCII code For Command 05 bytes 2 3 and 4 of the event history are status codes A B and C respectively The tables below provide status code descriptions Data field contents byte 2 byte 3 SJ7002 Inverter B 13 byte 4 Status A Status B Status C g xipuaddy Code Status A Definition Status C Definition 00 Initial status On reset 01 On stopping 02 On Stopping On deceleration 03 On running Constant speed 04 On free run stop On acceleration 05 On jog On 0 Hz running 06 On dynamic braking On running 07 On retry On dynamic braking 08 On trip On overload restriction 09 On under voltage Bit Status B Definition pater Code 0 Ground fault E14 1 IGBT error U phase E30 2 Under voltage error E09 3 Over voltage protection E07 4 Thermal trip E21 5 IGBT error V phase E30 6 IGBT error W phase E30 7 Gate array error E23 B 14 ASCII Mode Communications jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Command 06 The 06 command reads a single parameter Transmit frame format value from the inverter which is specified by the data field this read command STX Node Command Data Bcc CR Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station a
344. gent I O SJ FB Encoder Feedback Card terminals as described in Chapter 4 For more information refer to the SJ FB manual The SJ DG Digital Input Card installs in the inverter s expansion bay This card accepts up to PWB connector eight digital input signals in addition to the intel to external wiring ligent inputs on the inverter s control terminal connector All wiring associated with card connects to its PWB connectors as shown SJ DG Digital Input Card The SJ DN DeviceNet Interface Card not shown installs in the inverter s expansion bay It connects directly to a DeviceNet network Inverter parameters P044 to P049 configure the card Only one DeviceNet card may be installed in an inverter For more information please refer to the DeviceNet Expansion Card Instruction Manual gt Q re D 97 n fe D 07 56 Dynamic Braking Dynamic Braking Introduction The purpose of dynamic braking is to improve the ability of the inverter to stop decelerate the motor and load This becomes necessary when an application has some or all of the following characteristics High load inertia compared to the available motor torque The application requires frequent or sudden changes in speed e System losses are not great enough to slow the motor as needed When the inverter reduces its output frequency to decelerate the load the motor can temporarily become a generator This occurs when the motor rotation fr
345. gital output on terminal FM frequency monitor It uses terminal CM1 as digital GND reference While many applications use this terminal to monitor the output frequency you can configure terminal Analog digital Output FM to transmit one of several parameters Most use pulse width modulation PWM to D GND represent the value while one parameter uses frequency modulation FM to represent the See I O specs on page 4 9 value Do not confuse the notation for terminal FM with brackets with FM signal type The following table lists the configurations for terminal FM Use function C027 to configure Func Code Description Waveform Full Scale Value 00 Output frequency PWM 0 Max frequency Hz gt 01 Output current PWM 0 200 5 02 Output torque 1 PWM 0 200 ende 03 Output frequency FM 0 Max frequency Hz OT 04 Output voltage PWM 0 100 05 Input electric power PWM 0 200 06 Thermal load ratio PWM 0 100 07 LAD frequency PWM 0 Max frequency Hz Note 1 Display substitutes only during sensorless vector control OMz domain sensorless vector control and vector control PWM Signal Type The pulse width modulated signal at terminal FM is primarily designed for driving a moving coil meter The pulse width modulated signal is automatically averaged by the inertia of the moving coil mechanism converting the PWM signal to an analog
346. gram below shows the default configuration Chapter 2 covered wiring the power source to the inverter input and the inverter output to the motor By default the inverter s internal control circuit gets its power from two phases R and T from the input The user accessible 2 wire jumper R RO and T TO connects input power to the control circuit Power source 3 phase Ferrite To optional filter braking resistor Control braking unit 2 wire circuit N gt a jumper see gt sS To external a gt alarm circuit or ome interface O gt To provide power to the control circuit after input power loss you must change the control circuit wiring as shown below steps provided on following page Power source 3 phase SJ7002 Converter Rectifier To optional T gt braking resistor 2 wire jumper Control braking unit 20AWG circuit EN Ferrite To external filter gt alarm circuit or interface gt SJ7002 Inverter 45 Follow the steps to implement the wiring change shown in the previous diagram 1 Remove the 2 wire jumper J51 terminals RO and TO to connector J51 2 Procure several inches of multi strand 20 AWG 0 5mm or slightly heavier wire 3 Connect a wire to terminal RO that is long enough to connect to terminal P do not connect to P yet 4 Connect a wire to terminal TO that is long enough to connect
347. gs in effect Use the B021 B026 group of settings to configure the two set of parameters as needed By assigning the Overload Restriction function OLR to an intelligent terminal you can select the set of restriction parameters that is in effect Function Code Function Data or Range Description Set 1 Set 2 Overload Restriction B021 B024 00 Disable tion Mod MN 01 Enabled during accel and constant speed 02 Enabled during constant speed 03 Enabled during accel constant speed and decel Overload Restriction B022 B025 Rated current 0 5 Current value at which Setting to rated current 2 the restriction begins Deceleration Rate at B023 B026 0 1 to 30 seconds Deceleration time when Overload Restriction overload restriction operates Note the following e If the overload restriction constant B023 or B026 is set too short an over voltage trip during deceleration will occur due to regenerative energy from the motor e When an overload restriction occurs during acceleration the motor will take longer to reach the target frequency or may not reach it The inverter will make the following adjustments a Increase the acceleration time b Raise torque boost c Raise overload restriction level 3 2 e 5 e 5 Ke suonee8d0 4 30 Using Intelligent Input Terminals The figure below shows the operation during an overload restriction eve
348. he 10 0 10V voltage input circuit uses terminals L and 02 Attach the cable s shield wire to terminal L on the inverter only Maintain the voltage within specifications Only apply a negative voltage if this input is configured for bipolar use Current Input The current input circuit uses terminals OI and L The current comes from a sourcing type transmitter a sinking type will not work This means the current must flow into terminal OI and terminal L is the return back to the transmitter The input impedance from OI to L is 250 Ohms Attach the cable s shield wire to terminal L on the inverter only Standard Voltage Input Bipolar Voltage Input Current Input 0 to 9 6 VDC 10 to 9 6 VDC 4 to 19 6 mA DC 0 to 10V nominal 0 to 10V nominal 4 to 20 mA nominal See I O specs on page 4 9 4 66 Analog Output Operation Analog Output Operation In the system design for inverter applications it is sometimes useful to monitor inverter opera tion from a remote location In some cases this requires only a panel mounted analog meter moving coil type In other cases a controller device such as a PLC may monitor and command the inverter frequency and other functions The inverter can transmit the real time output frequency current torque or other parameters to the controller to confirm actual operation The monitor output terminal FM serves these purposes FM Terminal The inverter provides an analog di
349. he commercial power source switching function is useful in systems with excessive starting torque requirements This feature permits the motor to be started across the line sometimes called a bypass configuration After the motor is running the inverter takes over to control the speed This feature can eliminate the need to oversize the inverter reducing cost However additional hardware such as magnetic contactors will be required to realize this function For example a system may require 55KW to start but only 15KW to run at constant speed There fore a 15KW rated inverter would be sufficient when using the commercial power source switching The CS Commercial Power Source Enable input signal operation is as follows e OFF to ON transition signals the inverter that the motor is already running at powerup via bypass thus suppressing the inverter s motor output in Run Mode e ON to OFF transition signals the inverter to apply a time delay B003 frequency match its output to existing motor speed and resume normal Run Mode operation The following block diagram shows an inverter system with bypass capability When starting the motor directly across the line relay contacts Mg2 are closed and Mg1 and Mg3 are open This is the bypass configuration since the inverter is isolated from the power source and motor Then Mg contacts close about 0 5 to 1 second after that supplying power to the inverter
350. he timer is initialized again if an input transitions before the timer expires e When the timer expires the state of all three position select inputs is transferred to the output to generate a new position selection P060 to P067 suoesado D 2 e 5 e 5 Ke C169 Determination time 0 C169 Determination time gt 0 7 Position selection CP1 CP2 CP3 Note that excessively long determination time settings will reduce the overall performance of the position select inputs 4 40 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Zero Return A zero return operation also called a home return occurs when the motor moves the load to a Functions particular starting position Using parameter P068 you may select one of three possible types of zero return operations Parameter P069 selects the search direction The zero pulse input Opt Code 69 ORL also called zone input signals the arrival at the zero position z ba _ 70 ORG JERN Code Function Data Description ke 1 to 8 P068 Zero return mode selection 00 Low speed A 01 High speed 1 Required P068 P069 Settings P070 P071 02 High speed 2 Default Requires P069 Zero return direction selection 00 Forward terminal config 01 Revere It is generally a requirement or good practice to perform a zero return operation after every powerup of the inver
351. he waiting time If a shorter waiting time corresponding to the transmission of fewer than 3 5 characters is specified the inverter will not respond The actual waiting time is the sum of the silent interval corresponding to the transmission of 3 5 characters and the communication wait time C078 gt 3 Message Time required for communication Q PE 2 Configuration e After the inverter receives a query the inverter waits for the sum of the silent interval corre x Response sponding to the transmission of 3 5 characters and the communication wait time C078 w before sending a response After receiving a response from the inverter the master system must wait for the silent interval corresponding to the transmission of 3 5 characters or longer before sending the next query to the inverter Normal response Ifthe query specifies the function code 08h for the loopback test the inverter returns a response that has the same contents as the query Ifthe query specifies a function code 05h 06h OFh or 10h for writing data to registers or coils the inverter returns the query without a change as a response Ifthe query specifies a function code O1h or 03h for reading a register or coil the inverter returns a response that contains the slave address and function code specified in the query and the data read from the register or coil Response when an error occurs When finding any error in a query e
352. heir value ranges Please refer to the expansion card manual for more details Keypad Defaults Run er rn Range and Settings FEF FUF2 FF2 Mode go ESCEPTO SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 HP EU USA Jpn P001 Operation mode on expan TRF G0 Trip stop motor 00 00 00 Xv sion card I error RUH G I Continuous operation P002 Operation mode on expan TEP OG Trip stop motor 00 00 00 Xv sion card 2 error RUM G I Continuous operation PO11 Encoder pulse per revolution PPR setting 128 to 65000 pulses per revolution 1024 1024 1024 XX 3 P012 Control pulse setting ASR OG Automatic Speed Regulation ASR mode 00 00 00 xx Y is ME AFR G I Automatic Position Regulation APR mode xx 3 5 O APRS G2 Absolute Position Control xx p o HAFF 03 High resolution Absolute Position Control xx P013 Pulse input mode setting MDa OG Quadrature mode 00 00 00 xx MDL 0 I Count and direction HIZ G2 Separate forward and reverse pulse trains P014 Home search stop position setting 0 to 4095 pulses 0 0 0 Xv P015 Home search speed setting Start frequency to maximum frequency up 5 00 5 00 5 00 Xv to 120 0 Hz P016 Home search direction FH OG Forward 00 00 00 xx setting Rit 0 I Reverse xx P017 Home search completion range setting 0 to 9999 1000 10 000 pulses
353. hen the input is below the set threshold value the inverter substitutes the threshold value for 9 02dc AE the input Related parameters are given in the following tables Valid for 11 to 15 Outputs ALx Opt Required B070 BO71 Code Settings B072 Symbol Function Name 27 Odc Analog O disconnect detect Default Requires terminal config 28 Oldc Analog OI disconnect detect 29 O2dc Analog 02 disconnect detect Code Function Data or Range Description B070 O input disconnect 0 to 100 If O value lt B070 turn ON Ode threshold substitute BO70 value for O input no 255 Ignore B070 setting B071 OT input disconnect 0 to 100 If OI value lt B071 turn ON Ode threshold substitute B071 value for OI input no 255 Ignore B071 setting B072 02 input disconnect 0 to 100 If 02 value lt B072 turn ON Odc threshold substitute BO72 value for 02 input no 255 Ignore B072 setting suoljeisdo D ro O 5 e 5 Ke Value applied to input O Ol or 02 B070 B071 B072 0 Odc Oldc or O2dc t The inverter can also detect when an analog input value is within a range or window of values See Window Comparator Signals on page 4 62 4 56 Using Intelligent Output Terminals PID Feedback Seco
354. hermal protection cireuit Note The electronic thermal protection is detects a motor overload If the error easily triggered when the output frequency is occurs the inverter will trip according to 5 Hz or less If the moment of inertia of the the setting of the electronic thermal load is large this protective function may function operate when the inverter accelerates the motor and the acceleration may be disabled If this problem occurs increase the torque boost current or adjust other settings as needed 06 Braking When the BRD operation rate exceeds the Check whether the inverter has decreased resistor setting of B090 this protective function the motor quickly increase the decelera OL BED overload shuts off the inverter output and displays tion time protection the error code shown on the left Check whether the operation cycle is too short prolong the operation cycle Check whether the set BRD operation rate is too low adjust the setting to an appropriate level Note Confirm the maximum allowable capacity of the resistor 6 7 SJ7002 Inverter OPE SRW Nate Descrintion Troubleshooting and Display P Corrective Action 09 Over voltage If the DC voltage across the P and N Check whether the inverter has decreased protection terminals rises too high an inverter the motor quickly increase the decelera Duer Y failure may result To avoid this proble
355. hile the inverter is energized be sure not to open the front case Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock WARNING Be sure not to operate electrical equipment with wet hands Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock WARNING While the inverter is energized be sure not to touch the inverter terminals even when the motor is stopped Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock WARNING If the Retry Mode is selected the motor may suddenly restart after a trip stop Be sure to stop the inverter before approaching the machine be sure to design the machine so that safety for personnel is secure even if it restarts Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel WARNING If the power supply is cut OFF for a short period of time the inverter may restart operation after the power supply recovers if the Run command is active If a restart may pose danger to personnel so be sure to use a lock out circuit so that it will not restart after power recovery Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel WARNING The Stop Key is effective only when the Stop function is enabled Be sure to enable the Stop Key separately from the emergency stop Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel WARNING During a trip event if the alarm reset is applied and the Run command is present the inverter will automatically restart Be sure to apply the alarm reset only after verifying the Run command is OFF Otherwise it may cause injury to
356. hreshold from 0 to 100 of trip level for turning ON the intelligent output THM at that level The thermistor input of the inverter is a separate function from the electronic thermal function It has its own threshold to cause a trip alarm at a particular thermistor resistance For example suppose you have inverter model SJ700 110LFE2 The rated motor current is 46A The setting range is 0 2 46 to 1 2 46 or 9 2A to 55 2A For a setting of BO12 46A current at 100 the figure to the right shows 60 the curve Trip time s The electronic thermal characteristic adjusts the way the inverter calculates thermal heating based on the type of torque control the inverter uses 0 5 53 4 69 92 CAUTION When the motor runs at lower 116 150 200 speeds the cooling effect of the motor s internal fan decreases Trip current at 60 Hz Reduced Torque Characteristic The example below shows the effect of the reduced torque characteristic curve for example motor and current rating At 20Hz the output current is reduced by a factor of 0 8 for given trip times Trip current reduction factor x 1 0 x 0 8 x 0 6 0 5 20 60 42 7 55 2 73 6 92 8 120 160 Reduced trip current at 20 Hz SJ7002 Inverter KEJ Constant Torque Characteristic Selecting the constant torque characteristic for the example motor gives the curves below At 2 5 Hz the output current is reduced by a factor of 0 9 for given trip t
357. ia an external input braking force time and operating frequency Overload capacity output current 150 for 60 seconds 200 180 for 75kW 100HP and larger for 0 5 seconds Freq Operator keypad Up and Down keys Value settings setting Potentiometer Analog setting via potentiometer on operator keypad External signal 8 0 to 10 VDC and 10 to 10 VDC input impedance 10k Ohms 4 to 20 mA input impedance 250 Ohms Potentiometer 1k to 2k Ohms 2W Serial port RS485 interface FW RV Operator panel Run key Stop key change FW RV by function command Run External signal FW Run Stop NO contact RV set by terminal assignment NC NO 3 wire input available Serial port RS485 interface Intelligent Input terminals assign eight functions to terminals Input signal RV reverse run stop CF1 CF4 multi speed select JG jogging DB external DC braking SET set 2nd motor data 2CH 2 stage accel decel FRS free run stop EXT external trip USP unattended start protection CS commercial power source SFT software lock AT analog input voltage current select SET3 set 3rd motor data RS reset inverter STA start 3 wire interface STP stop 3 wire interface F R FW RV 3 wire interface PID PID ON OFF PIDC PID reset CAS control gain setting UP remote control Up function motorized speed pot DWN remote control Down function motorized speed pot UDC remo
358. imes Trip current Trip reduction time s factor x 1 0 x 0 9 ap x 0 8 0 47 8 62 1 82 8 104 135 180 Reduced trip current at 2 5 Hz Free Thermal Characteristic It is possible to set the electronic thermal characteristic using a free form curve defined by three data points according to the table below Function Hats Code Name Description Range B015 Free setting electronic Data point coordinates for Hz axis 0 to 400Hz BO17 thermal frequency 1 2 3 horizontal in the free form curve B019 B016 Free setting electronic Data point coordinates for Ampere 0 0 disable B018 thermal current 1 2 3 axis vertical in the free form curve 0 1 to 1000 B020 suoesado The left graph below shows the region for possible free setting curves The right graph below shows an example curve defined by three data points specified by B015 B020 5 2 fe 5 e 5 Ke Trip current reduction Output factor current A x 1 0 gt B020 l x 0 8 i B018 Setting range B016 l l 0 Hz 0 7 Output freq 400 B015 B017 B019 Ax04 max freq Suppose the electronic thermal setting B012 is set to 44 Amperes The graph below shows the effect of the free setting torque characteristic curve For example at B017 Hz the output current level to cause overheating in a fixed time period is
359. inal config If you assign the SET or SET3 functions to an intelligent input terminal you can select between two or three sets of motor parameters You may assign one or both of these functions These second and third parameters store alternate sets of motor characteristics When terminal SET or SET3 is turned ON the inverter will use the second or third set of parameters accordingly generating the frequency output to the motor When changing the state of the SET or SET3 input terminal the change will not take effect until the inverter is stopped When you turn ON the SET or SET3 input the inverter operates per the second or third set of parameters respectively When the terminal is turned OFF the output function returns to the original settings first set of motor parameters Refer to Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors on page 4 76 for details Note the following Ifthe terminal state is changed while the inverter is running the inverter continues using the current set of parameters until the inverter is stopped If both SET and SET3 are ON at the same time SET prevails and the 2nd motor parameters are in effect 4 20 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Two stage Acceleration and Deceleration Opt Code 09 Symbol 2CH Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Required A092 A093 Settings A094 0 Default terminal 5 Free run Stop
360. inals when connecting the wires to the main circuit terminals Note 4 N terminal for braking unit is common to N terminal of power lines 222 Step by Step Basic Installation iD Wire the Inverter Input to a Supply and Installation D E amp 5 oO 2 jo 2 _ Oo gt Step 6 In this step you will connect wiring to the input of the inverter All models have the same power connector terminals R L1 S L2 and T L3 for three phase input The three phases may be connected in any order as they are isolated from chassis ground and do not determine motor direction of rotation Please refer to the specifica tions label on the front or side of the inverter for the acceptable input voltage ranges NOTE The wiring example to the right shows an SJ700 110LFU2 inverter The terminal locations will vary depending on the inverter model see below Note the use of ring lug connectors for a secure connection Use the terminal arrangement below corresponding to your inverter model NOTE Be sure that the power is OFF before changing the jumper settings for P PD or for the EMC filter selection Inverter models 004 to 037LFUF2 007 to 037HFUF2 HFEF2 RIS T IU V W Ro To L1 L2 L3 T1 72 73 PD P N RB amp 1 RB G G I Jumper bar a ae J62 J61 EMC filter selection
361. increase the wait time B124 Time for Confirmation after the output of Check whether the braking confirmation the brake release signal signal has been input check the wiring 39 Emergency If the EMR signal on three terminals is Check whether an error has occurred in stop 8 turned ON when the slide switch SW1 the external equipment since the EMF on the logic board is set to ON the emergency stop function was enabled inverter hardware will turn OFF the recover the external equipment from the inverter output and display the error code error shown on the left The malfunction is due Check for the noise sources located near to incoming noise when EMR terminal is the inverter remove noise sources not ON 39 Low speed If overload occurs during the motor Check whether the motor load is too high __ overload operation at a very low speed at 0 2 Hz or reduce the load factor OL LowSF protection less the electronic thermal protection D 3 2 z 2 3 D 3 D 3 a ko Bunooysejqnolp 6 10 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions e C fe lt 02 O Ka 2 FE oa Oo Z a C o 2 E 49 xe oO OPE SRW Name Description Troubleshooting and Display P Corrective Action EYL ModBus If time out occurs because of line discon Check whether the communication speed communica nection during the communication in setting is correct
362. ing A057 Free run DC braking A054 Running tion If an inverter is started into such a backward rotating load over current trips can occur Use DC braking as an anti windmilling technique to stop the motor and load and allow a normal acceleration from a stop See also the Acceleration Pause Function on page 3 21 You can configure the inverter to apply DC braking at stopping only at starting only or both DC braking power 0 100 can be set separately for stopping and starting cases SJ7002 Inverter 319 1 Internal DC braking Set A051 01 to enable internal braking The inverter automatically applies DC braking as configured during stopping starting or both You can configure DC braking to initiate in one of two ways 2 External DC braking Configure an input terminal with option code 7 DB see Exter nal Signal for DC Injection Braking on page 4 19 for more details Leave A051 00 although this setting is ignored when a DB input is configured The DC braking force settings A054 and A057 still apply However the braking time settings A055 and A058 do not apply see level and edge triggered descriptions below Use A056 to select level or edge detection for the external input a Level triggered When the DB input signal is ON the inverter immediately applies DC injection braking whether the inverter is in Run Mode or Stop Mode You control DC
363. ing Factory set H004 Motor poles setting I st motor 4 4 4 H204 Motor poles setting 2nd motor 4 4 4 H005 Motor speed constant 1st motor 1 590 1 590 1 590 H205 Motor speed constant 2nd motor 1 590 1 590 1 590 H006 Motor stabilization constant 1st motor 100 100 100 H206 Motor stabilization constant 2nd motor 100 100 100 H306 Motor stabilization constant 3rd motor 100 100 100 H020 Motor constant R1 1st motor According to inverter rating H220 Motor constant R1 2nd motor According to inverter rating H021 Motor constant R2 1st motor According to inverter rating H221 Motor constant R2 2nd motor According to inverter rating H022 Motor constant L 1st motor According to inverter rating H222 Motor constant L 2nd motor According to inverter rating H023 Motor constant Io According to inverter rating H223 Motor constant Io 2nd motor According to inverter rating H024 Motor Constant J According to inverter rating H224 Motor constant J 2nd motor According to inverter rating H030 Auto constant R1 1st motor According to inverter rating H230 Auto constant R1 2nd motor According to inverter rating H031 Auto constant R2 1st motor According to inverter rating H231 Auto constant R2 2nd motor According to inverter rating H032 Auto constant L 1st motor According to inverter rating H232 Auto constant L 2nd motor According to inverter rating H033 Auto constant Io 1st motor According to inverter rating H233 Auto constant Io 2nd motor According to i
364. ings For more details refer to the expansion card instruction manual Torque ans DIP Switch Rotary Deroy Sur Accel Decel Time limit Posten Switch Seconds a Setting Setting 1 2 Code 0 01 0 1 1 Rate 0 01 0 1 1 1 1 pulse 0 1 2 OFF PAC batch input 3 d mode 4 7 5 6 v 0 v v Vv v OFF BIN 1 Vv binary input ON BCD 2 v binary coded decimal input 3 v v 4 Vv ON DIV 5 v divided input mode 6 v v 7 v 8 v 9 Vv v A v B v SJ7002 Inverter 6 13 DeviceNet Expansion Card Use the following table to diagnose errors caused by a DeviceNet expansion card Each error will cause the inverter to trip according to parameter settings P045 and P048 turning OFF its output and displaying an error code DeviceNet Expansion Card Errors Error Code OPE SRW Name Probable Cause s E68 END DeviceNet Communication The communication speed may be Error incorrect OF 1 8 OP 2 8 The network wiring length may not be appropriate A connector is loose or wire not connected E56 ETL Duplicate MAC ID Two or more devices on the network have the same MAC ID OF 1 1 OF Z 1 E62 ENZ External trip Check the Force Fault Trip bit z Attribute 17 in the Instance 1 of OPI 2 OP 2 2 Class 19 may be set to 1 If so clear the bit to 0 E59 99 Inverter communicatio
365. input starting value the inverter outputs the starting frequency specified by Al 11 When the input voltage is greater than the A114 ending value the inverter outputs the ending max rev frequency i frequency specified by A112 max fwd frequency eoe 1 f 1 input 100 10V Keypad Defaults Run nae Se PE Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 rn p SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn A005 AT selection GO GG Select between O and OT at AT 00 00 00 xx waz G I Select between O and 02 at AT DR G2 Select between O and keypad pot OLR 03 Select between OI and keypad pot DANE 04 Select between 02 and keypad pot A006 02 selection 22 G0 No summing 02 and OI 03 03 03 xx O 01 F G i Sum of 02 and OI neg sum reverse speed reference inhibited O 01 FM G2 Sum of 02 and OI neg sum reverse speed reference allowed OFF 03 Disable 02 input A011 O L input active range start frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 00 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv 7 model 4000HFx2 is 0 00 to 120 00 Hz The output frequency corresponding to the voltage input range starting point A012 O L input active range end frequency 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 00 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv model 4000HFx2 is 0 00 to 120 00 Hz The output frequency corresponding to the voltage input range ending point
366. inverter supplies adjustable voltage and adjustable frequency to an AC motor The inverter can automatically maintain a constant volts Hz ratio to enhance the motor capability throughout its entire speed range WARNING Use 65 75 C Cu wire only or equivalent For SJ700 series except SJ700 300Lxx and SJ700 370Lxx WARNING Use 75 C Cu wire only or equivalent For SJ700 300Lxx and SJ700 370Lxx WARNING Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes with 240 V maximum For models with suffix L 200V class WARNING Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes with 480 V maximum For models with suffix H 400V class WARNING The inverter must be installed in an environment that is rated for at least Pollution Degree 2 or equivalent WARNING The ambient temperature must not exceed 50 C WARNING The capacitor discharge time is 10 minutes or more Caution Care must be taken to avoid the risk of electric shock WARNING Each model of the inverter has a solid state overload protection circuit or an equivalent feature for the motor SJ7002 Inverter Ei Terminal Tighten The wire size range and tightening torque for field wiring terminals are presented in the table ing Torque and below Wire Size Input Er
367. ion However if the Jog command turns ON before the FW or RV terminal turns ON the inverter output turns OFF D gs S JG JG 5 a FW FW og 7 A038 A038 Output Output frequency t frequency t A039 00 01 02 A039 03 04 05 Decelerating stop 00 shown Free run stop 05 shown Note the following e Jogging is not performed when the value of A038 jogging frequency is smaller than the start frequency B082 or the value is 0 Hz Be sure to turn ON FW or RV after the JG input turns ON for a jog operation e When setting A039 to 02 or 05 you must also set the DC braking parameters External Signal for DC Injection Braking Opt Code 07 Symbol DB Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Required A053 A054 Settings Default Requires terminal config Set Second or Third Motors When the terminal DB is turned ON the DC braking DB feature is enabled regardless of A051 setting Set the follow ing parameters when the external DC braking terminal is to be used e A053 DC braking delay time setting The range 0 0 to 5 0 seconds e A054 DC braking force setting The range is 0 to 100 for models 004xxx to 1500xxx 0 to 35 for models 1850xxx to 4000xxx The scenarios to the right help show how DC braking works in various situations 1 Scenario 1 The FW Run or RV Run terminal is ON When the DB t
368. ion profile STP Stop Motor Stop motor rotation on momentary open OFF is active state uses deceleration profile F R Forward Reverse ON Reverse OFF Forward To implement the 3 wire interface assign 20 STA Start 21 STP Stop and 22 F R Forward Reverse to three of the intelligent input terminals Use momentary contacts for Start and Stop Use a selector switch such as SPST for the Forward Reverse input Be sure to set the operation command selection A002 01 for input terminal control of motor Note the following suonee8d0 D 5 2a e 5 e 5 Ke Ifyou have a motor control interface that needs logic level control rather than momentary pulse control use the FW and RV inputs instead The STP logic is inverted Normally the switch will be closed so you open the switch to stop In this way a broken wire causes the motor to stop automatically safe design e When you configure the inverter for 3 wire interface control the dedicated FW terminal is automatically disabled The RV intelligent terminal assignment is also disabled The diagram below shows the use of 3 wire control STA Start Motor is an edge sensitive input an OFF to ON transition gives the Start command The control of direction is level sensitive and the direction may be changed at any time STP Stop Motor is also a level sensitive input STA terminal STP terminal F R te
369. irm the setting values again CAUTION When using normally closed active state settings C011 to C019 for externally commanded Forward or Reverse terminals FW or RV the inverter may start automatically when the external system is powered OFF or disconnected from the inverter So do not use normally closed active state settings for Forward or Reverse terminals FW or RV unless your system design protects against unintended motor operation CAUTION Do not discard the inverter with household waste Contact an industrial waste management company in your area who can treat industrial waste without polluting the environment CAUTION In all the illustrations in this manual covers and safety devices are occasionally removed to describe the details While operating the product make sure that the covers and safety devices are placed as they were specified originally and operate it according to the instruction manual UL Cautions Warnings and Instructions Wiring Warnings The Cautions Warnings and instructions in this section summarize the procedures necessary to for Electrical Practices and Wire Sizes gt PPP P PP P ensure an inverter installation complies with Underwriters Laboratories guidelines The SJ7002 series inverter family is an open type and or Enclosed Type 1 when employing accessory Type I Chassis Kit AC inverter with 3 phase input and 3 phase output The inverter are intended for use in an enclosure The
370. is 100 To change the level from the default set C041 or C111 overload level The accuracy of this function is the same as the function of the output current monitor on the FM terminal see Analog Output Operation on page 4 66 NOTE If you use an intelligent output to drive an external relay be sure to connect a diode across the relay coil This will prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor The PID loop error is defined as the magnitude absolute value of the differ Gr Process variable ence between the Setpoint target value and the Process Variable actual value s C044 i et When the error magnitude exceeds the value preset value for C044 the OD terminal C044 signal turns ON The default deviation value is set to 3 To change this value change parameter C044 deviation OD level Refer to PID Loop Operation Signal on page 4 75 NOTE If you use an intelligent output to drive an external relay be sure to connect a diode across the relay coil This will prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor 4 47 SJ7002 Inverter Alarm Signal The inverter Alarm Signal is active when a fault has occurred and it is in the Trip Mode refer to the Opt Code 05 diagram at right When the fault is cleared the Alarm Signal becomes inac
371. is chapter are examples only Default and non default input terminal assignments are noted throughout your particular assignments may be different The wiring diagrams show the xFU xFR model default P24 PLC jumper position U S Jpn versions as shown below on the left The common return for inputs is CM1 in this case The diagram on the right shows the default jumper position and example input wiring for xFE models Europe version For this case the common return for inputs is P24 Be sure the jumper position and return terminal used match your application wiring needs xFU xFR models U S Jpn versions xFE models Europe version FW RV FW RV mjes jajalen mjw 5 4 3 2 4 P24 Default jumper i position P24 PLC Default jumper position PLC _ CM1 and wiring example kp used throughout this a g example chapter lt return return SJ7002 Inverter 4 15 Forward Run When you input the Run command via the dedicated terminal FW the inverter executes the Stop and Reverse Forward Run command high or Stop command low When you input the Run command via Run Stop the programmable terminal RV the inverter executes the Reverse Run command high or Commands Stop command low Note the following e When the Forward Run and Reverse Run commands are active at the same time the inv
372. is specified in the following tables Data Hex 02 Command Description Data Hex 02 CommandDescription 0000000000000001 FW Forward command 0000000100000000 SF1 Multi speed bit level 0000000000000002 RV Reverse command 0000000200000000 SF2 Multi speed bit level 0000000000000004 CF1 Multi speed 1 0000000400000000 SF3 Multi speed bit level 0000000000000008 CF2 Multi speed 2 0000000800000000 SF4 Multi speed bit level 0000000000000010 CF3 Multi speed 3 0000001000000000 SF5 Multi speed bit level 0000000000000020 CF4 Multi speed 4 0000002000000000 SF6 Multi speed bit level 0000000000000040 JG Jog operation 0000004000000000 SF7 Multi speed bit level 0000000000000080 DB Dynamic braking 0000008000000000 OLR Overload restriction setting 0000000000000100 SET set 2nd motor 0000010000000000 TL Torque limit 0000000000000200 2CH 2 stage adjustable speed 0000020000000000 TRQ1 Torque limit select I 0000000000000400 0000040000000000 TRQ2 Torque limit select 2 0000000000000800 FRS Free run stop 0000080000000000 PPI P PI inverter mode select 0000000000001000 EXP External trip 0000100000000000 BOK Brake confirmation 0000000000002000 USP Unattended start protection 0000200000000000 ORT Orientation home command 0000000000004000 CS Commercial power change 0000400000000000 LAC Linear Accel decel Cancel 0000000000008000 SFT Software lock 0000800000000000 PCLR Position erro
373. is the sum of the function code of the query and 80h The exception code indicates the factor of the exception response Function Code Query Exception Response Olh 8ih 03h 83h 05h 85h 06h 86h OFh 8Fh 10h 90h Exception Code Description Olh The specified function is not supported 02h The specified address is not found 03h The format of the specified data is not acceptable 21h The data to be written in a holding register is outside the inverter 22h The specified functions are not available to the inverter Function to change the content of a register that cannot be changed while the inverter is in service Function to submit an ENTER command during running UV Function to write in a register during tripping UV Function to write in a read only register or coil g xX ipu ddy B 32 ModBus Mode Communications Store New Neither the command 06h to write data to a register nor the command 10h to write data to Register Data multiple registers can store the updates they made in the internal memory of the inverter ENTER Turning the inverter power off without storing the updates deletes them and restores the original Comman d register settings If you intend to store register updates in the internal memory of the inverter issue the Enter command as described below If you have updated a control constant you must recalculate the motor constants In such c
374. it Time for R W Sets time delay from receipt of 137Dh 04979 Oto 500 0 01 sec Acceleration brake confirmation signal to start of motor acceleration B123 Brake Wait Time for R W Sets time delay from brake 137Eh 04990 010500 0 01 sec Stopping confirmation signal turns OFF to inverter deceleration to 0 H B124 Brake Wait Time for R W Sets the wait time for confirma 137Fh 04991 010500 0 01 sec Confirmation tion after turn ON OFF of brake release B125 Brake Release Frequency R W Sets the frequency of the brake 1380h 04992 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Setting release output signal after delay set by B121 B126 Brake Release Current R W Sets the minimum inverter 1381h 04993 Oto 1800 0 1 Setting current level above which the brake release signal is permitted B127 Braking frequency R W 0 00 to 99 99 100 0 to 400 0 Hz 1382h 04994 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Reserved 1383h 04995 Reserved 1384h 04996 B130 Over voltage LADSTOP R W 00 Disable 1385h 04997 0 1 2 enable 01 Enable during deceleration and constant speed 02 Enable during acceleration B131 Over voltage LADSTOP R W 330 to 390 V for 200V class 1386h 04998 330 to 390 1V level 660 to 780 V for 400V class 660 to 780 B132 Acceleration and decelera R W 0 10 to 30 00 seconds 1387h 04999 10 to 3000 0 01 sec tion rate at overvoltage suppression
375. ith Class 1 wire or equivalent WARNING Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes 240 V maximum For models with suffix L WARNING Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes 480 V maximum For models with suffix H D o DO vV SJ7002 Inverter gt gt gt gt gt gt gt HIGH VOLTAGE Be sure to ground the unit Otherwise there is a danger n se 2 17 of electric shock and or fire HIGH VOLTAGE Wiring work shall be carried out only by qualified ae 2 17 personnel Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or fire HIGH VOLTAGE Implement wiring after checking that the power supply 2 17 is OFF Otherwise you may incur electric shock and or fire i UA HIGH VOLTAGE Do not connect wiring to an inverter or operatean eee inverter that is not mounted according the instructions given in this manual Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or injury to personnel Wiring Cautions for Electrical Practices CAUTION Be sure that the input voltage matches the inverter specifica wa 2 25 tions Three phase 200 to 240V 50 60Hz Three phase 380 to 480V 50 60Hz CAUTION Be sure not to power a three phase only inverter with single a 2 25 phase power Otherwise there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of fire CAUTION Be sure not
376. ith this command Use the codes in the following table for setting parameters associated with H003 and H203 Code Data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Japan or U S A mode B85 00 or 02 02 kW 04 1075 15 22 3 7 EU mode B85 01 0 2kW 0 37 10 5510 75 1 1 1 5 22 3 0 40 Code Data 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Japan or U S A mode B85 00 or 02 5 5 kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 EU mode B85 01 5 5 kW 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Code Data 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Japan or U S A mode B85 00 or 02 90 kW 110 132 150 160 185 200 220 250 280 300 EU mode B85 01 90kW 110 132 150 160 185 200 220 250 280 300 Code Data 33 34 35 36 Japan or U S A mode B85 00 or 02 315 kW 340 355 400 EU mode B85 01 315 kW 340 355 400 B 16 ASCII Mode Communications Command 08 The 08 command initializes the inverter parameters to the factory default values First you must set B84 use command 07 to specify whether you want to clear the trip history at the same time Also set B85 to specify the country code for the initialization use command 07 The frame format of command 08 follows the Frame format diagram and specification
377. ive part is constant while the reactive part changes with applied frequency These devices have a complex imped ance complex number where the resistance is the real part and the reactance is the imaginary part An electronic device made of one or more diodes that converts AC power into DC power Rectifiers are usually used in combination with capacitors to filter smooth the rectified waveform to closely approximate a pure DC voltage source A particular method of generating reverse torque to a motor an inverter will switch internally to allow the motor to become a generator and will either store the energy internally deliver the braking energy back to the main power input or dissipate it with a resistor The quality of control applied to maintain a parameter of interest at a desired value Usually expressed as a percent from the nominal motor regulation usually refers to its shaft speed The torque applied in the direction opposite to motor shaft rotation As such reverse torque is a decelerating force on the motor and its external load The windings of a motor that rotate being physically coupled to the motor shaft See also stator For a transistor semiconductor device it is in saturation when an increase in input current no longer results in an increase in the output current The saturation voltage is the voltage drop across the device The ideal saturation voltage is zero A technique used in variable frequency drives
378. ive such as the Hitachi SJ7002 is also called an inverter since it contains three inverter circuits to generate 3 phase output to the motor y xipuaddy AL Glossary lt x Ra C Q Q lt Isolation Transformer Jogging Operation Jump Frequency Line Reactor Momentum Multi speed Operation Motor Load NEC NEMA Open collector Outputs Orientation Power Factor PID Loop Process Variable PWM A transformer with 1 1 voltage ratio that provides electrical isolation between its primary and secondary windings These are typically used on the power input side of the device to be protected An isolation transformer can protect equipment from a ground fault or other malfunction of nearby equipment as well as attenuate harmful harmonics and transients on the input power Usually done manually a jog command from an operator s panel requests the motor drive system to run indefinitely in a particular direction until the machine operator ends the jog operation A jump frequency is a point on the inverter output frequency range that you want the inverter to skip around This feature may be used to avoid a resonant frequency and you can program up to three jump frequencies in the inverter A three phase inductor generally installed in the AC input circuit of an inverter to minimize harmonics and to limit short circuit current The physical property of a body in motion that causes it to continue t
379. justable frequency inverter If possible route the other end of the control lines directly to the cable entry section of the supervisory controller or host computer The shield conductor of the motor cables always must connected to PE at both ends To achieve a large area contact between shield and PE potential use a PG screw with a metallic shell or use a metallic mounting clip e Use only cable with braided tinned copper mesh shield type CY with 85 coverage e The shielding continuity should not be broken at any point in the cable If the use of reactors contactors terminals or safety switches in the motor output is necessary the unshielded section should be kept as short as possible Some motors have a rubber gasket between terminal box and motor housing Very often the terminal boxes and particularly the threads for the metal PG screw connections are painted Make sure there is always a good metallic connection between the shielding of the motor cable the metal PG screw connection the terminal box and the motor housing If necessary carefully remove paint between conducting surfaces 4 Take measures to minimize interference that is frequently coupled in through installation cables e Separate interfering cables with 0 25m minimum from cables susceptible to interference A particularly critical point is laying parallel cables over longer distances If two cables intersect one crosses over the other the interfer
380. kg Therefore be careful when loading and transporting these inverters Use the eyebolts on the inverter housing and frame to lift the inverter The diagrams below show different lifting configurations to fit the orientations you may need Eyebolts Eyebolts Eyebolts DC reactor lifting Horizontal inverter lifting Use eye Use bolts at top of frame Upright inverter lifting bolts at front corners of inverter Use eyebolts at top of inverter 28 Step by Step Basic Installation Step 2 To summarize the caution messages you will need to find a solid non flammable 3 vertical surface that is in a relatively clean and dry environment In order to ensure enough room for air circulation around the inverter to aid in cooling maintain the specified clearance Ensure Adequate round the inverter specified in the diagram Ventilation Clear area 10 cm 3 9 min models 004 to 550 30 cm 11 8 min models 750 to 4000 Exhaust D cc 5 0 cs 530 o iie ZS j _ a 5 cm 1 97 5 cm 1 97 gt minimum minimum oe EG 10 cm 3 9 min models 004 to 550 Air intake 30 cm 11 8 min models 750 to 4000 Clearance to replace DC bus capacitors with inverter in place 22 cm 8 7 min models 150 to 550 30 cm 11 8 min models 750 to 4000 CAUTION Be sure to maintain the specified clearance area around the inverter and to provide
381. l current 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 B017 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 2 0 0 0 B018 Free setting electronic thermal current 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 B019 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 0 0 0 B020 Free setting electronic thermal current 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 B021 Overload restriction operation mode 01 01 01 B022 Overload restriction setting Rated current x 1 50 B023 Deceleration rate at overload restriction 1 0 1 0 1 0 B024 Overload restriction operation mode 2 01 01 01 B025 Overload restriction setting 2 Rated current x 1 50 B026 Deceleration rate at overload restriction 2 1 00 1 00 1 00 B027 Overcurrent suppression enable 01 01 01 B028 Current limit for active frequency matching restart Rated current x 1 0 as C D Q 2 lt C 8 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry B Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Nadie FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan B029 Scan time constant for active freq matching 0 50 0 50 0 50 B030 Restart freq select for active freq matching 00 00 00 B031 Software lock mode selection 01 01 01 B034 Run power on warning time 0 0 0 B035 Rotational direction restriction 00 00 00 B036 Reduced voltage start selection 06 06 06 B037 Function code display restriction 04 04 04 B038 Initial display selection 01 0
382. l of window 100 100 100 comparator J7002 Inverter B Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Name FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan B068 02 input hysteresis width of window comparator 0 0 0 B070 O input disconnect threshold 255 no 255 no 255 no B071 OI input disconnect threshold 255 no 255 no 255 no B072 02 input disconnect threshold 127 no 127 no 127 no B078 Clear cumulative input power data 00 00 00 B079 Cumulative input power display gain setting 1 1 1 B082 Start frequency adjustment 0 50 0 50 0 50 B083 Carrier frequency setting 3 0 3 0 3 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 9 1 9 1 9 B084 Initialization mode parameters or trip history 00 00 00 B085 Country code for initialization 01 02 00 B086 Frequency scaling conversion factor 1 0 1 0 1 0 B087 STOP key enable 00 00 00 B088 Restart mode after FRS 00 00 00 B089 Automatic carrier frequency reduction B090 Dynamic braking usage ratio 0 0 0 0 0 0 B091 Stop mode selection 00 00 00 B092 Cooling fan control 00 00 00 B095 Dynamic braking control 00 00 00 B096 Dynamic braking activation level 360 720 360 720 360 720 B098 Thermistor for thermal protection control 00 00 00 B099 Thermal protection level setting 3000 3000 3000 B100 Free setting V f frequency 1 0 0 0 B101 Free setting V f voltage 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 B102 Free se
383. l programmable output 1498h 05272 functions available except C149 Logic output 3 function B R W LOGI to LOG6 1499h 05273 C150 Logic output 3 operator R W 00 AND 149Ah 05274 0 1 2 01 0R 02 XOR exclusive OR C151 Logic output 4 function A R W All programmable output 149Bh 05275 functions available except C152 Logic output 4 function B R W LOGI to LOG6 149Ch 05276 C153 Logic output 4 operator R W 00 AND 149Dh 05277 0 1 2 01 OR 02 XOR exclusive OR C154 Logic output 5 function A R W All programmable output 149Eh 05278 functions available except C155 Logic output 5 function B R W LOGI to LOG6 149Fh 05279 SJ7002 Inverter Ex Holding Registers C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec C156 Logic output 5 operator R W 00 AND 14A0h 05280 0 1 2 01 OR 02 XOR exclusive OR C157 Logic output 6 function A R W All programmable output 14A1h 05281 7 i functions available except C158 Logic output 6 function B R W LOGI to LOG6 14A2h 05282 C159 Logic output 6 operator R W 00 AND 14A3h 05283 0 1 2 01 OR 02 XOR exclusive OR C160 Terminal 1 input R W 0 to 200 x 2 milliseco
384. l purpose outputs MO1 to MO6 SJ7002 Inverter 4 61 Inverter Ready The inverter turns ON the Inverter Ready Signal IRDY output when it is ready to receive an Signal operation command such as Run Forward Run Reverse or Jog Otherwise IRDY will be OFF and the inverter cannot accept operation commands If IRDY is OFF then check the input power supply voltage at the R S and T terminals to be sure the voltage is within the input specification range The IRDY output is OFF when the input power is provided only to Symbol URDY the control power supply Opt Code 50 Valid for 11 to 15 Outputs ALx Required Settings ns Default Requires terminals config Forward Reverse The Forward Rotation Signal FWR is ON only when the inverter is driving the motor in the Rotation Signals foward direction Similarly the Reverse Rotation Signal RVR is ON only when the inverter is driving the motor in the reverse direction Both signals are OFF when the motor is stopped Opt Code 51 FWR and 52 RVR Symbol Output frequency Hz Valid for 11 to 15 Ouputs ALx 0 I Required Gone I Settings i I I I I l Default Requires Forward Rotation Signal FWR terminal config i i t Reverse Rotation Signal RVR t suonee8d0 D 5 2 fe 5 e 5 Ke Major Failure The Major Failure Signal MJA indicates tha
385. ld Name Fane hex hex 1 Slave address 1 05 1 Slave address 05 2 Function code 03 2 Function code 03 3 Register start number 00 3 Data size in bytes 3 04 high ord high order 4 Register start number 00 4 Register start number 11 high order low order 5 Register start number 07 5 Number of registers 00 low order ee Me 6 Register start number 1 00 6 Number of registers 02 high order 1 rder 2 dewonel 7 Register start number 1 02 7 CRC 16 high order 95 low order 8 CRC 16 low order 8A 8 CRC 16 high order 36 9 CRC 16 low order 37 Note 1 Broadcasting is disabled Node MN Note 3 Data is transferred by the specified less than the number of the coil to be read first The data set in the response is as follows Response Buffer 4 5 number of data bytes data size In this case 4 bytes are used to return the content of two holding registers 6 7 Starting register 0 high order 0 low order 1 high order 1 low order number Register status 00h 07h 00h 02h Trip data Over voltage trip Decelerating When the Read Holding Register command cannot be executed normally refer to the exception response B 27 SJ7002 Inverter Write in Coil 05h This function writes data in a single coil Coil status changes are as follows Coil Status Data OFF to ON ON to OFF Change data high orde
386. lds Stage 1 inverter uses to turn ON or OFF Stage 2 inverter via the FBV output The vertical axis units are percent for the PID setpoint and for the upper and lower limits The output frequency in Hz is superimposed onto the same diagram When system control begins the following events occur in sequence in the timing diagram 1 Stage 1 inverter turns ON via the FW Run command 2 Stage 1 inverter turns ON the FBV output because the PV is below the PV low limit C053 So Stage 2 is assisting in loop error correction from the beginning 3 The PV rises and eventually exceeds the PV high limit C052 Stage 1 inverter then turns OFF the FBV output to Stage 2 since the boost is no longer needed 4 When the PV begins decreasing only Stage 1 is operating and it is in the linear control range This region is where a properly configured system will operate most often 5 The PV continues to decrease until it crosses under the PV low limit apparent external process disturbance Stage 1 inverter turns ON the FBV output and Stage 2 inverter is assisting again 6 After the PV rises above the PV low limit the FW Run command to Stage 1 inverter turns OFF as in a system shutdown 7 Stage 1 inverter enters Stop Mode and automatically turns OFF the FBV output which causes Stage 2 inverter to also stop i PID feedback PV PID setpoint SP Output frequency PV high limit C052 74 Ne
387. lgorithms improve performance particularly at low speeds Sensorless Vector Control improved torque control at output frequencies down to 0 5 Hz Use A044 03 1st motor or A244 03 2nd motor to select sensorless vector control Sensorless Vector Control 0Hz Domain improved torque control at output frequencies from 0 to 2 5 Hz Use A044 04 1st motor or A244 04 2nd motor to select sensorless vector control 0OHz domain Vector Control with Feedback improved torque control at all speeds while providing the most accurate speed regulation of all torque control algorithms Use A044 05 to select vector control with feedback These three control algorithms require the inverter s motor constants to accurately match the characteristics of the particular motor connected to your inverter Simply using the inverter s default parameters with the vector control modes may not produce satisfactory results The auto tuning procedure described later in this section is recommended for most applications needing vector control It determines and records the characteristics of the attached motor However it is possible to enter the motor constants directly if the motor manufacturer has provided that data After performing an initial auto tuning procedure for your motor you have an additional option adaptive tuning The adaptive tuning parameters use the auto tuning procedure s results as starting values Then each time the motor run
388. li 1008h 04101 bit0 11 I bit status gent input terminals bit 4 15 terminals D007 Scaled output frequency Displays the output frequency 1009h 04105 0 to 39960 0 01 monitor scaled by the constant in B0086 D007 L Decimal point indicates range 100Ah 04106 XX XX 0 00 to 99 99 XXX X 100 0 to 999 9 XXXX 1000 to 9999 XXXX 10000 to 99990 D008 Actual frequency monitor Displays the actual shaft speed of 100Bh 04107 40000 to 0 01 Hz the motor converted to 40000 D008 IL frequency 100Ch 04108 D009 Torque command monitor Displays the level of the torque 100Dh 04109 200 to 200 1 command when the inverter is set to torque control mode D010 Torque bias monitor Displays the level of the torque 100Eh 04110 200 to 200 1 bias if enabled when the inverter is in vector control mode with feedback Reserved 100Fh 04111 D012 Torque monitor Estimated output torque value 1010h 04112 200 to 200 1 range is 300 0 to 300 0 D013 Output voltage monitor Voltage of output to motor 1012h 04113 0 to 6000 0 1 V range is 0 0 to 600 0V D014 Power monitor Input power to inverter 1013h 04114 0 to 9999 0 1 kW range is 0 0 to 999 9 D015 H Cumulative power monitor Displays cumulative input power 1014h 04115 0 to 9999999 0 1 to inverter B079 selects the DOIS L multiplier for units Range is 0 0 1014h 04116 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 or 100 to 999
389. log Input Operation Input Terminal SJ7002 inverters provide for an external analog Signals input to command the inverter frequency output value The analog input terminal group includes the L OI O 02 and H terminals on the A GND control connector which provide for Voltage O and 02 or Current OT input All analog input V Ref signals must use the analog ground L pu O 10V input If you use either the voltage or current analog input you must select one of them using the logic 10 0 10V input terminal function AT analog type If terminal AT is OFF the voltage input O can 4 20mA input command the inverter output frequency If terminal AT is ON the current input OI can command the inverter output frequency The AT terminal function is covered in Analog Input Current Voltage Select on page 4 24 Remember that you must also set A001 01 to select analog input as the frequency source 02 1 A005 A001 01 Frequency i source setting Terminals Frequency setting l i Keypad 0 S see se pae eet 4 1 AT V I select 4 20 mA AT ON A005 00 suonee8d0 D 2 fe 5 e 5 Ke 10 0 10V AT ON A005 01 0 10V AT OFF Input Filter Parameter A016 adjusts an analog input sampling filter that evenly affects all analog inputs shown above The parameter range is from I to 30
390. ly the selected speed is infinitely variable across the speed range Multi speed Profile You can use the potentiometer control on the keypad for manual control The drive accepts analog 0 10V signals and 4 20 mA control signals as well The inverter can drive the motor in either direction Separate FW and RV commands select the direction of rotation The motion Speed profile example shows a forward motion followed by a reverse motion of shorter duration The speed presets and analog signals control the magnitude of the speed while the FW and RV commands determine the direction before the motion starts Forward move Reverse move Bi directional Profile NOTE The SJ7002 can move loads in both directions However it is not designed for use in servo type applications that use a bipolar velocity signal that determines direction Geting Started Frequently Asked Questions Frequently Asked Questions Q What is the main advantage in using an inverter to drive a motor compared to alternative solutions Q Q Q Q A An inverter can vary the motor speed with very little energy loss unlike mechanical or hydraulic speed control solutions The resulting energy savings can often pay for the inverter in a relatively short time The term inverter is a little confusing since we also use drive and amplifier to describe the electronic unit that controls a motor What does i
391. ly the multistage position settings and position ranges by four e Position settings can be sequenced in up to eight stages in combination with control pulse settings You can select zero return mode from one low speed and two high speed modes The home search function cannot be used during a zero return The teaching function allows you to set store position settings while actually running the machine motor is turning If intelligent terminal SPD Speed position Control Select option code 73 is assigned you can switch between speed control and position control e Only the four high order digits of data are displayed when the data position setting to be displayed consists of a large number of digits In Absolute Position Control Mode the inverter runs the motor until the machine reaches the target position according to the following settings and then set the machine into the position servo lock state until the Stop Command occurs 1 Position setting 2 Speed setting output frequency 3 Acceleration and deceleration time In absolute position control mode the frequency and accel decel settings selected at absolute position control are applied If the position setting value is small the inverter may decelerate the motor for positioning before its speed reached the set speed setting In absolute position control mode the direction of the operations command forward or reverse is ignored The operation command simply
392. m D Valid for 1 to 8 0 Hz left graph or the current motor rotation speed right graph when the FRS terminal 2 Inputs turns OFF The application determines the best setting of 5 S Required B003 B088 Parameter B003 specifies a delay time before resuming operation from a free run stop To og Settings i x disable this feature use a zero delay time og Default terminal 4 Resume from 0Hz B088 00 Resume from current speed B088 01 Motor Zero frequency start Motor gt 4 B003 wait time speed speed Switches Switches FRS FRS FW RV FW RV In the diagram above FRS signal is active high If you want the FRS terminal to be active low normally closed logic change the setting C011 to C018 that corresponds to the input 1 to 8 that is assigned the FRS function C001 to C008 External Trip Opt Code 12 Symbol EXT Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Required Settings none Default Requires terminal config Unattended Start Protection Opt Code 13 Symbol USP Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Required Settings none Default terminal 6 Default for FU2 models only others require input configuration SJ7002 Inverter El When the terminal EXT transitions OFF to ON the inverter enters the trip state indicates error code E12 and stops the output This is a general purpose interrupt type feature and the meaning of the error
393. m tion time this protective function shuts off the Check for a ground fault check the inverter output and displays the error code output cables and motor shown on the left when the DC voltage Check whether the motor has been rotated across the P and N terminals exceeds a by the action of the load reduce the specified level because of an increase in regenerative energy the energy regenerated by the motor or the input voltage during operation The inverter will trip if the DC voltage across the P and N terminals exceeds about 400 VDC in case of the 200 V class models or about 800 VDC in case of the 400 V class models E08 EEPROM When an internal EEPROM is caused by Check for the noise sources located near error external noise or an abnormal temperature the inverter remove noise sources EEPROM 2 3 rise the inverter shuts off its output and Check whether the cooling efficiency has displays the error code shown on the left deteriorated check the heat sink for Note An EEPROM error may result in a clogging and clean it CPU error e Check the cooling fan replace if needed E09 Under voltage If the inverter input voltage drops the Check whether the power supply voltage control circuit of the inverter cannot has dropped check the power supply Under function normally Therefore the inverter e Check whether the power supply capacity shuts off its output when the input voltage is sufficient check the power su
394. mal appearance overheating Insulation Isolation v Disconnect motor 500V class megger test resistance boundary from inverter do must pass fault megger test on motor Note 1 The life of a capacitor is affected by the ambient temperature See Capacitor Life Curve on page 6 20 Note 2 The inverter must be cleaned periodically If dust accumulates on the fan and heat sink it can cause overheating of the inverter SJ7002 Inverter 6 19 Megger Test The megger is a piece of test equipment that uses a high voltage to determine if an insulation degradation has occurred For inverters it is important that the power terminals be isolated from the Earth GND terminal via the proper amount of insulation The circuit diagram below shows the inverter wiring for performing the megger test Just follow the steps to perform the test 1 Remove power from the inverter and wait at least 10 minutes before proceeding 2 Open the front housing panel to access the power wiring 3 Remove all wires to terminals R S T PD P N RB U V and W Most importantly the input power and motor wires will be disconnected from the inverter 4 Remove the jumper at connector J61 It is located on the main circuit board beside the power terminals 5 Use a bare wire and short terminals R S T PD P N RB U V and W together as shown in the diagram 6 Connect the megger to the inverter Earth GND and to the shorted power terminals as shown The
395. mance specifications Operation Status Symptom Adjustment Parameter Powered running When the speed deviation Slowly increase the motor constant H021 H221 is negative R2 in relation to auto tuning data within to 1 2 times preset R2 When the speed deviation Slowly decrease the motor constant H021 H221 is positive R2 in relation to auto tuning data within 0 8 to 1 times preset R2 Regeneration When low frequency a Slowly increase the motor speed H020 H220 status with a decel few Hz torque is insuffi constant R1 in relation to auto erating torque cient tuning data within 1 to 1 2 times R1 Slowly increase the motor constant H023 H223 IO in relation to auto tuning data within I to 1 2 times preset IO During acceleration A sudden jerk at start of Increase motor constant J slowly H024 H224 rotation within to 1 2 times the preset constant During deceleration Unstable motor rotation Decrease the speed response H05 H205 Set motor constant J smaller than H024 H224 the preset constant During torque Insufficient torque during Set the overload restriction level B021 limiting torque limit at low speed lower than the torque limit level B041 to B044 At low frequency Irregular rotation Set motor constant J larger than the H024 H244 operation preset constant When using a motor one frame size smaller than the inverter rating the torque limit value B041 to B044 is from th
396. me monitor RUN mode in hours Range is 0 to 9999 1000 to 9999 100 to 999 10 000 to 99 900 hrs D017 Cumulative power on time Displays total time the inverter has had input hours monitor power ON in hours Range is 0 to 9999 100 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 100 to 999 hrs D018 Heat sink temperature Displays the temperature of the inverter s heat C monitor sink D019 Motor temperature monitor Displays motor internal temperature requires C an NTC thermistor installed in the motor and connected to TH and CM1 D022 Component life monitor Displays estimated life status of DC bus capacitors and cooling fans D023 Program counter Displays the current program step being Programs executed when the inverter is operating under the control of an EZ Sequence program D024 Program number counter Displays the EZ Sequence program identifica Program tion number if defined in the program when a program is loaded in the inverter D025 User monitor 0 Displays state of internal EZ Sequence register User Monitor 0 D026 User monitor I Displays state of internal EZ Sequence register User Monitor I D027 User monitor 2 Displays state of internal EZ Sequence register User Monitor 2 D028 Pulse counter Displays accumulated pulse count of PCNT Pulses intelligent input terminal option code 74 D029 Position setting monitor Displays absolute position command for Pulses motor shaft in absolute position control mode
397. mes proportional control P When the P PI input terminal is OFF the control mode becomes proportional integral control 0 P Control PI Control Torque Yi V Speed of rotation suonee8d0 The proportional gain Kpp value determines the droop Set the desired value using parameter H052 The relationship between the Kpp value and the droop is shown below 10 Kpp Set Value D 5 2 fe 5 e 5 Ke Droop The relationship between the droop and the rated rotation speed is shown below Speed error at rated torque Droop F Synchronous speed base frequency 4 28 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Remote Control The UP DWN terminal functions can adjust the output frequency for remote control while the motor is running The acceleration time and deceleration time used with this function is the same as for normal operation ACC1 and DEC1 2ACC1 2DEC1 The input terminals operate as follows Symbol Function Name Description UP Remote Control UP Function Accelerates increases output frequency motor from current frequency DWN Remote Control DOWN Decelerates decreases output frequency motor Function from current frequency Up and Down Functions Opt Code 21 UP and 28 DWN Symbol 29 UDC Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 A001 02 Required C101 01 Settings enables memory Default Requires terminal config 2 2 of
398. motor always resumes at 0 Hz or whether the motor resumes from its current coasting speed also called frequency matching The Run command may turn OFF briefly allowing the motor to coast to a slower speed from which normal operation can resume In most applications a controlled deceleration is desirable corresponding to BO91 00 However applications such as HVAC fan control will often use a free run stop B091 01 This practice decreases dynamic stress on system components prolonging system life In this case you will typically set BO88 01 in order to resume from the current speed after a free run stop see diagram below right Note that using the default setting BO88 00 can cause trip events when the inverter attempts to force the load quickly to zero speed 3 46 B Group Fine Tuning Functions NOTE Other events can cause or be configured to cause a free run stop such as power loss see Automatic Restart Mode and Phase Loss on page 3 30 and inverter trip events in general see Miscellaneous Functions on page 3 62 If all free run stop behavior is impor tant to your application such as HVAC be sure to configure each event accordingly Some additional parameters further configure all instances of a free run stop Parameter B003 Retry Wait Time Before Motor Restart sets the minimum time the inverter will free run For example if B003 4 seconds and B091 01 and the cause of the free run
399. motor and load will still be coasting when the inverter returns to normal Run Mode operation For that situation you can configure the inverter output C103 00 to resume opera tion from 0 Hz and accelerate normally Or you can configure the inverter C103 01 to resume operation from the current speed of the motor frequency matching often used in applications such as HVAC Keypad Defaults Run Kunc Name Range and Settings Mode Code Description sea EE 8 8 xFE2 xFU2 xFF2 Edit EU USA Jpn Lo Hi C102 Reset mode selection OH 008 Cancel trip state stop inverter output reset 00 00 00 Vv CPU clear position counter at ON transition Determines response to OFF G I Cancel trip state stop inverter output reset Reset input RST CPU clear position counter at OFF transi tion TRF G2 Cancel trip state and clear position counter no effect if a trip does not exist us EAT 03 Cancel trip state but does not clear position va counter no effect if a trip does not exist S S C103 Restart mode after reset ZST 2G Restart at 0 Hz 00 00 00 Xy Q UD FST G I Resume operation after frequency matching iy Ko FIA G2 Restart with active matching frequency C105 FM gain adjustment 50 to 200 100 100 100 XW C106 AM gain adjustment 50 to 200 100 100 100 XW C107 AMI gain adjustment
400. motor is 1800 RPM synchronous speed However an induction motor cannot generate torque unless its shaft turns at a slightly different speed This difference is called slip So it s common to see a rated speed of approximately 1750 RPM on a 60 Hz 4 pole motor Using a tachometer to measure shaft speed you can see the difference between the inverter output frequency and the actual motor speed The slip increases slightly as the motor s load increases This is why the inverter output value is called frequency since it is not exactly equal to motor speed You can program the inverter to display output frequency in units more directly related to the load speed by entering a constant discussed more in depth on page 3 45 Run Stop Versus Monitor Program Modes The Run LED on the inverter is ON in Run Mode 8 and OFF in Stop Mode The Program LED is ON when the inverter is in Program Mode and OFF for Monitor Mode All four mode combinations are possible The diagram to the right depicts the modes and the mode transitions via keypad D NOTE Some factory automation devices such as PLCs have alternate Run Program modes the device is in either one mode or the other In the Hitachi inverter however Run Mode alter nates with Stop Mode and Program Mode alternates with Monitor Mode This arrangement lets you program some values while the inverter is operating providing flexibility for maintenance personnel 2 37 SJ700
401. n 0034h 00052 LOGI Logical operation R result 1 Note 1 ON usually when either the control circuit terminal board or a coil is ON Among intelligent input terminals the control circuit terminal board is a high priority termi nal If the master cannot reset the coil ON status due to a transmission line break turn ON and OFF the control circuit terminal board to make the coil OFF status SJ7002 Inverter Ex Note 2 The content of a transmission error is held until the error is reset The error can be reset while the inverter is running ModBus Holding The following tables list the holding registers for the inverter interface to the network The table Registers legend is given below e Function Code The inverter s reference code for the parameter or function same as inverter keypad display Long word values 32 bits are listed in two rows H and L indicate the high and low order words e Name The standard functional name of the parameter or function for the inverter e R W The read only or read write access permitted to the data in the inverter Description How the parameter or setting works same as Chapter 3 description Register The network register address offset for the value in hex and decimal Actual network address is 40001 offset Some values have a high byte and low byte address g xIpuaddy Range The numerical range for the network value that is sent and or received
402. n 0 to 80 0 0 0 Xy Variable DC braking force Xv A055 DC braking time for deceleration 0 0 to 60 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv Sets the duration for DC braking during decel Xv A056 DC braking edge or level detection EDGE OG Edge detection 01 01 01 Xv for DB input LEVEL 0 I Level detection A057 DC braking force for starting 0 to 80 0 0 0 Xv Variable DC braking force A058 DC braking time for starting 0 0 to 60 0 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 Xv Sets the duration for DC braking before accel A059 DC braking carrier frequency setting 0 5 to 15 kHz up to SJ700 1500 3 0 3 0 3 0 xx 0 5 to 3 0kHz for models SJ700 1850 to SJ700 4000 3 20 A Group Standard Functions 2 a le CE 5 2D C e O 42 2 ob E oO iS av oO Derating of DC Braking The inverter uses an internal carrier frequency set by A059 to generate a DC braking voltage do not confuse with main inverter output carrier frequency set by B083 The maximum DC braking force available to the inverter is more limited with higher DC braking carrier frequency settings for A059 according to the graphs below Models 0 4 55kW Models 75 150kW Models 185 4000kW Max 100 Max 100 Max 100 rato ratio 2 99 ratio 80 80 Ao 70 70 60 60 60 50 50 50 40 40 40F 35 30 30 30 l BURRS Or eS 20 20 10 l l A 10 10 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 kHz 3 5 7 9 10 kHz 3 k
403. n A 6 Transistor A 6 Transporting the inverter 2 7 Trip events 3 8 clearing 6 5 definition A 6 error codes 6 6 external 421 history 6 15 monitoring 6 5 Trip history 6 15 Trip mode 4 24 Troubleshooting tips 6 3 Two stage accel decel 4 20 SJ7002 Inverter U Group functions 3 74 L instructions xii nattended start protection 4 21 nder voltage signal 4 48 nder voltage trip 3 30 npacking 2 2 p Down functions 4 28 ser selectable menu functions 3 74 shape accel decel 3 26 V V f control 3 14 V f control setting 3 47 V f free setting 3 16 Variable torque 3 15 Variable frequency drives introduction 1 14 Velocity profile 1 16 Ventilation 2 8 2 26 W 4 4 4 qaaqcqaqcqqaqa Warnings operating procedures 4 3 Warranty 6 29 Watt loss A 6 Windmilling 3 18 3 21 Window comparator signals 4 62 Wiring analog inputs 4 65 gauge 2 18 intelligent input wiring examples 4 13 logic 2 26 logic connector 4 9 output 2 26 power input 2 22 preparation 2 17 serial communications B 3 system diagram 4 8 Z Zero phase reactor 5 4 Zero return functions 4 40
404. n The expansion card may not be IPTS TE error properly connected to the inverter OF1 3 OF2 3 If the expansion card does not operate normally use the following diagrams to check the DIP switch settings For more details refer to the expansion card instruction manual DeviceNet Baud Rate Setting 125 kbps 250 kbps 500 kbps DeviceNet MAC ID Setting DIP switch example Description of switch setting MAC ID 1029 0024 102940022 0021 41020 r g E E 29h hex 41 decimal NA32 NA16 NAB NAA NA2 NAL S0UBUDJUIE N pue Bunoouse qnos 6 14 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions Easy Seq uence Use the following table to diagnose errors related to Easy Sequence programming The error Error Codes code will appear when the related program runs e fe lt 02 Ko Ka 2 FE oa Oo Z a C o 2 E 49 xe oO DeviceNet Expansion Card Errors Error Code OPE SRW Name Probable Cause s ET FRA CMD Invalid instruction A program contains an invalid instruction The PRG terminal was turn ON but a program was not loaded E44 PRG HST Nesting count error Subroutines with FOR and NEXT instructions are nested more than eight levels E75 FRG ERFI Execution error 1 A FOR or another instruction to begin nesting is not found at the jump destina tion of a GO TO instructi
405. n can affect copy operations when using an optional operator SRW or SRW EX Note 4 Note 5 Copying Inverter Data If operator data is copied to a SJ700 series inverter that has slide switch SW1 in the ON position from another SJ700 series inverter whose slide switch SW1 is OFF or an SJ300 series inverter the digital operator on your SJ700 series inverter may display R ERROR COPY ROM for a moment This event may occur because the data on intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 cannot be copied since on your inverter exclusive functions have already been assigned to intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 due to the slide switch SW1 setting to ON Note that other data is copied If this event occurs check the settings on both copy source and copy destination inverters 5 3 Q 23 32 z 0 MC D 5D NOTE To use the copied data in inverter operation power OFF and ON again after the copy operation is complete Safety Categories The following Safety Categories are defined by EN954 1 JIS B 9705 Principle for Category Safety requirement System behavior achieving safety Components safety related parts of control A defect fault may cause a loss system and protective equipment must be of the safety function designed manufactured selected assembled B and combined in accordance with related Characterized standards to ensure resistance to the anticipated mainly by the adver
406. n perform the megger test at 500 VDC and verify 5MQ or greater resistance Add test jumper wire Disconnect power Source 597002 Disconnect motor wires Disconnect jumper at J61 before performing the megger test 7 After completing the test disconnect the megger from the inverter 8 Reconnect the jumper at connector J61 as before 9 Reconnect the original wires to terminals R S T PD P N RB U V and W CAUTION Do not connect the megger to any control circuit terminals such as intelligent I O analog terminals etc Doing so could cause damage to the inverter Bunooysejqnop D 3 2 z D 3 D 3 D 3 Q ko CAUTION Never test the withstand voltage HIPOT on the inverter The inverter has a surge protector between the main circuit terminals above and the chassis ground gt gt 6 20 Maintenance and Inspection e fe K cay 02 Ko Ka 2 FE oa Oo Z a C o 2 49 xe fa Spare parts Capacitor Life Curve We recommend that you stock spare parts to reduce down time including parts listed below Quantity Part description Symbol Notes Used Spare Cooling fan FAN 1 2 3 depends lor2 Fan unit at top of housing on model in all models Auxiliary cooling fan FAN 0 or 1 depends Oorl 150Lxx 185Lxx and on model 220Lxx models Capacitor bank CB 1 1 All models The DC bus insi
407. n powerup the inverter will not resume a Run command tion that was active before power loss mostly used in the US 14 CS Commercial Power OFF to ON transition signals the inverter that the motor is Source already running at powerup via bypass thus suppressing the inverter s motor output in Run Mode ON to OFF transition signals the inverter to apply a time delay B003 frequency match its output to existing motor speed and resume normal Run Mode operation 15 SFT Software Lock The keypad and remote programming devices are prevented from changing parameters 16 AT Analog Input Voltage ON condition If A005 00 terminal OT is enabled for current Select input If A005 01 terminal 02 is enabled for input Use terminal L for signal return OFF condition Terminal O is enabled for voltage input use terminal L for signal return 17 SET3 Set select 3rd motor data Switch from normal 1st to 3rd motor parameters for gener ating frequency output to motor 18 RS Reset Inverter Resets the trip condition turns OFF the motor output and asserts powerup reset 20 STA START Starts the motor rotation 3 wire interface 21 STP STOP Stops the motor rotation 3 wire interface 22 F R FWD REV Selects the direction of motor rotation ON FWD 3 wire interface OFF REV While the motor is rotating a change of F R will start a deceleration followed by a change in direction 23 PID PID Disable Temporarily disables PID loop control Inverter ou
408. n that case the inverter decreases the rate of Acc1 or Dec1 in order to achieve the second ramp to the target frequency 3 26 A Group Standard Functions Accel Decel Standard default acceleration and deceleration is linear with time The inverter CPU can also Characteristics calculate other curves shown in the graphs below The sigmoid U shape and reverse U shape curves are useful for favoring the load characteristics in particular applications Curve settings for acceleration and deceleration are independently selected via parameters A097 and A098 respectively You can use the same or different curve types for acceleration and deceleration Set value 00 01 02 03 Curve Linear Sigmoid U shape Reverse U shape Output frequency Output frequency Output frequency Output frequency TRE STRETA A P ee 7 ee ee p Ker a Accel ue 7 pr 7 P 7 4 P gt 7 l l l A97 l My NS time time Q Output frequency Output frequency Output frequency Output frequency Fe D 2 Decel gt 5 A98 ca fe O time time Linear acceleration Avoid jerk on start stop Tension control for winding applications web Typical and deceleration for for elevators use for presses roller accumulators applications general purpose use _ delicate loads on con veyors Keypad Defaults Run Hynes Name Range and Settings Nodi Code Description eau Ver
409. n the 0 1 to 1000 free form curve The left graph below shows the region for possible free setting curves The right graph below shows an example curve defined by three data points specified by B015 B020 Trip current reduction Output factor current A x 1 0 B020 l x 0 8 I B018 Setting range B016 l I l 0 Hz 0 5 Output freq 400 B015 B017 B019 Ax04 max freq SJ7002 Inverter Ez Suppose the electronic thermal setting B012 is set to 44 Amperes The left graph below shows the effect of the free setting torque characteristic curve For example at B017 Hz the output current level to cause overheating in a fixed time period is reduced by a factor of B018 The right graph below shows the reduced trip current levels in those conditions for given trip times Trip time s 60 x BO18 value x 116 y B018 value x 120 z B018 value x 150 0 5 x y z Reduced trip current at B017 Hz Any intelligent output terminal may be programmed to indicate a thermal warning THM Parameter C061 determines the warning threshold Please see Thermal Warning Signal on page 4 52 for more details Q o Keypad Defaults Run 2 a D as Bard Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 EN ag H SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 5 EU
410. n to Inverter Features 2 2 Basic System Description 2 5 Step by Step Basic Installation 2 6 Powerup Test 2 27 Using the Front Panel Keypad 2 29 Emergency Stop Function 2 37 Chapter 3 Configuring Drive Parameters Choosing a Programming Device 3 2 Using Keypad Devices 3 3 D Group Monitoring Functions 3 6 F Group Main Profile Parameters 3 9 A Group Standard Functions 3 10 B Group Fine Tuning Functions 3 30 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions 3 50 H Group Motor Constants Functions 3 66 P Group Expansion Card Functions 3 69 U Group User selectable Menu Functions 3 74 Programming Error Codes 3 75 Chapter 4 Operations and Monitoring Introduction 4 2 Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss 4 4 Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices 4 7 Using Intelligent Input Terminals 4 13 Using Intelligent Output Terminals 4 43 Analog Input Operation 4 63 Analog Output Operation 4 66 Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control 4 69 PID Loop Operation 4 75 Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors 4 76 Chapter 5 Inverter System Accessories Introduction 5 2 Component Descriptions 5 3 Dynamic Braking 5 6 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting 6 2 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions 6 5 Restoring Factory Default Settings 6 16 Maintenance and Inspection 6 17 Warranty
411. nable LED Potentiometer Stop Reset Key The display is used in programming the inverter s parameters as well as monitoring specific parameter values during operation Many functions are applicable only during the initial instal lation while others are more useful for maintenance or monitoring The front panel controls and indicators are described as follows Run Stop LED ON when the inverter output is ON and the motor is developing torque and OFF when the inverter output is OFF Stop Mode Program Monitor LED This LED is ON when the inverter is ready for parameter editing Program Mode It is normally OFF when the parameter display is monitoring data Monitor Mode However the PRG LED will be ON whenever you are monitoring the value of parameter D001 When the keypad is enabled as the frequency source via A001 02 you can edit the inverter frequency directly from D001 monitor display by using the Up Down keys Run Key Enable LED is ON when the inverter is ready to respond to the Run key OFF when the Run key is disabled Run Key Press this key to run the motor the Run Enable LED must be ON first Parame ter F004 Keypad Run Key Routing determines whether the Run key generates a Run FWD or Run REV command Stop Reset Key Press this key to stop the motor when it is running uses the programmed deceleration rate This key will also reset an alarm that has tripped Potentiometer OPE SRE only allo
412. nal digital operator interface or the PC software DOP Professional provide features beyond what is available from the keypad on the unit A Yes However note first that the same set of parameters and functions are equally accessible from either the unit s keypad or from remote devices The DOP Profes sional PC software lets you save or load inverter configurations to or from a disk file And the hand held digital operator provides hard wired terminals a safety require ment for some installations Why does the manual or other documentation use terminology such as 200V class instead of naming the actual voltage such as 230 VAC A A specific inverter model is set at the factory to work across a voltage range particular to the destination country for that model The model specifications are on the label on the side of the inverter A European 200V class inverter EU marking has different parameter settings than a USA 200V class inverter US marking The initialization procedure see Restoring Factory Default Settings on page 6 16 can set up the inverter for European or US commercial voltage ranges Why doesn t the motor have a neutral connection as a return to the inverter A The motor theoretically represents a balanced Y load if all three stator windings have the same impedance The Y connection allows each of the three wires to alter nately serve as input or return on alternate half cy
413. nal mechanical brake is released This ensures that the load does not have an opportunity to begin coasting before the inverter begins driving the motor The External Brake Control function can be enabled by setting parameter B120 01 The diagram below shows the signals that are important to the External Brake Control function BRK Brake release External Brake p BOK Brake confirmation System BER Brake error Emergency Brake or alarm etc e Brake confirmation BOK turns ON to indicate that an external brake system has released is not engaged If external brake control is enabled B120 01 then the BOK signal must work properly to avoid an inverter trip event e If BOK is not assigned to an intelligent input then setting B124 is ignored The steps below describe the timing diagram of events on the following page 1 When the Run command turns ON the inverter begins to operate and accelerate to releasing frequency B125 2 After the output frequency arrives at the set releasing frequency B 125 the inverter waits for the brake release confirmation set by B121 The inverter outputs the braking release signal BRK However if the output current of the inverter is less than the releasing current set by B126 the inverter does not turn ON the brake release output BRK The lack of the proper current level indicates a fault such as open wire to motor In this case the inverter trips and outpu
414. nal speed 1226h 04646 Oor start 0 01 Hz freq t A028 L 1227h 04647 max freq A029 H Multi speed 9 setting R W Defines nth additional speed 1228h 04648 Oorstart 0 01 Hz freq t A029 L 1229h 04649 fe fed A030 H Multi speed 10 setting R W Defines nth additional speed 122Ah 04650 Oorstart 0 01 Hz freq to A030 L 122Bh 04651 wax freq A031 H Multi speed 11 setting R W Defines nth additional speed 122Ch 04652 Oorstart 0 01 Hz freq to A031 IL 122Dh 04653 max freq A032 H Multi speed 12 setting R W Defines nth additional speed 122Eh 04654 Oor start 0 01 Hz freq to A032 L 122Fh 04655 max freq A033 H Multi speed 13 setting R W Defines nth additional speed 1230h 04656 Oor start 0 01 Hz freq to A033 L 1231h 04657 max freg A034 H Multi speed 14 setting R W Defines nth additional speed 1232h 04658 Oorstart 0 01 Hz freq to A034 L 1233h 04659 max freq A035 H Multi speed 15 setting R W Defines nth additional speed 1234h 04660 Oor start 0 01 Hz freq to A035 L 1235h 04661 max freq Reserved 1236h 04662 Reserved 1237h 04663 A038 Jog frequency setting R W Defines limited speed for jog 1238h 04664 010999 0 01 Hz g xIpuaddy ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers A
415. nals on page 4 13 Input Function Summary Table Option Terminal seer Code Symbol Function Name Description 01 RV Reverse Run Stop Puts the inverter in Run Mode motor runs reverse 02 CF1 Multi speed select Binary encoded speed select Bit 0 Bit 0 LSB 03 CF2 Multi speed select Binary encoded speed select Bit 1 Bit 1 04 CF3 Multi speed select Binary encoded speed select Bit 2 Bit 2 05 CF4 Multi speed select Binary encoded speed select Bit 3 Bit 3 MSB 06 JG Jogging Puts the inverter in Run Mode output to motor runs at jog parameter frequency A038 07 DB External Signal for DC Applies DC braking during deceleration Injection Braking 3 52 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Input Function Summary Table 2 a le CE 5 2D C e O 42 2 ob E oO iS av oO Option Terminal Code Symbol Function Name Description 08 SET Set select 2nd Motor Switch from normal 1st to 2nd motor parameters for gener Data ating frequency output to motor 09 2CH 2 stage Acceleration and Frequency output uses 2nd stage acceleration and decelera Deceleration tion values 11 FRS Free run Stop Causes output to turn OFF allowing motor to free run coast to stop 12 EXT External Trip At OFF to ON transition inverter latches trip event and displays E12 until a reset occurs 13 USP Unattended Start Protec O
416. nce 228 M 1 2 to 30 HP 0 4 to 22 kW External Resistor External Resistor Minimum Resistance RT Resistance Max 100 Braking External Braking Minimum Braking saul Voltage Model Number Motor Braking DOG Resistance Torge Resistance Dut Duty Class HP Unit 60Hz gt 60Hz gt y Cycle Ohms Ohms Cycle Ohms S J700 004LFUF2 0 5 Built in 20 48 150 48 10 150 SJ700 007LFUF2 1 Built in 20 48 150 48 10 150 SJ700 015LFUF2 2 Built in 20 32 150 32 10 110 SJ700 022LFUF2 3 Built in 20 32 150 32 10 110 SJ700 037LFUF2 5 Built in 20 32 110 32 10 110 200V SJ700 O55LFUF2 7 5 Built in 20 16 140 16 10 50 SJ700 075LFUF2 10 Built in 20 10 150 10 10 50 SJ700 1 10LFUF2 15 Built in 10 10 110 10 10 50 SJ700 150LFUF2 20 Built in 10 7 5 110 7 5 10 35 SJ700 185LFU2 25 Built in 10 75 90 7 5 10 35 S J700 220LFU2 30 Built in 10 5 110 5 10 35 S J700 007HFUF2 1 Built in 20 100 150 70 10 300 S J700 007HFEF2 SJ700 015HFUF2 2 Built in 20 100 150 70 10 300 SJ700 015HFEF2 SJ700 022HFUF2 3 Built in 20 70 150 70 10 300 S J700 022HFEF2 gt SJ700 040HFUF2 5 Built in 20 70 150 70 10 200 9 2 S J700 040HFEF2 Dr 0 O SJ700 055HFUF2 7 5 Built in 20 70 130 70 10 200 e el 400V SJ700 055HFEF2 0s S J700 075HFUF2 10 Built in 20 70 150 35 10 150 SJ700 075HFEF2 SJ700 1 1OHFUF2 15 Built in 10 50 130 35 10 150 SJ700 1 1OHFEF2 SJ700 150HFUF2 20 Built in 10 35 140 24 10 100 SJ700 150HFEF2 S J700 185HFU2 E 25 Built in 10 35 140 24 10 100 S J700 2
417. nd Stage Output Opt Code 31 Symbol FBV Valid for l11to 15 Outputs ALx Required 0953 053 Settings Monitor Settings DI Default Requires terminals config 2 2 of g TS a Og av The inverter has a built in PID loop feature for two stage control useful for certain applications such as building ventilation or heating and cooling HVAC In an ideal control environment a single PID loop controller stage would be adequate However in certain conditions the maximum output energy from the first stage is not enough to maintain the Process Variable PV at or near the Setpoint SP And the output of the first stage is in saturation A simple solution is to add a second stage which puts an additional and constant amount of energy into the system under control When sized properly the boost from the second stage brings the PV toward the desired range allowing the first stage PID control to return to its linear range of operation The two stage method of control has some advantages for particular applications The second stage is only ON in adverse conditions so there is an energy savings during normal conditions e Since the second stage is simple ON OFF control it is less expensive to add than just dupli cating the first stage At powerup the boost provided by the second stage helps the process variable reach the desired setpoint sooner than it would if the first stage
418. nds 14A4h 05284 0to 200 2 ms response time setting C161 Terminal 2 input R W 0 to 200 x 2 milliseconds 14A5h 05285 0to 200 2 ms response time setting C162 Terminal 3 input R W 0 to 200 x 2 milliseconds 14A6h 05286 Oto 200 2 ms response time setting C163 Terminal 4 input R W 0 to 200 x 2 milliseconds 14A7h 05287 0to 200 2ms response time setting C164 Terminal 5 input R W 0 to 200 x 2 milliseconds 14A8h 05288 0to 200 2 ms response time setting C165 Terminal 6 input R W 0 to 200 x 2 milliseconds 14A9h 05289 0 to 200 2 ms response time setting C166 Terminal 7 input R W 0 to 200 x 2 milliseconds 14AA 05290 0 to 200 2 ms response time setting h C167 Terminal 8 input R W 0 to 200 x 2 milliseconds 14ABh 05291 0 to 200 2 ms response time setting C168 Terminal FW input R W 0 to 200 x 2 milliseconds 14ACh 05292 0 to 200 2 ms response time setting C169 Multi speed position deter R W 0 to 200 x 2 milliseconds 14AD 05293 0 to 200 2 ms mination time h Reserved 14AEh 05294 to to 1500h 05376 g xIpuaddy ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers H Group Motor Constants Functions
419. nfigure an intelligent input for the KHC function option code 53 Turn ON the input to clear the cumulative power data Required 3078 B079 Settings When B079 cumulative input power display gain setting 1000 cumulative power data up to 999000 kW h can be displayed Monitor D015 Settings Default Requires terminal config 4 37 SJ7002 Inverter Speed Servo ON Opt Code 54 Symbol SON Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Required Settings att Default Requires terminal config The servo ON function allows you to set the inverter in a speed servo lock state with an intelligent input during operation This function is available when A044 05 vector control with sensor for the characteristic V f curve To use the servo ON function assign option code 54 to an intelligent input After making the input assignment the inverter will accept an operation command only when the SON terminal is ON If the SON terminal is turned OFF during inverter operation the inverter output enters FRS mode free run stop If the SON is turned ON again the inverter restarts the motor according to function B088 Restart Mode After FRS The inverter does not allow SON terminal assignment and FOC forcing function assign ment at the same time If both are assigned the FOC has priority operates normally and the SON function is not available Free run stop Restart after FRS B088 Spee
420. nique each one having its own setting Note that European and US versions have different default settings You can use any option on any terminal and even use the same option twice to create a logical OR though usually not required Functions and Options The function codes in the following table let you assign one of 44 Configuration options to any of the eight logic inputs for the SJ7002 inverters The functions C001 through C008 configure the terminals 1 through 8 respectively The value of these particular parameters is not a scalar value but it is a discrete number that selects one option from many available options For example if you set function CO01 01 you have assigned option 01 Reverse Run to terminal 1 The option codes and the specifics of how each one works are in Chapter 4 Defaults Run re per Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 eas ode escription FF2 FU2 F2 E i U USA Jpn C001 Terminal 1 function 18 RS 18 RS 18 RS Xv C002 Terminal 2 function 16 AT 16 AT 16 AT Xv C003 Terminal 3 function 06 JG 06 JG 06 JG Xv C004 Terminal 4 function 63 programmable functions 11 FRS 11 FRS 11 FRS Xv available for terminals see C005 Terminal 5 function next section 09 2CH 09 2CH 09 2CH X C006 Terminal 6 function 03 CF2 13 USP 03 CF2 X
421. nly inverter with single phase power Other wise there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of fire CAUTION Be sure not to connect an AC power supply to the output terminals Otherwise there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of injury and or fire 5 55 Q az 392 z 0 MC fe O 5 Q Power Input Power Output NOTE L1 L2 L3 Li L2 L3 Three phase 200 to 240V 50 60 Hz Three phase 380 to 480V 50 60 Hz CAUTION Remarks for using ground fault interrupter breakers in the main power supply Adjustable frequency inverters with CE filters RFI filter and shielded screened motor cables have a higher leakage current toward Earth GND Especially at the moment of switching ON this can cause an inadvertent trip of ground fault interrupter breakers Because of the recti fier on the input side of the inverter there is the possibility to stall the switch off function through small amounts of DC current Please observe the following e Use only short time invariant and pulse current sensitive ground fault interrupter breakers with higher trigger current Other components should be secured with separate ground fault interrupter breakers e Ground fault interrupter breakers in the power input wiring of an inverter are not an absolute protection against electric shock CAUTION Be sure to install a fuse in each phase of the main power supply to the inverter Otherwise the
422. not allowed 01 setting is allowed BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Command and Data CR Control code carriage return I byte CR 0x0D Command 0A The 0A command sets a value in the EEPROM The frame format of command OA follows the diagram and specification table B 17 SJ7002 Inverter Frame format dd sal g xIpuaddy Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 and FF broadcast to all nodes Command Transmission command 2 bytes OA BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Command and Data CR Control code carriage return 1 byte CR 0x0D Command 0B The OB command recalculates the inverter s internal motor constants Use this function after the base frequency or any Hxxx parameters are changed via the serial link commands The frame format of command OB follows the diagram and specification table Frame format DOCCE Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 Command Transmission command 2 bytes OB BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Command and Data CR Control code carriage return 1 byte CR 0x0D
423. nput change for which there is no perceptible change in the output In PID loops the error term may have a deadband associated with it Deadband may or may not be desirable it depends on the needs of the application For Hitachi inverters digital operator panel DOP refers first to the operator keypad on the front panel of the inverter It also includes hand held remote keypads which connect to the inverter via a cable Finally the DOP Professional is a PC based software simulation of the keypad devices Diode Duty Cycle Dynamic Braking Error EMI Four quadrant operation Free run Stop Frequency Setting Harmonics Horsepower IGBT Inertia Intelligent Terminal Inverter SJ7002 Inverter AB A semiconductor device that has a voltage current characteristic that allows current to flow only in one direction with negligible leakage current in the reverse direction See also rectifier 1 The percent of time a square wave of fixed frequency is ON high versus OFF low 2 The ratio of operating time of a motor braking resistor etc to its resting time This parameter usually is specified in association with the allowable thermal rise for the device The inverter dynamic braking feature shunts the motor generated EMF energy into a special braking resistor The added dissipation braking torque is effective at higher speeds having a reduced effect as the motor nears a stop In process control the e
424. nt The overload restriction level is set by B022 and B025 The overload restriction constant is the time to decel erate to OHz from maximum frequency When this function operates the acceleration time will be longer than the normal acceleration time Output frequenc j E B022 B025 B022 B025 verload L me NC restriction level Deceleration rate at overload restriction Maximum frequency T Q Oo 14 pi t B023 B026 Deceleration rate at overload restriction NOTE The Overload Advance Notice function for intelligent outputs is related to Overload Restriction operation discussed in Overload Advance Notice Signal on page 4 46 D re a Torque Limit The Torque Limit function limits the motor output torque for sensorless vector control sensor og less vector control 0Hz domain or vector control with feedback Three intelligent inputs p 5 Opt Code 40 TL control the Torque Limit function 23 and 41 TRQI S Symbol 42 TRQ2 Symbol Function Name Description Valid for 1 to 8 TL Torque limit enable Enables torque limit function when ON Inputs pp TRQI Torque limit select 1 Bit I LSB Binary encoded bit for quadrant select B040 B041 Keqund B042 B043 TRQ2 Torque limit select 2 Bit 2 MSB Binary encoded bit for quadrant select Settings B044 Default Requires In the torque limit function
425. nt set selected by function H004 By default the 2nd and 3rd motor constants sets only store standard motor parameters The table below shows this arrangement Motor data selection 1st motor 2nd motor 3rd motor Standard motor parameters v v v Auto tuning parameters Vv x x Adaptive tuning parameters v x x When motor constant values are available from the motor manufacturer you can enter them directly The available motor constant parameters storage locations depend on the motor constant set 1st 2nd or 3rd according to the following table Motor data selection 1st motor 2nd motor 3rd motor Standard motor parameters H020 to H024 H220 to H224 Auto tuning parameters H030 to H034 Adaptive tuning parameters H030 to H034 Auto tuning of Motor Constants 4 71 SJ7002 Inverter The SJ7002 inverter features auto tuning which detects and records the motor characteristic parameters to use in all vector control modes Auto tuning determines the resistance and inductance of motor windings Therefore the motor must be connected to the inverter for this procedure Note that the auto tuning feature is not associated with PID loop operation which is common on some control devices The auto tuning procedure must be conducted while the inverter is stopped not in Run mode so it can use special output pulses to detect motor characteristics When using the inverte
426. nufacturer Terminal ring lug Cable support Hitachi SJ7002 inverters provide solid state motor overload protection which depends on the proper setting of the following parameters B012 electronic overload protection B212 electronic overload protection 2nd motor B312 electronic overload protection 3rd motor Set the rated current Amperes of the motor s with the above parameters The setting range is 0 2 rated current to 1 2 rated current WARNING Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the NEC and any additional local codes WARNING When two or more motors are connected to the inverter they cannot be protected by the electronic overload protection Install an external thermal relay on each motor SJ7002 Inverter Table of Contents Safety Messages Hazardous High Voltage i General Precautions Read These First ii Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual iv General Warnings and Cautions ix UL Cautions Warnings and Instructions xii Table of Contents Revisions xix Contact Information XX Chapter 1 Getting Started Introduction 1 2 Inverter Specifications 1 6 Introduction to Variable Frequency Drives 1 14 Frequently Asked Questions 1 18 Chapter 2 Inverter Mounting and Installation Orientatio
427. nverter mean A The terms are used somewhat interchangeably in industry Nowadays the terms drive variable frequency drive variable speed drive and inverter are generally used to describe electronic microprocessor based motor speed controllers In the past variable speed drive also referred to various mechanical means to vary speed Ampli fier is a term almost exclusively used to describe drives for servo or stepper motors Although the SJ7002 inverter is a variable speed drive can I use it in a fixed speed appli cation A Yes sometimes an inverter can be used simply as a soft start device providing controlled acceleration and deceleration to a fixed speed Other functions of the SJ7002 may be useful in such applications as well However using a variable speed drive can benefit many types of industrial and commercial motor applications by providing controlled acceleration and deceleration high torque at low speeds and energy savings over alternative solutions Can I use an inverter and AC induction motor in a positioning application A That depends on the required precision and the slowest speed the motor must turn and still deliver torque The SJ7002 inverter will deliver 200 rated torque while turning the motor at only 0 3 Hz DO NOT use an inverter if you need the motor to stop and hold the load position without the aid of a mechanical brake use a servo or stepper motion control system Does the optio
428. nverter s digital operator error codes in the E60 range refer to the upper card position Error codes in the E70 range 7 x or OP refer to the lower card position For the remote operator display error codes are in the OP1 or OP2 ranges respectively If an error occurs the inverter trips displays the corresponding error code and turns OFF the motor output Encoder Input Card Use the following table to diagnose errors caused by an encoder input expansion card Each error will cause the inverter to trip turning OFF its output and displaying an error code Encoder Input Expansion Card Errors Error Code OPE SRW Name Probable Cause s E50 E71D Encoder disconnect Encoder wiring to the expansion card is disconnected OF1 8 OF2 8 The encoder is faulty The encoder type is not correct no line driver output etc E5 ETL Excessive speed The motor speed increased to the maximum frequency A004 times the OP I 14 OP2 1 over speed error detection level P026 E62 ENZ Positioning error While in position control mode the position error command minus actual OPL 2 OP2 2 reached 1 000 000 pulses or more 53 93 Position control While in absolute position control mode range trip the actual position exceeded the forward OP1 3 OP2 3 P072 or reverse P073 position range value E69 99 SJ FB connection The SJ FB expansion card is not mounted error properly o
429. nverter parameters involved in multiple motor applications The topics in this chapter can help you decide the features that are important to your applica tion and how to use them The basic installation covered in Chapter 2 concluded with the powerup test and running the motor Now this chapter starts from that point and shows how to 7 2 make the inverter part of a larger control or automation system CA 2 2 Cautions for Before continuing please read the following Caution messages 5 EM Operating Q ok Procedures C CAUTION The heat sink fins will have a high temperature Be careful not to touch them Otherwise there is the danger of getting burned CAUTION The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high speed Be sure check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before operating the inverter Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel CAUTION If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default setting S0Hz 60Hz be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the respective manufacturer Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting their approval Otherwise there is the danger of equipment damage gt pp SJ7002 Inverter EEN Warnings for Before continuing please read the following Warning messages Operating Procedures WARNING Be sure to turn ON the input power supply only after closing the front case W
430. nverter rating H034 Auto constant J 1st motor According to inverter rating H234 Auto constant J 2nd motor According to inverter rating H050 PI proportional gain for 1st motor 100 0 100 0 100 0 H250 PI proportional gain for 2nd motor 100 0 100 0 100 0 SJ7002 Inverter C 15 H Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Name FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan H051 PI integral gain for 1st motor 100 0 100 0 100 0 H251 PI integral gain for 2nd motor 100 0 100 0 100 0 H052 P proportional gain setting for 1st motor 1 00 1 00 1 00 H252 P proportional gain setting for 2nd motor 1 00 1 00 1 00 H060 Zero LV limit for 1st motor 100 100 100 H260 Zero LV limit for 2nd motor 100 100 100 H061 Zero LV starting boost current for 1st motor 50 50 50 H261 Zero LV starting boost current for 2nd motor 50 50 50 H070 Terminal selection PI proportional gain setting 100 0 100 0 100 0 H071 Terminal selection PI integral gain setting 100 0 100 0 100 0 H072 Terminal selection P proportional gain setting 1 00 1 00 1 00 H073 Gain switching time 100 100 100 N xipueddy C 16 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry Expansion Card as ae E D Q 2 lt Functions P Group Parameters Default Setting User Func None FEF2
431. o 9999 0 to 99990 1000 to 1323h 04899 0 to 65535 1 10 time 6553 10000 to 655300 hours hours B034 L R W 1324h 04900 B035 Rotational direction R W 00 Enable for fwd and rev 1325h 04901 0 1 2 restriction 01 Enable for forward only 02 Enable for reverse only B036 Reduced voltage start R W 000 short to 255 long 1326h 04902 0 to 255 selection B037 Function code display R W 00 Display all 1327h 04903 Oto 4 restriction 01 Display only utilized functions 02 Display user selected functions only 03 Data comparison display 04 Basic display B038 Initial display selection R W 00 Last value dislayed when 1328h 04904 0to 5 STR key was pressed 01 D001 02 D002 03 D003 04 D007 05 FOO1 B039 Automatic user parameter R W 00 Disable 1329h 04905 0 I function enable 01 Enable B040 Torque limit selection R W 00 4 quadrant mode 132Ah 04906 Oto 4 EE 01 Selected by two input terminals 02 From analog 02 input 03 From expansion card I 04 From expansion card 2 B041 Torque limit 1 forward R W 0 to 200 no disable torque 132Bh 04907 0 to 200 1 driving in 4 quadrant limit 255 no mode g xIpuaddy B 56 ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers B Group Fine Tuning Functions
432. o be 80 or less of the component rating WARNING The screws that retain the capacitor bank assembly are part of the electrical circuit of the high voltage internal DC bus Be sure that all power has been disconnected from the inverter and that you have waited at least 10 minutes before accessing the terminals or screws Be sure the charge lamp is extinguished Otherwise there is the danger of electrocution to personnel CAUTION Do not operate the inverter unless you have replaced the two screws that connect the capacitor bank assembly to the internal DC bus Otherwise damage to the inverter may occur For inverters above 11kW output with molded plastic housings 1 Loosen the two screws that secure the lower front panel Remove the panel from the inverter Turn OFF power to the inverter and confirm that the Charge Indicator LED is OFF Remove the wiring entry exit plate from the inverter Remove the screws that connect the capacitor unit to the main circuit terminal block Remove the screws that secure the capacitor mounting plate to the inverter casing Pull down the capacitor mounting plate AA ww PY Remove the capacitor unit from the capacitor mounting plate To install the new capacitor unit 1 Place the capacitor unit on the mounting plate 2 Slide the capacitor mounting plate into the guides in the inverter housing Push the capacitor unit until the metal plate is flush with the housing Bunooysejqnoly D 3
433. o determine the current state of the keypad controls and display As long as you do not press the STR key no parameters will be changed by keypad entry errors Note that power cycling the inverter will not cause it to reset to a particular programming state The next section will show you how to monitor a particular parameter from the display Then you will be ready to run the motor SJ7002 Inverter 2 35 Monitorin After using the keypad for parameter p p Parameters with editing it s a good idea to switch the POWER i i HITACHI aarm the Display inverter from Program Mode to Monitor Mode This will turn out the PRG LED and RUNO An l the Hertz Volt Ampere or LED a nat Jw indicates the display units o DAOA For the powerup test monitor the motor speed indirectly by viewing the inverter s output frequency The output frequency must not be confused with base frequency 50 60 Hz of the motor or the carrier frequency switching frequency of the inverter in the kHz range The monitoring functions are in the D list located near the top left of the diagram in the Keypad Navigational Map on page 2 31 5 55 Q az 32 z 0 MC D 3 3 Output frequency speed monitor Resuming the keypad programming from the previous table follow the steps in the table below Action Display Func Parameter Press the ung key H Group selected Press the key d n n I
434. o remain in motion In the case of motors the rotor and attached load are rotating and possess angular momentum The ability of a motor drive to store preset discrete speed levels for the motor and control motor speed according to the currently selected speed preset The Hitachi inverters have 16 preset speeds In motor terminology motor load consists of the inertia of the physical mass that is moved by the motor and the related friction from guiding mechanisms See also inertia The National Electric Code is a regulatory document that governs electrical power and device wiring and installation in the United States The National Electric Manufacturer s Association NEMA Codes are a published series of device ratings standards Industry uses these to evaluate or compare the performance of devices made by various manufacturers to a known standard A common logic type discrete output that uses an NPN transistor that acts as a switch to a power supply common usually ground The transistor s collector is open for external connec tion not connected internally Thus the output sinks external load current to ground When using the expansion card SJ FB with encoder feedback the orientation feature is avail able Also called home search in motion terminology you can specify a search direction and a stop position Typically the orientation procedure is necessary after each inverter powerup A ratio that expresses a phase difference timing
435. o select the potentiometer for the speed command the table resumes action from the end of the previous table 3 Action Display Func Parameter 5 5 50 Press the key twice ADD I G G Speed command source setting 2 0 potentiometer O Ji Press the D key I 1 control terminals default 38 2 keypad Press the key G n 0 potentiometer selected AAMT Stores parameter returns to A NNI Press the key AGE I Group list Select the Keypad for the RUN Command The RUN command causes the inverter to accel erate the motor to the selected speed You can program the inverter to respond to either the control terminal signal or the keypad RUN key Follow the steps in the table below to select the front panel RUN key as the source for the RUN Command the table resumes action from the end of the previous table Action Display Func Parameter Press the key 2052 Run command source Press the UNO key gg te ar terminals default Press the DQ key oe 2 keypad selected Press the key 2002 ne ee returns to A NOTE When you press the STR key in the last step above and the display 02 the Run Enable LED above the RUN switch on the keypad will turn ON This is normal and does not mean the motor is trying to run It means that the RUN key is now enabled DO NOT press the RUN key at this time finish out the programming exercise firs
436. ocess Variable PV scale factor multiplier Xv A076 PV source setting OI 00 OI terminal current input 00 00 00 Xv Selects source of Process o I O terminal voltage input XV Variable PV COM 2 Communication input Xv PLS 03 Pulse train frequency input XV MATH i CALCULATE function output Xv A077 Reverse PID Action OFF G0 PID input SP PV normal 00 00 00 XV Changes response to error OH G I PID input SP PV reverse Xv A078 PID output limit Range is 0 0 to 100 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv A079 PID feed forward select reo 22 Disable 00 00 00 XV o G I O terminal voltage input XV OI G2 OT terminal current input Xv of 03 02 terminal voltage input Xv NOTE The setting A073 for the integrator is the integrator s time constant Ti not the gain The integrator gain Ki 1 Ti When you set A073 0 the integrator is disabled SJ7002 Inverter 3 23 Automatic The Automatic Voltage Regulation AVR feature keeps the inverter output voltage at a Voltage relatively constant amplitude during power input fluctuations This can be useful if the installa Regulation AVR tion is subject to input voltage disturbances However the inverter cannot boost its motor output to a voltage higher than the power input voltage If you enable this feature be sure to Function select the proper voltage class setting for yo
437. oes not operate move the machine NOTE When teaching position data to an inverter that is not operating the machine be sure to either disconnect input power terminals R S and T or disconnect the motor output terminals U V and W Otherwise personal injury or damage to equipment may result 3 Press the STR key on the digital operator when the target position is reached 4 The current position data is stored to the memory area selected by parameter P074 teaching selection P074 value itself is not stored After power OFF or reset 00 is stored Ez U Group User selectable Menu Functions U Group User selectable Menu Functions The user selectable menu functions allow you to configure select any twelve of the other functions in the inverter and place them together in a convenient list This feature provides quick access for the most used functions needed for your application Each U Group function can serve as a pointer to any of the other parameters You do not have to use the Store key to retain each association just scroll to the desired standard parameter for each U Group function and leave it The setting can point to a monitor only parameter such as D001 or point to editable parameters such as A001 In the case of pointing to an editable functions you use the Up Down keys to change the value and the Store key to accept the change into memory the same procedure as a normal parameter edit
438. of the motor is less threshold model 4000HFx2 than this value the inverter will restart is 0 00 to 120 0 Hz at 0 Hz In the following examples t instantaneous power failure time tj allowable under voltage power failure time B002 and t retry wait time B003 Example 1 Power failure within allowed limits resume Power supply Inverter output Motor frequency Free run After waiting for t seconds when t lt tj restart Power supply Inverter output Motor frequency Example 2 Power failure longer than limits trip Free run E Se oe T l l to gt Inverter trips when ty gt tj 3 2 3 3 Ko suonee8d0 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Examples 3 and 4 relate to configuring the inverter to retry upon power failure Frequency matching is possible if the inverter frequency is greater than the B007 value In this case the inverter reads the motor RPM and direction If this speed is higher than the matching setting B007 the inverter waits until they are equal and then engages the output to drive the motor example 3 If the actual motor speed is less than the restart frequency setting the inverter waits for t3 value in B003 and restarts from 0 Hz example 4 The display shows 2088 during an actual frequency matching event Example 3 Motor resumes via frequency matching Example 4 Motor resta
439. offset between current and voltage supplied by a power source to a load A perfect power factor 1 0 no phase offset Power factors less than one cause some energy loss in power transmission wiring source to load Proportional Integral Derivative a mathematical model used for process control process controller maintains a process variable PV at a setpoint SP by using its PID algorithm to compensate for dynamic conditions and varies its output to drive the PV toward the desired value See also error A physical property of a process that is of interest because it affects the quality of the primary task accomplished by the process For an industrial oven temperature is the process variable See also PID Loop and error Pulse width modulation A type of AC adjustable frequency drive that accomplishes frequency and voltage control at the output section inverter of the drive The drive output voltage waveform is at a constant amplitude and by chopping the waveform pulse width modulat ing the average voltage is controlled The chopping frequency is sometimes called the carrier frequency Reactance Rectifier Regenerative Braking Regulation Reverse Torque Rotor Saturation Voltage Sensorless Vector Control Setpoint SP Single phase Power Slip Squirrel Cage Stator Start Frequency Tachometer SJ7002 Inverter AS The impedance of inductors and capacitors has two components The resist
440. ogging 4 18 PCLR 47 Position deviation reset 4 34 DB 07 External signal for DC injection 4 19 STAT 48 Pulse train position cmd enable 4 34 braking ADD 50 ADD frequency enable 4 34 SET 08 Set select second motor data 4 19 F TM 51 Force terminal mode 4 35 2CH 09 2 stage accel and decel 4 20 ATR 52 Torque control enable 4 35 FRS 11 Free run stop 4 20 KHC 53 Clear cumulative power value 4 36 EXT 12 External trip 421 SON 54 Speed servo ON 4 37 USP 13 Unattended start protection 4 21 FOC 55 Current forcing 4 37 CS 14 Commercial power source enable 4 22 MII 56 General purpose input I 4 38 SFT 15 Software lock 4 23 MI2 57 General purpose input 2 4 38 AT 16 Analog input voltage current sel 4 24 MI3 58 General purpose input 3 4 38 SET3 17 Set select 3rd motor data 4 19 MI4 59 General purpose input 4 4 38 RS 18 Reset inverter 4 24 MIS 60 General purpose input 5 4 38 STA 20 Start 3 wire interface 4 25 MI6 61 General purpose input 6 4 38 STP 21 Stop 3 wire interface 4 25 MI7 62 General purpose input 7 4 38 F R 22 FW RV 3 wire interface 4 25 MI8 63 General purpose input 8 4 38 PID 23 PID Disable 426 AHD 65 Analog holding command 4 38 PIDC 24 PID Clear 4 26 CP1 66 Multi stage position select 1 4 39 CAS 26 Control gain setting 4 26 CP2 67 Multi stage position select 2 4 39 UP 27 Remote control Up func 4 28 CP3 68 Multi stage position select 3 4 39 DWN 28 Remote control Down func 4 28 ORL 69 Zero ret
441. ol algorithms improve the torque performance at very low speeds Sensorless Vector Control improved torque control at output frequencies down to 0 5 Hz Sensorless Vector Control 0Hz Domain improved torque control at output frequencies from 0 to 2 5 Hz These low speed torque control algorithms must be tuned to match the characteristics of the particular motor connected to your inverter Simply using the default motor parameters in the inverter will not work satisfactorily for these control methods Chapter 4 discusses motor inverter size selection and how to set the motor parameters either manually or by using the built in auto tuning Before using the sensorless vector control methods please refer to Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control on page 4 69 NOTE When the inverter is in SLV sensorless vector mode use B083 to set the carrier frequency greater than 2 1 kHz for proper operation NOTE You must disable sensorless vector operation when two or more motors are connected parallel operation to the inverter 3 17 SJ7002 Inverter Vector Control with Encoder Feedback This method of torque control uses an encoder as a motor shaft position sensor Accurate position feedback allows the inverter to close the velocity loop and provide very accurate speed control even with variations in motor loads To use encoder feedback you will need to add an SJ FB Encoder Feedback Card in the inverter
442. ommand Run command E Run command i Run command i Output Output is a Output Output LN 1 1 1 1 Alarm o Alarm 0 EG Alarm 0 Alarm ee ane Inst Power Fail Inst Power Fail Inst Power Fail 1 Inst Power Fail l P Example 6 nverter Stop nverter Run Example 9 nverter Stop nverter Run Power R a Power i De Power b R a Power K 2 N 1 1 1 1 Run command 9 Run command 9 _ _ z Run command Run command g _ Output Output ar Output Output Jes 1 1 1 Alarm 0 Alarm 0 E Alarm d ea Alarm ee ees under voltage Inst Power Fail Inst Power Fail A Inst Power Fail i Inst Power Fail I Example 7 Inverter Stop Inverter Run Example 10 Inverter Stop Inverter Run Power K 7 Power AG m Power a _ TR Power fa Bye Run command Run command i ute is Run command Run command g _ Output Output Ze Output Output eee 1 1 1 Alarm 0 Alarm o Alarm 0 Alarm o Inst Power Fail Inst Power Fail Inst Power Fail Inst Power Fail i SUES ea SJ7002 Inverter KEN Torque Limit The Torque Limit output TRQ works in conjunction with the torque limit function covered in the intelligent input section The torque limit function limits the motor torque according to the Signal criteria selected by parameter B040 When torque limiting occurs the TRQ output turns ON Opt Code 10 then turns OFF automatically when the output torque falls below the specified limits Note that the
443. ommand is active then the unit may restart operation automatically after the power failure has ended If there is a possibility that such an occurrence may harm humans then install an electromagnetic contactor on the power supply side so that the circuit does not allow automatic restarting after the power supply recov ers If an optional remote operator is used and the retry function has been selected this will also allow automatic restarting when a Run command is active So please be careful CAUTION Do not insert leading power factor capacitors or surge absorbers between the output terminals of the inverter and motor Ground fault interrupter Power Inverter Input L1 L2 L3 CAUTION Be sure to connect the grounding terminal to earth ground CAUTION When inspecting the unit be sure to wait 10 minutes after tuning OFF the power supply before opening the cover CAUTION SUPPRESSION FOR NOISE INTERFERENCE FROM INVERTER The inverter uses many semiconductor switching elements such as transistors and IGBTs Thus a radio receiver or measuring instrument located near the inverter is susceptible to noise interference To protect the instruments from erroneous operation due to noise interference they should be used well away from the inverter It is also effective to shield the whole inverter structure The addition of an EMI filter on the input side of the inverter also reduces the effect of noise from the commercial p
444. on Resulting Non displayed Code Data Functions when B37 01 Naes A002 01 03 04 B087 Stop key function 05 A019 00 A028 A035 Multi speed function C001 C008 02 03 04 05 Function Resulting Non displayed Code Daa Functions when B37 01 Notes A044 A244 02 B100 B113 Control methods A051 01 A052 A059 DC braking A071 01 A072 A076 C044 PID function A094 01 A095 A096 2 stage adjustable frequency A294 01 A0295 A296 B013 B213 02 B015 B020 Electric thermal characteris B313 tic B021 01 02 B022 B023 Overload restriction B024 01 02 B025 B026 Overload restriction 2 B095 01 02 B090 B096 Dynamic braking function 06 A038 A039 Jogging F202 F203 A203 A204 A220 2nd motor control A241 A244 A261 A262 08 A292 A296 B212 B213 H202 H206 H220 H224 H230 H234 H250 H252 H260 C001 C008 11 B088 Free run stop 17 F302 F303 A303 A304 A320 3rd motor control A342 A344 A392 A393 B312 B313 H306 18 C102 Reset 27 28 29 C101 UP DWN 00 01 A041 A043 Torque boost function A044 04 H060 OHz domain SLV limiter 00 01 A241 A243 Torque boost function A244 04 H260 OHz SLV limiter 03 04 05 B040 B046 H001 H070 Vector control A044 H072 H002 H005 H020 H024 H030 H034 H050 H052 H060 03 04 B040 B046 H001 H070 Vector control A244 H072 H202 H20
445. on and the NEXT or another instruction to end nesting precedes the beginning of nesting An arithmetic operation resulted in overflow or underflow or a divide by zero was attempted A CHG PARAM or MON PARAM instruc tion attempts to Reference an undefined parameter Set a value outside the range for a parameter e Update a parameter that cannot be changed during inverter operation ESUS m ESSA FRG B FRG User trip event A TRIP instruction was executed in a program SJ7002 Inverter 6 15 Trip History and We recommend that you first find the cause of the fault before attempting clearing it When a Inverter Status fault occurs the inverter stores important performance data at the moment of the fault To access the data use the monitor functions Dxxx and select D081 for details about the present fault E The previous five faults are stored in D081 to D086 with D E _ to E _5 Each error shifts D081 D085 to D082 D086 and writes the new error to D081 The following Monitor Menu map shows how to access the error codes When fault s exist you can review their details by first selecting the proper function D081 is most recent and D086 is the oldest Monitor Menu Trip History No error Current Trip Conditions Error Code Output frequency at trip point Motor current at trip point DC bus voltage at trip point Cumulative in
446. on a ground fault the bypass circuit will not operate the motor When an inverter backup is required take the supply from the bypass circuit GFI Use control relays for FW RV and CS suoesado D 2 fe 5 e 5 Ke Software Lock When the terminal SFT is ON the data of all the parameters and functions except the output frequency depending on the setting of B031 is locked prohibited from editing The keypad Opt Code 15 and remote programming devices will be prevented from changing parameters To edit parame ters again turn OFF the SFT terminal input Use parameter B031 to select whether the output Sann SFT frequency is excluded from the lock state or is locked as well Note the following kr 1 to 8 When the SFT terminal is turned ON only the output frequency can be changed e Software lock can include the output frequency by setting B031 Required i a Software lock by the operator is also possible without the SFT terminal being used B031 Settings from lock Default Requires terminal config 4 24 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Analog Input Current Voltage Select Opt Code 16 Symbol AT Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 A001 01 Required 00 Settings A006 00 01 02 Default terminal 2 Reset Inverter Opt Code 18 Symbol RS Valid for EE inputs H to 8 56 Required B
447. on terminology for single phase power is Line L and Neutral N Three phase power connections are usually labeled Line 1 L1 Line 2 L2 and Line 3 L3 In any case the power source should include a ground connection That ground connection will need to connect to the inverter chassis and to the motor frame see Wire the Inverter Output to Motor on page 2 26 Inverter Output to The AC motor must be connected only to the inverter s 3 Phase the Motor output terminals The output terminals are uniquely AC Motor labeled to differentiate them from the input terminals with the designations U T1 V T2 and W T3 This U T1 V T2 corresponds to typical motor lead connection designa tions T1 T2 and T3 It is often not necessary to connect a particular inverter output to a particular motor lead for a new application The consequence of swapping any two of the three connections is the reversal of the motor Earth direction In applications where reversed rotation could GND cause equipment damage or personnel injury be sure to W T3 verify direction of rotation before attempting full speed operation For safety to personnel you must connect the motor chassis ground to the ground connection at the bottom of the inverter housing Notice the three connections to the motor do not include one marked Neutral or Return The motor represents a balanced Y impedance to the inverter so there is no need for a separate re
448. op command and frequency change command are not accepted until deceleration is complete Be sure to set b052 higher than the normal supply voltage Keypad Defaults Run rn Aase Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ae p SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn B050 Controlled deceleration OFF OG Disable 00 00 00 xx and stop on power loss Allows inverter control DEC I Constant decel to stop xx using regenerative energy to decelerate after loss of HS1 02 Constant DC voltage control xx input power requires with resume jumper change HS2 03 Constant DC voltage control xx B051 DC bus voltage trigger level during power 0 0 to 999 9 1000 V 220 0 220 0 220 0 X xX loss 440 0 440 0 440 0 Sets trigger for controlled deceleration and stop on power loss function B052 Over voltage threshold during power loss 0 0 to 999 9 1000 V 360 0 360 0 360 0 X X 720 0 720 0 720 0 Sets over voltage threshold for controlled deceleration function B053 Deceleration time setting during power loss 0 01 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 1 00 1 00 1 00 xx 1000 to 3600 seconds B054 Initial output frequency decrease during 0 00 to 10 00 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 xx power loss Sets the initial decrease in output frequency upon power loss B055 Proportional gain setting for non stop 0 00 to 2 55 0 20 0 20 0 20 XX operation at power loss B056 Integral time se
449. open N O 1420h 05152 C033 Terminal 13 active state R W 01 Normally closed N C 1421h 05153 C034 Terminal 14 active state R W 1422h 05154 C035 Terminal 15 active state R W 1423h 05155 C036 Alarm relay active state R W 1424h 05156 SJ7002 Inverter B 61 Holding Registers C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec Reserved 1425h 05157 C038 Low current indication R W 00 Output during accel 1426h 05158 0 1 output mode select decel and constant speed 01 Output only during constant speed C039 Low current indication R W 0 0 to 2 0 x rated inverter 1427h 05159 Oto 1800 0 1 detection level current C040 Overload signal output R W 00 During accel decel 1428h 05160 0 1 mode constant speed 01 During constant speed C041 Overload level setting R W 0 00 x rated current to 2 00 x 1429h 05161 Oto 1800 0 1 rated current A C042 H Frequency arrival setting R W Sets the frequency arrival 142Ah 05162 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz for accel setting threshold for the C042 L R W output frequency during 142Bh 05163 acceleration C043 H Arrival frequency setting R W Sets the frequency arrival 142Ch
450. or DC braking Variable operating frequency time and braking force Electrical filtering Built in EMC filter and built in zero phase reactor Weight kg Ib 22 48 4 30 66 30 66 50 110 55 121 SJ7002 Inverter EEN The 400V models from 1850 to 4000HFU2 HFE2 250 to 525 HP include a DC reactor and ferrite core Item 400V Class Specifications SJ7002 inverters U S version 900HFU2 1100HFU2 1500HFU2 1850HFU2 3150HFU2 4000HFU2 seng European ver 9000HFE2 1100HFE2 1320HFE2 1850HFE2 3150HFE2 4000HFE2 Applicable motor size 2 HP 125 150 200 250 425 525 kW 90 110 150 185 315 400 Rated capacity kVA 400 480V 121 9 146 3 150 3 180 4 180 1 216 1 256 308 416 499 554 665 Rated input voltage 3 phase 3 wire 380 to 480V 10 15 50 60 Hz 5 Rated input current A 194 239 286 389 630 840 Rated output voltage 3 3 phase 3 wire 380 to 480V corresponding to input voltage Rated output current A 176 217 260 370 600 800 Overload capacity output current A 50 for 60 sec 200 for 0 5 sec 50 for 60 sec 180 for 0 5 sec Inv efficiency at 100 rated output 95 2 95 2 95 2 96 5 96 2 96 3 Inverter Watt loss at 70 output 3375 3900 4670 4700 8000 10500 approximate W at 100 output 4800 5550 6650 6700 11500 15000 DCL efficiency at 100 rated ou
451. or 2 35 Run time edits 3 5 3 38 4 23 Run time signal 451 S Safety messages i Saturation voltage A 5 Second motor 4 19 Second stage output PID 4 56 Sensorless vector control 3 14 3 16 A 5 Serial communications 3 61 B 2 Set 2nd 3rd motors 4 19 Setpoint A 5 Sigmoid accel decel 3 26 Single phase power A 5 Sinking I O 4 7 Slip A 5 Software lock 3 5 3 38 4 23 Sourcing I O 4 7 Spare parts 6 20 Specifications general 1 10 logic signals 49 Speed control 1 14 1 16 4 15 4 17 Speed loop gains 4 26 Speed pot 2 33 Speed servo ON 4 37 Speed position control select 4 41 Squirrel cage A 5 Standard functions 3 10 Start frequency A 5 Starting contact signal 4 59 Stator A 5 Stop command 4 15 Stop Mode 3 45 Supply wiring 2 22 Switching frequency 3 44 Symbol definitions i System description 2 5 T Tachometer A 5 Teaching position function 3 73 Technical support 1 xx Term definitions A 2 Terminal block 1 4 Terminal listing 4 11 Thermal overload 3 32 Thermal protection 4 25 Thermal switch A 6 Thermal warning 4 52 Thermistor A 6 Thermistor input 4 25 Third motor 4 19 Three phase power A 6 motor phase connections 1 15 Three wire interface 4 25 Torque 1 14 Torque boost 3 17 Torque control algorithms 3 5 3 14 3 66 tuning 4 69 Torque control enable 4 35 Torque limit 4 30 Torque limit signal 4 51 Torque specs terminals 2 20 Torque definitio
452. or cables from terminals RO and TO connect the main circuit terminals P and RO to each other and connect the main circuit terminals N and TO to each other Use 0 75 mm2 or heavier wires for the connections SJ7002 Inverter EZI Ifan instantaneous power failure has occurred while the inverter is operating the motor and the output voltage falls to the DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss b051 or less the inverter reduces the output frequency by the initial output frequency decrease during power loss b054 once and then decelerates the motor for the deceleration time setting during power loss b053 Ifthe voltage increases to an overvoltage level exceeding the over voltage threshold during power loss b052 because of regeneration the inverter enters the LAD stop state deceler ate to stop until the voltage falls below the overvoltage level If the over voltage threshold during power loss B052 is less than the DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss B051 the over voltage threshold during power loss will be increased to the DC bus voltage trigger level during power loss when the stop level is applied However the stored setting will not be changed And in case B052 is lower than the supply voltage equivalent to rectified DC voltage which is square root of 2 times the supply AC voltage when power recovers while this function is activated inverter will be in the LAD stop status and cannot decelerate St
453. or fire HIGH VOLTAGE Implement wiring after checking that the power supply is OFF Otherwise you may incur electric shock and or fire HIGH VOLTAGE Do not connect wiring to an inverter or operate an inverter that is not mounted according the instructions given in this manual Otherwise there is a danger of elec tric shock and or injury to personnel 218 Step by Step Basic Installation Determining Wire This section includes tables for 200V class and 400V class inverters on the next page The and Fuse Sizes and Installation D E 5 e 2 jo 2 b o gt following notes will help you read the tables in this section e Locate the row corresponding to the motor size and particular inverter in your application The maximum motor current determines the recommended wire sizes The length column specifies that some inverters can optionally use a smaller wire gauge if the wires are shorter than 10m and the inverter is located in an enclosure e Power Lines columns include wires connecting to terminals R S T U V W P PD and N Only power input and motor leads will be fused R S T U V and W The breaker ratings GFI ground fault interrupter are slightly higher than fuse ratings to allow for nominal surges without tripping The chassis ground columns list the Hitachi recommended AWG and the minimal AWG for UL conformity The optional external braking resistor wiring only applies to
454. or systems and the location of measurement points for these Measurements PAGE Circuit location Measuring Parameter er RE Notes Reference Value Supply voltage Ep across L1 and L2 Moving coil type Fundamental Commercial supply Ej Eg across L2 and L3 voltmeter or recti wave effective voltage 200V class 7 fier type voltmeter value 200 240V 50 60 Hz Er across L3 and L1 400V class 380 460V 50 60 Hz Supply current I L1 I L2 I L3 Moving coil type Total effective I ammeter value Supply power W W across L1 and L2 Electronic type Total effective W 2 across L2 and L3 wattmeter value Supply power Ww factor Pf Pr 1 x 100 JB xE xI Output voltage Ey across U and V Rectifier type Total effective Eo Ey across V and W voltmeter value Ew across W and U Output current I Iy U Moving coil type Total effective Iy V ammeter value Iy W Output power W Wo across U and V Electronic type Total effective Wo across V and W wattmeter value Output power Calculate the output power factor from the output voltage E output factor Pf current I and output power W Wo Pf x 100 3 x Ey x Io Note 1 Use a meter indicating a fundamental wave effective value for voltage and meters indicating total effective values for current and power Note 2 The inverter output has a distorted waveform and h
455. ormally When one or more CF input s are ON then the corresponding multi speed setting see the table above overrides and becomes the output frequency 2 2 oe 3 Cc SS a Og av When programming the multi speed settings be sure to press the Store key each time and then set the next multi speed setting Note that when the Store key is not pressed no data will be set When a multi speed setting more than 50Hz 60Hz is to be set it is necessary to program the maximum frequency A004 high enough to allow that speed While using the multi speed capability you can monitor the output frequency with monitor function D001 during each segment of a multi speed operation There are two ways to program the speeds into the registers A020 to A035 1 Standard keypad programming a Select each parameter A020 to A035 b Press the ond key to view the parameter value c Use the AX and Y keys to edit the value d Use the oA key to save the data to memory 2 Programming using the CF switches a Turn the Run command OFF Stop Mode b Turn inputs ON to select desired Multi speed Display the value of F001 on the digital operator c Set the desired output frequency by pressing the AN and VW keys d Press the En key once to store the set frequency When this occurs F001 indicates the output frequency of the selected Multi speed e Press the End key once to confirm that the indication is the same as the set frequency Re
456. orque for tightening for Dimensions and each of the SJ7002 inverter models 400V models are on the next page Torque Specs CAUTION Fasten the screws with the specified fastening torque in the table below Check for any loosening of screws Otherwise there is the danger of fire 200V Class Inverters 2 5 Motor p E Output Screw size of terminal Ring lug Torque 2 3 Inverter Model str 5 e HP kW AWG bolt Metric ft Ibs N m E E 0 5 0 4 8J700 004LFUF2 20 10 M4 1 25 4 0 9 1 2 1 0 75 SJ700 O07LFUF2 20 10 M4 1 254 0 9 1 2 2 1 5 SJ700 015LFUF2 20 10 M4 2 4 0 9 1 2 3 2 2 S 700 022LFUF2 20 10 M4 2 4 0 9 1 2 5 3 7 8J700 037LFUF2 2010 M4 3 54 0 9 1 2 7 5 5 5 8J700 055LFUF2 812 M5 R5 5 5 1 8 2 4 10 7 5 8J700 075LFUF2 8 12 M5 R8 5 1 8 2 4 15 11 SJ700 110LFUF2 4 1 4 M6 R14 6 3 0 4 0 20 15 SJ700 150LFUF2 2 1 4 M6 22 6 3 3 4 5 25 18 5 SJ700 185LFU2 1 1 4 M6 30 S6 3 3 4 5 30 22 SJ700 220LFU2 1 0 5 16 M8 38 8 6 0 8 1 40 30 SJ700 300LFU2 2 5 16 M8 60 8 6 0 8 1 50 37 SJ700 370LFU2 1 5 16 M8 2 100 8 6 0 8 1 60 45 SJ700 450LFU2 1 5 16 M8 2 100 8 6 0 8 1 75 55 SJ700 550LFU2 2 0 1 2 M10 150 10 14 5 19 6 Note 1 The recommended ring lug connector listing consists of wire size screw size format The wire sizes are in AWG or mm format For AWG wire sizes bolt sizes for the ring lug centers are 10 12 1 4 5 16
457. oss tion and stop on power loss function B052 Over voltage threshold during Sets over voltage threshold for 0 0 to 1000 V power loss controlled deceleration function B053 Deceleration time setting Deceleration time inverter uses only 0 01 to 99 99 sec during power loss at power loss 100 0 to 999 9 sec 1000 to 3600 sec B054 Initial output frequency Sets the initial decrease in output 0 00 to 10 00 Hz decrease during power loss frequency upon power loss 3 2 O 5 e i 3 Ke suonee8d0 46 Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss 2 2 of g TS a Og av The timing diagram below shows a power loss scenario and the related parameter settings During the controlled deceleration the inverter itself acts as a load to decelerate the motor With either a high inertia load or a short deceleration time or both it is possible that the inverter impedance will not be low enough to continue linear deceleration and avoid an over voltage condition on the DC bus Use parameter B052 to specify a threshold for the over voltage In this case the inverter pauses deceleration runs at constant speed When the DC bus decays again below the threshold linear deceleration resumes The pause resume process will repeat as necessary until the DC bus energy is depleted under voltage condition occurs DC bus V B052 B051 Under voltage level Output Fr
458. ot rotate c First DC excitation motor does not rotate d V F running this step occurs only if H001 02 motor accelerates up to 80 of the base frequency e SLV running this step occurs only if H001 02 motor accelerates up to x of the base frequency where x varies with time T during this step x 40 when T lt 50s x 20 when 50s lt T lt 100s x 10 when T gt 100s f Second DC excitation g Displays the pass fail result of the auto tuning see next page NOTE During the AC and DC motor excitation steps above you may notice that the motor makes a slight humming sound This sound is normal Adaptive Auto tuning of Motor Constants 4 73 SJ7002 Inverter If the auto tuning procedure is successful the inverter updates the motor characteristic parameters and indicates normal termi nation of the procedure as shown Pressing any key on the I keypad will clear the result from the display ep e Trip during auto tuning A trip event will cause the auto Normal termination tuning sequence to quit The display will show the error code for the trip rather than the abnormal termination indication After eliminating the cause of the trip then conduct the auto tuning procedure again I a e Power loss or stop during auto tuning If the auto tuning procedure is interrupted by power loss the Stop key or by turning OFF the Run command the auto tuning constants ma
459. otor and inverter as well as fuses for safety If you are connecting a motor to the inverter on a test bench just to get started that s all you may need for now But a fully developed system can also have a variety of additional components Some can be for noise suppression while others may enhance the inverter s braking performance The figure below shows a system with several possible optional compo nents and the table gives part number information From power supply L1 L2 L3 Y o r E Y Part No Series l l Breaker Name Europe Se J asd seg Mesa P USA paes i O O oO i GFI p R A WAN AC reactor input ALI xxx HRL x be 3 3 3 AC reactor side RF noise filter ZCL x ZCL x 54 een input side aq D RF noise filter EMI filter NF CEHx NF CEHxx 54 EMC Class A EMNE EMI filter NF CEHx NF CEHxx 54 Switch EMC Class B with FC Hx with FC Hx G Ferrite core Capacitive filter CFI x CFI x 5 4 mi p DC link choke HDC xxx 54 Capacitive filter Braking resistor JRB xxx x JRB xxx SRB xxx x SRB xxx R S Braking resistor DCL x xx HRBI x Inverter 1 DC link choke NEMA rated HRB2 x HRB3 x i Brakin Expansion bay faa sae Resistance braking BRD xxx BRD xxx unit Sn Digital input o expansion card Braking RF noise filter ZCL xxx ZCL xxx 54 5
460. otor stabilization R W 0 to 255 factory set 2507h 09479 Oto 255 1 constant 2nd motor Reserved 2508h 09480 to to 2514h 09292 H306 Motor stabilization R W 0 to 255 factory set 3507h 13575 Oto 255 1 constant 3rd motor Reserved 3508h 13576 to end to end H020 H Motor constant R1 Ist R W 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 1515h 05397 1 to 65530 0 001 Q motor 65 53 Ohms H020 L R W 1516h 05398 H220 H Motor constant R1 2nd R W 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 2515h 09293 1 to 65530 0 001 Q motor 65 53 Ohms H220 L R W 2516h 09294 H021 H Motor constant R2 1st R W 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 1517h 05399 1 to 65530 0 001 Q motor 65 53 Ohms H021 L R W 1518h 05400 B 67 SJ7002 Inverter Holding Registers H Group Motor Constants Functions g xIpuaddy Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec H221 H Motor constant R2 2nd R W 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 2517h 09495 1 to 65530 0 001 Q motor 65 53 Ohms H221 L R W 2518h 09496 H022 H Motor constant L Ist R W 0 01 to 99 99 1519h 05401 1 to 65530 0 01 mH motor 100 0 655 3 mH H022
461. ower line on external devices Note that the external dispersion of noise from the power line can be minimized by connecting an EMI filter on the primary side of inverter pp gt EMI filter Inverter Power source Ost 820 os vo a sg EMI filter Inverter 77 ES I I I I Completely ground the enclosed Remote I I Conduit or shielded cable panel metal screen etc with as operator to be grounded short a wire as possible I i I i Grounded frame I I I I gt PPP P gt General Caution gt SJ7002 Inverter Eg CAUTION MOTOR TERMINAL VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION FILTER For 400 V CLASS Inverters In a system using an inverter with the voltage control PWM system a voltage surge caused by the cable constants such as the cable length especially when the distance between the motor and inverter is 10 m or more and cabling method may occur at the motor terminals A dedicated filter of the 400 V class for suppressing this voltage surge is available Be sure to install a filter in this situation See LCR filter on page 5 2 part type HRL xxxC CAUTION EFFECTS OF POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS ON INVERTERS In the cases below involving a general purpose inverter a large peak current can flow on the power supply side sometimes destroying the converter module 1 The unbalance factor of the power supply is 3 or higher 2 The power supply capacity
462. ower speeds the cooling effect of the motor s internal fan decreases CAUTION If the inverter capacity is more than twice the capacity of the motor in use the inverter may not achieve its full performance specifica tions Warnings and Cautions for Troubleshooting and Maintenance WARNING Wait at least ten 10 minutes after turning OFF the input power supply before performing maintenance or an inspection Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock WARNING Make sure that only qualified personnel will perform mainte nance inspection and part replacement Before starting to work remove any metallic objects from your person wristwatch bracelet etc Be sure to use tools with insulated handles Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or injury to personnel WARNING Never remove connectors by pulling on its wire leads wires for cooling fan and logic P C board Otherwise there is danger of fire due to wire breakage and or injury to personnel CAUTION Do not connect the megger to any control circuit terminals such as intelligent I O analog terminals etc Doing so could cause damage to the inverter CAUTION Never test the withstand voltage HIPOT on the inverter The inverter has a surge protector between the main circuit terminals above and the chassis ground dI ig N A A A SJ7002 Inverter Ei WARNING The screws that retain the capacitor bank assembly are partof ow 6 21 the el
463. ox co om E BE ASCII Mode Communications jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Command 01 Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 and FF broadcast to all nodes Command Transmission command 2 bytes 00 Data Transmission data 1 byte 00 Stop command 01 Forward command 02 Reverse command BCC Block check sum code 2 bytes Exclusive OR of Node Command and Data CR Control code carriage return I byte CR 0x0D The example below shows a transmission to the inverter at address Node 1 to rotate the motor in the forward direction to ASCII STX I 01100 I 1 I BCC I CR 02 I 30 31 I 30 30 I 31 I 33 30 0D The 01 command sets the output frequency for the standard profile You must set parameter A002 03 in order for serial communications control of the inverter to apply The frame format of command 01 follows the Frame format timing diagram and specification table ene mm Element Description Size Value STX Control code STart of TeXt 1 byte STX 0x02 Node Node station address of inverter 2 bytes 01 to 32 and FF broadcast to all nodes Command Transmission command 2 bytes 01 Data Transmission data 6 bytes ASCII code for ten times the frequency accommodates two decimal places BCC Block check sum code
464. panel filler plate may remain Remove the two retention screws the bottom corners of the upper front panel Lift up at the bottom then disengage the two hinge latches at the top The expansion bay has two sites for adding expansion cards Each card connects via the interface connector and mounts using three standoff screw locations Further details on accessories are in Chapter 5 You may also refer to the instruction manual that comes with each type of expansion card Latch to release digital operator Expansion bay Retention screws Expansion connectors The following sections will describe the system design and guide you through a step by step installation process After the section on wiring this chapter will show how to use the front panel keys to access functions and edit parameters Basic System Description A motor control system will obviously include a motor and inverter as well as a breaker or fuses for safety If you are connecting a motor to the inverter on a test bench just to get started that s all you may need for now But a system can also have a variety of additional components SJ7002 Inverter 2 5 Some can be for noise suppression while others may enhance the inverter s braking perfor mance The figure and table below show a system with all the optional components you may need in your finished application Power source GFI ET ed I I
465. peat operations in 2 a to 2 e to set the frequency of other Multi speeds It can be set also by parameters A020 to A035 in the first procedure 1 a to 1 d 4 17 SJ7002 Inverter Multi Speed The Bit level method of speed control i Speed Select Bit level uses up to seven intelligent inputs to select from up to eight speeds Since the 7th 32 SF1 all switches OFF combination selects 6th 33 SF2 the first speed you only need N 1 Sth switches to select N speeds With Bit ath Opt Code 34 SF3 level speed control only one input is g and 35 SF4 normally active at a time If multiple 2nd Symbol 35 SF5 switches are ON the lower numbered Hi input takes precedence determines the 36 SF6 speed The table and figure below 37 SF7 show how the input combinations work ks Valid for ik 1 to 8 Symbol Function Name ara SF3 Required ve Py SF1 Bit level Speed Select 1 sjel Settings a019 01 SF2 Bit level Speed Select 2 ae Default Requires SF3 Bit level Speed Select 3 SF6 F i fig terminals Kilen SF4 Bit level Speed Select 4 SF7 SF5 Bit level Speed Select 5 Fwd Run SF6 Bit level Speed Select 6 SF7 Bit level Speed Select 7 i D Multi Input Function 3 Q speed SF7 SF6 SF5 SF4 SF3 SF2 SFI g 2 Speed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q 5 Speed I 1 Q Speed 2 1
466. play or you can view it later with D090 in Monitor Mode Also the PGM LED on the display will flash ON OFF when programming These indications are automatically cleared when the parameter is corrected to the allowed range Programming Error Parameter out of bounds Boundary defined by Code 2 76 Code Description lt gt Code Description 505 gegil A8061 A261 Frequency upper limit gt A004 Maximum frequency setting 1st 2nd motor A204 Ist 2nd 3rd motor A304 40826 Hete A062 A262 Frequency lower limit gt setting 1st 2nd motor o e 5004 HRert A003 A203 Base frequency setting gt I 3 4304 A303 Ist 2nd 3rd motor 1 5 4055 482055 F001 Output frequency setting gt 8 4305 A020 A220 Multi speed freq setting GE A320 Ist 2nd 3rd motor 2 5 45005 82055 A021 to A035 Multi speed freq settings gt 4305 4559 P015 Home search speed gt setting gole gele A062 A262 Frequency lower limit gt A061 A261 Frequency upper limit setting setting 1st 2nd motor Ist 2nd motor HOS gels F001 Output frequency setting gt A020 A220 Multi speed freq setting lst 2nd motor 50 56 Bels A021 to A035 Multi speed freq settings gt g8lg A061 A261 Frequency upper limit lt P015 Home search speed setting setting 1st 2nd motor goel geel lt A062 A262 Frequency lower limit setting Ist 2nd motor 4005 Bers F00
467. pply falls below a specified level The inverter e Check whether the thyristor has been will trip if the DC voltage across the P damaged check the thyristor and N terminals exceeds about 175 VDC in case of the 200 V class models or about 345 VDC in case of the 400 V class models E 1G CT error If an error occurs in the internal current Check whether the inverter has failed detector CT the inverter will shut off its repair the inverter CT output and display the error code shown on the left The inverter will trip when the CT outputs about 0 6 V or more at power on Note 1 The inverter will not accept any reset command within about 90 seconds after tripping i e after the protective function operates Be sure to turn OFF the input power supply after waiting two minutes for cooling Note 2 The inverter will not accept any reset command after an EEPROM error occurs with error code displayed Turn off the inverter power once If error code E08 is displayed when the inverter power is turned on subsequently the internal memory device may er o have failed or parameters may have not been stored correctly In such cases initialize 3 3 the inverter and then reset the parameters S Note 3 The inverter will not accept reset commands input via the RS terminal or entered by 2 oO the STOP RESET key Therefore turn off the inverter power z 5 Note 4 Be sure to reduce the inverter s output current and the motor load before restartin
468. properly for the load etc 1 A signal generator usually attached to the motor shaft for the purpose of providing feedback to the speed controlling device of the motor 2 A speed monitoring test meter that may optically sense shaft rotation speed and display it on a readout y xipuaddy AG Bibliography lt x ra ae C Q 2 lt Thermal Switch Thermistor Three phase Power Torque Transistor Trip Watt Loss An electromechanical safety device that opens to stop current flow when the temperature at the device reaches a specific temperature threshold Thermal switches are sometimes installed in the motor in order to protect the windings from heat damage The inverter can use thermal switch signals to trip shut down if the motor overheats See also trip A type of temperature sensor that changes its resistance according to its temperature The sensing range of thermistors and their ruggedness make them ideal for motor overheating detection Hitachi inverters have built in thermistor input circuits which can detect an overheated motor and shut OFF trip the inverter output An AC power source with three Hot connections that have phase offsets of 120 degrees is a 3 phase power source Usually Neutral and Earth Ground wires accompany the three Hot connections Loads may be configured in a delta or Y configuration A Y connected load such as an AC induction motor will be a balanced load the currents in all
469. que instead of speed 53 KHC Clear cumulative power Clears cumulative power data displayed by parameter D015 value 54 SON Speed servo ON Enables the inverter to accept FW REV commands for use with V F curve vector control with sensor A044 05 U 2 g 3 Q D Q a AUG BuunByuon 3 54 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Input Function Summary Table 2 a le CE 5 2D C e O 42 2 ob E oO iS av oO Option Terminal Code Symbol Function Name Description 55 FOC Current forcing Forces excitation current in motor at 0 speed for use with V f curve settings A044 A244 03 04 and 05 56 MI1 General purpose input I Easy sequence function general input I 57 MI2 General purpose input 2 Easy sequence function general input 2 58 MB General purpose input 3 Easy sequence function general input 3 59 MI4 General purpose input 4 Easy sequence function general input 4 60 MIS General purpose input 5 Easy sequence function general input 5 61 MI6 General purpose input 6 Easy sequence function general input 6 62 MI7 General purpose input 7 Easy sequence function general input 7 63 MIS General purpose input 8 Easy sequence function general input 8 65 AHD Analog holding command Causes the inverter to sample and hold the analog speed input maintaining constant speed while this signal is ON 6
470. quipment should be installed adjusted and serviced by qualified electrical maintenance personnel familiar with the construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury WARNING The user is responsible for ensuring that all driven machinery drive train mecha nism not supplied by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd and process line material are capable of safe operation at an applied frequency of 150 of the maximum selected frequency range to the AC motor Failure to do so can result in destruction of equipment and injury to personnel should a single point failure occur WARNING For equipment protection install a ground leakage type breaker with a fast response circuit capable of handling large currents The ground fault protection circuit is not designed to protect against personal injury HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK DISCONNECT INCOMING POWER BEFORE WORKING ON THIS CONTROL WARNING Wait at least ten 10 minutes after turning OFF the input power supply before performing maintenance or an inspection Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock CAUTION These instructions should be read and clearly understood before working on SJ7002 series equipment CAUTION Proper grounds disconnecting devices and other safety devices and their location are the responsibility of the user and are not provided by Hitachi Industrial Equipment S
471. r s watt loss is the input power minus the power delivered to the motor The watt loss is typically highest when an inverter is delivering its maximum output Therefore watt loss is usually specified for a particular output level Inverter watt loss specifications are important when designing enclosures Bibliography Title Author and Publisher Variable Speed Drive Fundamentals 2nd Ed Phipps Clarence A The Fairmont Press Inc Prentice Hall Inc 1997 ISBN 0 13 636390 3 Electronic Variable Speed Drives Brumbach Michael E Delmar Publishers 1997 ISBN 0 8273 6937 9 Hitachi Inverter Technical Guide Book Published by Hitachi Ltd Japan 1995 Publication SIG E002 Gerial Communications In This Appendix page I EEE RE En 2 ASCII Mode Gommuniealions j hu evsnasnoseninmlniissiemnie 5 Communications Reference Information rrvvrnnnnnrnnnnnnvnnnnvrnnnnennnn 18 ModBus Mode Communications cccccccccccsseeecsseeeeeesueeeeseeeeeeeeaes 21 ModBus Data SN EEEEREE 33 Ba Introduction jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Introduction SJ7002 inverters have a built in RS485 serial communications interface This serial communi cations function provides a way of controlling from 1 to 32 inverters on a common serial network SJ7002 SJ300 and L300P inverters all have the same communications prototol In a typical application a host computer or controller is the
472. r FFh 00h Change date low order 00h 00h An example follows note that to command the inverter set A002 03 e Sending a RUN command to an inverter having slave address 10 This example writes in coil number 1 Query Response No Field Name pee Na Field Name anne hex hex 1 Slave address 1 OA 1 Slave address OA 2 Function code 05 2 Function code 05 3 Coil start number high 00 4 Coil start number high 00 order order 4 Coil start number low 00 5 Coil start number low 00 order 2 order 5 Change data high FF 6 Change data high FF order order 6 Change data low order 00 7 Change data low order 00 7 CRC 16 high order 8D 8 CRC 16 high order 8D 8 CRC 16 low order 41 9 CRC 16 low order 41 Note 1 Broadcasting is disabled Note 2 The starting coil number is one When the Write in Coil command cannot be executed normally refer to the exception response Write in Holding Register 06h less than the number of the coil to be read first This function writes data in a specified holding register An example follows below e Write 50Hz as the first Multi speed 0 A020 in an inverter having slave address 5 e This example uses change data 50 0032h to set 50Hz as the data resolution of the register 1203h holding the base frequency setting A003 is 1 Hz
473. r each device on the serial network must have a unique node address See Serial Communications on page B 1 for more information Keypad Defaults Run Tune Name Range and Settings Mode Code Description Ra OPE 8 8 xFE2 xFU2 xFF2 Edit EU USA Jpn Lo Hi C071 Communication speed TEST G2 Test 04 04 04 Xv selection aaa eS NEN 2408brs 03 2400 bps J5BBbr 04 4800 bps S688brs OS 9600 bps 1S288be Ss 06 19200 bps Q C072 Node allocation 1 to 32 node 1 1 1 Xv a Set the address of the inverter on the network S Oo 3 C073 Communication data length TEIT 09 7 bit data 07 07 07 Xv D 2 selection 7 a g SEIT 08 8 bit data 5 C074 Communication parity HO OG No parity 00 00 00 Xv selection EVH 0 I Even parity OLD G2 Odd parity C075 Communication stop bit 1EIT 0 I 1 Stop bit 1 1 1 Xv selection ZEIT Ge 2 Stop bits C076 Action upon communication TEF 80 Trip 02 02 02 Xv error selection 7 ISTF G I Trip after deceleration and stop HEG 2 No action ignore errors FES 03 Free run stop ITP 04 Decelerate and stop C077 Communication timeout before trip 0 00 to 99 99 seconds 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv C078 Communication wait time 0 0 to 1000 milliseconds 0 0 0 Xv Time the inverter waits after receiving a message before it transmits C079 Communication protocol ASCII G0 ASCII
474. r clear 0000000000010000 AT analog input voltage current 0001000000000000 STAT Pulse train input enable 0000000000020000 SET3 Set 3rd motor 0002000000000000 0000000000040000 RS Reset 0004000000000000 ADD Trigger for frequency addition 0000000000080000 0008000000000000 F TM Forcible terminal operation 0000000000100000 STA 3 wire Start 0010000000000000 ATR Permission of torque command 0000000000200000 STP 3 wire Hold 0020000000000000 KHC Cumulative power clearance 0000000000400000 F R 3 wire FWD REV 0040000000000000 SON Servo ON 0000000000800000 PID PID enable 0080000000000000 FOC Forcing 0000000001000000 PIDC PID integrator reset 0100000000000000 MIL General purpose input I 0000000002000000 0200000000000000 MI2 General purpose input 2 ASCII Mode Communications faa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Data Hex 02 Command Description Data Hex 02 CommandDescription 0000000004000000 CAS control gain switching function 0400000000000000 MI3 General purpose input 3 0000000008000000 UP remote control increment speed 0800000000000000 MI4 General purpose input 4 0000000010000000 DWN remote control decrement 1000000000000000 MI5 General purpose input 5 speed 0000000020000000 UDC remote control clear up down 2000000000000000 MI
475. r in sensorless vector control sensorless vector control OHz domain or vector control with encoder feedback the motor circuit constants are important If they are unknown then you must first conduct the auto tuning procedure The inverter will determine the constants and write new values for the related H Group settings The auto tuning proce dure requires that the inverter be configured to operate the Ist motor do not set the inverter to use 2nd and 3rd motor data during an auto tuning procedure Func Name Range Notes Auto tuning setting 00 Disabled H001 01 Enabled without motor rotation 02 Enabled with motor rotation Motor data selection 1st motor 00 Standard motor parameters H002 01 Auto tuning parameters 02 Adaptive tuning parameters Motor capacity 1st motor 0 2 75 kW up to 550xxx models H003 0 2 160 kW 750xxx to 1500xxx models 2 3 ao H004 Motor poles setting 1st motor 2 4 6 8 Units poles zg eo y Auto tuned motor constant R1 Units ohms 3 H030 5 1st motor 95 Auto tuned motor constant R2 Units ohms a HO31 1st motor H032 Auto tuned motor constant L Units mH 1st motor H033 Auto tuned motor constant Io Units A 1st motor H034 Auto tuned motor constant J Ist Units kgm motor A003 Base frequency setting 30 to maximum freq Units Hz DC braking enable 00 Disabled Disable during auto A051 tuning 01 Enable
476. r the card is faulty OFL 3 OF2 3 If an encoder expansion card does not operate normally use the following table to check the fed DIP switch settings on the card a 3 5 Switch 5 A wi i 3 DIP Switch Nan Setting g 3 1 ON setting enables encoder disconnect function for loss of A 3 amp or B channel SWENC 2 ON setting enables encoder disconnect function for loss of Z channel 1 ON setting connects the 150Q termination resistor across terminals SAP and SAN SWR 2 ON setting connects the 150Q termination resistor across terminals SBP and SBP 6 12 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions Digital Input Card Use the following table to diagnose errors caused by a digital input expansion card Each error will cause the inverter to trip turning OFF its output and displaying OD od ce es 2 MC OG Fel S2 D FS an error code Digital Input Expansion Card Errors Error Code OPE SRW Name Probable Cause s E50 ENQ Digital input A communications time out between the expansion card error inverter and the digital input card has OF1 8 OF2 8 eiker The input mode is determined by a combination of DIP switch and rotary switch settings If the expansion card does not operate normally use the following table to check the DIP switch and rotary switch settings The check marks indicate input modes specified by switch sett
477. rameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1671h 05745 0 to 65530 1 U11 10000 to 65535 P112 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1672h 05746 0 to 65530 1 U12 10000 to 65535 P113 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1673h 05747 0 to 65530 1 U13 10000 to 65535 P114 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1674h 05748 0 to 65530 1 U14 10000 to 65535 P115 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1675h 05749 0 to 65530 1 U15 10000 to 65535 ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers P Group Expansion Card Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec P116 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1676h 05750 0 to 65530 1 U16 10000 to 65535 P117 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1677h 05751 0 to 65530 1 U17 10000 to 65535 P118 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1678h 05752 0 to 65530 1 U18 10000 to 65535 P119 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 1679h 05753 0 to 65530 1 U19 10000 to 65535 P120 Easy sequence parameter R W 0 to 9999 1000 to 6553 167Ah 05754 0 to 65530 1 U20 10000 to 65535 P121 Easy
478. re is the danger of fire CAUTION For motor leads ground fault interrupter breakers and electromagnetic contac tors be sure to size these components properly each must have the capacity for rated current and voltage Otherwise there is the danger of fire 226 Step by Step Basic Installation D E amp 5 e 2 jo 2 _ Oo gt and Installation T2 Wire the Inverter Output to Motor Logic Control Wiring s Uncover the Inverter Vents A Step 7 The process of motor selection is beyond the scope of this manual However it must be a three phase AC induction motor It should also come with a chassis ground lug If the motor does not have three power input leads stop the installation and verify the motor type Other guidelines for wiring the motor include Use an inverter grade motor for maximum motor life 1600V insulation e For standard motors use an output filter if the wiring between the inverter and motor exceeds 10 meters in length Simply connect the motor to the terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 indicated on the inverter to the right This is a good time to connect the chassis ground lug on the drive as well The motor chassis ground must also connect to the same point Use a star ground single point arrangement and never daisy chain the grounds point to point aC oe inverter 4 Kne LY grounding Use the same wire gauge on the motor and To power To chassis To
479. red in Torque Limit on page 4 30 actually limits the torque Opt Code 07 during certain operating conditions Instead the over torque output feature only monitors the torque turning ON output OTQ if the torque is above programmable thresholds you set The Symbol OTQ OTQ function is valid only for sensorless vector control 0 Hz domain sensorless vector Valid for 11 to 15 control or vector control with sensor Do not use the OTQ output except for these inverter one ALx operational modes C055 C056 Required C057 C058 Code Function Description Data or Range Settings S p or C055 Over torque forward driving level setting 0 to 200 or C056 Over torque reverse regenerating level setting 0 to 200 Default 14 terminals 14 C057 Over torque reverse driving level setting 0 to 200 C058 Over torque forward regenerating level setting 0 to 200 C021 to C025 Intelligent output terminal 11 to 15 function 07 The assignment of the Over torque function to an output terminal OTQ is detailed in the table at the left Instantaneous An instantaneous power failure complete loss or under voltage condition partial loss of Power Failure inverter input voltage can occur without warning SJ7002 Series inverters can be configured to Under voltage respond to these conditions in different ways You can select whether the inverter trips or retries Signal restart attempt when an instantaneous power failure or under voltag
480. represents the output value To do this use the circuit shown to the right Note the output impedance of the circuit is at least 82kQ so the monitoring device needs an input impedance of IMQ or greater Otherwise the impedance of the smoothing circuit will cause a non linearity in the reading FM Signal Type The frequency modulated output at terminal FM varies its frequency with the inverter output frequency when C027 03 The signal at FM uses the parameter A004 Maximum frequency setting For example if A004 60 Hz then the maximum signal value at FM will be at 60 Hz This frequency is digitally controlled for accuracy and does not use the B081 gain setting when C027 03 frequency modulation suonee8d0 D 2 fe 5 e 5 Ke 50 fixed duty cycle FM lt gt I I idi FM Output Frequency ii C027 03 Selects FM type output ig TD t T 1 J FM Output Frequency 4 68 Analog Output Operation AM and AMI The AM and AMI terminals provide signals Terminals to monitor various inverter parameters such as output frequency output current and torque The terminals provide these analog signal types J e AM terminal 0 10V analog output signal A GND e AMI terminal 4 20mA analog output 0 10V analog output signal These signals both use the L terminal for signal 4 20mA analog output return Eight different inverter parameters may be monitore
481. requency 1629h 05673 Oto max 0 01 Hz for torque controlled Hz frequency P040 L operation R W 162Ah 05674 up to 40000 Reserved 162Bh 05675 Reserved 162Ch 05676 Reserved 162Dh 05677 P044 DeviceNet comm R W 0 00 to 99 99 seconds 162Eh 05678 0 to 9999 0 01 sec watchdog timer P045 Inverter action on R W 00 Trip 162Fh 05679 Oto 4 DeviceNet comm error 01 Decelerate and trip 02 Hold last speed 03 Free run stop 04 Decelerate and stop P046 DeviceNet polled I O R W 20 21 100 1630h 05680 20 21 Output instance number 100 i ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers P Group Expansion Card Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec P047 DeviceNet polled I O R W 70 71 101 1631h 05681 70 71 Input instance number 101 P048 Inverter action on R W 00 Trip 1632h 05682 0 to 4 DeviceNet idle mode 01 Decelerate and trip 02 Hold last speed 03 Free run stop 04 Decelerate and stop P049 Motor poles setting for R W 00 to 38 even numbers only 1633h 05683 Oto 19 RPM 2 poles Reserved
482. rial in Chapter 3 gave a reference listing of all the programmable functions of the inverter We suggest that you first scan through the listing of inverter functions to gain a general familiarity This chapter will build on that knowledge in the following ways 1 Related functions Some parameters interact with or depend on the settings in other functions This chapter lists required settings for a programmable function to serve as a cross reference and an aid in showing how functions interact 2 Intelligent terminals Some functions rely on an input signal from control logic terminals or generate output signals in other cases 3 Electrical interfaces This chapter shows how to make connections between the inverter and other electrical devices 4 Auto tuning The SJ7002 inverter has the ability to run a calibration procedure in which it takes measurements of the motor s electrical characteristics This chapter shows how to run the auto tuning procedure to help the inverter run the motor more smoothly and efficiently 5 PID Loop Operation The SJ7002 has a built in PID loop that calculates the optimal inverter output frequency to control an external process This chapter shows the parameters and input output terminals associated with PID loop operation 6 Multiple motors A single SJ7002 inverter may be used with two or more motors in some types of applications This chapter shows the electrical connections and i
483. rminal Forward Reverse Motor revolution speed 4 26 Using Intelligent Input Terminals 2 2 of Cc TS a Og fav PID Disable and PID Clear Opt Code 23 PID and 24 PIDC Symbol Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Required Settings AON Default Requires terminal config A Internal Speed Loop Gain Settings Opt Code 26 CAS and 43 PPI Symbol Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 A044 A244 F A344 03 Settings 04 or 05 Default Requires terminal config The PID loop function is useful for controlling motor speed to achieve constant flow pressure temperature etc in many process applications PID Disable This function temporarily suspends PID loop execution via an intelligent input terminal It overrides the parameter A071 PID Enable to stop PID execution and return to normal motor frequency output characteristics the use of PID Disable on an intelligent input terminal is optional Of course any use of the PID loop control requires setting PID Enable function A071 01 PID Clear This function forces the PID loop integrator sum 0 So when you turn ON an intelligent input configured as PIDC the integrator sum is reset to zero This is useful when switching from manual control to PID loop control and the motor is stopped Note the following The use of PID and PIDC terminals are optional Use A
484. rnal resistor to these models to improve braking perfor mance Models SJ700 300XXX through SJ700 4000XXX require you to add an external braking unit The braking resistor connects to the external braking unit for those models More information on dynamic braking is located in Chapter 5 Q How will I know if my application will require resistive braking A For new applications it may be difficult to tell before you actually test a motor drive solution In general some applications can rely on system losses such as friction to serve as the decelerating force or otherwise can tolerate a long decel time These applications will not need dynamic braking However applications with a combina tion of a high inertia load and a required short decel time will need dynamic braking This is a physics question that may be answered either empirically or through extensive calculations Q Several options related to electrical noise suppression are available for the Hitachi invert ers How can I know if my application will require any of these options A The purpose of these noise filters is to reduce the inverter electrical noise so the operation of nearby electrical devices is not affected Some applications are governed by particular regulatory agencies and noise suppression is mandatory In those cases the inverter must have the corresponding noise filter installed SJ700 models from 004XXX 0 4kW to 1500XXX 150kW have built in EMC filters Other
485. ror code displayed Are the signals to the intelligent input terminals correct Is the Run Command active Is the FW terminal or RV connected to P24 via switch etc Press the FUNC key and determine the error type Eliminate the error cause then clear the error Reset Verify the terminal functions for C001 C008 are correct Turn ON Run command enable Supply 24V to FW or RV termi nal if configured Has the frequency setting for F001 been set greater than zero Are the control circuit terminals H O and L connected to the potenti ometer Is the RS reset function or FRS free run stop function ON Set the parameter for F001 to a safe non zero value If the potentiometer is the frequency setting source verify voltage at O gt OV Turn OFF the command s Inverter outputs U V W are supplying voltage Is the motor load too heavy Reduce load or test the motor independently of the load The direction of the motor is reversed Are the connections of output termi nals U T1 V T2 and W T3 correct Is the phase sequence of the motor forward or reverse with respect to U T1 V T2 and W T3 Are the control terminals FW and RV wired correctly Is parameter F004 properly set Make connections according to the phase sequence of the motor In general FWD U V W and REV U W V Use terminal FW for forward and
486. rrent the curve is shown below SJ700 110LFE2 SJ700 750LFE2 Trip Trip time s time s 60 60 53 4 69 92 158 223 5 268 109 150 200 106 150 180 Trip current at 60 Hz Trip current at 60 Hz SJ7002 Inverter EEJ Example 3 setting for SJ700 3150LFE2 185 to SJ700 3150LFE2 400kW The rated motor current is 600A The setting range is 0 2 64 to rated current or 120A to 600A For a setting of B012 600A current at coo 100 rated current the curve is shown to the right SOS 60 The electronic thermal characteristic adjusts the way the inverter calculates thermal heating based on the type of load connected to the motor as set 5 0 by parameter B013 su 0 CAUTION When the motor runs at lower 636 900 1140 speeds the cooling effect of the motor s internal 106 150 190 fan decreases m 110002 Trip current at 60 Hz The table below shows the torque profile settings Use the one that matches your load Function Code Data Function Description E3 qc Reduced torque c3 B013 B213 B313 Constant torque U Q D 3 D2 D Q o Ge Free setting AUG BuunByuon Reduced Torque Characteristic The Trip current example below shows the effect of the reduction reduced torque characteristic curve for factor example motor and current rating At 20Hz x 1 0 the output current is reduced by a factor of f 0 8 for given trip times x 0 8 x 0
487. rror is the difference between the desired value or setpoint SP and the actual value of a the process variable PV See also process variable and PID Loop Electromagnetic Interference In motor drive systems the switching of high currents and voltages creates the possibility of generating radiated electrical noise that may interfere with the operation of nearby sensitive electrical instruments or devices Certain aspects of an instal lation such as long motor lead wire lengths tend to increase the chance of EMI Hitachi provides accessory filter components you can install to decrease the level of EMI Referring to a graph of torque versus speed a four quadrant drive can turn the motor either forward or reverse as well as decelerate in either direction see also reverse torque A load that has a relatively high inertia and must move in both directions and change directions rapidly requires four quadrant capability from its drive A method of stopping a motor caused when the inverter simply turns OFF its motor output connections This may allow the motor and load to coast to a stop or a mechanical brake may intervene and shorten the deceleration time While frequency has a broad meaning in electronics it typically refers to motor speed for variable frequency drives inverters This is because the output frequency of the inverter is variable and is proportional to the attained motor speed For example a motor with a base frequency of 60
488. rts from 0Hz Power supply Power supply Inverter output Inverter output y Free run Motor Motor l frequency i frequency T l l to t to bh A 100 2 l l l lt _ gt _ gt Frequency matching lt gt lt 0H restart Motor frequency gt B007 value at ty Motor frequency lt B007 value at t The Instantaneous Power Failure and Alarm output responses during various power loss condi tions are shown in the diagram below Use B004 to enable disable the alarm output when instantaneous power failure or under voltage occurs The alarm output will continue while the A control power of the inverter is present even if the motor is stopped Examples 5 to 7 Fe correspond to normal wiring of the inverter s control circuit Examples 8 to 10 correspond to 55 the wiring of the inverter s control circuit for controlled deceleration after power loss see sS Optional Controlled Decel and Alarm at Power Loss on page 4 4 D 83 5 Instantaneous power failure operation with standard Instantaneous power failure operation with RO TO RO TO connections connected to P N Example 5 Inverter Stop nverter Run Example 8 Inverter Stop Inverter Run Power 1 Ao Power j _ GE Power s asde am Power _ Run c
489. rward maximum speed for torque controlled 0 00 0 00 0 00 operation P040 Reverse maximum speed for torque controlled 0 00 0 00 0 00 operation P044 DeviceNet comm watchdog timer Ol Ol 01 SJ7002 Inverter C 17 N xipueddy P Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Nome FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan P045 Inverter action on DeviceNet comm error 21 21 21 P046 DeviceNet polled I O Output instance number 71 71 71 P047 DeviceNet polled I O Input instance number 01 01 01 P048 Inverter action on DeviceNet idle mode 0 0 0 P049 Motor poles setting for RPM 01 01 01 P055 Pulse train frequency span 25 0 25 0 25 0 P056 Pulse train frequency time constant 0 10 0 10 0 10 P057 Pulse train frequency bias 0 0 0 P058 Pulse train frequency limit 100 100 100 P060 Multi stage position setting 0 0 0 0 P061 Multi stage position setting 1 0 0 0 P062 Multi stage position setting 2 0 0 0 P063 Multi stage position setting 3 0 0 0 P064 Multi stage position setting 4 0 0 0 P065 Multi stage position setting 5 0 0 0 P066 Multi stage position setting 6 0 0 0 P067 Multi stage position setting 7 0 0 0 P068 Home position mode selection 00 00 00 P069 Home position direction selection 00 00 00 P070 Low speed homing frequency 0 00 0 00 0 00 P071 High speed homing frequency 0 00 0
490. ry To satisfy the EMC directive and to comply with standard follow the guidelines in this section 1 As user you must ensure that the HF high frequency impedance between adjustable frequency inverter filter and ground is as small as possible Ensure that the connections are metallic and have the largest possible contact areas zinc plated mounting plates 2 Avoid conductor loops that act like antennas especially loops that encompass large areas e Avoid unnecessary conductor loops e Avoid parallel arrangement of low level signal wiring and power carrying or noise prone conductors 3 Use shielded wiring for the motor cable and all analog and digital control lines Allow the effective shield area of these lines to remain as large as possible i e do not strip away the shield screen further away from the cable end than absolutely necessary e With integrated systems for example when the adjustable frequency inverter is commu nicating with some type of supervisory controller or host computer in the same control cabinet and they are connected at the same PE potential connect the shields of the control lines to ground PE protective earth at both ends With distributed systems for example the communicating supervisory controller or host computer is not in the same control cabinet and there is a distance between the systems we recommend connecting the shield of the control lines only at the end connecting to the ad
491. s expansion bay Please refer to Expansion Cards on page 5 5 in this manual or the SJ FB manual for details The following table shows the methods of torque control selection Keypad Defaults Run ae ane z Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 eg s ESC PUD SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 a EU USA Jpn A041 Torque boost method selection MANUAL 00 Manual torque boost 00 00 00 xx AUTO G I Automatic torque boost A241 Torque boost method selection 2nd MANUAL 22 Manual torque boost 00 00 00 xx motor AUTO G I Automatic torque boost A042 Manual torque boost value 0 0 to 20 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Vv z 8 Can boost starting torque between 0 and 20 above S E normal V f curve 3 A242 Manual torque boost value 2nd motor 0 0 to 20 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Vv ao p os Can boost starting torque between 0 and 20 above 5 normal V f curve A342 Manual torque boost value 3rd motor 0 0 to 20 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 VY Can boost starting torque between 0 and 20 above normal V f curve A043 Manual torque boost frequency adjustment 0 0 to 50 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 Vv Sets the frequency of the V f breakpoint A in graph top of previous page for torque boost A243 Manual torque boost frequency adjustment 2nd motor 0 0 to 50 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 VY Sets the frequency of the V f breakpoint A in graph top of previous page for torque boost A343 Manual
492. s correct 3 Verify inputs are configured correctly sink source to interface to interface to any external devices PLCs etc 4 Check the zero and span curve end points for analog connections and be sure the scale factor from input to output is correct 5 Understand what will happen at the system level if any particular device suddenly loses power or powers up after other devices 48 Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices Example Wiring The schematic diagram below provides a general example of logic connector wiring in Diagram addition to basic power and motor wiring covered in Chapter 2 The goal of this chapter is to help you determine the proper connections for the various terminals shown below for your specific application needs SJ7002 Converter Inverter L1 R DC bus U Ti i O Power source L2 S Recti 3 phase O fier L3 T C 2 wire jumper J51 E N e ar Ferrite filter iR Braking r Braking i O Control 7 RB resistor unit Aro circuit f optional optional BEE ee NN models with 22kW capacity or Mr En P24 ZDE AL less have built in braking unit sourcing type inputs amp C u gu I PLC v ALO Intelligent relay output I 9 O alarm function default rd CM1 NN l Default jumper position i i for xFE models I 1 Output sinking
493. s normally in your application the inverter tunes the parameters again to match the motor This compensates for temperature changes etc further optimizing the values The following table lists the parameters associated with motor constant settings Function H002 selects the set of motor constants that you want the inverter to use in normal use Standard 2 constants select with H002 00 include H020 to H024 Auto tuned constants select with er Q H002 01 include H030 to H034 Remember that you have to do the auto tuning procedure in S this section before using either auto tuned constants or the adaptive mode H002 02 3 gt 2 Func Name Data Notes TY 00 fWeonstanttorque 01 V f variable torque P V f characteristic curve selection 02 V f free setting curve A344 Ist 2nd 3rd motors 03 Sensorless vector control SLV 04 Sensorless vector control OHz domain 05 Vector control with encoder feedback H002 Motor data selection 1st motor 00 Standard motor parameters 01 Auto tuning parameters 02 Adaptive tuning parameters H003 Motor capacity 1st motor 0 2 75 kW up to 550xxx models 0 2 160 kW 750xxx to 1500xxx models H004 Motor poles setting 1st motor 2 4 6 8 Units poles H020 Motor constant R1 1st motor 0 000 65 53 Units ohms H021 Motor constant R2 1st motor 0 000 65 53 Units ohms H022 Motor constant L 1st motor 0 00 655 3 Units mH H023 Mo
494. s shown to the right The Output output frequency is set in Hz but accel frequency F002 re FOGH eration and deceleration are specified seconds the time to ramp from zero to FOO1 maximum frequency or from maximum frequency to zero The motor direction parameter determines whether the keypad Run key produces a FW or RV command This parameter does not affect the FW terminal or RV intelligent terminal function which you configure separately Acceleration 1 and Deceleration 1 are the standard default accel and decel values for the main profile Accel and decel values for an alternative profile are specified by using parameters Ax92 through Ax93 The motor direction selection F004 determines the direction of rotation as commanded only from the keypad This setting applies to any motor profile 1st 2nd or 3rd in O use at a particular time v S ca gs Keypad Defaults Run 2 g ae Mas Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 a eg 9 SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn ES i eS F001 Output frequency setting O to 400 Hz 0 00 0 00 000 vv Standard default target frequency that deter mines constant motor speed F002 Acceleration 1 time setting 10 01 to 3600 seconds 30 0 30 0 300 Vv Standard default acceleration F202 Acceleration 1 time setting 2nd motor 10 01 to 3600 seconds 30 0 30 0 300 WH St
495. s the danger of fire CAUTION Be sure not to let the foreign matter enter vent openings in the inverter housing such as wire clippings spatter from welding metal shavings dust etc Otherwise there is the danger of fire CAUTION Be sure to install the inverter in a place that can bear the weight according to the specifications in the text Chapter 1 Specifications Tables Otherwise it may fall and cause injury to personnel CAUTION Be sure to install the unit on a perpendicular wall that is not subject to vibration Otherwise it may fall and cause injury to personnel CAUTION Be sure not to install or operate an inverter that is damaged or has missing parts Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel CAUTION Be sure to install the inverter in a well ventilated room that does not have direct exposure to sunlight a tendency for high temperature high humidity or dew condensation high levels of dust corrosive gas explosive gas inflammable gas grinding fluid mist salt air etc Otherwise there is the danger of fire CAUTION Be sure to maintain the specified clearance area around the inverter and to provide adequate ventilation Otherwise the inverter may overheat and cause equipment damage or fire Wiring Warnings for Electrical Practices and Wire Specifications WARNING Use 75 C Cu wire only or equivalent WARNING Open Type Equipment For models SJ700 750H to SJ700 4000H WARNING A Class 2 circuit wired w
496. sable When the TL input is OFF the inverter always uses the default torque control limit of 200 maximum That torque limit value corre sponds to 200 of the maximum inverter output current Therefore the output torque also depends on the particular motor in use When the over torque output OTQ is assigned in the intelligent output selection it turns ON when the inverter is performing torque limiting When using the torque limit function at low speed also use the overload restriction feature Code Function Data or Range Description 00 V f Constant torque 01 V f Variable torque A044 Control method 02 V f Free setting torque 1 A244 selection 03 Sensorless vector 1 04 Sensorless vector 0 Hz domain 1 05 Vector control with sensor 2 B040 00 4 quadrant individual setting Torque limit 01 Terminal selection or nie 02 Analog 02 input 03 Expansion card 1 04 Expansion card 2 B041 Torque limit 1 0 to 200 Forward driving in 4 quadrant mode B042 Torque limit 2 0 to 200 Reverse regenerating in 4 quadrant mode B043 Torque limit 3 0 to 200 Reverse driving in 4 quadrant mode S 3 B044 Torque limit 4 0 to 200 Forward regenerating in 4 quadrant Q Q mode D 39 C001 Intelligent input 40 Torque limit enable 3 9 to terminal 1 to 8 41 Torque limit selection bit I LSB 30 C008 function 42 Torque limit selection bit 2 MSB Q C021 Intelligent output 10 In torque limit to terminal 11 to 15 C025
497. scription Register Range Res hex dec P028 Numerator of motor gear R W 0 to 9999 161Ch 05660 1 to 9999 1 ratio P029 Denominator of motor gear R W 1 to 9999 161Dh 05661 1 to 9999 1 ratio Reserved 161Eh 05662 P031 Accel decel time input R W 00 Inverter 161Fh 05663 0 1 2 selection 01 Expansion card I 02 Expansion card 2 P032 Positioning command R W 00 Inverter 1620h 05664 0 1 2 input selection 01 Expansion card I 02 Expansion card 2 P033 Torque command input R W 00 O terminal 1621h 05665 0 to 3 selection 01 OI terminal 02 02 terminal 03 Inverter keypad P034 P034 Torque command setting R W 0 to 200 1622h 05666 0 to 180 1 P035 Torque command polarity R W 00 Indicated by signal 1623h 05667 0 1 selection polarity 01 Depends on motor direction P036 Torque bias mode R W 00 Disable 1624h 05668 0 1 2 01 Inverter keypad P037 02 02 terminal input P037 Torque bias value R W 200 to 200 1625h 05669 Oto 180 1 P038 Torque bias polarity R W 00 Indicated by polarity 1626h 05670 0 1 E selection 01 Depends on motor direction P039 H Forward maximum speed R W 0 00 to Maximum frequency 1627h 05671 Oto max 0 01 Hz for torque controlled Hz frequency P039 L operation R W 1628h 05672 up to 40000 P040 Reverse maximum speed R W 0 00 to Maximum f
498. se Frequency Braking Resistor Break away Torque Carrier Frequency CE Choke DC Braking DC Link Deadband Digital Operator Panel The air temperature in the chamber containing a powered electronic unit A unit s heat sinks rely on a lower ambient temperature in order to dissipate heat away from sensitive electronics The arrival frequency refers to the set output frequency of the inverter for the constant speed setting The arrival frequency feature turns ON an output when the inverter reaches the set constant speed The inverter has various arrival frequencies and pulsed or latched logic options The ability of a controller to execute a procedure that interacts with a load to determine the proper coefficients to use in the control algorithm Auto tuning is a common feature of process controllers with PID loops Hitachi inverters feature auto tuning to determine motor parameters for optimal commutation Auto tuning is available as a special command from a digital operator panel See also digital operator panel The power input frequency for which an AC induction motor is designed to operate Most motors will specify a 50 to 60 Hz value The Hitachi inverters have a programmable base frequency so you must ensure that parameter matches the attached motor The term base frequency helps differentiate it from the carrier frequency See also carrier frequency and frequency setting An energy absorbing resistor that dissipates
499. se effects of faults selection of 1 The requirements of Category B must be A defect fault may cause a loss components applied Proven components and safety of the safety function However principles must be applied the probability of loss is less than that specified for Category B 2 The requirements of Category B and proven e A defect fault occurring safety principle specifications must be applied during checking may cause a The safety function must be checked by the loss of the safety function machine control system at appropriate inter e A loss of the safety function is vals The requirements of category B and detected by checking proven safety principle specifications must be Characterized applied Safety related parts must be designed mainly by the to meet the following requirements structure Any single defect fault in a part must not cause any loss of the safety functions e Ifa single defect fault occurs it must always be detected when the safety function can be reasonably implemented 2 40 Emergency Stop Function D E 3 e _ jo 2 _ Oo gt and Installation Safety related parts must be designed to meet the following requirements Any single defect fault in a part must not cause any loss of the safety function Ifa single defect fault occurs it must be detected when or before the next operation request is made to the safety function If single defects
500. served 1108h 04360 to to 1200h 04608 SJ7002 Inverter Ez Holding Registers A Group Standard Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec A001 Frequency source setting R W 00 Keypad potentiometer 1201h 04609 00 to 07 01 Control terminal 10 gt 02 Function F001 setting D 03 RS485 serial command 04 Expansion board 1 05 Expansion board 2 x 06 Pulse train input W 07 Easy sequence 10 Caltulate function input A002 Run command source R W 01 Input FW or RV 1202h 04610 O1 to 05 setting 02 Run key on keypad 03 RS485 serial command 04 Start stop Exp card 1 05 Start stop exp card 2 A003 Base frequency setting R W 30 to max frequency Hz 1203h 04611 30 to 1 Hz A004 val A203 Base frequency setting R W 30 to max frequency Hz 2203h 08707 30 to 1 Hz 2nd motor A004 val A303 Base frequency setting 3rd R W 30 to max frequency Hz 3203h 12803 30 to 1 Hz motor A004 val A004 Maximum frequency R W 30 to 400 Hz 1204h 04612 30 to 400 1 Hz setting A204 Maximum frequency R W 30 to 400 Hz 2204h 08708 30 to 400 1 Hz setting 2nd motor Reserved 2205h 08709 to to 2215h 08725 A304 Maximum frequency R W 30 to 400 Hz 3204h
501. sing the screws Install the lower screws in the terminal block terminals P and N Mount the terminal block cover SJ7002 Inverter 6 23 For inverters 11kW output and below with molded plastic housings The inverters in this category do not have separate capacitor units It is necessary to replace the main circuit board accessible by following the steps below 1 Loosen the two screws that secure the lower front panel Remove the panel from the inverter 2 Turn OFF power to the inverter and confirm that the Charge Indicator LED is OFF 3 Loosen the two screws that secure the upper front panel Remove the panel from the inverter 4 Press the tabs inward on each side of the cooling fan unit and lift the unit away from the top of the inverter housing 5 Disconnect the fan unit wiring on the circuit board at the top of the inverter 6 Disconnect the ribbon cable that connects the control board and main board 7 Remove the wiring entry exit plate and the jumper between terminal P and PD on the main board 8 Remove the two 2 screws in the plastic housing and remove the top half of the housing Be careful not to damage the plastic tabs at the top corners of the housing Fan Assembly The SJ7002 Series inverters have field replaceable fan units The service life of the cooling fan Replacement bearings is approximately 100 000 hours However actual results vary with the inverter operating environment Inverters
502. sis frequency width setting 0 50 0 50 0 50 A066 A068 A069 Acceleration stop frequency setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 A070 Acceleration stop time frequency setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 A071 PID Function Enable 00 00 00 A072 PID proportional gain 1 0 1 0 1 0 A073 PID integral time constant 1 0 1 0 1 0 A074 PID derivative gain 0 0 0 0 0 0 A075 PV scale conversion 1 00 1 00 1 00 A076 PV source setting 00 00 00 A077 Reverse PID action 00 00 00 A078 PID output limit 0 00 0 00 0 00 A079 PIDfeedforwardselect fm o oo A081 AVR function select 00 00 02 A082 AVR voltage select 1 230 400 230460 200400 A085 Operation mode selection 00 00 00 A086 Energy saving mode tuning 50 0 50 0 50 0 A092 Acceleration 2 time setting 15 0 15 0 15 0 A292 Acceleration 2 time setting 2nd motor 15 0 15 0 15 0 A392 Acceleration 2 time setting 3rd motor 15 0 15 0 15 0 A093 Deceleration 2 time setting 15 0 15 0 15 0 A293 Deceleration 2 time setting 2nd motor 15 0 15 0 15 0 A393 Deceleration 2 time setting 3rd motor 15 0 15 0 15 0 A094 Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 profile 00 00 00 A294 Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 2nd motor 00 00 00 A095 Accl to Acc2 frequency transition point 0 0 0 0 0 0 A295 Accl to Acc2 frequency transition point 2nd 0 0 0 0 0 0 motor A096 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition point 0 0 0 0 0 0 A296 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition point 2nd 0 0 0 0 0 0 motor A097 Acceleration curve selection 00 00 00 A098 Decelera
503. ss the Stop Rest button on the keypad to return the inverter keypad display to normal operation 5 Change C071 to its original setting default is C071 04 Otherwise while CO71 02 the inverter will perform the communications loopback test at each powerup SJ7002 Inverter ModBus Mode Communications Transmission The network master sends a frame to initiate communications with a slave as shown in the Procedure figure below Transmitting device Query Host master l I gt Response Inverter l slave n l l 4 Latency time silent interval plus C078 setting g xIpuaddy e Query A frame sent from the external control equipment to the inverter Response A frame returned from the inverter to the external control equipment e Wait time C077 If the inverter cannot complete the reception of a query from the host master within the communication timeout period the inverter responds to the query and waits to receive the query from the beginning Subsequently the inverter returns no response to the master system After reception timeout occurs the inverter operates according to function C076 Action upon communication error selection see table below Monitoring of reception timeout begins when the first communication is performed upon inverter powerup or a reset Reception timeout is monitored only when the inverter communicates with the master
504. st have fusing suitable for the load Check the fuse size chart presented in Step 5 if necessary 2 Be sure you have access to a disconnect switch for the drive input power if necessary However do not turn OFF power to the inverter during its operation unless it is an emergency 3 Turn the inverter s front panel potentiometer if it exists to the MIN position fully counter clockwise CAUTION The heat sink fins will have a high temperature Be careful not to touch them Otherwise there is the danger of getting burned CAUTION The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high speed Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before operating the inverter Otherwise there is the danger of injury 2 28 Powerup Test CAUTION If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default setting 50Hz 60Hz be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the respective manufacturer Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting their approval Otherwise there is the danger of equipment damage and or injury to personnel danger of equipment damage e Is the shorting bar between the P and PD terminals installed DO NOT power or operate the inverter if the jumper is removed CAUTION Check the following before and during the powerup test Otherwise there is the 2 5 e Is the direction of the motor rotation correc
505. stop function is enabled intelligent input terminals 1 and 3 are used exclusively for this function and no other functions can be assigned to these terminals Even if other functions have been assigned to these terminals these are automatically disabled and these terminals are used exclusively for the emergency stop function Terminal 1 function This terminal always serves as the a N O contact for the reset RS signal This signal resets the inverter and releases the inverter from the trip due to emergency stop error code E37 Terminal 3 function This terminal always serves as the b N C contact for the emergency stop EMR signal This signal shuts off the inverter output without the operation by internal CPU software This signal makes the inverter trip due to emergency stop error code E37 NOTE If intelligent input terminal 3 is left unconnected the cable connected to the terminal is disconnected or the signal logic is improper the inverter trips due to emergency stop E37 If this occurs check and correct the wiring and signal logic and then input the reset RS signal Only the reset RS signal input from intelligent input terminal 1 can release the inverter from tripping due to emergency stop E37 The inverter cannot be released from the E37 trip status by any operation from the digital operator SWI1 Switch Setting Intelligent input terminal 1 Intelligent input terminal 3
506. strated you do not have to program very many param eters to run the motor In fact most applications would benefit only from programming just a few specific parameters This chapter will explain the purpose of each set of parameters and help you choose the ones that are important to your application If you are developing a new application for the inverter and a motor finding the right parame ters to change is mostly an exercise in optimization Therefore it is okay to begin running the motor with a loosely tuned system By making specific individual changes and observing their effects you can achieve a finely tuned system And the SJ7002 Series inverters have a built in auto tuning algorithm to set certain motor parameters The front panel keypad is the first and best way to get to know the inverter s capabilities Every function or programmable parameter is accessible from the keypad All keypads have the same basic layout but with different features The OPE SRE has a potentiometer knob for frequency setting input The SRW OEX Read write Copy Unit has the ability to upload copy or download write all inverter parameter data to from memory in the copy unit itself This unit is useful in transferring one inverter s settings to another The following table shows various programming options the features unique to each device and the cables required Cables for optional Part Parameter Funn S
507. surement without load U T1 Inverter L1 R W T3 V class Diode bridge Voltmeter V class Diode bridge Voltmeter 200V class 600V 0 01A min 300V range 200V class 600V 0 01A min 300V range 400V class 1000V 0 1 A min 600V range 400V class 1000V 0 1 A min 600V range HIGH VOLTAGE Be careful not to touch wiring or connector terminals when working with the inverters and taking measurements Be sure to place the measurement circuitry above in an insulated housing before using them 6 27 SJ7002 Inverter IGBT Test Method The following procedure will check the power module including inverter transistors IGBTs IPM diodes and thyrister until replacement of inverter 1 000 000 start stop cycles 1 Disconnect input power to terminals R S and T and motor terminals U V and W 2 Disconnect any wires from terminals P and RB for regenerative braking 3 Use a Digital Volt Meter DVM and set it for 1 ohm resistance range You can check the status of the charging state of terminals R S T U V W RB P and N of the inverter and the probe of the DVM by measuring the charging state Almost infinite ohms non conducting and 0 to 10 ohms conducting NOTE The resistance values for the diodes or
508. sy sequence parameter U23 0 0 0 lt P124 Easy sequence parameter U24 0 0 0 P125 Easy sequence parameter U25 0 0 0 P126 Easy sequence parameter U26 0 0 0 P127 Easy sequence parameter U27 0 0 0 P128 Easy sequence parameter U28 0 0 0 P129 Easy sequence parameter U29 0 0 0 P130 Easy sequence parameter U30 0 0 0 P131 Easy sequence parameter U31 0 0 0 User selectable Menu Functions SJ7002 Inverter C 19 5 xipuaddy P Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Name FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan U001 no no no U002 no no no U003 no no no U004 no no no U005 no no no U006 User selected function no disabled no no no U007 or use any of the functions D001 to P049 io j U008 no no no U009 no no no U010 no no no U011 no no no U012 no no no CE EMC Installation Guidelines In This Appendix page CE EMC Installation Guidelines r rrnnrvnnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnnnnnnvvnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnr 2 Precautions for EMC Models SJ700 004 to 1500 o ae 4 Precautions for EMC Models SJ700 1850 to 4000 ee 5 D 2 CE EMC Installation Guidelines m Zs C Q 2 lt CE EMC Installation Guidelines You are required to satisfy the EMC directive 89 336 EEC when using an SJ7002 inverter in an EU count
509. t 2 34 Using the Front Panel Keypad D E eo 2 jo 2 b o gt and Installation Configure the Inverter for the Number of Motor Poles The number of magnetic poles of a motor is determined by the motor s internal winding arrangement The specifications label on the motor usually indicates its number of poles For proper operation verify the parameter setting matches the motor poles Many industrial motors have four poles corresponding to the default setting in the inverter Follow the steps in the table below to verify the motor poles setting and change it if necessary the table resumes action from the end of the previous table Action Display Func Parameter ee key A nr A Group selected Press the key three times H Hr rou sele TART First H parameter Press the key HGO P Press the AN key five times HOOH Motor poles parameter 2 2 poles Press the key q 4 4 poles default 6 6 poles 8 8 poles Set to match your motor your Press the or key as needed display may be different Stores parameter returns to H Press the key 10 HH Yy Group list This step concludes the parameter setups for the inverter You are almost ready to run the motor for the first time TIP If you became lost during any of these steps first observe the state of the PRG LED Then study the Keypad Navigational Map on page 2 31 t
510. t S3 e Did the inverter trip during acceleration or deceleration T e Were the rpm and frequency meter readings as expected s 2 e Were there any abnormal motor vibrations or noise So 25 Powering the If you have followed all the steps cautions and warnings up to this point you re ready to apply Inverter power After doing so the following events should occur The POWER LED will illuminate The numeric 7 segment LEDs will display a test pattern then stop at 8 8 The Hz LED will be ON If the motor starts running unexpectedly or any other problem occurs press the STOP key Only if necessary should you remove power to the inverter as a remedy NOTE If the inverter has been previously powered and programmed the LEDs other than the POWER LED may illuminate differently than as indicated above If necessary you can initial ize all parameters to the factory default settings See Restoring Factory Default Settings on page 6 16 SJ7002 Inverter 2 29 Using the Front Panel Keypad Front Panel Introduction Parameter Editing and Controls Please take a moment to familiarize yourself with the keypad layout shown in the figure below Parameter Display Power LED Run Stop LED PANGEED HITACHI Display Units LEDs Hertz Program Monitor LED nn Run Key Enable LED Run Key Volts or Amperes KW both ON Percent 5 55 Q az 32 z 0 MC fe O 5 Q Potentiometer E
511. t will be cleared within 30 ms after the onset of the Reset command Note the following When the control terminal RS input is already ON at powerup for more than 4 seconds the remote operator display is R ERROR COMM lt 2 gt the display of the digital operator is However the inverter has no error To clear the digital operator error turn OFF the terminal RS input and press one of the operator keys The active edge leading or trailing of the RS signal is determined by the setting of C102 A terminal configured with the RS function can only be configured as a normally open contact The terminal cannot be used in the normally closed contact state e When input power is turned ON the inverter performs the same reset operation as it does when a pulse on the RS terminal occurs NOTE For inverter models 1850Hxx to 4000Hxx After an external reset input RS occurs the internal cooling fan turn ON after stopping once WARNING After the Reset command is given and the alarm reset occurs the motor will restart suddenly if the Run command is already active Be sure to set the alarm reset after verifying that the Run command is OFF to prevent injury to personnel Thermistor Thermal Protection Opt Code Symbol TH Valid for Inputs TH only Required B098 B099 Settings and C085 Default terminal TH Three wire Interface Operation Opt Code 20
512. t Output Terminals 2 2 of g TS a Og av Thermal Warning The purpose of the electronic thermal setting is to protect the motor from overloading Signal Opt Code 10 Symbol THM Valid for 11 to 15 Outputs ALx Required Settings oe Default Requires terminals config overheating and being damaged The setting is based on the rated motor current The inverter calculates the thermal rise heating of the motor using the current output to the motor squared integrated over the time spent at those levels This feature allows the motor to draw excessive current for relatively short periods of time allowing time for cooling The Thermal Warning output THM turns ON to provide a warning before the inverter trips for electronic thermal protection You can set a unique thermal protection level for each of the three motor profiles as shown in the table below Function pen Code Function Description Data or Range B012 B212 Electronic thermal setting calculated Range is 0 2 rated current to B312 within the inverter from current output 1 2 rated current B013 B213 Electronic thermal characteristic use 00 Reduced torque B313 the setting that matches your load 01 Constant torque 02 Free setting The electronic thermal overload function uses the output current and time to calculate thermal heating of the motor Use parameter C061 to set the t
513. t a particular type of error event has occurred resulting in an inverter trip In addition to causing the normal trip alarm the following error Signal events also will turn ON the MJA output when assigned to an intelligent output terminal Opt Code 53 Symbol MJA Error Name Code Valid for 11 to 15 Outputs ALx ED CT current transformer error Required Ell CPU error none Settings E LY Ground fault Default Requires ee Fea Inverter thermal trip with low fan speed terminals config E23 Gate array error E2S Main circuit error 4 62 Using Intelligent Output Terminals 2 2 of g TS a Og av Window The window comparator function outputs turn ON when You can also monitor each analog Comparator input by comparing it to a threshold value This feature allows the inverter to detect discon Signals nected signal wiring loss of power at a signal transmitter etc When the input is below the set threshold value the inverter substitutes the threshold value for the input The related parameters Opt Code 54 WCO are given in the following tables and 55 WCOI Symbol 56 1wco er Symbol Function Name Valid for 11 to 15 Ouputs ALx 54 WCO O terminal window comparator Required Er 55 WCOI OI terminal window comparator Settings 54 WCO2 02 terminal window comparator Default Requires t
514. t key suoesado D ro fe 5 e 5 Ke The three examples below show how the USP function works in the scenarios described at the bottom of the diagram The error code E13 indicates the USP trip state and corresponds to the Alarm signal in the diagram Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Power supply I I I FW i USP i RS l Alarm Output l l Loo l l i frequency If the Run command is already OFF at powerup the inverter output starts normally If the alarm is cleared during Run command the inverter output restarts automatically When USP is ON after powerup the alarm E13 will clear when the Run command FW or RV turns OFF Note the following e Note that when a USP error occurs and it is canceled by a reset from the RS terminal input or keypad the inverter restarts immediately Even when the trip state is canceled by turning the terminal RS ON and OFF after an under voltage trip E09 occurs the USP function will be performed 4 22 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Commercial Power Source Enable Opt Code 14 Symbol CS Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Required 2003 B007 Settings Default Requires terminal config e When the Run command is active immediately after the power is turned ON a USP error will occur When this function is used wait for at least three 3 seconds after powerup before applying a Run command T
515. t models 0 5 to 15 0 kHz 3 0 3 0 3 0 Xv Z S 1850 and 3150 are 0 5 to 10 kHz 2 1 2 1 2 1 p Sets the PWM carrier internal switching freq 4000 is 0 5 to 3 kHz 1 9 1 9 19 XY all models are subject to derating B084 Initialization mode parameters TRF OG Trip history clear 00 00 00 xx or trip history STE DATA 0 I Parameter initialization TEF G2 Trip history clear and parameter DATA initialization B085 Country code for initialization JFH OG Japan version 01 02 00 xx Select default parameter values EUR G I Europe version for country on initialization i A USA G2 USA version B086 Frequency scaling conversion factor 0 1 to 99 9 1 0 1 0 1 0 Vv Specify a constant to scale D007 to display in engineering units B087 STOP key enable OH G0 Enable 00 00 00 Xv Select whether the STOP key on OFF G Disable the keypad is enabled req i A002401 03 04 or 05 5 0FF 02 Disable only the STOP function B091 B088 Stop Mode Restart Mode Configuration You can configure how the inverter performs a standard stop each time Run FWD and REV signals turn OFF Setting B091 deter mines whether the inverter will control the deceleration or whether it will perform a free run stop coast to a stop When using the free run stop selection it is imperative to also configure how you want the inverter to resume control of motor speed Setting BO88 determines whether the inverter will ensure the
516. tandard Functions Keypad Defaults Run pee Pat Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 pa p SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA pn 2 A038 Jog frequency setting 0 5 to 9 99 Hz 1 00 1 00 1 00 Y y Defines limited speed for jog A039 Jog stop mode FRS OG Free run stop jogging disabled during 00 00 00 XV motor run Defines how end of jog stops DEC 0 I Controlled deceleration jogging the motor disabled during motor run DE 02 DC braking to stop jogging disabled during motor run R FRS 03 Free run stop jogging always enabled R IEC 04 Controlled deceleration jogging always g enabled a 2 F TE 85 DC braking to stop jogging always Do enabled 530 25 5 A O Torque Control The inverter generates the motor output Inverter Torque Control Algorithms Algorithms according to the V f algorithm or the sensorless vector control algorithm Param A044 V f control constant torque V f control variable torque eter A044 selects the inverter torque control algorithm for generating the frequency output as shown in the diagram to the right A244 and A344 for 2nd and 3rd motors respectively The factory default is 00 constant torque V f control Review the following descriptions to help you choose the best torque control algorithm for your application The built in V f curves are oriented toward developing constant
517. te control data clearing OPE Operator control SF1 SF7 Multispeed bits 0 7 OLR Overload limit change TL torque limit enable TRQ1 torque limit selection bit 1 LSB TRQ2 torque limit selection bit 2 MSB PPI Proportional Proportional Integral mode selection BOK Brake confirmation signal ORT Orientation home search LAC LAC LAD cancel PCLR Position deviation reset STAT pulse train position command input enable ADD trigger for frequency addition F TM forcible terminal operation ATR permission of torque commend input KHC cumulative power clearance SON servo ON FOC pre excitation MI1 general purpose input 1 MI general purpose input 2 MI3 general purpose input 3 MI4 general purpose input 4 MIS general purpose input 5 MI6 general purpose input 6 MI7 general purpose input 7 MIS general purpose input 8 AHD analog command holding NO not selected Thermistor input One terminal PTC characteristics SJ7002 Inverter EEIN Item General Specifications Output signal Intelligent Output terminals assign six functions to five open collector outputs and one relay NO NC contact RUN run signal FA1 Frequency arrival type 1 constant speed FA2 Frequency arrival type 2 over frequency OL overload advance notice signal 1 OD Output deviation for PID control AL alarm signal FA3 Frequency arrival type 3 at frequency
518. tely disconnected CAUTION Hazardous main terminals for any interconnection motor contact breaker filter etc must be inaccessible in the final installation CAUTION The end application must be in accordance with BS EN60204 1 Refer to the section Step by Step Basic Installation on page 2 6 The diagram dimensions are to be suitably amended for your application CAUTION Connection to field wiring terminals must be reliably fixed having two indepen dent means of mechanical support Using a termination with cable support figure below or strain relief cable clamp etc Terminal ring lug Cable support Cable CAUTION A three pole disconnection device must be fitted to the incoming main power supply close to the inverter Additionally a protection device meeting IEC947 1 IEC947 3 must be fitted at this point protection device data shown in Determining Wire and Fuse Sizes on page 2 18 NOTE The above instructions together with any other requirements are highlighted in this manual and must be followed for continued LVD European Low Voltage Directive compli ance Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual rrrrr P PPPPP PP Installation Cautions for Mounting Procedures CAUTION Be sure to install the unit on flame resistant material such as a steel plate Otherwise there is the danger of fire CAUTION Be sure not to place any flammable materials near the inverter Otherwise there i
519. tempt to either run or stop the motor during the auto tuning procedure unless it is an emergency If this occurs initialize the inverter s parameters to the factory default settings see Restoring Factory Default Settings on page 6 16 Then reprogram the parameters unique to your application and initiate the auto tuning procedure again c Release any mechanical brake that would interfere with the motor rotating freely d Disconnect any mechanical load from the motor The torque during auto tuning is not enough to move some loads e Ifthe motor is part of a mechanism with limited travel such as lead screw or elevator select HO01 01 so that the auto tuning will not cause motor rotation 6 Note that even when you select HO01 01 for no rotation sometimes the motor will rotate 7 When using a motor that is one frame size smaller than the inverter rating enable the D gt overload restriction function Then set the overload restriction level to 1 5 times the rated 2 5 output current of the motor 2 5 S Auto tuning After the preparations above are complete perform the auto tuning procedure by following the seem Procedure steps below S 1 Set H001 01 auto tuning without motor rotation or H001 02 auto tuning with motor rotation 2 Turn the Run command ON The inverter will then automatically sequence through the following actions a First AC excitation motor does not rotate b Second AC excitation motor does n
520. ter It is possible that the previous power OFF occurred when the load was not at zero position Or it may be that an external force moved the load during the power OFF period If you do not perform a zero return operation after power ON then the inverter uses the current position at powerup as the zero position Zero return limit ORL Inverter Zero return trigger Output to motor Encoder Z pulses The three available zero return modes differ in the overall search speed final approach direction to the origin and the limit switch input transition or encoder pulse if used causing the final stop Choose the zero return mode that best fits your application 2 2 of g TS a Og av Low speed Zero Return P070 Low speed zero return level 1 Motor accelerates for the specified acceleration time to the low zero return level return speed Output ____ 2 2 Motor runs at the low zero return frequency 7 Ves speed 0 a i Position 3 Inverter stops motor and sets position value to zero when ORL signal ORG I turns ON ORL High speed 1 Zero Ret rti P071 High zero return level 1 Motor accelerates for specified 2 acceleration time to high zero return Output 4 speed frequency 2 Motor runs at high zero return speed 3 Motor starts deceleration when o Position ORL signal turns ON i sa p e s g Se 4 Motor runs in reverse direction at i
521. the ModBus network for control for example However an external device can turn ON the F TM input to force the inverter to temporarily allow control frequency source and Run command via control terminals When the F TM input is OFF then the inverter uses the regular sources specified by A001 and A002 again When changing the F TM state during Run Mode inverter is driving the motor the inverter will stop the motor before the new F TM state takes effect The torque control enable function is available in the vector control with encoder feedback mode A044 05 You can use the inverter not only in speed control or pulse train position control but also with the torque control function Suitable applications include material winding machines The torque command input is enabled when the ATR intelligent input assigned with option code 52 is ON You can select one of four torque command input methods digital operator and three analog input terminals by the torque command input selection Code Function Data or Range Description P033 Torque command input 00 O terminal election 01 OI terminal 02 02 terminal 03 Inverter keypad P034 P034 Torque command setting 0 to 200 Torque setting for the input from the digital operator P033 03 P035 Torque command polarity 00 Indicated by signal polarity at select 02 terminal Ol Depends on motor direction
522. the five possible sources The ADD Frequency is a value you can store in parameter A145 The ADD Frequency is summed with or subtracted from the output frequency setting only when the ADD terminal is ON Function A146 selects whether ligent input as the ADD terminal your application can selectively apply the fixed value in A145 to offset positively or negatively the inverter Frequency source setting Output frequency setting A146 ADD direction select SJ7002 Inverter 4 35 Force Terminal Mode Opt Code 51 Symbol F TM Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 Required 4001 A002 Settings Default Requires terminal config Torque Control Enable Opt Code 52 Symbol ATR Valid for Inputs 1 to 8 A044 05 P033 P034 EA P035 P039 eUINgS P040 P036 P037 P038 Monitor D009 D010 Settings D012 Default Requires terminal config The purpose of this intelligent input is to allow a device to force the inverter to allow control of the following two parameters via the control terminals e A001 Frequency source setting 01 control terminals FW and RV A002 Run command source setting 01 control terminals O or OI Some applications will require one or both settings above to use a source other than the terminals You may prefer to normally use the inverter s keypad and potentiometer or to use
523. the following table Item DCL Specifications DCL models DCL H xxx 185 315 400 Rated current A 515 0 680 1042 Insulation class Type H Weight kg Ib 65 75 90 The maximum carrier frequency F that provides full inverter rated output depends on the particular inverter model However you may operate an inverter at the maximum settable F with an output derating Refer to the table below for the carrier frequency values and output deratings 200V Class Inverters Capacity Maximum Derating at Capacity Maximum Derating at kW F kHz Fc 15 kHz kW F kHz Fc 15 kHz 0 4 15 100 15 12 95 60 8A or less 0 75 15 100 18 5 10 90 68 4A or less 1 5 15 100 22 7 70 66 5A or less 2 2 15 100 30 5 80 96 8A or less 3 7 4 0 15 100 37 10 75 108 7A or less 5 5 15 100 45 5 70 127 4A or less 7 5 15 100 55 5 70 154 0A or less 11 12 90 41 4A or less SJ7002 Inverter 1 13 400V Class Inverters Capacity Maximum Derating at Capacity Maximum Derating at kW F kHz Maximum Fe kW Fe kHz Maximum Fe a 0 75 15 100 37 8 80 60 0A or less 2 1 5 15 100 45 9 75 68 2A or less 3 2 2 15 100 55 6 60 67 2A or less 3 7 15 100 75 6 85 126 7A or less 5 5 15 100 90 4 75 132 0A or less 7 5 15 100 110 6 70 151 9A or less 11 15 100 150 3 60 156 0A or less
524. thod IP20 NEMA 1 models 750xFU2 to 4000xFU2 is IP00 Line to line sine wave pulse width modulation PWM control Output frequency range 4 0 1 to 400 Hz Frequency accuracy Digital command 0 01 of the maximum frequency Analog command 0 2 at 25 C 10 C Frequency setting resolution Digital 0 01 Hz Analog max frequency 4000 O terminal 12 bit 0 to 10V OI terminal 12 bit 4 20mA 02 terminal 12 bit 10 to 10V Volt Freq characteristic 5 V F optionally variable 30 to 400Hz base frequency V F control constant torque reduced torque sensorless vector control 0 Hz range sensorless vector control Speed fluctuation 0 5 sensorless vector control or 0 Hz range sensorless vector control Acceleration deceleration time 0 01 to 3600 sec linear curve profiles accel decel selection two stage accel decel Starting Torque 6 200 at 0 3 Hz SLV or 0Hz range SLV 150 at 0 Hz range SLV with motor one frame size down For 750Hxx to 1500Hxx 180 at 0 3Hz 150 at 0 Hz range with feedback board with 0Hz range sensorless vector control or with motor one frame size down For 750Hxx to 1500Hxx 130 at 0 3Hz Carrier frequency range Models 004xFU2 to 550xFU2 0 5 to 15 0 kHz Models 750xFU2 to 1500xFU2 0 5 to 10 0 kHz Models 1850HFU2 to 4000HFU2 0 5 to 3 0 kHz DC braking Performs at start under set frequency at declaration v
525. ting electronic Data point coordinates for 1311h 04881 0 to rated 0 1 A thermal current 1 Ampere axis vertical in the current free form curve B017 Free setting electronic Data point coordinates for Hz 1312h 04882 0 to 400 1 Hz thermal frequency 2 axis horizontal in the free form curve B018 Free setting electronic Data point coordinates for 1313h 04883 0 to rated 0 1 A thermal current 2 Ampere axis vertical in the current free form curve B019 Free setting electronic Data point coordinates for Hz 1314h 04884 0 to 400 I Hz thermal frequency 3 axis horizontal in the free form curve B020 Free setting electronic Data point coordinates for 1315h 04885 0to rated 0 1 A thermal current 3 Ampere axis vertical in the current free form curve B021 Overload restriction opera 00 Disable 1316h 04886 0 to3 tion mode 01 Enable for acceleration and constant speed 02 Enable for constant speed only 03 Enable for accel decel and constant speed B022 Overload restriction setting 0 20 x rated current to 1 80 x 1317h 04887 200 to 0 1 rated current A 2000 B023 Deceleration rate at 0 10 to 30 00 seconds 1318h 04888 10 to 3000 0 1 sec overload restriction B024 Overload restriction opera 00 Disable 1319h 04889 0to 3 tion mode 2 01 Enable for acceleration and constant speed 02 Enable for constant speed only 03 Enable for accel decel
526. tion 3 39 Droop control 4 27 Duty cycle A 3 Dynamic braking 5 6 A 3 usage ratio 3 47 5 6 E Easy sequence 4 38 Editing parameters 2 29 2 32 in Run Mode 3 5 3 38 4 23 Electromagnetic compatibility D 2 Electronic thermal overload 3 32 Elevator braking 3 48 EMC installation guidelines D 2 EMC installation precautions D4 Emergency Stop function 2 37 EMI A 3 EMI filter 5 4 Encoder feedback 3 17 Energy savings mode 3 23 Error PID loop 4 46 A 3 Error codes programming 3 75 trip events 6 6 Event clearing 4 24 Expansion bay 2 4 Expansion card functions 3 69 Expansion cards digital input 5 5 encoder feedback 5 5 input signals 4 34 output signals 4 54 External brake control 4 32 4 54 External trip 421 F F Group functions 3 9 Factory settings restoring 6 16 Fan default setting 347 Fan outlet 2 8 2 26 Fan replacement 6 23 Fan unit Filler plate 1 4 FAQ 1 18 Features 1 2 2 2 Ferrite core 5 4 Filters noise suppression 5 2 Fine tuning functions 3 30 Force operation from digital operator 4 28 Force terminal mode 4 35 Forward run command 4 15 Forward reverse drive stop 4 41 Forward reverse rotation signals 4 61 Four quadrant operation A 3 Free run stop 3 45 3 62 4 18 4 20 A 3 Frequency arrival signals 4 44 Frequency matching 3 45 3 62 Frequency setting A 3 Frequency related functions 3 20 Frequently asked questions 1 18 Functions
527. tion curve setting 00 00 00 A101 OI L input active range start frequency 0 00 0 00 0 00 A102 OI L input active range end frequency 0 00 0 00 0 00 A103 OI L input active range start current 20 20 20 A104 OI L input active range end current 100 100 100 N xipueddy C 6 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry as ae E D Q 2 lt A Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Naa FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan A105 OI L input start frequency enable 01 01 01 A111 02 L input active range start frequency 0 00 0 00 0 00 A112 02 L input active range end frequency 0 00 0 00 0 00 A113 02 L input active range start voltage 100 100 100 A114 02 L input active range end voltage 100 100 100 A131 Acceleration curve constants setting 02 02 02 A132 Deceleration curve constants setting 02 02 02 A141 A input select for calculate function 02 02 02 A142 B input select for calculate function 03 03 03 A143 Calculation symbol 00 00 00 A145 ADD frequency 0 00 0 00 0 00 A146 ADD direction select 00 00 00 A150 EL S curve acceleration ratio 1 25 25 25 A151 EL S curve acceleration ratio 2 25 25 25 A152 EL S curve acceleration ratio 3 25 25 25 A153 EL S curve acceleration ratio 4 25 25 25 J7002 Inverter Fine Tuning
528. tive Symbol AL a We must make a distinction between the Alarm Valid for 11 to 15 Signal AL and the alarm relay contacts ALO Outputs ALx AL1 and AL2 The signal AL is a logic Fault Requived function which you can assign to the open collec Fault SA C026 C036 tor output terminals 11 to 15 or the relay Alarm signal outputs The most common and default use of active Default Relay ALO the relay is for AL thus the labeling of its termi terminals AL1 AL2 nals Use an open collector output terminals 11 to 15 for a low current logic signal inter face or to energize a small relay 50 mA maximum Use the relay output to interface to higher voltage and current devices 10 mA minimum Note the following e When the alarm output is set to normally closed a time delay of less than 2 seconds occurs until the contact is closed when the power is turned ON e Terminals 11 15 are open collector outputs so the electrical specifications of AL are different from the contact output terminals ALO AL1 AL2 e When the inverter power supply is turned OFF the alarm signal output is valid as long as the external control circuit has power This signal output has the delay time 300ms nominal from the fault alarm output e The relay contact specifications are in Specifications of Control and Logic Connections on page 4 9 The contact diagrams for different
529. tly Asked Questions rrrvrrrnrrrvvrrrvrrrnrrrvrrrnrrrnrrrnrrrvrrrnnrerer 18 Introduction Introduction Main Features Congratulations on your purchase of an SJ7002 Series Hitachi inverter This inverter drive features state of the art circuitry and components to provide high performance The housing footprint is excep tionally small given the size of the corresponding motor The Hitachi SJ7002 product line includes more than twenty inverter models to cover motor sizes from 1 2 horsepower to 500 horsepower in either 230 VAC or 480 VAC power input versions The main features are e 200V Class and 400V Class inverters e U S or European version available OD fob 2 oO S 09 o gt fob 5 e Sensorless vector control e Regenerative braking circuit Different operator keypads available for RUN STOP control and setting parameters Built in RS 422 communications interface to allow configuration from a PC and for field bus external modules e Sixteen programmable speed levels Motor constants are programmable or may be set via auto tuning PID control adjusts motor speed automatically to maintain a process variable value The design of Hitachi inverters overcomes many of the traditional trade offs between speed torque and efficiency The performance characteristics are e High starting torque of 150 rating or greater e Continuous operation at 100 rated torque within a 1 10 speed
530. to to 12AEh 04782 A141 A input select for calculate R W 00 Digital operator A020 12AFh 04783 Oto 7 function A220 A320 01 Keypad potentiometer 02 O input 03 OI input 04 Comm port 05 Expansion card 1 06 Expansion card 2 07 Pulse train frequency train input A142 B input select for calculate R W 00 Digital operator A020 12B0h 04784 0to7 function A220 A320 01 Keypad potentiometer 02 O input 03 OI input 04 Comm port 05 Expansion card 1 06 Expansion card 2 07 Pulse train frequency train input A143 Calculation symbol R W 00 ADD A input B input 12B1h 04785 0 1 2 01 SUB A input B input 02 MUL A input x B input Reserved 12B2h 04786 B 52 ModBus Data Listing jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt Holding Registers A Group Standard Functions Network Data Func Code Name R W Description Register Range Res hex dec A145 H ADD frequency R W 0 00 to 99 99 12B3h 04787 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 100 0 to 400 0 Hz Al45 L R W 12B4h 04788 A146 ADD direction select R W 00 Plus adds A145 value to 12B5h 04789 0 I output frequency 01 Minus subtracts A145 value from output freq Reserved 12B6h 04790t to o 12B8h
531. tor constant Io Ist motor 0 00 655 3 Units A H024 Motor constant J 1st motor 0 001 9999 Units kgm H030 Auto tuned constant R1 Ist motor 0 000 65 53 Units ohms 2 2 of g TS a Og av 4 70 Setting Motor Constants for Vector Control Func Name Data Notes H031 Auto tuned constant R2 1st motor 0 000 65 53 Units ohms H032 Auto tuned constant L Ist motor 0 00 655 3 Units mH H033 Auto tuned constant Io 1st motor 0 00 655 3 Units A H034 Auto tuned constant J 1st motor 0 001 9999 Units kgm The inverter has three separate motor constant sets named 1st 2nd and 3rd The 1st motor constant set is the default while the SET and SET intelligent inputs select the 2nd and 3rd constant sets respectively The torque control methods are valid to use only if a particular motor constant set includes parameters for the selected control method The following table lists the vector control methods and shows the ones that are valid for each motor constant set Vector Control Method 1st motor 2nd motor 3rd motor V f constant torque Y v v V f variable torque V f free setting curve Sensorless vector control SLV Sensorless vector control OHz domain SN SESE SES KI RIR SIS xi x xj xi Vector control with encoder feedback The motor data selection is available only to the 1st motor consta
532. tor is less than this value the inverter will restart at 0 Hz B008 Retry after trip select ALM OG Always retry after trip 00 00 00 Xv 2ST I Start with 0 Hz RST G2 Start with frequency matching FTF 03 Retry after deceleration and stop with matching frequency FIA 04 Start with active matching frequency B009 Retry after undervoltage 16 00 16 times 00 00 00 Xv select a FREE I Unlimited BO10 Retry count select after over voltage or 1 to 3 times 3 3 3 Xy overcurrent B011 Retry wait time after trip 0 3 to 100 0 seconds 1 0 1 0 1 0 XV CAUTION When a loss of phase occurs increased ripple current will markedly reduce main capacitor life over time Diode bridge failure can also result If phase loss occurs under load the inverter could be damaged Please pay particular attention to the setting of function B006 3 32 B Group Fine Tuning Functions 2 a le CE 5 2D C e O 42 2 ob E oO iS av oO Electronic Thermal Overload Alarm Setting The thermal overload detection protects Trip current the inverter and motor from overheating reduction due to an excessive load It uses a current factor inverse time curve to determine the trip x 1 0 point The thermal overload alarm THM Constant torque B013 01 is the resulting intelligent output x 0 8 et B013 00 First use B013 to select the torque x 0 6 a characteristic
533. torque or V f control free setting curve Sensorless vector SLV control variable torque characteristics see graphs below Sensorless vector The free setting curve provides an even i Fr OHz domain more flexible characteristic but it requires more parameter settings e Sensorless vector control calculates an Vector control with 95 ideal torque vector based on current Sensor motor position winding currents and so on It is a more robust control method than the V f control methods However it is more dependent on actual motor parameters and will require you to set these values carefully or to perform the auto tuning procedure see Auto tuning of Motor Constants on page 4 71 to obtain optimum performance e Sensorless vector control OMz domain increases the low speed torque performance 0 2 5Hz via an advanced Hitachi torque control algorithm However you will need to size the inverter for one frame size larger than the motor for proper operation e Vector control with sensor requires expansion card SJ FB encoder feedback board and a motor shaft encoder Choose this method when precise position velocity control is required SJ7002 Inverter 315 Constant and Variable Torque The graph below left shows the constant torque character istic from OHz to the base frequency A003 The voltage remains constant for output frequencies higher than the base frequency Output Constant torque Output
534. tput 99 9 99 9 99 9 DCL Watt loss at 70 output 0 1 0 1 0 1 approximate KW F TO0 output 0 2 0 2 0 2 Dynamic braking w o braking unit 8 8 8 10 10 10 approx torque short time stop 7 with braking unit Refer to separate DB Unit instruction m anual or contact your Hitachi distributor DC braking Electrical filtering Variable operating frequen Built in EMC filter and zero phase reactor cy time and braking force External DC reactor and ferrite core Weight kg Ib 55 121 55 121 70 54 140 308 210 463 360 792 Footnotes for the preceding tables and the table that follows Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 The protection method conforms to JEM 1030 The applicable motor refers to Hitachi standard 3 phase motor 4 pole When using other motors care must be taken to prevent the rated motor current 50 60 Hz from exceeding the rated output current of the inverter The output voltage decreases as the main supply voltage decreases except when using the AVR function In any case the output voltage cannot exceed the input power supply voltage To operate the motor beyond 50 60 Hz consult the motor manufacturer for the maximum allowable rotation speed When SLV is selected please set the carrier frequency higher than 2 1 kHz At the rated voltage when using a Hitachi standard
535. tput chatter near the threshold value Hz e F is 1 of the max output frequency 0 e Fog is 2 of the max output frequency I The hysteresis effect causes the output to FAT fi om turn ON slightly early as the speed approaches the threshold Then the turn OFF point is slightly delayed The 1 and 2 values also apply to the remaining Frequency arrival outputs discussed below Frequency Arrival outputs FA2 and FA4 work the same way they just use two separate threshold pairs as shown in the figure These provide for separate Hz acceleration and deceleration thresholds Threshoids to provide more flexibility than for FA1 FA2 uses C042 and C045 for C042 C045 ON and OFF thresholds respectively FA4 uses C043 and C046 for ON and C043 C046 OFF thresholds respectively Having different accel and decel thresholds 0 provides an asymmetrical output l i I function However you can use equal FA2 FA4 l ON i ON and OFF thresholds if desired Frequency Arrival outputs FA3 and FA5 use the same threshold parameters as FA2 and FA4 above but operate in a slightly different way Refer to the diagram below After the frequency arrives at the first threshold during acceleration and turns ON FA3 or FA5 they turn OFF again as the output frequency accelerates further The second thresholds work similarly during deceleration In this way we have separate ON OFF pulses for acceleration and deceleration
536. tput instance 20 21 100 21 21 21 xx number P047 DeviceNet polled I O Input instance number 70 71 101 71 71 71 xx P048 Inverter action on DeviceNet TEF OG Trip 01 01 01 xx idle mode FTF G I Decelerate and trip HO 02 Hold last speed FRS 03 Free run stop DEC 04 Decelerate and stop P049 DeviceNet motor poles poles poles 00 to 38 even numbers only 0 0 0 xx setting for RPM SJ7002 Inverter 3 71 Keypad Defaults Run ae unt Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 i oce Ger SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 ae EU USA pm P055 Pulse train frequency scale 1 0 to 50 0 kHz 25 0 25 0 250 XW P056 Pulse train frequency filter time constant 0 01 to 2 00 seconds 0 10 0 10 0 10 XY P057 Pulse train frequency bias 100 to 100 0 0 0 Xv P058 Pulse train frequency limit 0 to 100 100 100 100 X P060 Multi stage position setting 0 Reverse side to forward side upper four 0 0 0 Vv to to Multi stage position setting 7 digits including sign P067 P068 Zero return mode selection LOH OG Low speed 00 00 00 VV Hil G I High speed Hi2 G2 High speed 2 P069 Zero return direction FH OG Forward 00 00 00 Vv selection RH 0 I Reverse P070 Low speed zero return frequency 0 00 to 10 00 Hz 0 00 0 00 000 vv P071
537. tput turns OFF as long as PID Enable is active A071 1 24 PIDC PID Reset Resets the PID loop controller The main consequence is that the integrator sum is forced to zero 26 CAS Control gain setting To select the source of internal speed loop gain OFF selects parameters H050 to H052 or H250 to H252 for 2nd motor ON selects alternate parameters H070 to H072 27 UP Remote Control Accelerates increases output frequency motor from current UP Function motorized frequency speed pot 28 DWN Remote Control DOWN Decelerates decreases output frequency motor from current Function motorized speed pot frequency SJ7002 Inverter EEJ Input Function Summary Table Option Terminal Ga Code Symbol Function Name Description 29 UDC Remote Control Data Clears the UP DWN frequency memory by forcing it to equal Clearing the set frequency parameter F001 Setting C101 must be set 00 to enable this function to work 31 OPE Operator Control Forces the source of the output frequency setting A001 and the RUN command A002 to be from the digital operator F001 and the Run key respectively 32 SFI Multi speed bit I Multiple speed select Bit 1 33 SF2 Multi speed bit 2 Multiple speed select Bit 2 34 SF3 Multi speed bit 3 Multiple speed select Bit 3 35 SF4 Multi speed bit 4 Multiple speed select Bit 4 36 SF5 Multi speed bit 5 Multiple speed select
538. ts 00 none C074 Parity 01 Even parity 02 Odd parity 01 1 bit C075 Stop bits 02 2 bits C078 Wait time 0 to 1000 0 to 1000 ms time that the inverter waits to respond to network master C079 Communication 00 ASCII protocol select 01 ModBus RTU For inverters on the same network some settings must match from inverter to inverter These include Baud rate data bits parity and stop bits However the node address on each inverter must be unique used only once on the network Communication Use the communication test mode to check the RS485 serial port hardware on the inverter Use Test Mode the following procedure 1 Disconnect the wiring from the TM2 serial port terminal block on the inverter 2 Set parameter C071 02 loopback test 3 Turn the inverter power OFF and then ON again to initiate the communication test 4 Check the pass fail results according to the keypad display I E I Ch h l l K d a ap l Normal termination Abnormal termination 5 Press the STOP RESET key on the digital operator keypad or the Reset button on the copy unit to switch to the normal setting display 6 Set parameter C071 to the desired setting for normal operation SJ7002 Inverter B 5 ASCII Mode Communications Introduction to The network master sends a frame to Transmitting Command List initiate communications with a slave as device shown in the figure to the right After fr
539. ts the braking error signal BER This signal is useful to engage an emergency brake to ensure the load does not move if the primary braking system has failed 3 While the brake release output BRK is ON the inverter drives the motor but does not accelerate immediately The inverter waits for confirmation from the external brake When the external brake system properly releases it signals the inverter by using the Brake OK input terminal BOK If BOK is not assigned to an intelligent input B124 is ignored 4 When the brake operates properly and signals with the BOK input the inverter waits for the required time for acceleration B122 and then begins to accelerate to the set target frequency If BOK is not assigned to an intelligent input acceleration begins after the delay time set by B122 after BRK signal occurs 5 When the Run command turns OFF the procedure outlined above happens in reverse The idea is to engage the brake before the motor comes completely to a stop The inverter decel erates to the releasing frequency B125 and turns the brake release output BRK OFF to engage the brake 6 The inverter does not decelerate further during just the waiting time for brake confirmation B121 If the brake confirmation signal does not turn OFF within the waiting time for brake confirmation the inverter causes a trip alarm and outputs the brake error signal BER useful for engaging an emergency brake system 7 Normally
540. tting V f frequency 2 0 0 0 B103 Free setting V f voltage 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 B104 Free setting V f frequency 3 0 0 0 B105 Free setting V f voltage 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 B106 Free setting V f frequency 4 0 0 0 B107 Free setting V f voltage 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 B108 Free setting V f frequency 5 0 0 0 B109 Free setting V f voltage 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 B110 Free setting V f frequency 6 0 0 0 B111 Free setting V f voltage 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 B112 Free setting V f frequency 7 0 0 0 B113 Free setting V f voltage 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 xipueddy C 10 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry O as ae C D Q 2 lt B Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Name FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan B120 Brake Control Enable 00 00 00 B121 Brake Wait Time for Release 0 00 0 00 0 00 B122 Brake Wait Time for Acceleration 0 00 0 00 0 00 B123 Brake Wait Time for Stopping 0 00 0 00 0 00 B124 Brake Wait Time for Confirmation 0 00 0 00 0 00 B125 Brake Release Frequency Setting 0 00 0 00 0 00 B126 Brake Release Current Setting Rated current for each inverter B127 Braking frequency 0 00 0 00 0 00 B130 Over voltage LADSTOP enable 00 00 00 B131 Over voltage LADSTOP level 380 760 380 760 380 760 B132 Acceleration and deceleration rate at overvoltage 1 0 1 0 1 0 suppression
541. tting for non stop operation 0 0 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 55 0 10 0 10 0 10 XX at power loss U QD g 3 Q D Q 7 avg BuunByuon 3 44 B Group Fine Tuning Functions o 2 a te a 5 2 C e O 42 2 E oO av oO Window The window comparator function controls digital outputs based on the comparison of analog Comparators input values to user defined upper and lower limits Keypad Defaults Run Bune Name Range and Settings Mie Code Description SRW LOPE 8 xFE2 xFU2 xFF2 Edit EU USA Jpn Lo Hi B060 O input maximum limit level of window comparator 0 to 100 100 100 100 Xv Lower limit B061 B062 x 2 B061 O input minimum limit level of window comparator 0 to 100 0 0 0 Xv Lower limit B060 B062 x 2 B062 O input hysteresis width of window comparator 0 to 10 0 0 0 Xv Lower limit B061 B062 x 2 B063 OI input maximum limit level of window comparator 0 to 100 100 100 100 Xv Lower limit B064 B066 x 2 B064 OI input minimum limit level of window comparator 0 to 100 0 0 0 Xv Lower limit B063 B066 x 2 B065 OI input hysteresis width of window comparator 0 to 10 0 0 0 Xv Lower limit B063 B064 x 2 B066 O2 input maximum limit level of window comparator 100 to 100
542. tuning sequence executes after DC braking brings the motor to a stop 5 Note that when intelligent terminal SON Speed Servo ON or FOC Current Forcing is assigned the online auto tuning function is not available After reading and following the preparation steps above then configure the inverter for adaptive auto tuning by following these steps 1 Set H002 02 for adaptive auto tuning procedure 2 Set HO01 00 to disable the manual auto tuning procedure 3 Turn the Run command ON 4 Run the motor for an appropriate time until it reaches its normal operating temperature range Remember that the purpose of adaptive auto tuning is optimize the inverter for typical running conditions 5 Stop the motor or turn the Run command OFF which initiates an adaptive auto tuning Wait at least five 5 seconds before issuing any other command to the inverter With the above configuration the inverter automatically runs the adaptive auto tuning sequence each time the motor runs and decelerates to a stop This continuously adapts the SLV control algorithm to slight changes in the motor constants during operation NOTE It is not necessary to wait 5 seconds after each time the motor runs before running again When the motor stops for less than 5 seconds before running again the inverter stops the adaptive tuning sequence and keeps the current motor constant values in memory The inverter will attempt the adaptive auto tuning at the next run stop
543. turn In other words each of the three Hot connections serves also as a return for the other connections because of their phase relationship The Hitachi inverter is a rugged and reliable device The intention is for the inverter to assume the role of controlling power to the motor during all normal operations Therefore this manual instructs you not to switch OFF power to the inverter while the motor is running unless it is an emergency stop Also do not install or use disconnect switches in the wiring from the inverter to the motor except thermal disconnect Of course safety related devices such as fuses must be in the design to break power during a malfunction as required by NEC and local codes 116 Introduction to Variable Frequency Drives OD fob 2 oO S 09 o gt fob 5 Intelligent Functions and Parameters Braking Velocity Profiles Much of this manual is devoted to describing how to use inverter functions and how to configure inverter parameters The inverter is microproces sor controlled and has many independent functions The microprocessor has an on board EEPROM for parameter storage The inverter s front panel keypad provides access to all functions and parameters which you can access through other devices as well The general name for all these devices is the digital operator or digital operator panel Chapter 2 will show you how to get a motor running using a minimal set
544. type inputs l circuits amp 1 FW Forward 00 I ia D ntelligent outputs 8 g puts 2 Reverse 1070 Input 5 terminals ge circuits open collector 6 l i os i 5 5 Intelligent inputs l f 8 terminals o0 3 Expansion o a Signals for expanded i optiona features including Thermistor encoder feedback Expansion digital I O and p output Card 2 DeviceNet networking monitor optional 10VDC reference H I NOTE For the wiring of intel Sa 0 10VDC O ligent I O and analog inputs P 10kQ 10VDC be sure to use twisted pair 4 Se 10 0 10 VDC A02 reference shielded cable Attach the shield wire for each signal to C 10kQ its respective common termi Ol nal at the inverter end only gt 4 20MA 1009 L Analog GND 4 C Send AM output AM 1000 SN O gere RS 485 serial monitor R O RP communications O Jumper for SN AMI output AMI q termination monitor Type D grounding 200V class models Kr Type C grounding 400V class models SJ7002 Inverter 49 Specifications of The control logic connector board is removable for wiring convenience as shown below first Control and Logic remove two retaining screws The small connector to the left is for serial communications Connections we A Retaining screw locations H 2 AM beder ol OL TAME Joe oo aged ed gt BG Terminal screw size is M3 Tight
545. uency available only at FM 0 to max frequency in Hz frequency output 04 Output voltage Rated output voltage to motor 0 to 100 SJ7002 Inverter EEJ C028 Setting for Terminal AM C029 Setting for Terminal AMI Option Function Name Description Corre ponding Signal Code Range 05 Input power Rated input power 0 to 200 06 Electronic thermal Percentage of electronic overload attained 0 to 100 overload 07 LAD frequency Internal ramp generator frequency 0 to max frequency in Hz 09 Motor temperature Thermistor input temp reading in PWM 0 to 200 C format 10 Heat sink temperature Inverter heatsink temp reading in PWM 0 to 200 C format 13 General YA 1 analog Internal analog value from EZ Sequence 0 to 100 output only from output terminal AM 14 General YA 2 analog Internal analog value from EZ Sequence 0 to 100 output only from output terminal AMI Output Function Adjustment Parameters The following parameters work in conjunction with the intelligent output function when configured The overload level parameter C041 sets the motor current level at which the overload signal OL turns ON The range of settings is from 0 to 200 of the rated current for the inverter This function is for generating an early warning logic output without causing either a trip event or
546. ump center frequency R W Up to 3 output frequencies 1253h 04691 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz setting can be defined for the output A063 L R W to jump past to avoid motor 1254h 04692 resonances center freq A064 Jump hysteresis R W Defines the distance from the 1255h 04693 0 to 1000 0 01 Hz frequency width setting center frequency at which the jump occurs A065 H Jump center frequency R W Up to 3 output frequencies 1256h 04694 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz setting can be defined for the output A065 L R W to jump past to avoid motor 1257h 04695 resonances center freq A066 Jump hysteresis R W Defines the distance from the 1258h 04696 0 to 1000 0 01 Hz frequency width setting center frequency at which the jump occurs A067 H Jump center frequency R W Up to 3 output frequencies 1259h 04697 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz setting can be defined for the output A067 L R W to jump past to avoid motor 125Ah 04698 resonances center freq A068 Jump hysteresis R W Defines the distance from the 125Bh 04699 0 to 1000 0 01 Hz frequency width setting center frequency at which the jump occurs A069 Acceleration stop R W 0 00 to 400 0 Hz 125Ch 04700 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz frequency setting A069 L R W 125Dh 04701 A070 Acceleration stop time R W 0 0 to 60 0 seconds 125Eh 04702 Oto600 0 1 sec frequency setting A071 PID Function Enable R W 00 PID operation OFF
547. uon NOTE When the DeviceNet option board SJ DN is installed you may keep the A002 default setting because the Run Command Source is automatically set via DeviceNet Other wise only use settings A002 01 02 or 03 NOTE The base frequency must be less than or equal to the maximum frequency ensure that A003 lt A004 Analog Input and The inverter has the capability to accept external analog inputs that can command the output Miscellaneous frequency to the motor Signals including voltage input 0 to 10V at terminal O bipolar Settings input 10 to 10V at terminal 02 and current input 4 to 20mA at terminal OT are avail able Terminal L serves as signal ground for the three analog inputs The analog input settings adjust the curve characteristics between the analog input and the frequency output Adjusting O L characteristics In the graph to the right A013 and A014 select max frequency the active portion of the input voltage ee ee range Parameters A011 and A012 select A012 p the start and end frequency of the converted output frequency range respec tively Together these four parameters define the major line segment as shown When the line does not begin at the origin A011 and A013 gt 0 then A015 defines whether the inverter outputs OHz or the 1 input AO11 specified frequency when the 0 100 analog input value is less than the A013 OV 10V setting When the input voltag
548. ur motor Keypad Defaults Run er Er Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 sia v SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 i EU USA Jpn A081 AVR function select OH G0 AVR enabled 00 00 02 xx Automatic output voltage OFF G i AVR disabled regulation DOFF 02 AVR enabled except during deceleration A082 AVR voltage select 200V class inverter settings 230 230 200 XX 200 215 220 230 240 V 400 460 400 400V class inverter settings 380 400 415 440 460 480 V U 2 g 3 Q D Q 7 Energy Savings Energy Savings Mode This function allows the inverter to deliver the minimum power Mode Optimal necessary to maintain speed at any given frequency This works best when driving variable Accel Decel torque characteristic loads such as fans and pumps Parameter A085 01 enables this function and A086 controls the degree of its effect A setting of 0 0 yields slow response but high accuracy while a setting of 100 will yield a fast response with lower accuracy AUG BuunByuon Keypad Defaults Run ae fe er Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 Kr Sa SR Ry Te SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 EU USA Jpn A085 Operation mode selection HOR OG Normal operation 00 00 00 xx ECO G I Energy saver operation xx FUZZY 02 Optimal accel decel operation xx A086 Energy saving mode tuning 0 0 to 100 seconds 50 0 50 0 500 Vv Optimal
549. urn limit function 440 UDC 29 Remote control data clearing 4 28 ORG 70 Zero return trigger function 4 40 OPE 31 Operator control 4 28 FOT 71 Forward drive stop 441 SFI 7 32 38 Multi speed bits 1 to 7 4 15 ROT 72 Reverse drive stop 441 OLR 39 Overload restriction 4 29 SPD 73 Speed position control select 441 TL 40 Torque limit enable 4 30 PCNT 74 Pulse counter input 4 42 TRQI 41 Torque limit select bit 1 LSB 4 30 PCC 75 Pulse counter clear 442 3 2 3 3 Ko suoeiado 412 Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices Output Terminal 2 2 of g TS a Og av Use the following table to locate pages for intelligent output material in this chapter Listing Intelligent OUTPUTS Intelligent OUTPUTS Symbol Code Name Page Symbol Code Name Page RUN 00 Run signal 4 44 FBV 31 PID feedback second stage output 4 56 FA1 01 Freq arrival type 1 4 44 NDc 32 Network detection signal 4 57 constant speed LOGI 33 Logic output I 4 58 FA2 02 Freq arrival type 2 4 LOG2 34 Logic output 2 4 58 over ireg eney LOG3 35 Logic output 3 4 58 OL 03 Overload advance notice signal 446 LOG4 36 Logic output 4 4 58 OD 04 Output deviation for PID control 446 LOGS 37 Logic output 5 4 58 AL 05 Alarm signal 447 LOG6 38 Logic output 6 4 58 FA3 06 Freq
550. ut status terminals meg ge ko or ea 8 76 54 32 1 Terminal symbols D006 Intelligent output terminal Displays the state of the intelligent output status terminals I LI gon ri r OFF AL 15 14 13 12 11 Terminal symbols D007 Scaled output frequency Displays the output frequency scaled by the User monitor constant in B0086 Decimal point indicates defined range XX XX 0 00 to 99 99 XXX X 100 0 to 999 9 XXXX 1000 to 9999 XXXX 10000 to 99990 D008 Actual frequency monitor Displays the actual shaft speed of the motor Hz converted to frequency D009 Torque command monitor Displays the level of the torque command when the inverter is set to torque control mode D010 Torque bias monitor Displays the level of the torque bias if enabled when the inverter is in vector control mode with feedback SJ7002 Inverter Func aac 3 Name Description Units Code L D012 Torque monitor Estimated output torque value range is 300 0 to 300 0 D013 Output voltage monitor Voltage of output to motor VAC range is 0 0 to 600 0V D014 Power monitor Input power to inverter range is 0 0 to 999 9 kW D015 Cumulative power monitor Displays cumulative input power to inverter kW h B079 selects the multiplier for units Range is 0 0 to 999 9 1000 to 9999 or 100 to 999 D016 Cumulative operation RUN Displays total time the inverter has been in hours ti
551. v operation mode Select the operating OH G I Enable for acceleration and constant speed mode during overload conditions CET G2 Enable for constant speed only H F 03 Enable for accel decel and constant speed B022 Overload restriction setting 0 20 x rated current to 1 80 x rated rated current times 1 50 XW current A B023 Deceleration rate at overload restriction 0 10 to 30 00 seconds 1 00 1 00 100 XW B024 Overload restriction OFF 22 Disable 01 01 Ol Xv operation mode 2 Select the operating OH G I Enable for acceleration and constant speed mode during overload conditions CET G2 Enable for constant speed only H E 03 Enable for accel decel and constant speed B025 Overload restriction setting 2 Models 004xxx to 550xxx 0 20 x rated rated current times 1 50 XW current to 2 0 x rated current A Models 750xxx to 4000xxx 0 20 x rated current to 1 80 x rated current A B026 Deceleration rate at overload restriction 2 0 10 to 30 00 seconds 1 00 1 00 1 00 Xv B027 Overcurrent suppres OFF 22 Disable 01 01 01 XV sion enable OH 0 I Enable B028 Current limit for active frequency matching Models 004xxx to 550xxx 0 20 x rated rated current times 1 0 XW restart current to 2 0 x rated current A Models 750xxx to 4000xxx 0 20 x rated current to 1 80 x rated current A B029 Scan time constant for active freq matching 0 10 to 30 00 seconds 0 50 0 50 0 50 Xv
552. val between data elements constituting a message is shorter than 3 5 characters e When the data length of the query is invalid NOTE Provide a timer in the master and make the master retransmit the same query when no response is made within a preset time period after the preceding query was sent SJ7002 Inverter Ez Explanation of Read Coil Status 01h Function Codes This function reads the status ON OFF of selected coils An example follows below Read intelligent input terminals 1 to 6 of an inverter having a slave address 8 This example assumes the intelligent input terminals have terminal states listed below coils 13 and 14 are OFF Item Data Intelligent input terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 Coil number 7 8 9 10 11 12 Terminal status ON ON ON OFF ON OFF Query Response No Field Name Beer IENS Field Name Beample hex hex 1 Slave address 1 08 1 Slave address 08 2 Function code 01 2 Function code 01 3 Coil start number 00 3 Data size in bytes 01 ss 4 Coil data 4 17 4 Coil start number low 06 order 5 CRC 16 high order 12 5 Number of coils high 00 6 CRC 16 low order 1A order 2 te4 Data is transferred by th ified 6 Number of coils low 06 Note ata is transferred by the specifie number of data bytes data size order 2 7 CRC 16 high order 5C 8 CRC 16 low order 90
553. ve humidity non condensing Environ ment Vibration 10 Location Models SJ700 004xxx to 220xxx 5 9 m s 0 6G 10 to 55 Hz Models J700 300xx to 1500xxx 2 94 m s 0 3G 10 to 55 Hz Models SJ700 3150xx to 4000xxx 1 96 m s 0 2G 10 to 55 Hz Altitude 1 000 m or less indoors no corrosive gasses or dust Coating color Gray Feedback expansion card SJ FB vector control loop speed sensor Digital input exp card SJ DG 4 digit BCD 16 bit binary DeviceNet expansion card Option to support the open network DeviceNet function Accessories Lon Works expansion card Option to support the open network Lon Works function Profibus DP option Option to support the open network Profibus DP function Other optional accessories Operator input devices EMI filter AC reactor DC reactor radio noise filter braking resistors braking units LCR filter communication cables OPE SRE 4 digit LED with potentiometer OPE S 4 digit LED w o potentiometer Optional OPE SR 4 digit LED with potentiometer Japanese English overlay SRW OEX Multilingual operator with copy function English Spanish French German Italian and Portuguese Q QO 3 J Ko ip o D Q EEH Inverter Specifications D D 2 e fa ae 09 D amp Signal Ratings Detailed ratings are in Specifications of Control and Logic Connections on pag
554. verheat warning level 120 120 120 C 12 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry Ra ke C D Q 2 lt C Group Parameters Default Setting User Func Nad FEF2 FE2 FU2 FU2 FF2 F2 Setting Code Europe U S A Japan C071 Communication speed selection 04 04 04 C072 Node allocation 1 1 C073 Communication data length selection 7 7 7 C074 Communication parity selection 00 00 00 C075 Communication stop bit selection 1 1 1 C076 Action upon communication error selection 02 02 02 C077 Communication timeout before trip 0 00 0 00 0 00 C078 Communication wait time 0 0 0 C079 Communication protocol select 00 00 00 C081 O input span calibration Factory set Factory set Factory set C082 OT input span calibration Factory set Factory set Factory set C083 02 input span calibration Factory set Factory set Factory set C085 Thermistor input tuning 105 0 105 0 105 0 C086 AM terminal offset tuning 0 0 0 0 0 0 C087 AMI terminal meter tuning 80 80 80 C088 AMI terminal offset tuning Factory set Factory set Factory set CO91 Debug mode enable 00 00 00 Do not edit C101 Up Down memory mode selection 00 00 00 C102 Reset mode selection 00 00 00 C103 Restart mode after reset 00 00 00 C105 FM gain adjustment 100 100 100 C106 AM gain adjustment 100 100 100 C107 AMI gain adjustment
555. verter operation time at trip point Cumulative power ON time at trip point ped a D o fed O oO Bunoouse qnod 6 16 Restoring Factory Default Settings Restoring Factory Default Settings You can restore all inverter parameters to the original factory default settings for the intended country of use After initializing the inverter use the powerup test in Chapter 2 to get the motor running again To initialize the inverter follow the steps below No Action Display Func Parameter 1 Use the Ed DQ sd keys to bass mA B Group selected navigate to the B Group 2 Press the key b g g First B parameter selected 3 177 Country code for initializa IN Press and hold the DQ key until gt d ig q Gon selected 4 00 Japan 01 Europe Press the key Ge 02 US 5 Confirm the country code is correct Do not change it unless you are absolutely sure the power input voltage range and frequency match the country code setting To change the country code press or to set to store 6 2 Country code for initializa m Press the key bu 8 5 tion selected 7 Press the key 5084 Initialization function selected 8 00 initialization disabled nn i Press the D key uu clear trip history only 9 Press the key G 01 enable initialization 10 Initialization now
556. verter output operation follows the constant V f curve until it reaches the full scale output voltage This initial straight line is the constant torque part of the operating characteris tic The horizontal line over to the maximum frequency serves to let the motor run faster but at a reduced torque This is the constant horsepower part of the characteristic If you want the motor to output constant torque over its entire operating range limited to the motor nameplate voltage and frequency rating then set the base frequency and maximum frequency equal as shown below right v v A003 100 00 1 A003 Constant torque i N I I I I I 0 t 0 t Base Maximum Base frequency Frequency Frequency maximum frequency NOTE The 2nd motor and 3rd motor settings in the tables in this chapter store an alter nate set of parameters for additional motors The inverter can use the Ist 2nd or 3rd set of parameters to generate the output frequency to the motor See Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors on page 4 76 Keypad Defaults Run mae kg Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 Jr SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 Lo Hi EU USA Jpn A001 Frequency source setting VE 22 Keypad potentiometer 01 01 02 xx TERM G I Control terminal REM 02 Function F001 setting RS455 03 RS485 serial command OF1 04 Expansion board 1 OFS S E
557. werup Test e You have followed all the steps in this chapter up to this step The inverter is new and is securely mounted to a non flammable vertical surface The inverter is connected to a power source and motor e No additional wiring of inverter connectors or terminals has been done The power supply is reliable and the motor is a known working unit and the motor nameplate ratings match the inverter ratings The motor is securely mounted and is not connected to any load 5 55 Q az 32 z 0 MC feen O 3 3 Q Goals for the If there are any exceptions to the above conditions at this step please take a moment to take any P P P Powerup Test measures necessary to reach this basic starting point The specific goals of this powerup test are 1 Verify that the wiring to the power supply and motor is correct 2 Demonstrate that the inverter and motor are generally compatible 3 Give a brief introduction to the use of the built in operator keypad The powerup test gives you an important starting point to ensure a safe and successful applica tion of the Hitachi inverter We highly recommend performing this test before proceeding to the other chapters in this manual Pre test and The following instructions apply to the powerup test or to any time the inverter is powered and Operational operating Please study the following instructions and messages before proceeding with the Precautions pr 1 The power supply mu
558. wise it may fall and cause injury to personnel CAUTION Be sure to install the unit on a perpendicular wall that is not subject to vibration Otherwise it may fall and cause injury to personnel CAUTION Be sure not to install or operate an inverter that is damaged or has missing parts Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel CAUTION Be sure to install the inverter in a well ventilated room that does not have direct exposure to sunlight a tendency for high temperature high humidity or dew condensation high levels of dust corrosive gas explosive gas inflammable gas grinding fluid mist salt air etc Otherwise there is the danger of fire 2 7 SJ7002 Inverter b The position and orientation of the inverter are very important Install the inverter vertically and securely with screws or bolts on a surface that is free from vibrations and that can bear the inverter s weight If the inverter is not installed vertically its cooling performance may be degraded and trip events or inverter damage may result If the inverter requires an external DC reactor do not install the reactor directly under the inverter I 2 rar ML TOE uone elsu pue Bununop 1343AU Air 2 Transport or Lift in Safe Manner flow Heated air 11 SJ7002 Series inverter models 1850hFx2 to 4000hFx2are very heavy For example the 315kW inverter weighs about 463 Ibs 210
559. ws an operator to directly set the motor speed when the potentiometer is enabled for output frequency control Potentiometer Enable LED ON when the potentiometer is enabled for value entry OPE SRE only Parameter Display a 4 digit 7 segment display for parameters and function codes Display Units Hertz Volts Amperes kW These LEDs indicate the units associated with the parameter display When the display is monitoring a parameter the appropriate LED is ON In the case of kW units both Volts and Amperes LEDs will be ON An easy way to remember this is that kW V x A 1000 Power LED This LED is ON when the power input to the inverter is ON Alarm LED This LED is ON when an alarm condition has tripped the inverter Clearing the alarm will turn this LED OFF again See Chapter 6 for details on clearing alarms 2 30 Using the Front Panel Keypad D E eo 2 jo 2 _ o gt and Installation Function Key This key is used to navigate through the lists of parameters and functions for setting and monitoring parameter values HITACHI 700 ALARM Up Down AN Y Keys Use these ING de keys alternately to move up or down the lists nn UU de Jw of parameter and functions shown in the PRGO display and increment decrement values o Store Gr Key When the unit is in Program Mode and the operator has edited a Min Max parameter value press the Store k
560. xcept for a transmission error the inverter returns an exception response without executing anything e You can check the error by the function code in the response The function code of the exception response is the sum of the function code of the query and 80h The content of the error is known from the exception code Field Configuration Slave address Function code Exception code CRC 16 Exception Code Description Olh The specified function is not supported 02h The specified address is not found 03h The format of the specified data is not acceptable 21h The data to be written in a holding register is outside the inverter ModBus Mode Communications Exception Code Description 22h The specified functions are not available to the inverter Function to change the content of a register that cannot be changed while the inverter is in service e Function to submit an ENTER command during running UV e Function to write in a register during tripping UV Function to write in a read only register or coil No response occurs In the cases below the inverter ignores a query and returns no response e When receiving a broadcasting query jaa 2s ae C Q 2 lt e When detecting a transmission error in reception of a query e When the slave address set in the query is not equal to the slave address of the inverter e When a time inter
561. xpansion board 2 PLS 06 Pulse train input PRG 27 Easy sequence MATH 18 Calculate function input A002 Run command source setting TEN G I Input terminal FW or RV assignable 01 01 02 xx REM G2 Run key on keypad of digital operator RS465 03 RS485 serial command OF1 04 Start Stop expansion card 1 OPS OS Start Stop expansion card 2 SJ7002 Inverter El Keypad Defaults Ran Pre Ar Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ae SRW OPE FE2 FU2 F2 AER EU USA Jpn A003 Base frequency setting 30 to maximum frequency Hz 50 60 60 xx A203 Base frequency setting 2nd motor 30 to maximum frequency Hz 50 60 60 xx A303 Base frequency setting 3rd motor 30 to maximum frequency Hz 50 60 60 xx A004 Maximum frequency setting 30 to 400 Hz 50 60 60 xx A204 Maximum frequency setting 2nd motor 30 to 400 Hz 50 60 60 xx A304 Maximum frequency setting 3rd motor 30 to 400 Hz 50 60 60 xx NOTE Intelligent terminals OPE option code 31 or F TM option code 51 can override settings A001 and A002 when either terminal is ON and the operation commands for that terminal is enabled NOTE When using a remote operator SRW to operate the inverter the REMT remote key allows you to enter the frequency setting and operation commands remotely U fe 3 Q D n AUG BuunBy
562. y 2 25 to the inverter Otherwise there is the danger of fire CAUTION For motor leads ground fault interrupter breakers and electro n se 2 25 magnetic contactors be sure to size these components properly each must have the capacity for rated current and voltage Otherwise there is the danger of fire CAUTION Failure to remove all vent opening covers before electrical ea 2 26 operation may result in damage to the inverter Powerup Test Caution Messages CAUTION The heat sink fins will have a high temperature Be careful not ow 2 27 to touch them Otherwise there is the danger of getting burned CAUTION The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low a 2 27 speed to high speed Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before operating the inverter Otherwise there is the danger of injury CAUTION If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter messene 2 28 standard default setting S0Hz 60Hz be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the respective manufacturer Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting their approval Otherwise there is the danger of equipment damage and or injury to personnel CAUTION Check the following before and during the powerup test Other ow wise there is the danger of equipment damage Is the shorting bar between the P and PD terminals installed DO NOT power or
563. y before the inverter restarts the motor B004 Instantaneous power R W 00 Disable 1304h 04868 0 1 2 gt failure under voltage trip 01 Enable 3 alarm enable 02 Disable during stop and D ramp to stop S B005 Number of restarts on R W 00 Restart 16 times 1305h 04869 0 I W power failure under 01 Always restart voltage trip events B006 Phase loss detection enable R W 00 Disable 1306h 04870 0 1 01 Enable B007 H Restart frequency thresh R W When the frequency of the motor 1307h 04871 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz N old m is less than this value the I B007 L R W 1308h 04872 inverter will restart at 0 Hz B008 Retry after trip select R W 00 Always retry after trip 1309h 04873 Oto 4 01 Start with 0 Hz 02 Start with frequency matching 03 Retry after deceleration and stop with matching frequency 04 Start with active matching frequency B009 Retry after undervoltage R W 00 Restart 16 times 130Ah 04874 0 1 select 01 Unlimited B010 Retry count select after R W 1 to 3 times 130Bh 04875 1to3 times overvoltage or overcurrent BO11 Retry wait time after trip R W 0 3 to 100 0 seconds 130Ch 04876 3 to 1000 0 1 sec B012 Electronic thermal setting R W Range is 0 2 rated current to 130Dh 04877 200 to 0 1 calculated within the 1 2 rated current 1000 inverter from current output B212
564. y or may not be stored in the inverter It will be necessary to restore the inverter s factory default settings see Restoring Factory Default Settings on page 6 16 After initializing the inverter then perform the auto tuning procedure again Abnormal termination Free V F setting The auto tuning procedure will have an abnormal termination if the control mode of the inverter is set for free V F setting The adaptive auto tuning feature refines the motor constants by checking the motor characteris tic while it in the normal running temperature range Preparation for Adaptive Auto tuning Be sure to study the preparation items and verify the related inverter configuration before going further in this procedure 1 Itisnecessary to first perform the auto tuning procedure in the section above since adaptive auto tuning requires accurate initial constant values 2 Adaptive auto tuning is valid only for the 1st motor data do not use 2nd or 3rd motor data settings 3 The adaptive auto tuning sequence actually begins as the motor decelerates to a stop from a Run command you initiate However the sequence still continues for five 5 more seconds Giving another Run command during this 5 second time period will halt the adaptive auto tuning It will resume the next time the motor runs and decelerates to a stop suoeiado D 5 2 fe 5 e 5 Ke 4 If DC braking is enabled then the adaptive auto
565. y sequence function general output 2 46 MO3 General output 3 Easy sequence function general output 3 47 MO4 General output 4 Easy sequence function general output 4 48 MO5 General output 5 Easy sequence function general output 5 49 MO6 General output 6 Easy sequence function general output 6 50 IRDY Inverter ready signal Inverter is ready to accept commands FW REV JOG etc 51 FWR Forward rotation signal Inverter output is driving motor in forward direction 52 RVR Reverse rotation signal Inverter output is driving motor in reverse direction 53 MJA Major failure signal Inverter trip caused by internal hardware error 54 WCO O terminal window O input is within comparator window set by B060 and B061 comparator 55 WCOI OI terminal window OT input is within comparator window set by B063 and comparator B064 auq BuunByuon EEJ C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Output Function Summary Table Option Terminal E Code Symbol Function Name Description 56 WCO2 02 terminal window 02 input is within comparator window set by B066 and comparator B067 Analog Summary Table The following tables show all functions available for assignment to the three analog output terminals FM AM AMI at a glance Detailed descriptions related parameters and settings are in Analog Output Operation on page 4 66 C027 Setting for Terminal FM pjon Function Nam
566. your application exceeds the maximum current or voltage characteristics of a connection point The connections between the inverter and other devices rely on the electrical input output characteristics at both ends Input Output of each connection shown in the circuit Return TER diagram to the right The inverter can accept either sourcing or sinking type inputs from an external device such as Output Input gt circuit Return circuit a PLC A terminal jumper configures the input type connecting the input circuit common to the supply or Detailed wiring examples are in Using Intelligent Input Terminals on page 4 13 This chapter shows the inverter s internal electrical component s at each T O terminal and how to interface them with external circuits Other device SJ7002 Inverter Inverter Jumper Buouuop pue suoleisdo In order to avoid equipment damage and get your application running smoothly we recommend drawing a schematic of each connection between the inverter and the other device Include the internal components of each device in the schematic so that it makes a complete circuit loop Input circuits After making the schematic then 1 Verify that the current and voltage for each connection is within the operating limits of each device 2 Make sure that the logic sense active high or active low of any ON OFF connection i
567. ypad recess See Chapter 3 for information on how to install and use these keypads and cables Q D 3 3 Ko ep r o oO a HITACHI 9 O OO Digital Operator OPE SRE Digital Operator OPE S standard for LFU and HFU models standard for HFE models The digital operator copy unit is optional and occupies the entire keypad recess when mounted It has the additional capability of reading uploading HITACHI ae the parameter settings in the inverter into its memory ALARM PRG RUN Then you can install the copy unit on another inverter and write download the parameter settings into that inverter OEMs will find this unit particularly useful as one can use a single copy unit to transfer parame ter settings from one inverter to many Other digital operator interfaces may be available from your Hitachi distributor for particular industries or international markets Contact your Hitachi distributor for further details Optional Digital Operator Copy Unit SRW OEX Introduction Removable The SJ7002 Series inverters are designed for long life and ease of service Several components Components are removable as shown below aiding installation or parts replacement Details on how and when to remove these parts are in the referenced chapters 5 Q 2 pad ia S 69 D E HITACHI 0 av D O O O Fan Unit See Chapter 6 for servicing Digital Operator and Panel Filler Plate
568. ystems Co Ltd CAUTION Be sure to connect a motor thermal disconnect switch or overload device to the SJ7002 series controller to assure that the inverter will shut down in the event of an overload or an overheated motor HIGH VOLTAGE Dangerous voltage exists until power light is OFF Wait at least 10 minutes after input power is disconnected before performing maintenance CAUTION This equipment has high leakage current and must be permanently fixed hard wired to earth ground via two independent cables WARNING Rotating shafts and above ground electrical potentials can be hazardous There fore it is strongly recommended that all electrical work conform to the National Electrical Codes and local regulations Installation alignment and maintenance should be performed only by qualified personnel Factory recommended test procedures included in the instruction manual should be followed Always disconnect electrical power before working on the unit gt PrP P gt SJ7002 Inverter KE CAUTION a Motor must be connected to protective ground via low resistive path lt 0 19 b Any motor used must be of a suitable rating c Motors may have hazardous moving parts In this event suitable protection must be provided CAUTION Alarm connection may contain hazardous live voltage even when inverter is disconnected When removing the front cover for maintenance or inspection confirm that incoming power for alarm connection is comple
569. z A262 Frequency lower limit setting 2nd Baga AA 0 00 Setting is disabled 0 00 0 00 0 00 Xv motor Sets a limit on output frequency BEBE 38 gt 0 50 Setting is enabled XV greater than zero 0 50 to 400 0 Hz SJ7002 Inverter El Jump Frequencies Some motors or machines exhibit resonances at particular speed s which can be destructive for prolonged running at those speeds The inverter has up to three jump frequencies as shown in the graph The hysteresis around the jump frequencies causes the inverter output to skip around the sensitive frequency values Output frequency Jump frequencies k A068 BOG TS RT RES A068 A065 Hysteresis values A063 Frequency command Defaults Run Q 3 Se og ee Range and Settings FEF2 FUF2 FF2 ee oF ode escription FE2 FU2 F2 g S EU USA Jpn 2a zU A063 Jump center frequency setting 0 00 to 400 0 Hz 0 00 0 00 0 00 XY on A065 model 4000HFx2 is 0 00 to 120 0 Hz co A067 Up to three output frequencies can be defined for the output to jump past to Xv avoid motor resonances center frequency A064 Jump hysteresis frequency width Range is 0 0 to 10 0 Hz 0 50 0 50 0 50 XW A066 setting A068 A Defines the distance from the center frequency at which the jump occurs Xv A

Hitachi-sj700-user-manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents